Pro c5200 SM
Pro c5200 SM
C5200S/C5210S
Machine Code:
D257/D258/D260/D261
Field Service Manual
Ver 1.10
In this manual, the following important symbols and notations are used.
• A Warning indicates a potentially hazardous situation. Failure to obey a Warning could result in death or
serious injury.
• A Caution indicates a potentially hazardous situation. Failure to obey a Caution could result in minor or
moderate injury or damage to the machine or other property.
• Obey these guidelines to avoid problems such as misfeeds, damage to originals, loss of valuable data
and to prevent damage to the machine.
• This information provides tips and advice about how to best service the machine.
General Safety Instructions
For your safety, please read this manual carefully before you use this product. Keep this manual handy for future
reference.
Safety Information
Always obey the following safety precautions when using this product.
Safety During Operation
In this manual, the following important symbols and notations are used.
[A]: ON
[B]: OFF
[C]: Push ON/Push OFF
[D]: Standby
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) prohibits the repair of laser-based optical units in the
field. The optical housing unit can only be repaired in a factory or at a location with the requisite equipment. The
laser subsystem is replaceable in the field by a qualified Customer Engineer. The laser chassis is not repairable in
the field. Customer engineers are therefore directed to return all chassis and laser subsystems to the factory or
service depot when replacement of the optical subsystem is required.
• Use of controls, or adjustment, or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual
may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
WARNING FOR LASER UNIT
WARNING:
Turn off the main switch before attempting any of the procedures in the Laser Unit section. Laser beams can
seriously damage your eyes.
Safety Instructions for the Color Controller
Fuse
The color controller uses a double pole fuse. If this fuse blows, be sure to replace it with an identical fuse.
Batteries
1. Always replace a battery with the same type of battery prescribed for use with the color controller unit.
Replacing a battery with any type other than the one prescribed for use could cause an explosion.
2. Never discard used batteries by mixing them with other batteries or other refuse.
3. Always remove used batteries from the work site and dispose of them in accordance with local laws and
regulations regarding the disposal of such items.
Revision History
Version Revision Date Revision History
V1.00 2017.01.01 -
V1.10 2017.02.10 See Revision History (V1.10)
Symbols, Abbreviations
This manual uses several symbols and abbreviations. The meaning of those symbols and abbreviations
are as follows:
Symbol What it means
Clip ring
Screw
Connector
Clamp
E-ring
Flat Flexible Cable
Timing Belt
SEF Short Edge Feed
LEF Long Edge Feed
K Black
C Cyan
M Magenta
Y Yellow
B/W, BW Black and White
FC Full color
Trademarks
Adobe, Acrobat, PageMaker, PostScript, and PostScript 3 are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any
use of such marks by Ricoh Company, Ltd. is under license.
Firefox and Thunderbird are registered trademarks of the Mozilla Foundation.
Dropbox is a registered trademark or trademark of Dropbox, Inc.
Google, Android, and Chrome are trademarks of Google Inc.
Java is a registered trademark of Oracle and/or its affiliates.
JAWS® is a registered trademark of Freedom Scientific, Inc., St. Petersburg, Florida and/or other
countries.
Kerberos is a trademark of the Massachusetts Institute of Technology (MIT).
Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds.
Macintosh, OS X, Bonjour, Safari, and TrueType are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S.
and other countries.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Server, Windows Vista, Internet Explorer, and Outlook are either
registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corp. in the United States and/or other countries.
QR Code is a registered trademark of DENSO WAVE INCORPORATED in Japan and in other
countries.
"Red Hat" is a registered trademark of Red Hat, Inc.
The SD and SD logo are trademarks of SD-3C, LLC.
UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group.
UPnP is a trademark of UPnP Implementers Corporation.
This product includes RSA BSAFE® Cryptographic software of EMC Corporation. RSA and BSAFE are
registered trademarks or trademarks of EMC Corporation in the United States and other countries.
1
Image Adjustments: Side-to-side registration ................................................................................ 160
Banner Sheet Guide Tray for A3/11"x17" LCIT Type S6 (Pro C5200S/C5210S Only) ..................... 161
Accessory Check ............................................................................................................................ 161
Installation Procedure ..................................................................................................................... 161
A3/11"x17" Tray Unit Type M2 (D749) ............................................................................................... 165
Component List............................................................................................................................... 165
Installation ....................................................................................................................................... 165
Tab Sheet Holder Type M2 (D750) .................................................................................................... 172
Accessories..................................................................................................................................... 172
Installation ....................................................................................................................................... 172
Banner Paper Guide Tray Type M26 (MP C6503/C8003 Only) ........................................................ 175
Accessories..................................................................................................................................... 175
Installation Procedure ..................................................................................................................... 175
8 1/2" x 14" Paper Size Tray Type M2 (D745) ................................................................................... 182
Component List............................................................................................................................... 182
Installation Procedure ..................................................................................................................... 183
Multi Bypass Banner Sheet Tray Type S6 (Pro C5200S/C5210S Only) ........................................... 189
Accessories..................................................................................................................................... 189
Installation Procedure ..................................................................................................................... 189
Cover Interposer Tray CI4040 (D3CN) .............................................................................................. 193
Accessories..................................................................................................................................... 193
Installation Procedure ..................................................................................................................... 194
Cover Interposer Tray CI4020 (D712)................................................................................................ 216
Accessories..................................................................................................................................... 216
Installation Procedure ..................................................................................................................... 217
Finisher SR4120/SR4130 (D3CG/D3CH) .......................................................................................... 224
Accessory Check ............................................................................................................................ 224
Installation Procedure ..................................................................................................................... 225
Punch Unit PU3060 (D706) ................................................................................................................ 240
Accessory Check ............................................................................................................................ 240
Installation Procedure ..................................................................................................................... 240
SR4000 series Output Tray for Banner Sheet Type S6 (Pro C5200S/C5210S Only)....................... 260
Accessory Check ............................................................................................................................ 260
Installation Procedure ..................................................................................................................... 260
Cooling Fan Unit Type M26 ................................................................................................................ 263
Accessory Check ............................................................................................................................ 263
Installation Procedure ..................................................................................................................... 263
Information for Cooling Fan Unit Type M26 ................................................................................... 281
Finisher SR4110 (D707) (MP C6503/C8003 Only) ............................................................................ 282
2
Accessories..................................................................................................................................... 282
Installation Procedure ..................................................................................................................... 283
SP Setting ....................................................................................................................................... 292
Punch Unit PU5000 (B831) (MP C6503/C8003 Only) ....................................................................... 293
Component Check .......................................................................................................................... 293
Installation Procedure ..................................................................................................................... 293
Cooling Fan Unit Type M31 (D770) (MP C6503/C8003 Only)........................................................... 299
Component Check .......................................................................................................................... 299
Preparing the Main Machine........................................................................................................... 300
Cooling Fan Unit Installation........................................................................................................... 305
Information for Cooling Fan Unit Type M31 ................................................................................... 316
Booklet Finisher SR5080 (D3CA), Finisher SR5070 (D3CB) (Pro C5200S/C5210S Only) .............. 318
Accessory Check ............................................................................................................................ 318
Installation Procedure ..................................................................................................................... 319
Punch Unit PU5020 (Pro C5200S/C5210S Only) .............................................................................. 337
Accessory Check ............................................................................................................................ 337
Installation Procedure ..................................................................................................................... 338
SR5000 series Output Tray for Banner Sheet Type S6 (Pro C5200S/C5210S Only)....................... 346
Accessory Check ............................................................................................................................ 346
Installation Procedure ..................................................................................................................... 346
Output Jogger Unit Type M25 (D3CJ)................................................................................................ 349
Component Check .......................................................................................................................... 349
Installation ....................................................................................................................................... 349
Copy Tray Type M26 (D3D2) ............................................................................................................. 360
Component Check .......................................................................................................................... 360
Installation Procedure ..................................................................................................................... 361
Decurl Unit DU5020 (D727) (Pro C5200S/C5210S Only) ................................................................. 373
Accessories..................................................................................................................................... 373
Installation Procedure ..................................................................................................................... 374
Buffer Pass Unit Type S6 (D3D0) (Pro C5200S/C5210S Only) ........................................................ 384
Accessory Check ............................................................................................................................ 384
Installation ....................................................................................................................................... 384
Multi-Folding Unit FD4000 (D615)...................................................................................................... 402
Accessories..................................................................................................................................... 402
Installation ....................................................................................................................................... 402
Mail Box CS4010 (D708).................................................................................................................... 415
Accessories..................................................................................................................................... 415
Installation Procedure ..................................................................................................................... 415
Scanner Heater .................................................................................................................................. 421
3
Accessories (Scanner Heater)........................................................................................................ 421
Installation (Scanner Heater) .......................................................................................................... 421
Internal Options .................................................................................................................................. 425
List of Slots ..................................................................................................................................... 425
Copy Connector Type M25 (D3D3).................................................................................................... 426
Accessories..................................................................................................................................... 426
Installation ....................................................................................................................................... 426
USB Device Server Option Type M19 (D3BC-28,-29) (MP C6503/C8003 Only) .............................. 428
Component Check .......................................................................................................................... 428
Installation Procedure ..................................................................................................................... 429
IP Address Setting .......................................................................................................................... 433
Extended USB Board Type M19 (D3BS-01) ...................................................................................... 435
Component Check .......................................................................................................................... 435
Installation Procedure ..................................................................................................................... 435
IEEE 1284 Interface Board Type M19 (D3C0)................................................................................... 437
Component List............................................................................................................................... 437
Installation Procedure ..................................................................................................................... 437
IEEE802.11a/g/n Interface Unit Type M19 (D3BR-01) ...................................................................... 439
Component List............................................................................................................................... 439
Installation Procedure ..................................................................................................................... 439
User Tool Settings for IEEE 802.11a/g/n ....................................................................................... 442
SP Mode Settings for IEEE 802.11 Wireless LAN ......................................................................... 443
File Format Converter Type M19 (D3BR-04) ..................................................................................... 445
Component List............................................................................................................................... 445
Installation Procedure ..................................................................................................................... 445
SD Card Appli Move ........................................................................................................................... 447
Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 447
Move Exec ...................................................................................................................................... 447
Undo Exec ...................................................................................................................................... 448
Caution............................................................................................................................................ 449
PostScript3 Unit Type M26 (D3D8-05, -06, -07) ................................................................................ 452
Accessories..................................................................................................................................... 452
Installation Procedure ..................................................................................................................... 452
OCR Unit Type M13 (D3AC-23, -24, -25) .......................................................................................... 454
Accessories..................................................................................................................................... 454
Searchable PDF Function Outline .................................................................................................. 454
Installation Procedure ..................................................................................................................... 454
Recovery Procedure ....................................................................................................................... 456
XPS Direct Print Option Type M26 (D3D8-24, -25, -26) .................................................................... 457
4
Accessories..................................................................................................................................... 457
Installation Procedure ..................................................................................................................... 457
IPDS Unit Type M6 (D3D8-20, -21, -22) ............................................................................................ 459
Accessories..................................................................................................................................... 459
Installation Procedure ..................................................................................................................... 459
DataOverwriteSecurity Unit Type M19 (D3BS03) (MP C6503/C8003 Only) ..................................... 461
Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 461
Component List............................................................................................................................... 461
Before You Begin the Procedure .................................................................................................... 461
Installation Procedure ..................................................................................................................... 463
Configuring "Auto Erase Memory" (Performed by the Customer).................................................. 464
Optional Counter Interface Unit Type A (B870) ................................................................................. 467
Component Check .......................................................................................................................... 467
Installation Procedure ..................................................................................................................... 467
NFC Card Reader Type S6 (D3DH-06) (Pro C5200/C5210 Only) .................................................... 471
Accessory Check ............................................................................................................................ 471
Installation Procedure ..................................................................................................................... 471
NFC Card Reader Type M19 (D3BS-21) (MP C6503/C8003 Only) .................................................. 477
Accessory Check ............................................................................................................................ 477
Installation Procedure ..................................................................................................................... 477
Smart Card Reader Built-in Unit Type S6 (D3DH-07) (Pro C5200/C5210 Only) .............................. 481
Accessory Check ............................................................................................................................ 481
Installation Procedure ..................................................................................................................... 481
Smart Card Reader Built-in Unit Type M19 (D3BS-22) (MP C6503/8003 Only) ............................... 487
Accessory Check ............................................................................................................................ 487
Installation Procedure ..................................................................................................................... 487
Common Adjustments ........................................................................................................................ 491
Height and Level Adjustment.......................................................................................................... 491
Skew and Side-to-Side Registration............................................................................................... 493
3. Preventive Maintenance ................................................................................................................. 501
Preventive Maintenance Tables ......................................................................................................... 501
PM Parts Settings ............................................................................................................................... 502
PM Parts Replacement Procedure ................................................................................................. 502
Preparation before Operation Check.............................................................................................. 504
Operation Check ............................................................................................................................. 505
PM Counter Display............................................................................................................................ 506
Note concerning Running Distance Data ....................................................................................... 506
Opening the PM Counter ................................................................................................................ 506
PM Parts Screen Details ................................................................................................................ 508
5
Cleaning Points .................................................................................................................................. 512
Scanner........................................................................................................................................... 512
Laser Unit........................................................................................................................................ 513
Developer........................................................................................................................................ 514
Toner Supply................................................................................................................................... 518
ITB Unit ........................................................................................................................................... 518
Fusing ............................................................................................................................................. 520
Other ............................................................................................................................................... 522
Paper Feed ..................................................................................................................................... 523
Duplex ............................................................................................................................................. 528
4. Replacement and Adjustment ........................................................................................................ 540
Notes on the Main Power Switch ....................................................................................................... 540
Push Switch .................................................................................................................................... 540
Special Tools and Lubricants ............................................................................................................. 543
Exterior Covers ................................................................................................................................... 544
Right Cover ..................................................................................................................................... 544
Left Cover ....................................................................................................................................... 553
Rear Cover...................................................................................................................................... 557
Upper Cover.................................................................................................................................... 559
Operation Panel (Pro C5200S/C5210S) ............................................................................................ 563
When Using the Standard Operation Panel ................................................................................... 563
When Using the Smart Operation Panel ........................................................................................ 569
Operation Panel (MP C6503/C8003) ................................................................................................. 573
Operation Panel Unit ...................................................................................................................... 573
Internal Parts................................................................................................................................... 575
Adjustment of Screen Angle ........................................................................................................... 576
Proximity Sensor (Human Detection Sensor) .................................................................................... 579
ADF ..................................................................................................................................................... 581
ADF Removal ................................................................................................................................. 581
Adjustment after Replacing the ADF .............................................................................................. 583
ADF Cover ...................................................................................................................................... 585
Original Feed Unit ........................................................................................................................... 587
Pick-up Roller, Transport Belt......................................................................................................... 588
ADF Separation Roller .................................................................................................................... 589
Original Registration Sensor........................................................................................................... 590
Original Exit Sensor ........................................................................................................................ 592
ADF Control Board ......................................................................................................................... 593
Separation Sensor, Skew Correction Sensor................................................................................. 594
Original Width Sensors, Interval Sensor ........................................................................................ 594
6
Original Length Sensor (B5, A4, LG).............................................................................................. 596
APS Feeler...................................................................................................................................... 596
ADF Lift-Up Interlock Switch, Lift-Up Sensor ................................................................................. 596
Original Set Sensor......................................................................................................................... 597
Original Length Sensor (A4/LT) ...................................................................................................... 598
Bottom Plate HP Sensor................................................................................................................. 598
Bottom Plate Position Sensor ......................................................................................................... 599
ADF Feed Cover Interlock Switch, Pick-up Roller HP Sensor ....................................................... 599
ADF Entrance Motor ....................................................................................................................... 600
ADF Scanning Motor ...................................................................................................................... 601
ADF Exit Motor ............................................................................................................................... 602
ADF Bottom Plate Lift Motor ........................................................................................................... 603
ADF Pick-up Roller Lift Motor ......................................................................................................... 604
ADF Transport Motor ...................................................................................................................... 604
ADF Feed Motor ............................................................................................................................. 605
CIS Unit........................................................................................................................................... 606
CIS White Roller Cleaning .............................................................................................................. 609
Scanner Unit ....................................................................................................................................... 611
Exposure Glass .............................................................................................................................. 611
ADF Exposure Glass, Gap Sheet (MP C6503/C8003) .................................................................. 612
Modification Procedure for Original Transport ............................................................................... 614
Lens Block, Original Length Sensor ............................................................................................... 616
Exposure Lamp (LED) .................................................................................................................... 618
Scanner Drive Motor ....................................................................................................................... 619
Scanner Home Position Sensor ..................................................................................................... 621
DF Position Sensor ......................................................................................................................... 622
Scanner Unit ................................................................................................................................... 623
Scanner Wire .................................................................................................................................. 627
Installing the Scanner Heater ......................................................................................................... 633
Magnification and Registration Adjustment .................................................................................... 635
Laser Unit ........................................................................................................................................... 638
Before You Begin............................................................................................................................ 638
Laser Unit........................................................................................................................................ 639
Charge Roller Cleaning Roller Lift Solenoids (KCMY) ................................................................... 643
Laser Unit Cooling Fan (Right) ....................................................................................................... 643
Laser Unit Cooling Fan (Left) ......................................................................................................... 644
Toner Supply Unit ............................................................................................................................... 645
Toner Supply Unit Front Cover ....................................................................................................... 645
Toner Supply Unit ........................................................................................................................... 645
7
ID Chip Connector Board (KCMY) ................................................................................................. 648
Toner Supply Unit Inner Cover ....................................................................................................... 649
Sub Hopper Unit (KCMY) ............................................................................................................... 650
Toner End Sensor (KCMY)............................................................................................................. 651
Sub Hopper Motor (KCMY) ............................................................................................................ 652
Toner Supply Board (TSB) ............................................................................................................. 652
Toner Cartridge Guide .................................................................................................................... 652
Toner Supply Motor (KCMY) .......................................................................................................... 655
Drawer Unit ......................................................................................................................................... 658
Layout (Motors)............................................................................................................................... 658
Layout (Boards) .............................................................................................................................. 659
Drawer Unit Cover .......................................................................................................................... 660
DUB (Drawer Unit Board) ............................................................................................................... 665
Curled Cord..................................................................................................................................... 667
Drawer Unit Connector ................................................................................................................... 669
Drawer Set Sensor 1 ...................................................................................................................... 670
Drawer Set Sensor 2 ...................................................................................................................... 671
Drawer Unit Set Sensor .................................................................................................................. 671
Drawer Unit Lock Sensor................................................................................................................ 672
Drawer Unit Flapper Sensor ........................................................................................................... 673
Drawer LEDs (LED 1-3).................................................................................................................. 674
Drawer Unit Lock Motor .................................................................................................................. 678
Registration Motor .......................................................................................................................... 680
Exit Motor ........................................................................................................................................ 681
Duplex Inverter Entrance Motor...................................................................................................... 681
Exit Inverter Motor .......................................................................................................................... 682
Duplex Transport Motor .................................................................................................................. 683
Duplex Exit Motor ........................................................................................................................... 683
Cleaning Web Motor (Pro C5200S/C5210S only) .......................................................................... 684
Cleaning Web Contact Motor (Pro C5200S/C5210S only) ............................................................ 685
Fusing Heat Pipe Cooling Fan........................................................................................................ 687
IH Coil Cooling Fan......................................................................................................................... 688
Fusing Pressure Roller Intake Fan (Pro C5200S/C5210S only) .................................................... 689
PCDU .................................................................................................................................................. 692
Faceplate ........................................................................................................................................ 692
Applying Grease to the Top Edge of the Drum Shaft..................................................................... 693
PCDU .............................................................................................................................................. 694
Charge Roller Unit .......................................................................................................................... 696
Drum Cleaning Unit Removal ......................................................................................................... 697
8
OPC Drum ...................................................................................................................................... 702
Drum Cleaning Unit Internal Components ..................................................................................... 704
Potential Sensor (KCMY) ............................................................................................................... 713
Development Unit ............................................................................................................................... 715
Development Unit ........................................................................................................................... 715
Development Filter.......................................................................................................................... 716
Removing Old Developer ............................................................................................................... 717
Adding New Developer ................................................................................................................... 721
Image Transfer Belt (ITB) Unit ........................................................................................................... 728
ITB Unit Removal............................................................................................................................ 728
ITB Replacement ............................................................................................................................ 729
ID/MUSIC Sensors ......................................................................................................................... 735
ITB Home Position Sensor ............................................................................................................. 735
Paper Transfer Belt Separation Sensor ......................................................................................... 736
ITB Lift (YMC) Sensor..................................................................................................................... 736
Image Transfer Roller (K) ............................................................................................................... 737
Image Transfer Roller (YMC) ......................................................................................................... 739
ITB Bias Roller ................................................................................................................................ 740
Transfer Power Pack/Separation Power Pack ............................................................................... 743
TDRB (Transfer Drive Relay Board)............................................................................................... 743
Anti-condensation Heater ............................................................................................................... 744
Paper Transfer Belt Separation Motor............................................................................................ 745
AC Transfer Power Pack (Pro C5200S/C5210S Only) .................................................................. 746
ITB Motor ........................................................................................................................................ 746
ITB Drive Shaft Gear, ITB Drive Shaft Encoder Sensor ................................................................ 747
ITB Driven Shaft Encoder Sensor .................................................................................................. 748
ITB Cleaning Unit ............................................................................................................................... 750
ITB Cleaning Unit............................................................................................................................ 750
Bottom Cover .................................................................................................................................. 751
ITB Cleaning Blade ......................................................................................................................... 752
ITB Lubricant Brush ........................................................................................................................ 753
ITB Lubricant Bar ............................................................................................................................ 755
ITB Lubricant Blade ........................................................................................................................ 755
ITB Cleaning Unit Set Sensor......................................................................................................... 756
ITB Paper Dust Cleaning Brush Roller ........................................................................................... 756
Lubrication after Replacement........................................................................................................ 759
Paper Transfer Belt Unit ..................................................................................................................... 761
Paper Transfer Belt Unit ................................................................................................................. 761
Adjustment of the Paper Transfer Belt Unit.................................................................................... 763
9
Belt Unit .......................................................................................................................................... 771
Cleaning Blade ............................................................................................................................... 775
Paper Transfer Lubricant Bar (Pro C5200S/C5210S Only) ........................................................... 777
Paper Transfer Lubrication Roller (Pro C5200S/C5210S Only) .................................................... 778
Paper Transfer Belt Cooling Fan (Front) ........................................................................................ 779
Paper Transfer Belt Cooling Fan (Rear)......................................................................................... 780
Tandem Tray ...................................................................................................................................... 783
Left Tandem Tray, Right Tandem Tray .......................................................................................... 783
Feed Roller, Pick-up Roller and Separation Roller ........................................................................ 784
Paper Feed Unit for Tray 1 ............................................................................................................. 785
Rear Fence Home Position Sensor, Left Tray Paper Sensor ........................................................ 789
Rear Fence Return Sensor............................................................................................................. 791
Paper Height Sensors 1-3, Tray Down Sensor, Right Tray Set Sensor ........................................ 792
Rear End Fence Closed Sensor..................................................................................................... 796
End Fence Rear Solenoid .............................................................................................................. 800
Left Tray Lock Solenoid .................................................................................................................. 801
Rear Fence Drive Motor ................................................................................................................. 802
1st Tray Lift Motor ........................................................................................................................... 802
Paper Feed Section (Tray 2-3, Vertical Transport) ............................................................................ 803
Paper Tray ...................................................................................................................................... 803
Feed Roller, Pick-up Roller and Separation Roller ........................................................................ 806
Paper Feed Unit.............................................................................................................................. 807
Pick-up Solenoid ............................................................................................................................. 809
Transport Sensor ............................................................................................................................ 809
Paper Feed Sensor......................................................................................................................... 809
Paper Tray Upper Limit Sensor, Paper End Sensor ...................................................................... 810
Vertical Transport LED ................................................................................................................... 811
Paper Size Sensors ........................................................................................................................ 812
Paper Tray Set Sensors ................................................................................................................. 813
Tray Pull-In Device ......................................................................................................................... 813
Paper Tray Lift Motor ...................................................................................................................... 814
Tray Heater ..................................................................................................................................... 815
Bypass Tray Unit (Pro C5200S/C5210S) ........................................................................................... 818
Bypass Tray Unit Removal ............................................................................................................. 818
Bypass Pick-up Roller, Bypass Feed Roller, Bypass Separation Roller........................................ 821
Bypass Tray Paper End Sensor ..................................................................................................... 822
Bypass Paper Width Sensor........................................................................................................... 824
Bypass Paper Length Sensor ......................................................................................................... 825
Bypass Tray Lower Limit Sensor .................................................................................................... 826
10
Bypass Tray Lift Motor .................................................................................................................... 826
Bypass Tray Upper Limit Sensor, Bypass Paper Feed Sensor ..................................................... 828
Bypass Pick-up Solenoid ................................................................................................................ 833
Bypass Tray Set Sensor ................................................................................................................. 834
Bypass Tray LED ............................................................................................................................ 834
Bypass Tray Unit (MP C6503/C8003) ................................................................................................ 836
Bypass Tray Unit Removal ............................................................................................................. 836
Bypass Pick-up Roller, Bypass Feed Roller, Bypass Separation Roller........................................ 839
Bypass Tray Paper End Sensor ..................................................................................................... 841
Bypass Paper Width Sensor........................................................................................................... 842
Bypass Paper Length Sensor ......................................................................................................... 842
Bypass Paper Feed Sensor............................................................................................................ 843
Bypass Pick-up Solenoid ................................................................................................................ 848
Bypass Tray LED ............................................................................................................................ 849
Paper Relay and Registration Section ............................................................................................... 850
Registration Unit ............................................................................................................................. 850
Relay Unit ....................................................................................................................................... 853
Registration Sensor ........................................................................................................................ 855
Paper Type Sensor ......................................................................................................................... 856
Relay Sensor .................................................................................................................................. 857
Bypass Tray Paper Type Sensor.................................................................................................... 858
Paper Transport Belt Unit ................................................................................................................... 860
Separation Lever ............................................................................................................................ 860
Paper Transport Belt Unit ............................................................................................................... 861
Paper Transport Belts ..................................................................................................................... 862
Paper Transport Belt Fans ............................................................................................................. 863
Paper Transport Belt Sensor .......................................................................................................... 864
Paper Transport Belt Unit Set Sensor ............................................................................................ 864
Fusing Unit.......................................................................................................................................... 866
Screw List ....................................................................................................................................... 866
Removing the Fusing Unit .............................................................................................................. 867
Fusing Heat Pipe ............................................................................................................................ 869
Fusing Unit Cover ........................................................................................................................... 870
Fusing Unit Plates........................................................................................................................... 873
IH Coil Unit ...................................................................................................................................... 875
Fusing Stripper Plate ...................................................................................................................... 877
Separating the Fusing Unit ............................................................................................................. 879
Heating Roller, Fusing Roller, Fusing Belt ..................................................................................... 881
Heating Roller Shaft, Flanges......................................................................................................... 885
11
Pressure Roller Stripper Plate ........................................................................................................ 887
Pressure Roller Fusing Lamp ......................................................................................................... 888
Pressure Roller ............................................................................................................................... 889
Applying Grease: Gears ................................................................................................................. 892
Applying Grease: Bearings (Fusing Roller, Pressure Roller) ......................................................... 893
Thermistor (Fusing Belt) ................................................................................................................. 894
Thermistor (Hot Roller Shaft).......................................................................................................... 894
Pressure Roller Sensor (Rear) ....................................................................................................... 895
Pressure Roller Sensor (Front)....................................................................................................... 896
Thermopile (Pressure Roller) ......................................................................................................... 897
Thermostat (Pressure Roller) ......................................................................................................... 899
Fusing Paper Feed Sensor............................................................................................................. 900
Fusing Cleaning Web Unit (Pro C5200S/C5210S Only) ................................................................ 900
Fusing Cleaning Web (Pro C5200S/C5210S Only) ....................................................................... 901
Fusing Belt Smoothing Roller (Pro C5200S/C5210S Only) ........................................................... 906
Fusing Belt Smoothing Roller Contact Sensor (Pro C5200S/C5210S) ......................................... 907
Cleaning Web Set Sensor (Pro C5200S/C5210S Only) ................................................................ 908
Cleaning Web End Sensor (Pro C5200S/C5210S Only) ............................................................... 908
Cleaning Web Contact Sensor (Pro C5200S/C5210S Only) ......................................................... 908
Fusing Entrance Sensor ................................................................................................................. 909
Thermopile (Fusing Belt) ................................................................................................................ 911
Paper Exit and Duplex Unit ................................................................................................................ 912
Paper Exit Unit ................................................................................................................................ 912
Paper Exit Sensor ........................................................................................................................... 914
Paper Exit Relay Sensor ................................................................................................................ 915
Inverter Exit Sensor ........................................................................................................................ 916
Inverter Feed-in Sensor .................................................................................................................. 917
Inverter Feed-out Sensor................................................................................................................ 919
Inverter Junction Gate Home Position Sensor ............................................................................... 920
Inverter Junction Gate Motor .......................................................................................................... 920
Duplex Inverter Solenoid ................................................................................................................ 921
Paper Exit Left Guide Plate Sensor................................................................................................ 922
Paper Exit Upper Guide Plate Sensor ............................................................................................ 922
Duplex Unit ......................................................................................................................................... 924
Purge Relay Sensor, Duplex Invert Sensor ................................................................................... 924
Duplex Invert Solenoid.................................................................................................................... 925
Duplex Unit Entrance Sensor ......................................................................................................... 926
Duplex Unit Sensor 3 ...................................................................................................................... 927
Duplex Unit Sensor 4 ...................................................................................................................... 927
12
Duplex Exit Sensor ......................................................................................................................... 928
Horizontal Feed Guide Plate Open Sensor .................................................................................... 929
Duplex Transport Home Position Sensor 1 .................................................................................... 930
Duplex Transport Home Position Sensor 2 .................................................................................... 931
Edge Detection Sensor Shift Motor ................................................................................................ 933
Edge Detection Unit ........................................................................................................................ 934
Edge Detection Sensor................................................................................................................... 937
Sensor Shift Home Position Switch ................................................................................................ 938
Duplex Transport Shift Motor 1....................................................................................................... 939
Duplex Transport Shift Motor 2....................................................................................................... 940
Paper Purge Unit ................................................................................................................................ 944
Paper Purge Unit ............................................................................................................................ 944
PCB: LSB ........................................................................................................................................ 945
Push Switch .................................................................................................................................... 947
Duplex Inverter Motor ..................................................................................................................... 947
Purge Tray LED .............................................................................................................................. 949
Left Lower Door LED ...................................................................................................................... 951
Lower Guide Plate LED .................................................................................................................. 951
Drive Unit ............................................................................................................................................ 953
Layout (Motors)............................................................................................................................... 953
Drum Motor (KCMY) / Drum Encoder Sensor (KCMY) .................................................................. 957
Drum Home Position Sensor (Pro C5200S/C5210S Only) ............................................................ 960
Drum Cleaning Motor (KCMY)........................................................................................................ 961
Development Motor (KCMY) .......................................................................................................... 963
Development Roller Home Position Sensor (KCMY) ..................................................................... 966
ITB Lift Motor .................................................................................................................................. 966
Paper Transfer Belt Motor, Paper Transfer Belt Encoder Sensors................................................ 968
Bypass Feed Motor, Relay Motor ................................................................................................... 969
Paper Feed Motors, Transport Motors ........................................................................................... 970
Fusing Drive Motor ......................................................................................................................... 976
Fusing Release Motor..................................................................................................................... 978
Waste Toner Collection Motor ........................................................................................................ 980
Waste Toner Lock Sensor .............................................................................................................. 983
Fusing Belt Smoothing Roller Drive Motor (Pro C5200S/C5210S)................................................ 984
Fusing Belt Smoothing Roller Contact Motor (Pro C5200S/C5210S)............................................ 985
Waste Toner Collection ...................................................................................................................... 987
Waste Toner Bottle ......................................................................................................................... 987
Waste Toner Bottle Unit ................................................................................................................. 990
Waste Toner Bottle Motor Sensor .................................................................................................. 993
13
Waste Toner Near Full Sensor ....................................................................................................... 993
Waste Toner Bottle Set Sensor ...................................................................................................... 993
Waste Toner Transport Motor ........................................................................................................ 994
Waste Toner Upper Transport ........................................................................................................ 994
Waste Toner Vertical Transport...................................................................................................... 995
Waste Toner Lower Transport ........................................................................................................ 996
Main Boards, and HDD Unit ............................................................................................................... 998
Layout (Boards) .............................................................................................................................. 998
Controller Board.............................................................................................................................. 999
HDD Unit ....................................................................................................................................... 1001
BICU ............................................................................................................................................. 1003
NVRAM Replacement Procedure ................................................................................................. 1006
IOB ................................................................................................................................................ 1010
PFB ............................................................................................................................................... 1012
IH Inverter ..................................................................................................................................... 1013
AC Drive Board ............................................................................................................................. 1014
PSU1, PSU2 ................................................................................................................................. 1016
Potential Sensor Board ................................................................................................................. 1020
Combined High-Voltage Power Supply Board (Charge/Development) (KCMY) ......................... 1021
Heater Switch ............................................................................................................................... 1023
Fans and Filters ................................................................................................................................ 1025
Layout (Fans)................................................................................................................................ 1025
Controller Exhaust Fan ................................................................................................................. 1029
Development Exhaust Fans (Right/Left) ...................................................................................... 1029
Development Intake Fans (KCMY)............................................................................................... 1031
Drive Exhaust Fan ........................................................................................................................ 1033
Fusing Exit Exhaust Fan ............................................................................................................... 1034
Fusing Pressure Roller Exhaust Fan (Pro C5200S/C5210S) ...................................................... 1035
Heat Pipe Panel Exhaust Fan ...................................................................................................... 1036
Heat Pipe Panel Intake Fan.......................................................................................................... 1037
Paper Transfer Belt Fusing Exhaust Fan ..................................................................................... 1039
ITB Motor Cooling Fan.................................................................................................................. 1040
Ozone Exhaust Fan ...................................................................................................................... 1041
Duplex Exhaust Fans (Front/Middle/Rear) ................................................................................... 1042
IH Coil Power Cooling Fan ........................................................................................................... 1043
ITB Cleaning Intake Fan ............................................................................................................... 1044
ID Sensor Cleaning Fan ............................................................................................................... 1045
PSU Fans (Right/Left)................................................................................................................... 1046
Layout (Filters) .............................................................................................................................. 1047
14
Duplex Exhaust Ozone Filters ...................................................................................................... 1048
Ozone Filters (Large/Small).......................................................................................................... 1049
Dust Filters (Large/Small) ............................................................................................................. 1050
Particulate Filters .......................................................................................................................... 1051
Deodorizing Filters ........................................................................................................................ 1052
Adjustment after Replacement ......................................................................................................... 1053
5. System Maintenance .................................................................................................................... 1055
Service Program Mode ..................................................................................................................... 1055
Entering SP Mode......................................................................................................................... 1055
Exiting SP Mode ........................................................................................................................... 1056
Types of SP Modes ...................................................................................................................... 1056
Remarks........................................................................................................................................ 1059
SP Tables ......................................................................................................................................... 1062
Firmware Update (SD Card)............................................................................................................. 1063
Overview ....................................................................................................................................... 1063
Firmware Types ............................................................................................................................ 1063
Procedure ..................................................................................................................................... 1064
Error Screens During Updating .................................................................................................... 1068
Firmware Update (Remote Firmware Update) ................................................................................. 1072
RFU Performable Condition ......................................................................................................... 1072
Firmware Update (Smart Firmware Update) .................................................................................... 1073
Overview ....................................................................................................................................... 1073
Immediate Update ........................................................................................................................ 1074
Update at the Next Visit (Reserve) ............................................................................................... 1076
Update via SD card....................................................................................................................... 1082
Firmware Update (Auto Remote Firmware Update) ........................................................................ 1085
Overview ....................................................................................................................................... 1085
Downloading and Updating Process ............................................................................................ 1086
Related SP .................................................................................................................................... 1090
Updating JavaVM ............................................................................................................................. 1095
Creating an SD Card for Updating ............................................................................................... 1095
NVRAM Data Upload/Download ...................................................................................................... 1098
Uploading Content of NVRAM to an SD card .............................................................................. 1098
Downloading an SD Card to NVRAM ........................................................................................... 1099
Address Book Upload/Download...................................................................................................... 1100
Information List ............................................................................................................................. 1100
Download ...................................................................................................................................... 1100
Upload........................................................................................................................................... 1101
SMC List Card Save Function .......................................................................................................... 1102
15
Overview ....................................................................................................................................... 1102
Procedure ..................................................................................................................................... 1102
File Names of the Saved SMC Lists............................................................................................. 1104
Error Messages ............................................................................................................................ 1105
UP/SP Data Import/Export ............................................................................................................... 1106
UP Data Import/Export.................................................................................................................. 1106
SP Data Import/Export .................................................................................................................. 1109
Possible solutions for import/export problems ............................................................................. 1111
Capturing the Device Logs ............................................................................................................... 1113
Overview ....................................................................................................................................... 1113
Retrieving the Device Logs via Operation Panel.......................................................................... 1114
Retrieving the Device Logs via Web Image Monitor .................................................................... 1117
Card Save Function .......................................................................................................................... 1121
Overview ....................................................................................................................................... 1121
Procedure ..................................................................................................................................... 1121
Error Messages ............................................................................................................................ 1123
6. Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................................ 1125
Self-Diagnostic Mode ....................................................................................................................... 1125
Service Call Conditions ................................................................................................................ 1125
SC Logging ................................................................................................................................... 1126
SC Automatic Reboot ................................................................................................................... 1126
SC Manual Reboot ....................................................................................................................... 1128
SC100 (Engine: Scanning) ............................................................................................................... 1130
SC200 (Engine: Image Writing)........................................................................................................ 1138
SC300 (Engine: Charge, Development)........................................................................................... 1149
SC300 (Engine: Around the Drum) .................................................................................................. 1156
SC300 (Engine: Transfer/Separation, Cleaning, etc.)...................................................................... 1171
SC400 (Engine: Around the Drum) .................................................................................................. 1173
SC400 (Engine: Transfer/Separation, Cleaning etc.)....................................................................... 1178
SC500 (Engine: Paper transport 1: Paper Feed, Duplex, Transport) .............................................. 1198
SC500 (Engine: Paper Transport 2: Fusing, etc.) ............................................................................ 1217
SC500 (Engine: Paper Transport 3: Feed, Duplex, Transport, Fusing) .......................................... 1232
SC500 (Engine: Others) ................................................................................................................... 1237
SC600 (Engine: Communication and Others).................................................................................. 1238
SC600 (Controller)............................................................................................................................ 1254
SC600 (Engine: System) .................................................................................................................. 1266
SC700 (Engine: Peripherals-1) ........................................................................................................ 1271
Troubleshooting for SC720-XX..................................................................................................... 1299
SC700 (Engine: Peripherals-2) ........................................................................................................ 1310
16
SC800 (Controller)............................................................................................................................ 1332
SC900 (Controller)............................................................................................................................ 1360
SC900 (Engine: Others) ................................................................................................................... 1364
Jam Detection ................................................................................................................................... 1366
Jam Displays................................................................................................................................. 1366
Removing Jammed Paper ............................................................................................................ 1367
Printer Engine Jam History ........................................................................................................... 1367
Jam Codes and Position Codes ................................................................................................... 1368
Sensor Locations .......................................................................................................................... 1380
Paper Size Codes ......................................................................................................................... 1381
Voltage of the Input Power Source .................................................................................................. 1383
Checking the Voltage of the Input Power Source ........................................................................ 1383
Acquisition Control for Voltage of the Input Power Source .......................................................... 1384
Fan Defect Detection ........................................................................................................................ 1388
Fan Locations and Fan SC ........................................................................................................... 1388
Blown Fuse Conditions ..................................................................................................................... 1393
AC Drive Board ............................................................................................................................. 1393
PSU ............................................................................................................................................... 1394
DUB .............................................................................................................................................. 1395
IH Inverter ..................................................................................................................................... 1397
Toner Supply Board (TSB) ........................................................................................................... 1397
BICU ............................................................................................................................................. 1398
IOB ................................................................................................................................................ 1399
PFB ............................................................................................................................................... 1402
TDRB ............................................................................................................................................ 1405
Operation Panel ............................................................................................................................ 1406
LED Conditions ................................................................................................................................. 1407
ADF Control Board ....................................................................................................................... 1407
BICU ............................................................................................................................................. 1408
IOB ................................................................................................................................................ 1409
Toner Supply Board (TSB) ........................................................................................................... 1410
PFB ............................................................................................................................................... 1411
DUB .............................................................................................................................................. 1411
SDCU ............................................................................................................................................ 1412
Controller Board............................................................................................................................ 1413
NICE Function (Pro C5200S/C5210S) ............................................................................................. 1416
How to Activate NICE ................................................................................................................... 1418
Reference Side Registration Adjustment ..................................................................................... 1419
Front and Back Registration Adjustment ...................................................................................... 1429
17
FR Density Adjustment ................................................................................................................. 1432
Banding Analysis .......................................................................................................................... 1446
Shock-jitter Finder......................................................................................................................... 1453
Adjustment ........................................................................................................................................ 1460
Adjustment 001: ACC (Automatic Color Calibration) ................................................................... 1460
Adjustment 002: Manual Gamma Adjustment.............................................................................. 1461
Adjustment 003: Scanner Registration ......................................................................................... 1467
Adjustment 004: ADF Registration ............................................................................................... 1467
Adjustment 005: Registration ....................................................................................................... 1467
Adjustment 006: Fusing Nip Width Adjustment for Envelopes..................................................... 1474
Adjustment 007: Adjustments Required for Improved Glossiness............................................... 1475
Adjustment 008: Margin Adjustment ............................................................................................ 1476
Image Quality.................................................................................................................................... 1478
Definitions of Abnormal Images.................................................................................................... 1478
Image Quality 001: Spots ............................................................................................................. 1486
Image Quality 002: Streaks .......................................................................................................... 1493
Image Quality 003: Bands ............................................................................................................ 1507
Image Quality 004: Non-Reproduction ......................................................................................... 1511
Image Quality 005: Unevenness .................................................................................................. 1511
Image Quality 006: Toner Flaking Off .......................................................................................... 1516
Paper Transport................................................................................................................................ 1519
Paper Transport 001: Envelopes .................................................................................................. 1519
Scanning ........................................................................................................................................... 1520
Scanning 001: Streaks.................................................................................................................. 1520
Other Problems ................................................................................................................................ 1523
Other 001: Drawer Unit ................................................................................................................. 1523
Other 002: Paper Exit Section ...................................................................................................... 1525
Other 003: Correspondance Table for Adjustment Settings (Pro C5200S/C5210S)................... 1529
Other 004: Correspondance Table for IMSS Settings (Pro C5200S/C5210S) ............................ 1534
Other 005: SC ............................................................................................................................... 1540
Other 006: Jam ............................................................................................................................. 1543
Problems Related to Peripheral Devices ......................................................................................... 1547
Peripherals 001: Finisher SR4120/SR4130 ................................................................................. 1547
Peripherals 002: LCIT RT4050 ..................................................................................................... 1549
Peripherals 003: LCIT RT4020 (Pro C5200S/C5210S, MP C8003 SP) ...................................... 1551
7. Detailed Descriptions .................................................................................................................... 1556
Guidance for Those Who are Familiar with Predecessor Products ................................................. 1556
Product Overview ............................................................................................................................. 1560
Component Layout ....................................................................................................................... 1560
18
Electrical Components .................................................................................................................. 1564
ADF ................................................................................................................................................... 1582
Mechanism Descriptions .............................................................................................................. 1582
Mechanism Details ....................................................................................................................... 1585
Scanner ............................................................................................................................................ 1596
Mechanism Descriptions .............................................................................................................. 1596
Mechanism Details ....................................................................................................................... 1596
Laser Unit ......................................................................................................................................... 1605
Mechanism Descriptions .............................................................................................................. 1605
Mechanism Details ....................................................................................................................... 1606
Toner Supply .................................................................................................................................... 1613
Mechanism Descriptions .............................................................................................................. 1613
Mechanism Details ....................................................................................................................... 1616
Drawer Unit ....................................................................................................................................... 1623
Mechanism Descriptions .............................................................................................................. 1623
Mechanism Details ....................................................................................................................... 1624
PCDU ................................................................................................................................................ 1633
Mechanism Descriptions .............................................................................................................. 1633
Mechanism Details ....................................................................................................................... 1634
Development Unit ............................................................................................................................. 1640
Mechanism Descriptions .............................................................................................................. 1640
Mechanism Details ....................................................................................................................... 1640
Image Transfer Belt (ITB) Unit ......................................................................................................... 1647
Mechanism Descriptions .............................................................................................................. 1647
Mechanism Details ....................................................................................................................... 1648
ITB Cleaning Unit ............................................................................................................................. 1653
Mechanism Descriptions .............................................................................................................. 1653
Mechanism Details ....................................................................................................................... 1654
Paper Transfer Belt Unit ................................................................................................................... 1657
Mechanism Descriptions .............................................................................................................. 1657
Mechanism Details ....................................................................................................................... 1658
Paper Feed Unit ............................................................................................................................... 1667
Mechanism Descriptions .............................................................................................................. 1667
Mechanism Details ....................................................................................................................... 1667
Vertical Transport ............................................................................................................................. 1680
Mechanism Descriptions .............................................................................................................. 1680
Mechanism Details ....................................................................................................................... 1680
By-pass Tray Unit ............................................................................................................................. 1682
Mechanism Descriptions .............................................................................................................. 1682
19
Mechanism Details ....................................................................................................................... 1683
Paper Registration ............................................................................................................................ 1690
Mechanism Descriptions .............................................................................................................. 1690
Mechanism Details ....................................................................................................................... 1691
Paper Transport Belt Unit ................................................................................................................. 1698
Mechanism Descriptions .............................................................................................................. 1698
Mechanism Details ....................................................................................................................... 1698
Fusing Unit........................................................................................................................................ 1700
Mechanism Descriptions .............................................................................................................. 1700
Mechanism Details ....................................................................................................................... 1703
Paper Exit and Duplexing ................................................................................................................. 1720
Mechanism Descriptions .............................................................................................................. 1720
Mechanism Details ....................................................................................................................... 1722
Paper Purge...................................................................................................................................... 1731
Mechanism Descriptions .............................................................................................................. 1731
Mechanism Details ....................................................................................................................... 1731
Waste Toner Collection .................................................................................................................... 1733
Mechanism Descriptions .............................................................................................................. 1733
Mechanism Details ....................................................................................................................... 1733
Electrical Components...................................................................................................................... 1740
Mechanism Descriptions .............................................................................................................. 1740
Image Processing ............................................................................................................................. 1746
Mechanism Descriptions .............................................................................................................. 1746
Mechanism Details ....................................................................................................................... 1746
Process Control ................................................................................................................................ 1748
Mechanism Descriptions .............................................................................................................. 1748
Components.................................................................................................................................. 1749
Initial Settings ............................................................................................................................... 1752
Process Control ............................................................................................................................ 1753
Others ............................................................................................................................................... 1757
Proximity Sensor (MP C6503/C8003 only)................................................................................... 1757
Energy Save ................................................................................................................................. 1760
Paper Removal Mechanism for Jam J058/J098 .......................................................................... 1767
@Remote New Function (Auto Discovery) .................................................................................. 1768
Firmware Update Method Using the Firmware Package ............................................................. 1771
20
1.Product Information
1. Product Information
Pro C5200S/C5210S
21
1.Product Information
22
1.Product Information
Internal Options
• You can only install one of the following units at the same time: IEEE 802.11a/g/n Interface
Unit Type M19, IEEE 1284 Interface Board Type M19, File Format Converter Type M19.
EFI Options
• Color Controller E-24B and Color Controller E-44B cannot be used simultaneously.
24
1.Product Information
MP C6503/C8003
Internal Options
• You can only install one of the following units at the same time: IEEE 802.11a/g/n Interface
Unit Type M19, IEEE 1284 Interface Board Type M19, File Format Converter Type M19.
• You cannot install Extended USB Board Type M19 and USB Device Server Option Type M19
simultaneously.
27
1.Product Information
Specifications
See "Appendices" for the following information:
• General Specifications
• Supported Paper Sizes
• Software Accessories
• Optional Equipment
28
2.Installation
2. Installation
Installation Requirements
Environment
29
2.Installation
The following space is required for the user to use the machine. If you cannot secure this space, then
you will not be able to ensure the machine’s usability. Make this space to avoid causing damage.
RTB 32
Modified
30
2.Installation
Dimensions
Pro C5200S/C5210S
[A]: 799 mm
[B]: 1648 mm
31
2.Installation
MP C6503/C8003
[A]: 750 mm
[B]: 1050 mm
[C]: 1225 mm
Power Requirements
• Make sure that the wall outlet is near the main machine and easily accessible. Make sure the
plug is firmly inserted in the outlet.
• Avoid multi-wiring.
• Be sure to ground the machine.
• Never set anything on the power cord.
• Rating voltage of output connectors [A] and [B] for peripherals: Max.DC 24V
32
2.Installation
33
2.Installation
In order to increase the security of the MFP, and to ensure that the customer sets the administrator
password, an administrator set/change prompt display is shown at the first power-up.
Overview
• When the customers set the administrator/supervisor login password, the display disappears and
the home display will appear. The customers, however, can erase this screen with the following
procedure in the case that they think there is no need to set the password.
1. On the Program/Change Administrator screen, press [Change] next to Supervisor and then touch
[OK] without inputting any password.
2. Touch [OK] again when the Confirm password display shows up.
3. For Administrator 1, do the same procedure as steps 1 and 2.
4. Press the [OK] button, and then turn the power OFF/ON.
SP5-755-002 (Display Setting: Hide Administrator Password Change Scrn) allows you to skip this
screen temporarily and continue the installation procedure without setting an administrator password.
However, the Program/Change Administrator screen appears every time you turn the power OFF/ON, if
the password is not set.
For more details about this security issue, see "Notes on Using Multi-Function Printers Safely" supplied
with the MFP.
When Supervisor / Administrator 1-4 passwords are configured via network, the "Change Supervisor
login password" window won't display.
The passwords for Supervisor or Administrator 1 to 4 can be set via "System Settings". But the
34
2.Installation
Program/Change Administrator screen appears every time the power switch is turned ON if the
passwords are input this way. So we recommend the customers to set the passwords via network or the
Program/Change Administrator screen.
1. Install the machine.
2. Turn ON the main power.
The password change display appears.
3. Press [Change] and change the supervisor login password.
35
2.Installation
No Description Q’ty
Pro C5200S Pro C5210S
1 Service Pocket 1 1
2 Rivet - Dia5 2 2
3 Developer Funnel 1 1
4 Drum Holder (front) 1 1
5 Drum Holder (rear) 1 1
6 Jig for Development Unit 1 1
7 Development Cap 4 4
8 Jig for Paper Transfer Belt Unit 1 1
9 PCDU Holder 1 1
36
2.Installation
No Description Q’ty
Pro C5200S Pro C5210S
10 Cloth - DF Exposure Glass 1 1
11 Cloth Holder 1 1
12 Power Cord Protection Plate 1 1
13 Screw - M3 x 6 1 1
14 Leveling Shoes 4 4
15 Power Cord 1 1
16 Tube Type Lamp 1 1
17 Operation Panel Arm Guide Plate 1 1
18 Operation Panel Arm 1 1
19 Operation Panel Post Lower Cover 1 1
20 Operation Panel Post Front Cover 1 1
21 Operation Panel Post Rear Cover 1 1
22 Operation Panel Arm Upper Cover 1 1
23 Tapping Screw - 3 x 6 28 28
24 Screw Cover 5 5
25 Operation Panel Rear Cover 1 1
26 Guide Sheet 1 1
37
2.Installation
38
2.Installation
39
2.Installation
5. Open the feed cover [A] and remove the protection sheet.
6. Open the ADF [A] and release the lever to open the white board. Then remove the protection
sheet.
7. Open the tandem tray [A] and remove the filament tape at the duplex unit [B].
40
2.Installation
When unpacking the machine, the ITB separation lever is not yet attached to the correct location. Be
sure to attach the lever when installing the machine.
After transporting the machine, the load on the front part of the machine may cause the drawer unit to
become stuck, making it impossible to draw it out.
[A] (Normal): When the drawer unit is pulled, the lock mechanism is lifted and the drawer unit is
unlocked.
[B] (Abnormal): The drawer unit is stuck.
If this happens, push the drawer unit in and try pulling it out again.
Also, please note that when the power is turned ON, the drawer unit will be pulled in automatically, and
this will solve the problem.
41
2.Installation
1. Open the toner supply unit front cover [A], and remove the ITB separation lever [B].
42
2.Installation
• Pushing the drawer unit back into the machine allows you to close the guide plate [A]
of the paper exit and duplex unit after removing the drawer unit cover.
• Make sure to hold down the lock lever [A] when pulling out the drawer unit. The
drawer unit is locked in place by this lever.
5. Remove the ITB cleaning intake fan [A] along with the duct.
43
2.Installation
Do not remove the screw [B] below the toner supply unit fixing screw [A] because it is used to fix
the faceplate.
44
2.Installation
8. Attach the ITB separation lever [A] horizontally from the right side of the machine.
10. Return the toner supply unit to the machine and secure it with the screws.
11. Attach the ITB cleaning intake fan and drawer unit cover
• When you install the standard operation panel, follow the instructions in this section.
45
2.Installation
• When you install the smart operation panel, follow the instructions in Smart Operation Panel
Type S6 (D3C9) (Pro C5200S/C5210S Only).
1. Attach the arm stay [A] for the operation panel.
Position the hook of the operation panel arm [A] over the arm stay [B].
46
2.Installation
3. Route the harness [B] around the operation panel arm [A].
4. Attach the the rear cover [B], and then attach the front cover [A].
47
2.Installation
7. Attach the operation panel [A], fitting it on the hooks of the operation panel arm [B].
48
2.Installation
49
2.Installation
11. Attach the screw cover [B] to the rear cover [A].
12. Attach the arm upper cover [A] and the screw covers [B].
50
2.Installation
When attaching the operator call light, be careful not to pinch the harness. Fix the light after
checking visually from the front and back.
51
2.Installation
TCRU/ORU Contracts
When a TCRU/ORU user removes the PCDU from the machine, they must use the caps (x 4) to
prevent developer from spilling. When installing the machine, attach the caps [A] to the clamping
positions shown below.
Store the caps [A] (x 4) in the service pocket for the operating instructions. Use them during
maintenance if needed.
On a newly delivered machine, the factory SP sheet is located on the exposure glass.
52
2.Installation
Open the tandem tray [A], and remove the paper set sheet [B]. Confirm that the factory SP sheet [C] is
stored inside.
1. Prepare the ADF paper set decal [A] and ADF caution decal ([B] or [C]).
53
2.Installation
3. Attach the ADF paper set decal [A] in the indentation in the ADF.
4. According to the paper that will be used by the customer, select and attach the following decals to
the 1st tray, 2nd tray and 3rd tray.
• If the machine is not leveled, the tilt of the machine reduces the accuracy in side-to-side
registration.
• The front and rear side of the machine must be less than 5 mm (0.2") away from level.
1. Place the four shoes [A] below the bolts [B] under each corner of the machine.
2. Turn the nuts [B] to lower the bolt until the bolts reach the leveling shoes [A].
Example below: Front side
54
2.Installation
4. Adjust the machine level until the machine is less than 5mm from level (measure from left-to-right).
• When the right side of the machine is lower: Lower the nuts of the right side of the machine
(front and rear) to lift the right side of the machine.
• When the left side of the machine is lower: Lower the nuts of the left side of the machine (front
and rear) to lift the left side of the machine.
55
2.Installation
5. Open the ADF, and then place the level [A] along the side.
6. Adjust the machine level until the machine is less than 5mm from level (measure from front-to-
rear).
• When the front side of the machine is lower: Lower the nuts of the front side of the machine
(left and right) to lift the front of the machine.
• When the rear side of the machine is lower: Lower the nuts of the rear side of the machine (left
and right) to lift the rear of the machine.
Installing the Securing Bracket to Prevent the Power Cord from Falling Off
1. Install the securing bracket [A] to prevent the power cord from falling off.
• Be careful when setting the toner cartridges because the toner cartridges have different
shapes, and the cartridge may be damaged if you try to force a cartridge into the wrong
56
2.Installation
4. Set each color toner cartridge. Push the toner cartridge until it locks into place.
Executing DEMS
1. Check that there are no clamps or other parts that you forgot to remove. Then, plug the power cord
into the power source.
2. Turn ON the main power.
If you want to install any options, install them using the installation procedure before doing the
procedure below.
1. Switch the machine to copier mode.
2. Make sure that there is A3 or DLT paper in one of the trays.
3. Put a "Color Chart C-5" on the exposure glass.
4. Select full color mode and print one copy of the chart.
5. Check the results of the copy with the customer.
From this model, the file format "mqp" is changed to "fwu", which is generally used for firmware for
RICOH products.
This change allows you to do paper library data installation with the same procedure for other firmware
update. Refer to Update procedure for details.
This table describes the methods for backing up and restoring Paper Library data.
58
2.Installation
How to back up and restore Custom Paper Library/Saved Paper Library in Adjustment
Settings for Skilled Operators
1. Insert the SD card into the SD card slot on the operation panel.
2. Tap [User Tools], and then tap [Adjustment Settings for Skilled Operators].
3. Tap [05: Machine Maintenance].
4. Tap [0703: Backup / Restore Custom Paper Data].
5. Tap [Back Up Saved Paper Library], [Back Up Custom Paper Settings], or [Restore Custom Paper
Settings].
The machine contains the Security functions (Data Overwrite Security and HDD Encryption) in the
controller board.
If you are installing a new machine, it is recommended to activate the Data Overwrite Security and HDD
Encryption by selecting "Format All Data" from “System Settings” on the operation panel.
• This method is recommended because there is no user data on the hard drive yet (Address
Book data, image data, etc.).
If the customer wishes to activate the Data Overwrite Security and HDD Encryption unit on a machine
that is already running, it is recommended to activate the unit by selecting "All Data" from “System
Settings” on the operation panel.
• Selecting "All Data" will preserve the data that has already been saved to the HDD. (If "Format
All Data" is selected, all user data saved to the HDD up to that point will be erased).
Immediately after encryption is enabled, the encryption setting process will take several minutes to
complete before you can begin using the machine.
59
2.Installation
• If encryption is enabled after data has been stored on the HDD, or of the encryption key is
changed, this process can take up to three and a half hours or more.
The machine cannot be operated while data is being encrypted.
Once the encryption process begins, it cannot be stopped.
Make sure that the machine's main power is not turned off while encryption is in progress.
If the machine's main power is turned off while encryption is in progress, the HDD will be damaged and
all data on it will be unusable.
Print the encryption key and keep the encryption key (which is printed as a paper sheet).
Keep the encryption key in a safe place. If the encryption key is lost and cannot be printed, the
controller board, HDD and NVRAM must all be replaced at the same time.
Installation Procedure
Icon This icon is lit when there is temporary data to be overwritten, and blinks
[1] during overwriting.
9. Check the display and make sure that the overwrite erase icon appears.
10. Check the overwrite erase icon.
The icon [1] is lit when there is temporary data to be overwritten, and blinks during overwriting.
The icon [2] is lit when there is no temporary data to be overwritten.
The Auto Erase Memory function can be enabled by the following procedure.
1. Log in as the machine administrator from the control panel.
2. Press the [User Tools] icon.
3. Press [Machine Features].
4. Press [System Settings].
5. Press [Administrator Tools].
6. Press [Next] three times.
61
2.Installation
8. Press [On].
9. Select the method of overwriting.
If you select [NSA] or [DoD], proceed to step 12.
If you select [Random Numbers], proceed to step 10.
10. Press [Change].
11. Enter the number of times that you want to overwrite using the number keys, and then press [#].
12. Press [OK]. Auto Erase Memory is set.
13. Log out.
14. Check the display and make sure that the overwrite erase icon appears.
15. Check the overwrite erase icon (see the bottom right of the following screenshot).
The icon [1] is lit when there is temporary data to be overwritten, and blinks during overwriting.
The icon [2] is lit when there is no temporary data to be overwritten.
Icon This icon is lit when there is temporary data to be overwritten, and blinks
[1] during overwriting.
62
2.Installation
HDD Encryption
Installation Procedure
When setting up encryption, specify whether to start encryption after deleting data (initialize) or encrypt
and retain existing data. If data is retained, it may take some time to encrypt it.
1. Turn ON the main power.
2. Log in as the machine administrator from the control panel.
3. Press the [User Tools] icon.
4. Press [Machine Features].
5. Press [System Settings].
63
2.Installation
9. Press [Encrypt].
10. Select the data to be carried over to the hard disk and not be reset.
To carry all of the data over to the hard disk, select [All Data].
To carry over only the machine settings data, select [File System Data Only].
To reset all of the data, select [Format All Data].
11. Select the backup method.
If you have selected [Save to SD Card], load an SD card into the media slot on the side of the
control panel and press [OK] to back up the machine's data encryption key.
64
2.Installation
If you have selected [Print on Paper], press the [Start] key to print out the machine's data
encryption key.
12. Press [OK].
65
2.Installation
6. Confirm whether the encryption has been completed or not on this display.
Use the following procedure to print the key again if it has been lost or misplaced.
1. Press the [User Tools] icon.
2. Press [Machine Features].
3. Press [System Settings].
4. Press [Administrator Tools].
5. Press [Machine Data Encryption Settings].
If this item is not visible, press [Next] to display more settings.
6. Press [Print Encryption Key].
66
2.Installation
The encryption key is printed out as a sheet of paper like the example shown above.
Please instruct the customer to keep it in a safe place.
The encryption key can be backed up. Select whether to save it to an SD card or to print it.
The encryption key is required for data recovery if the machine malfunctions. Be sure to store the
encryption key safely for retrieving backup data.
1. Log in as the machine administrator from the control panel.
2. Press the [User Tools] icon.
3. Press [Machine Features].
4. Press [System Settings].
5. Press [Administrator Tools].
6. Press [Next] three times.
7. Press [Machine Data Encryption Settings].
67
2.Installation
Ask an Administrator to enter the encryption key. The key has already been printed out by the user
and may have been saved in the "key_xxxxxxxxxxx.txt" file. (The function of back-up the encryption
key to the SD card directly is provided 11A products or later.)
68
2.Installation
The machine will automatically restore the encryption key to the flash memory on the controller
board.
10. Turn OFF the main power when the machine has returned to normal status.
11. Remove the SD card from SD card slot 2.
How to do a forced start up with no encryption key
If the encryption key back-up has been lost, follow the procedure below to do a forced start-up.
69
2.Installation
SP descriptions
Operating Conditions:
• ARFU requires connection to the Internet. Be sure to get permission from the customer before
setting ARFU up. Otherwise, it may cause an incident.
• ARFU is available only for machines that contain a HDD. If the machine does not have a HDD,
an option HDD must be installed.
• The connection is one-way, so the user’s data cannot be accessed from the firmware server.
Procedure:
70
2.Installation
To download the firmware only using SFU (Smart Firmware Update), and not by ARFU, specify the
settings as follows:
- SP5-886-111(Auto Update Setting) to "0 (OFF)"
- SP5-886-115 (SFU Auto Download Setting) to "1 (ON)"
3. Check if one of the following messages appears: "Will you download the latest package Ver *** and
update?" or "The installed package is the latest version.".
If the message appears, it is possible to execute ARFU. Press “No” and close SP mode to
complete the configuration.
The update will run immediately if you press “Yes” at the message "Will you download the latest
package Ver *** and update?" The update cannot be canceled if it is run by SFU. (The update can
be canceled if ARFU is used.)
SP5-886-116 (Auto Update Prohibit Term Setting) displays the scheduled date and time of the next
ARFU.
If error code 71: [Network connection error] appears when you click “Execute update”, see
troubleshooting below.
Ask the customer for the prohibited times and days of the week for ARFU execution and set the
following as needed. The default prohibited time is from 9 a.m. to 5 p.m. and there is no prohibited day.
71
2.Installation
They can be specified also via Web Image Monitor if logged in as the machine administrator from the
device if SP5-886-111(Auto Update Setting) is set to "1 (ON)". For details, see Specifying the Time and
Day of the Week to Prohibit Updating via Web Image Monitor.
If error code 71: [Network connection error] appears when you click [Firmware update] > [Update] >
[Execute update] in SP mode, check the following.
• 4-1. IPv4 address, Subnet mask of the machine and Gateway IPv4 address
• 4-2. IPv4 address of the DNS server
• 4-3. Proxy server settings
• 4-4. Encryption level setting SP
4-1. IPv4 address, Subnet mask of the machine and Gateway IPv4 address
Check the machine’s IPv4 address, subnet mask, and gateway IPv4 address.
(In User Tools > Machine Features > System Settings > Interface Settings)
72
2.Installation
73
2.Installation
If access to the external server is restricted, request the network administrator (customer) to permit the
following FQDN name for communication.- FQDN: p-rfu-ds2.support.ricoh.com
They can be specified also via Web Image Monitor if logged in as the machine administrator from the
device if SP5-886-111(Auto Update Setting) is set to "1(ON)". For details, see Specifying the Time and
Day of the Week to Prohibit Updating via Web Image Monitor.
4-4. Encryption level setting SP
Check SP5-816-087 (Remote Service: CERT:Macro Ver) and make sure the encryption level is [2]:
2048 bit.
Make sure to check the conditions before changing the encryption level and do the corresponding
workaround. ARFU uses the same certificate as @Remote to communicate with the Global Server. This
may cause failure in connecting with the Center Server, if the device is to be installed in the following
conditions.
74
2.Installation
Conditions
1) Customer uses RC Gate Type BN1.
RC Gate Type BN1 does not support 2048 bit encryption level communication with Ricoh devices
(HTTPS Managed device). Therefore, the device cannot be registered under RC Gate Type BN 1.
2) Ricoh device (HTTPS Managed) that supports only 512 bit encryption level is registered as an
external appliance.
Only one encryption level can be set for an external appliance for its communication with imaging
devices. If a 512 bit encryption level Ricoh device (HTTPS Managed) is registered, the external
appliance as well as other devices must also use 512 bit encryption even if 2048 bit encryption is
supported on those devices.
Workaround
For Condition 1:
Advise your customer to change to the latest appliance that supports 2048 bit encryption level
communication.
For Condition 2:
1. Manage the device with embedded RC Gate (2048 bit)
2. Exclude non-supported devices (i.e., those devices that cannot be changed from 512-bit to 2048-bit)
from the external appliances, then change the encryption level of external appliances and all managed
devices (from 512 bit to 2048 bit).
Specifying the Time and Day of the Week to Prohibit Updating via Web Image Monitor
75
2.Installation
Turn the main power OFF and back ON again after setting SP5-886-111 (AutoUpdateSetting) to "1
(ON)". "Auto Firmware Update" will appear in the menu list of Web Image Monitor.
5. Specify the times and days of the week to prohibit updating.
Select the check boxes of the applicable days of the week to prohibit updating on that day
1. Turn OFF the main power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the main machine.
2. Close all the doors and trays that can be opened and closed, and then secure them in place with
shipping tape.
76
Moving the finishers
SR4120
SR4130
2.Installation
3. Make sure to follow all the precautions listed below when moving the machine. This is to prevent
the machine from being damaged and the drawer unit from coming out.
• Do not put a load on the ADF
• When moving the machine, push the machine instead of pulling the machine. Pulling the
machine may cause damage to the covers.
• When pushing the machine, push the upper side of the machine in the areas marked with red
rectangles below. If you move the machine over an uneven surface, insert your hands under
the machine at the places marked with red rectangles below, and then lift the machine slightly
to get over the uneven surface.
• When you move the machine, face the left or right side of the machine toward the direction of
movement. Then, push the machine forward at a slow walking speed. Go slower if there are
any uneven areas on the floor.
• However, if you cannot face the left or right side forward, move the machine with the front
side facing forward (in the direction you are moving).
• Do not face the rear side of the machine toward the direction of movement. This is because if
the floor is inclined upward, the trays and drawer unit may come out.
• Do not push or lift the locations marked with red rectangles below. You may damage
77
2.Installation
the machine.
• After transporting the machine, the load on the front part of the machine may cause
the drawer unit to become stuck, making it impossible to pull it out.
• [A] (Normal): When the drawer unit is pulled, the lock mechanism is lifted and the
drawer unit is unlocked.
• [B] (Abnormal): The drawer unit is stuck.
• If this happens, push the drawer unit in and try pulling it out again.
• Also, please note that when the power is turned ON, the drawer unit will be
pulled in automatically, and this will solve the problem.
78
2.Installation
In order to increase the security of the MFP, and to ensure that the customer sets the administrator
password, an administrator set/change prompt display is shown at the first power-up.
Overview
• When the customers set the administrator/supervisor login password, the display disappears and
the home display will appear. The customers, however, can erase this screen with the following
procedure in the case that they think there is no need to set the password.
1. On the Program/Change Administrator screen, press [Change] next to Supervisor and then touch
[OK] without inputting any password.
2. Touch [OK] again when the Confirm password display shows up.
3. For Administrator 1, do the same procedure as steps 1 and 2.
4. Press the [OK] button, and then turn the power OFF/ON.
SP5-755-002 (Display Setting: Hide Administrator Password Change Scrn) allows you to skip this
screen temporarily and continue the installation procedure without setting an administrator password.
However, the Program/Change Administrator screen appears every time you turn the power OFF/ON, if
the password is not set.
For how to enter SP mode, see the note at the end of the Password Setting Procedure.
For more details about this security issue, see "Notes on Using Multi-Function Printers Safely" supplied
with the MFP.
When Supervisor / Administrator 1-4 passwords are configured via network, the "Change Supervisor
79
2.Installation
To enter the SP mode, there are two ways to display the number keyboard on screen;
1. Press the "Document Server" icon.
2. Press and hold the button [A] located at the left side of the operation panel and "Check Status [B]" at
80
2.Installation
81
2.Installation
No Description Q’ty
MP MP
C6503 C8003
1 Service Pocket 1 1
2 Rivet - Dia5 2 2
3 Developer Funnel 1 1
4 Drum Holder (front) 1 1
5 Drum Holder (rear) 1 1
6 Jig for Development Unit 1 1
7 Development Cap 4 4
8 Jig for Paper Transfer Belt Unit 1 1
9 PCDU Holder 1 1
10 Cloth - DF Exposure Glass 1 1
11 Cloth Holder 1 1
12 Power Cord Protection Plate 1 1
13 Screw - M3 x 6 1 1
14 Leveling Shoes 4 4
15 Power Cord 1 1
16 Guide Sheet 1 1
17 DECAL:SIZE INDICATION:PAPER TRAY:OFFICE 1 1
18 DECAL:CAUTION CHART:PAPER SET DIRECTION 3 3
19 DECAL:BLUETOOTH:CHEETAH-G2 1 1
20 IC:NFC_TAG:MN63Y3212NB 1 1
21 PLATE:LOGOTYPE:RIC 1 1
22 SHEET:LOGO 1 1
- SAFETY INFORMATION SHEET (EU only) 1 1
- DECAL:PULL OUT:SET:CAUTION:MANY LANGUAGES (EU and Asia 1 1
only)
- DECAL:CAUTION:ORIGINAL:MANY LANGUAGES (EU only) 1 1
- DECAL:SET:ORIGINAL TABLE (EU only) 1 1
82
2.Installation
83
2.Installation
84
2.Installation
5. Open the feed cover [A] and remove the protection sheet.
6. Open the ADF [A] and release the lever to open the white board. Then remove the protection
sheet.
7. Open the tandem tray [A] and remove the filament tape at the duplex unit [B].
85
2.Installation
Removing the ITB Retainer and Attaching the ITB Separation Lever
When unpacking the machine, the ITB separation lever is not yet attached to the correct location. Be
sure to attach the lever when installing the machine.
1. Open the toner supply unit front cover [A], and remove the ITB separation lever [B].
86
2.Installation
• Pushing the drawer unit back into the machine allows you to close the guide plate [A]
of the paper exit and duplex unit after removing the drawer unit cover.
• Make sure to hold down the lock lever [A] when pulling out the drawer unit. The
drawer unit is locked in place by this lever.
87
2.Installation
5. Remove the ITB cleaning intake fan [A] along with the duct.
• Do not remove the screw [B] below the toner supply unit fixing screw [A] because it is
88
2.Installation
9. Pull out the toner supply unit [A], and remove it from the slide rail with the handles on the left and
right.
• When attaching the toner supply unit [A] to the machine, the hooks of the toner supply unit
89
2.Installation
11. Attach the ITB separation lever [A] horizontally from the right side of the machine.
90
2.Installation
12. Turn the ITB separation lever [A] clockwise until it stops.
13. Return the toner supply unit to the machine and secure it with the screws.
14. Attach the ITB cleaning intake fan and drawer unit cover
On a newly delivered machine, the factory SP sheet is located on the exposure glass.
Open the tandem tray [A], and remove the paper set sheet [B]. Confirm that the factory SP sheet [C] is
stored inside.
1. Prepare the ADF paper set decal [A] and ADF caution decal ([B] or [C]).
91
2.Installation
3. Attach the ADF paper set decal [A] in the indentation in the ADF.
4. According to the paper that will be used by the customer, select and attach the following decals to
the 1st tray, 2nd tray and 3rd tray.
92
2.Installation
• If the machine is not leveled, the tilt of the machine reduces the accuracy in side-to-side
registration.
• The front and rear side of the machine must be less than 5 mm (0.2") away from level.
1. Place the four leveling shoes [A] below the bolts [B] under each corner of the machine.
2. Turn the nuts [B] to lower the bolt until the bolts reach the leveling shoes [A].
Example below: Front side
4. Adjust the machine level until the machine is less than 5mm from level (measure from left-to-right).
93
2.Installation
• When the right side of the machine is lower: Lower the nuts of the right side of the machine
(front and rear) to lift the right side of the machine.
• When the left side of the machine is lower: Lower the nuts of the left side of the machine (front
and rear) to lift the left side of the machine.
5. Open the ADF, and then place the level [A] along the side.
6. Adjust the machine level until the machine is less than 5mm from level (measure from front-to-
rear).
• When the front side of the machine is lower: Lower the nuts of the front side of the machine
(left and right) to lift the front of the machine.
• When the rear side of the machine is lower: Lower the nuts of the rear side of the machine (left
and right) to lift the rear of the machine.
Installing the Securing Bracket to Prevent the Power Cord from Falling Off
1. Install the securing bracket [A] to prevent the power cord from falling off.
94
2.Installation
• Be careful when setting the toner cartridges because the toner cartridges have different
shapes, and the cartridge may be damaged if you try to force a cartridge into the wrong
place. The position of the toner cartridges is Y, M, C, K from the left.
4. Set each color toner cartridge. Push the toner cartridge until it locks into place.
95
2.Installation
• Make sure to remove the retainer [A] before installing the K toner cartridge.
1. Check that there are no clamps etc. that you forgot to remove, and plug the power cord into its
power source.
2. Turn the main power switch ON. RTB 33: New step added after step 2.
3. Tap [User Tools], and execute Auto Color Calibration and Adjusting the Color Registration.
Auto Color Calibration (ACC) (Adjustment 001: ACC (Automatic Color Calibration))
If you want to install any options, install them using the installation procedure before doing the
procedure below.
1. Switch the machine to copier mode.
2. Make sure that there is A3 or DLT paper in one of the trays.
3. Put a "Color Chart C-5" on the exposure glass.
4. Select full color mode and print one copy of the chart.
5. Check the results of the copy with the customer.
96
2.Installation
• The pressure release bracket [A] of the tray bottom plate is set to 81/2 size at the factory. For
MP C6503/C8003, do not change the position of the bracket even if using A4 size paper. (The
bracket is fixed to 81/2 size).
The machine contains the Security functions (Data Overwrite Security and HDD Encryption) in the
controller board.
If you are installing a new machine, it is recommended to activate the Data Overwrite Security and HDD
Encryption by selecting "Format All Data" from “System Settings” on the operation panel.
• This method is recommended because there is no user data on the hard drive yet (Address
Book data, image data, etc.).
If the customer wishes to activate the Data Overwrite Security and HDD Encryption unit on a machine
that is already running, it is recommended to activate the unit by selecting "All Data" from “System
Settings” on the operation panel.
• Selecting "All Data" will preserve the data that has already been saved to the HDD. (If "Format
All Data" is selected, all user data saved to the HDD up to that point will be erased).
Immediately after encryption is enabled, the encryption setting process will take several minutes to
complete before you can begin using the machine.
97
2.Installation
• If encryption is enabled after data has been stored on the HDD, or of the encryption key is
changed, this process can take up to three and a half hours or more.
The machine cannot be operated while data is being encrypted.
Once the encryption process begins, it cannot be stopped.
Make sure that the machine's main power is not turned off while encryption is in progress.
If the machine's main power is turned off while encryption is in progress, the HDD will be damaged and
all data on it will be unusable.
Print the encryption key and keep the encryption key (which is printed as a paper sheet).
Keep the encryption key in a safe place. If the encryption key is lost and cannot be printed, the
controller board, HDD and NVRAM must all be replaced at the same time.
Installation Procedure
Icon This icon is lit when there is temporary data to be overwritten, and blinks
[1] during overwriting.
9. Check the display and make sure that the overwrite erase icon appears.
10. Check the overwrite erase icon.
The icon [1] is lit when there is temporary data to be overwritten, and blinks during overwriting.
The icon [2] is lit when there is no temporary data to be overwritten.
The Auto Erase Memory function can be enabled by the following procedure.
1. Log in as the machine administrator from the control panel.
2. Press the [User Tools] icon.
3. Press [Machine Features].
4. Press [System Settings].
5. Press [Administrator Tools].
6. Press [Next] three times.
99
2.Installation
8. Press [On].
9. Select the method of overwriting.
If you select [NSA] or [DoD], proceed to step 12.
If you select [Random Numbers], proceed to step 10.
10. Press [Change].
11. Enter the number of times that you want to overwrite using the number keys, and then press [#].
12. Press [OK]. Auto Erase Memory is set.
13. Log out.
14. Check the display and make sure that the overwrite erase icon appears.
15. Check the overwrite erase icon.
The icon [1] is lit when there is temporary data to be overwritten, and blinks during overwriting.
The icon [2] is lit when there is no temporary data to be overwritten.
Icon This icon is lit when there is temporary data to be overwritten, and blinks
[1] during overwriting.
100
2.Installation
HDD Encryption
Installation Procedure
When setting up encryption, specify whether to start encryption after deleting data (initialize) or encrypt
and retain existing data. If data is retained, it may take some time to encrypt it.
1. Turn ON the main power.
2. Log in as the machine administrator from the control panel.
3. Press the [User Tools] icon.
4. Press [Machine Features].
5. Press [System Settings].
101
2.Installation
9. Press [Encrypt].
10. Select the data to be carried over to the hard disk and not be reset.
To carry all of the data over to the hard disk, select [All Data].
To carry over only the machine settings data, select [File System Data Only].
To reset all of the data, select [Format All Data].
11. Select the backup method.
If you have selected [Save to SD Card], load an SD card into the media slot on the side of the
control panel and press [OK] to back up the machine's data encryption key.
102
2.Installation
If you have selected [Print on Paper], press the [Start] key to print out the machine's data
encryption key.
12. Press [OK].
103
2.Installation
6. Confirm whether the encryption has been completed or not on this display.
Use the following procedure to print the key again if it has been lost or misplaced.
1. Press the [User Tools] icon.
2. Press [Machine Features].
3. Press [System Settings].
4. Press [Administrator Tools].
5. Press [Machine Data Encryption Settings].
If this item is not visible, press [Next] to display more settings.
6. Press [Print Encryption Key].
104
2.Installation
The encryption key is printed out as a sheet of paper like the example shown above.
Please instruct the customer to keep it in a safe place.
The encryption key can be backed up. Select whether to save it to an SD card or to print it.
The encryption key is required for data recovery if the machine malfunctions. Be sure to store the
encryption key safely for retrieving backup data.
1. Log in as the machine administrator from the control panel.
2. Press the [User Tools] icon.
3. Press [Machine Features].
4. Press [System Settings].
5. Press [Administrator Tools].
6. Press [Next] three times.
7. Press [Machine Data Encryption Settings].
105
2.Installation
Ask an Administrator to enter the encryption key. The key has already been printed out by the user
and may have been saved in the "key_xxxxxxxxxxx.txt" file. (The function of back-up the encryption
key to the SD card directly is provided 11A products or later.)
106
2.Installation
The machine will automatically restore the encryption key to the flash memory on the controller
board.
10. Turn OFF the main power when the machine has returned to normal status.
11. Remove the SD card from SD card slot 2.
How to do a forced start up with no encryption key
If the encryption key back-up has been lost, follow the procedure below to do a forced start-up.
107
2.Installation
SP descriptions
Operating Conditions:
• ARFU requires connection to the Internet. Be sure to get permission from the customer before
setting ARFU up. Otherwise, it may cause an incident.
• ARFU is available only for machines that contain a HDD. If the machine does not have a HDD,
an option HDD must be installed.
• The connection is one-way, so the user’s data cannot be accessed from the firmware server.
Procedure:
108
2.Installation
To download the firmware only using SFU (Smart Firmware Update), and not by ARFU, specify the
settings as follows:
- SP5-886-111(Auto Update Setting) to "0 (OFF)"
- SP5-886-115 (SFU Auto Download Setting) to "1 (ON)"
3. Check if one of the following messages appears: "Will you download the latest package Ver *** and
update?" or "The installed package is the latest version.".
If the message appears, it is possible to execute ARFU. Press “No” and close SP mode to
complete the configuration.
The update will run immediately if you press “Yes” at the message "Will you download the latest
package Ver *** and update?" The update cannot be canceled if it is run by SFU. (The update can
be canceled if ARFU is used.)
SP5-886-116 (Auto Update Prohibit Term Setting) displays the scheduled date and time of the next
ARFU.
If error code 71: [Network connection error] appears when you click “Execute update”, see
troubleshooting below.
Ask the customer for the prohibited times and days of the week for ARFU execution and set the
following as needed. The default prohibited time is from 9 a.m. to 5 p.m. and there is no prohibited day.
109
2.Installation
They can be specified also via Web Image Monitor if logged in as the machine administrator from the
device if SP5-886-111(Auto Update Setting) is set to "1 (ON)". For details, see Specifying the Time and
Day of the Week to Prohibit Updating via Web Image Monitor.
If error code 71: [Network connection error] appears when you click [Firmware update] > [Update] >
[Execute update] in SP mode, check the following.
• 4-1. IPv4 address, Subnet mask of the machine and Gateway IPv4 address
• 4-2. IPv4 address of the DNS server
• 4-3. Proxy server settings
• 4-4. Encryption level setting SP
4-1. IPv4 address, Subnet mask of the machine and Gateway IPv4 address
Check the machine’s IPv4 address, subnet mask, and gateway IPv4 address.
(In User Tools > Machine Features > System Settings > Interface Settings)
110
2.Installation
111
2.Installation
If access to the external server is restricted, request the network administrator (customer) to permit the
following FQDN name for communication.- FQDN: p-rfu-ds2.support.ricoh.com
They can be specified also via Web Image Monitor if logged in as the machine administrator from the
device if SP5-886-111(Auto Update Setting) is set to "1(ON)". For details, see Specifying the Time and
Day of the Week to Prohibit Updating via Web Image Monitor.
4-4. Encryption level setting SP
Check SP5-816-087 (Remote Service: CERT:Macro Ver) and make sure the encryption level is [2]:
2048 bit.
Make sure to check the conditions before changing the encryption level and do the corresponding
workaround. ARFU uses the same certificate as @Remote to communicate with the Global Server. This
may cause failure in connecting with the Center Server, if the device is to be installed in the following
conditions.
112
2.Installation
Conditions
1) Customer uses RC Gate Type BN1.
RC Gate Type BN1 does not support 2048 bit encryption level communication with Ricoh devices
(HTTPS Managed device). Therefore, the device cannot be registered under RC Gate Type BN 1.
2) Ricoh device (HTTPS Managed) that supports only 512 bit encryption level is registered as an
external appliance.
Only one encryption level can be set for an external appliance for its communication with imaging
devices. If a 512 bit encryption level Ricoh device (HTTPS Managed) is registered, the external
appliance as well as other devices must also use 512 bit encryption even if 2048 bit encryption is
supported on those devices.
Workaround
For Condition 1:
Advise your customer to change to the latest appliance that supports 2048 bit encryption level
communication.
For Condition 2:
1. Manage the device with embedded RC Gate (2048 bit)
2. Exclude non-supported devices (i.e., those devices that cannot be changed from 512-bit to 2048-bit)
from the external appliances, then change the encryption level of external appliances and all managed
devices (from 512 bit to 2048 bit).
Specifying the Time and Day of the Week to Prohibit Updating via Web Image Monitor
113
2.Installation
Turn the main power OFF and back ON again after setting SP5-886-111 (AutoUpdateSetting) to "1
(ON)". "Auto Firmware Update" will appear in the menu list of Web Image Monitor.
5. Specify the times and days of the week to prohibit updating.
Select the check boxes of the applicable days of the week to prohibit updating on that day
1. Turn OFF the main power switch, and then unplug the power cable from the main machine.
2. Close all the doors and trays that can be opened and closed, and then secure them in place with
shipping tape.
114
Moving the finishers
SR4120
SR4130
2.Installation
3. Make sure to follow all the precautions listed below when moving the machine. This is to prevent
the machine from being damaged and the drawer unit from coming out.
• Do not put a load on the ADF
• When moving the machine, push the machine instead of pulling the machine. Pulling the
machine may cause damage of the covers.
• When pushing the machine, push the upper side of the machine in the areas marked with red
rectangles below. If you move the machine over an uneven surface, insert your hands under
the machine at the places marked with red rectangles below, and then lift the machine slightly
to get over the uneven surface.
• When you move the machine, face the left or right side of the machine toward the direction of
movement. Then, push the machine forward at a slow walking speed. Go slower if there are
any uneven areas on the floor.
• However, if you cannot face the left or right side forward, move the machine with the front
side facing forward (in the direction you are moving).
• Do not face the rear side of the machine toward the direction of movement. This is because if
the floor is inclined upward, the trays and drawer unit may come out.
• Do not push or lift the location marked with red rectangles below. You may damage
115
2.Installation
the machine.
• After transporting the machine, the load on the front part of the machine may cause
the drawer unit to become stuck, making it impossible to draw it out.
• [A] (Normal): When the drawer unit is pulled, the lock mechanism is lifted and the
drawer unit is unlocked.
• [B] (Abnormal): The drawer unit is stuck.
• If the drawer unit is stuck, push the drawer unit in and try pulling it out again.
• Also, please note that when the power is turned ON, the drawer unit will be
pulled in automatically, and this will solve the problem.
116
2.Installation
Accessories
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following list.
No Description Q'ty
1 Operation Panel 1
2 Arm Bracket 1
3 Hinge 1
4 Operation Panel Rear Upper Cover 1
5 Operation Panel Rear Lower Cover 1
6 Tapping Screw - 3x6 18
- EMC Address Decal 1
- Caution Chart (CE) 1
- NFC Tag 1
- Caution Chart (CAN) 1
- Manual: Start Guide 1
- Caution: Smart Operation Panel 1
- Caution: NFC Tag 1
- Caution: FCC 1
Installation Procedure
Turn OFF the machine and disconnect the machine power cord before you do this procedure.
117
2.Installation
1. Attach the arm stay [A] for the operation panel, provided with the main machine.
2. Attach the operation panel arm [A], provided with the main machine.
Position the hook of the operation panel arm [A] over the arm stay [B].
118
2.Installation
3. Route the harness [B] around the operation panel arm [A].
4. Attach the the rear cover [B] and the front cover [A], provided with the main machine.
119
2.Installation
8. Place the operation panel [A] on the upper front cover of the main machine with LCD facing down.
120
2.Installation
9. Make sure that DIP switches 3 and 7 of the operation panel [A] are set to ON.
If the DIP switch settings are not correct, the machine will issue SC672.
10. Pass the harness [A] through the cut-out [C] of the arm bracket [B].
11. Connect the harnesses [B] and [C] to the operation panel, and then route them as shown below.
RTB 20
Steps 11 - 13 12. Fix the ground cable [A].
Modified
121
2.Installation
13. Attach the arm bracket [A] to the operation panel, and then fasten the harness [B] with the clamp.
RTB 20
Step 13
modified
14. Attach the operation panel [A], fitting it on the hooks of the hinge [B].
15. Route the harness as shown below.
16. Attach the operation panel rear upper cover [A] and the operation panel rear lower cover [B],
122
2.Installation
17. Attach the arm upper cover [A] and the screw covers [B], provided with the main machine.
18. Attach the arm cover [A], provided with the main machine.
123
2.Installation
19. Attach the screw covers [A], provided with the main machine, on the arm cover [B].
22. Change all the DIP switches [B] on the controller board [A] to OFF.
124
2.Installation
125
2.Installation
Accessories
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following list.
No Description Q'ty
1 Stay 1
2 Rail 1
3 Tapping screws – M3 x 6 2
4 Tapping screws – M4 x 14 2
5 Shoulder screws 2
6 Decal: caution chart: paper set direction 1
7 Decal: LED 1
Installation Procedure
• Always switch the machine off and unplug the machine before doing the following procedure.
1. Remove all tape and retainers from the LCIT.
126
2.Installation
2. Open the vertical transport door [A] and remove the LCIT cover [B].
127
2.Installation
6. Install the rail [A] on the right side of the main machine. (M4 x 14)
• The rail must be standing on the floor. If the screw holes on the LCIT are too high or too
low, and do not overlap the vertical screw slots in the rail, the rubber feet of the rail must
128
2.Installation
129
2.Installation
• When you fasten the rail to the LCIT, the screw holes [B] of the rail need to be in the
same position as the screw holes [A] of the LCIT.
12. Reattach the right cover, and then connect the plug [A] of the LCIT power connector to the side of
130
2.Installation
the machine.
13. Prepare the Decal: caution chart: paper set direction [A].
14. Open the top right cover and attach the decal as shown below.
Select one of the decals according to the paper that will be used by the customer.
131
2.Installation
Pro C5210S/C5200S: Attach the Decal: LED supplied with the LCIT.
MP C8003/C6503: Attach a blank sheet on the paper size decal supplied with the main machine.
• To move down the paper tray, cover the photo sensor with your left hand and press
the bottom plate operation button [A].
By changing the location of the side fence and the rear edge supporting rod, you can switch the paper
size among A4 LEF, B5 LEF, 81/2x11 LEF.
132
2.Installation
2. Change the location of the side fence [A] corresponding to the paper size.
3. Change the location of the rear edge supporting rib [B], on the back of the the top right cover [A],
133
2.Installation
4. Enter the SP mode, and then specify the paper size in SP5-959-003 (A4 LCT: Paper size).
The rail must be standing on the floor. If the screw holes on the LCIT are too high or too low, and do not
overlap the vertical screw slots in the rail, the rubber feet of the rail must be adjusted. Change the
rubber foot positions on the rail before installing the rail.
1. The rubber feet are placed at [A] as shown below.
2. The slotted screw holes in the rail for attaching the rail to the LCIT have a tolerance for the height (-
/+ 2 mm). If you can move the rail up or down within this -/+ 2 mm tolerance so that it is installed
correctly, with the feet on the floor, you do not need to do the following steps.
3. If you cannot install the rail within the -/+ 2 mm height tolerance, change the rubber foot position to
adjust the height of the rail.
• If the screw holes of the machine are above the slotted holes of the rail, change the rubber
134
2.Installation
• If the screw holes of the machine are below the slotted holes of the rail, change the rubber foot
position as shown below.
When changing the rubber foot position, remove the rail bracket [A]. After changing the rubber foot
position, reinstall the rail bracket.
Accessories
No Description Q'ty
2 Heater Harness 1
3 Harness clamp 2
4 Tapping Screw:4x6 2
5 Tapping Screw:4x8 2
6 Tapping Screw - M3x6 2
7 Screw: Polished Round/Spring:M4x8 1
8 Screw: Polished Round/Spring:M3x8 1
Installation
136
2.Installation
2. To move down the paper tray, cover the photo sensor with your left hand and press the bottom
plate operation button [A].
137
2.Installation
4. Close the top right cover to move the paper tray upward. (The paper tray stops in about 30
seconds.)
5. Turn OFF the main power and unplug the machine.
6. Disconnect the LCIT power connector [A] from the machine.
138
2.Installation
10. Slide the LCIT [A] against the main machine, and then remove it from the rail [B].
139
2.Installation
140
2.Installation
141
2.Installation
17. Clamp the heater harness [A] and pass it through the hole.
18. Attach the clamps [A] on the left side of the LCIT.
142
2.Installation
20. Connect the heater bracket cable [A] and the heater harness [B], and fix the ground cable.
21. Remove the heater harness cover [A] from the rear cover.
143
2.Installation
24. Remove the rear lower cover [A] of the main machine.
26. Attach the heater harness [A] and grounding wire [B].
To attach the grounding wire, remove the screw and replace it with the polished round screw M3.
144
2.Installation
28. Set the LCIT [A] on the rail [B], and then slide it towards the main machine.
30. Open the top right cover, and then fasten the rail to the LCIT. (shoulder screws)
When you fasten the rail to the LCIT, the screw holes [B] of the rail must be in the same position as
the screw holes [A] of the LCIT.
145
2.Installation
1. Use the Trimming Area Pattern (SP2-109-003, No. 14) to print the test pattern.
2. Go to SP1-003-007 (Side-to-Side Reg: LCIT).
3. Load paper (A4 LEF) in the LCIT tray, and then copy a couple of sheets.
146
2.Installation
4. Enter the value in SP1-003-007 to adjust the blank margin [A] to 2 mm.
The default value of the SP is 0 mm. Press [+] to increase the margin, and press [-] to reduce it.
You can adjust the value in 0.1 mm intervals.
147
2.Installation
Accessory Check
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following list.
No Description Q'ty
1 Shoes 4
2 Upper Positioning Pins 2
3 Lower Positioning Pin 1
4 Tapping screws – M4 x 8 4
5 Stay 1
6 Decal: caution chart: paper set direction 1
7 Decal: LED 1
8 Decal: transport: cover
9 Decal: misfeed removal: manual feed: 250
- Tapping screws – M3 x 6 2
- Screw: Polished Round/Spring:M3x8 1
Installation Procedure
Turn OFF the machine and disconnect the machine power cord before you do this procedure.
148
2.Installation
2. Open the front door [A] and paper tray unit [B], and remove all tape and retainers from the LCIT.
3. Open the vertical transport door [A] and remove the LCIT cover [B].
149
2.Installation
• Set the embossed side of the stay against the main machine.
6. Remove the connector cover [A] and LCIT connecting cover [B].
150
2.Installation
151
2.Installation
10. Change the orientation of the grounding plate, and then install it as shown below.
152
2.Installation
16. Connect the connection cable [A] and fix the grounding wire [B].
To fix the grounding wire, remove the screw and replace it with the polished round screw M3.
153
2.Installation
20. Set the leveling shoes [A] (front left, front right, rear left, rear right side of the LCIT).
• Align the bottom of the machine paper tray and the bottom of the LCIT front cover [B].
• Adjust the level of the LCIT top surface [C] until it is within ±2.5/1000mm.
154
2.Installation
22. Connect the LCIT interface cable [A] to the LCIT connector of the main machine.
• Push down the lever [A] when opening the bypass unit.
155
2.Installation
24. Prepare the caution decal [A] provided with the LCIT. (Accessories No.9, Decal: misfeed removal:
manual feed: 250)
25. Attach the caution decal to [A] on the bypass tray unit.
• [B]: 2mm
• [C]: 2mm
26. Prepare the sponge decal [A] provided with the LCIT. (Accessories No.8, Decal: transport: cover)
156
2.Installation
• Attach the sponge decal [A] on the corner of the exit cover.
• [B]: 50 mm
• [C]: 65 mm
28. Prepare the Decal: caution chart: paper set direction [A].
29. Draw out the paper tray and attach the decal [A] on the top of the front door.
Select one of the decals according to the paper that will be used by the customer.
157
2.Installation
Pro C5210S/C5200S: Attach the Decal: LED supplied with the LCIT.
MP C8003/C6503: Attach a blank sheet on the paper size decal supplied with the main machine.
1. Open the front cover [A]. Remove the screw [B] and pull the lock plate [C] in the direction indicated
158
2.Installation
2. Disconnect the LCIT from the main machine while pressing the lock plate [D] in the direction
indicated with the arrow.
• Lock plate [D] is located at the rear side of the LCIT frame [E].
159
2.Installation
1. Use the Trimming Area Pattern (SP2-109-003, No. 14) to print the test pattern.
2. Go to SP1-003-007 (Side-to-Side Reg: LCIT).
3. Load paper (A4 LEF) in the LCIT tray, and then copy a couple of sheets.
4. Enter the value in SP1-003-007 to adjust the blank margin [A] to 2 mm.
The default value of the SP is 0 mm. Press [+] to increase the margin, and press [-] to reduce it.
You can adjust the value in 0.1 mm intervals.
160
2.Installation
Accessory Check
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list.
No Description Qty
1 Base Plate 1
2 Inner Bracket 1
3 Outer Bracket 1
4 Tapping Screw M4 X 6 4
Installation Procedure
Always switch the machine off and unplug the machine before doing the following procedure.
1. Open the front door of LCIT RT4050.
161
2.Installation
2. Slide the right cover [A] to the left, and then slide it down to remove it.
162
2.Installation
7. Attach the covers in the following order: Top right cover, top front cover, front left cover, right cover.
8. Attach the outer bracket [A].
163
2.Installation
9. Insert the bosses of the base plate [A] into the holes in the outer bracket [B].
164
2.Installation
Component List
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following illustration and list.
No. Description Q'ty
1. Screw – M3 x 4 4
2. Tapping screws –M3 x 6 3
3. Screw – M3 x 6 1
4. Pin Bracket (for MP C6502/MP C8002/Pro C5100S/Pro C5110S) 1
5. Pin Bracket (for MP C6503/MP C8003/Pro C5200S/Pro C5210S) 1
6. Harness 1
7. Paper Size Decal 1
8. Paper Set Direction Decal 1
- Manual: Installation Procedure: Pin Bracket 1
Installation
• The unit must be connected to a power source that is close to the unit and easily accessible.
• Make sure that the main machine is switched off and that its power cord is disconnected
before doing the following procedure.
1. Remove the stay [A].
165
2.Installation
2. Remove the retainers [B] [C] and the shipping material [D].
3. Check the position of the front and back side fences and make sure that they are set for DLT or A3.
4. If you need to adjust the positions of the side fences for the paper to be loaded in the tray, remove
the front panel [A].
5. Remove the fences and adjust their positions for the paper to be loaded:
[F] Side fence
[G] Back fence
[H] End fence
166
2.Installation
167
2.Installation
10. Push the right tandem tray [A] into the machine.
11. Remove the left tandem tray [A] (left rail: M3 x 8, right rail: M3 x 10).
12. From the left tandem tray, remove the front cover [A].
13. Pull out the right tandem tray [A] then remove it.
168
2.Installation
14. Insert the short connector [A] into the socket inside the machine [B].
15. Using the screw provided in the accessories, attach the pin bracket [A] to the center rail.
16. Using the screws provided in the accessories for the right rail and left rail, install the tray [B] on the
169
2.Installation
right rail [C], center rail [D], and left rail [E].
• Make sure that the pin on the pin bracket passes through the hole in the tray bottom plate.
• Make sure that bosses [A] (two each on the left and right rails) pass through the holes in
the tray. If you close the tray without doing this, it will be impossible to open the tray.
17. Return the factory SP sheet and SD card holder that you removed in Step 9.
170
2.Installation
171
2.Installation
Accessories
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following list.
No. Description Q'ty
1 Tab Sheet Holder 1
2 Decal 1
Installation
2. Check that the paper tray is not being used, and then pull the tray carefully out until it stops.
172
2.Installation
3. Install the tab sheet holder on the end fence of the paper tray.
• When the tab sheet holder is installed correctly, you can hear a clicking noise.
• Load tab stock so that the side with the tab faces the tab sheet holder.
5. Adjust the end fence position so that the tab sheet holder will fit the tab stock.
• When removing the tab stock holder, spread the hook [A] of the tab sheet holder and then
173
2.Installation
174
2.Installation
Accessories
Installation Procedure
175
2.Installation
4. Put the paper feed tray assembly [A] on the bypass tray.
176
2.Installation
6. Put the bosses in the holes [B] of the counter plate [A].
177
2.Installation
178
2.Installation
11. Make two screw holes in the right middle upper cover [A] with a screwdriver or drill.
179
2.Installation
13. Attach the damper assembly [A]. ([B]: M4×20, [C]: M4×14)
14. Close the paper feed tray, so that it is held closed by the magnetic catch.
15. Pull the ring [A] of the damper assembly, and put it in the hole [B] in the paper feed tray assembly.
180
2.Installation
RTB 24
Additional note
181
2.Installation
Component List
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following list.
No. Description Q'ty
1 Cover 1
2 B4/LG frame 1
3 Bottom plate extension 1
4 Rear bracket 1
5 Front bracket 1
6 Harness clamp 1
7 Tapping screws - M4x8 6
8 Tapping bind screws - M4x8 4
182
2.Installation
Installation Procedure
2. Move down the paper tray. To do this, cover the photo sensor with your left hand and press the
bottom plate operation button [A].
3. Move the front side fence [A] and rear side fence [B] to the B4 or LG position.
183
2.Installation
4. Close the upper right cover to move the paper tray up. (The paper tray stops in about 30 seconds.)
5. Switch the machine off and unplug the machine.
6. Disconnect the LCIT power connector from the machine.
7. Remove the right cover of the LCIT. (LCIT RT4020 (D709))
8. Release the LCIT from the main machine.
9. Slide the LCIT [A] against the main machine, and then remove it from the rail [B].
184
2.Installation
12. Install the lower limit sensor bracket [A] at the higher position.
13. Pull the sensor connector wire removed in step 11 through the hole [A] from the left side of the
LCIT.
14. Release the sensor connector wire from the clamp [B].
185
2.Installation
15. Put the sensor connector wire to the right side of the LCIT through the hole [A].
16. Connect the sensor connector wire to the lower limit sensor [A].
17. Attach the harness clamp to the rear of the plate [A]. Use this clamp to hold the sensor connector
wire.
186
2.Installation
20. Attach the front bracket [A] with the beveled corner down.
• If the brackets are not easy to install, lift the bottom plate with your hand.
21. Attach the rear bracket [B] with the beveled corner down.
22. Attach the bottom plate extension [C] with the hex screws.
187
2.Installation
23. Attach the B4/LG frame [A] with the hex screws.
Insert the positioning pin [B] of the B4/LG frame [A] into the hole of the LCIT.
24. Attach the right cover [B].
25. Attach the upper right cover [A] provided with the 8 1/2" x 14" Paper Size Tray Type M2.
26. Install the LCIT on the main machine. (LCIT RT4020 (D709))
27. Plug in and turn ON the machine.
28. Go into the SP mode and do 5-959-003.
29. Input "5" for B4 SEF or "6" for 8.5" x 14" SEF.
188
2.Installation
Accessories
Installation Procedure
189
2.Installation
3. Attach the grounding plate [A] with the screw removed in Step 2.
4. Put the paper feed tray assembly [A] on the bypass tray.
190
2.Installation
6. Put the bosses in the holes [B] of the counter plate [A].
191
2.Installation
192
2.Installation
To use Cover Interposer Tray CI4040, one of the following is also required: Finisher SR4120 or Booklet
Finisher SR4130
Accessories
193
2.Installation
Installation Procedure
• Always switch the machine off and unplug the machine before doing the following procedure.
194
2.Installation
2. Open the finisher front door. Remove the screw [A], and then pull the lock lever [B].
195
2.Installation
196
2.Installation
3. Open the tray, and remove all tape and pieces of cardboard.
197
2.Installation
3. On the right rear inside panel of the finisher [A], fasten one shoulder screw.
4. On the right front post of the finisher [A], fasten the other shoulder screw.
198
2.Installation
5. To avoid damaging the guides [A] on the right side of the unit, elevate the unit with some blocks,
boxes, etc. [B] so it is not flat on the floor.
6. Select the rear tray mounting bracket [A], and then locate its screw holes between the keyholes on
the rear frame.
7. Align the holes, and then fasten the tray mounting bracket to the frame.
199
2.Installation
8. Fasten the other mounting bracket to the front frame at [A] and [B].
9. If the upstream device is the main machine or "Multi-Folding Unit FD4000", proceed to step 10. If
the upstream device is any other option, replace the original guide plate [A] with "GUIDE PLATE:
CONNECTING: LOWER" (item #19 of the accessories).
• With the original guide plate installed, lever [A] will catch the optional device if released for
jam recovery.
1) Release the lever [A].
200
2.Installation
The original guide plate will no longer be used and does not have to be stored.
3) Attach the new entrance guide plate [A] (item #19 of the accessories) to the frame of the cover
interposer.
2) Remove the release paper from the guide sheet [A], and attach the guide sheet to the bottom
side of the upper entrance guide plate [B].
201
2.Installation
[C]: Align the edge of the guide sheet with the edge of the upper entrance guide plate.
[D]: Align the edge of the adhesive tape with the edge of the upper entrance guide plate.
11. On the right side of the finisher, hold the tray unit over the finisher, and then align the hooks of the
mounting brackets with the installed shoulder screws in the finisher.
12. Slowly, lower the tray unit hooks onto the shoulder screws inside the finisher.
• The shoulder screws are located on the front panel [A] and rear panel [B] inside the
202
2.Installation
finisher.
13. Look inside the finisher to confirm that the hook of the rear bracket is seated correctly on the
shoulder screw.
14. Fasten one screw below the Q2 lever to fasten the tray to the frame.
203
2.Installation
16. Fasten one screw to fasten the tray to the frame at the rear.
Extensions
1. Set two screws in the bottom half of the finisher front door [A].
204
2.Installation
3. Set two screws in the top half of the finisher front door [A].
205
2.Installation
206
2.Installation
207
2.Installation
down so that the heads of the screws slide into the cutouts.
10. Check the top of the door and the top of the extension.
• If the top the door is not level with the top of the extension [A], slide the extension up slightly.
• Tighten the screws.
208
2.Installation
12. Remove the grounding plate [A] from the bottom right edge of the finisher.
13. Set the tab [1] and boss [2] of the grounding plate extension on the bottom edge, and then fasten it
209
2.Installation
14. Hook the grounding plate onto the right edge of the extension.
16. At the right front corner of the finisher [A], peel off the tape.
17. Set one screw [B]. Do not tighten it.
18. Select the right front corner plate (the smaller plate).
210
2.Installation
19. Attach it to the right edge [A], and then lower its cutout over the set screw.
20. Use a long screwdriver inserted through the hole at [C] to tighten the screw and fasten the plate.
21. At the right rear corner of the finisher [A], peel off the tape.
22. Set two screws [B]. Do not tighten them.
23. When you attach the plate [C], hook the cutouts under the plate over the set screws.
24. Use a long screwdriver inserted through the cutouts under the plate [A] to tighten the screws and
fasten the plate.
211
2.Installation
Sponge Strip
4. Raise and lower the tray a few times to make sure that the strip is not sticking to the tray.
1. On the left side of the main machine, attach the front connecting bracket (marked "R") on the right
side of the paper exit [A].
212
2.Installation
4. Attach the rear connecting bracket (marked "L") on the left side of the paper exit [A].
213
2.Installation
1. Push the finisher close to the left side of the main machine.
2. Confirm that the lock bar is pulled out completely.
214
2.Installation
3. Push in the lock bar, and then fasten it with its screw.
• After docking the finisher, lower and raise guide Q2 to confirm that it opens and closes
smoothly.
• If it does not operate smoothly, make sure that the right side of the finisher is straight
against the left side of the machine (or upstream device).
• Also, check the guide Q2 and the paper guide above to see if either is bent or loose.
4. Connect the finisher cable [A] to the machine.
215
2.Installation
To use Cover Interposer Tray CI4020, one of the following is also required: Finisher SR5070, Booklet
Finisher SR5080, or Finisher SR4110
Accessories
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following list.
No. Description Q'ty
1. Base Cover (Tray Unit) 1
2. Rear Cover 1
3. Spacer 1
4. Entrance Guide Plate 1
5. "L" Hinge Pins (Tray Unit Front Cover) 2
6. Sponge Strip 1
7. Leveling Shoes 4
8. Front Docking Bracket 1
9. Rear Docking Bracket 1
10. Screw (M4 x 14) 4
11. Screw (M3 x 6) 2
12. Screw (M3 x 8) 1
13. Screws (M4 x 8) 7
14. Flat Knob Screw 1
216
2.Installation
Installation Procedure
217
2.Installation
7. If the upstream device is the main machine, prepare the guide sheet [A] provided with the main
machine.
If the upstream device is not the main machine, proceed to step 11.
218
2.Installation
9. Remove the release paper from the guide sheet [A], and attach the guide sheet to the side of the
upper entrance guide plate [B] which becomes the inner side when assembled.
[C]: Position the edge of the guide sheet 5 mm inside from the edge of the upper entrance guide
plate.
[D]: Align the edge of the adhesive tape with the edge of the upper entrance guide plate.
10. Reassemble the entrance guide plate [A].
11. Peel the tape from the back of the sponge strip [A] and attach it as shown.
[D]: 0 to 5 mm
12. Attach the entrance guide plate [B] (M3x6).
13. Remove the grounding plate [C] from the bottom cross-piece.
14. Turn the grounding plate over.
219
2.Installation
15. Reattach the grounding plate with the same screws as shown.
220
2.Installation
23. Push the runners [A] and [B] in and re-fasten them again with the screws.
The next peripheral device to the left of the cover interposer tray must be installed before you can
mount the tray unit on top of the transport unit of the cover interposer tray.
• The tray unit of the cover interposer tray is supported by the top of the next peripheral device in line
to the left, as well as the transport unit of the cover interposer.
• The next peripheral device to the left of the cover interposer must be set up and docked to the
cover interposer before the transport unit of the cover interposer can be mounted.
Connect the next peripheral unit now.
• Finisher SR4110 (Finisher SR4110 (D707) (MP C6503/C8003 Only))
• Never attempt to mount the cover interposer tray unit until the next device in line has been
docked to the transport unit (base) of the cover interposer tray.
• To prevent bending the frame of the tray unit and damaging its alignment, always remove the
tray unit from the cover interposer tray transport unit at the following times: (1) Before
disconnecting either the cover interposer tray or the next peripheral device to the left, or (2)
Before doing any maintenance on either the cover interposer tray or the next peripheral device
to the left.
221
2.Installation
222
2.Installation
14. Hold the upper L-pin [E] as shown, insert it halfway, push it down, then rotate it into its groove.
15. Attach the spacer [A] to the rear of the transport unit. (M4x12)
16. Set the leveling shoes [A] (x4) under the feet.
17. Turn the nuts to adjust the height of the cover interposer until it is level.
223
2.Installation
• You cannot install more than one finisher at the same time.
Accessory Check
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list.
No Description Q’ty
SR4120 SR4130
1 Lower Output Tray - 1
2 Shift Auxiliary Tray 1 1
3 Proof Auxiliary Tray 1 1
4 Sponge Strip 1 1
5 Entrance Guide Plate 1 1
6 Upper Output Tray 1 1
7 Screws M3 x 6 6 6
8 Tapping Screws 2 2
9 Screws M4 x 20 4 4
10 Screws M3 x 8 1 1
11 Ground Plate 1 1
12 Joint Bracket 1 1
13 End Fence - 1
14 Proof Support Tray 1 1
15 Tray Holder - 1
16 Right Upper Cover 1 1
17 Coupling Seal 1 1
18 Shoes 4 4
19 Hopper 1 1
20 Cushion 1 1
- Caution Sheet 1 1
224
2.Installation
Installation Procedure
• Always turn off and unplug the machine before doing the following steps.
1. Unpack the finisher and remove all tapes and retainers from the finisher.
2. Open the front door and remove all visible tapes and retainers.
RTB 26
The correct way to hold the finisher
225
2.Installation
3. Remove the upper bracket with the red tag attached [A].
4. Pull out the jogger unit, and then remove all remaining tapes and retainers.
226
2.Installation
5. Remove the lower bracket with the red tag attached [A].
1. If the upstream device is the main machine, prepare the guide sheet [A] provided with the main
machine.
If the upstream device is not the main machine, proceed to step 5.
227
2.Installation
3. Remove the release paper from the guide sheet [A], and attach the guide sheet to the side of the
upper entrance guide plate [B] which will become the inner side when assembled.
[C]: Position the edge of the guide sheet 5 mm inside from the edge of the upper entrance guide
plate.
[D]: Align the edge of the adhesive tape with the edge of the upper entrance guide plate.
228
2.Installation
5. Install the entrance guide plate [A] on the right side of the finisher.
6. Do not attach the right upper cover if you are going to install Cover Interposer Tray CI4020 (D712).
-or-
Set the tabs of the right upper cover [A] at the right rear corner of the finisher, and then attach the
cover at the front [B].
229
2.Installation
7. Hook the grounding plate [A] onto the right bottom edge of the finisher, and then attach it [B] with
the screws.
230
2.Installation
9. Attach the strip to the right top edge of the finisher so that it is 0 to 1 mm from the top edge.
1. Use the long screws to loosely attach the connecting bracket [A] to the left side of the main
machine. Do not tighten these screws.
2. With the connecting bracket floating freely on the loose screws, move the bracket to position screw
[B] so that it is centered exactly below the long line on the scale. Then tighten the four screws.
3. Peel the tape from the coupling seal, and then attach it to the left side of the main machine
231
2.Installation
4. Remove the connector cover [A] on the rear left side of the main machine.
5. Push the finisher close to the left side of the main machine.
1. Disconnect the lock bar by removing the screw [1], and then pull the lock bar [2] out until it stops.
232
2.Installation
3. Confirm that the gap between finisher and main machine is tight and perfectly even.
4. Firmly push the lock bar [1] in until it stops, and then fasten screw [2].
233
2.Installation
7. Set the upper output tray [A], and then attach screw [B] under the tray.
8. If you are installing Booklet Finisher SR4130, raise feeler arm [A], and then set the back edge of
the tray [B] into the slots. (No screws.)
10. If the floor is uneven, you may want to use the four accessory shoes to level the machine with the
234
2.Installation
• If you see the edge of the paper at the center mark on the scale, the paper is aligned correctly.
• If you see the edge of the paper at any mark to the right of center, the paper is shifting toward
the front of the machine.
• If you see the paper at a mark to the left of center, the paper is shifting toward the rear of the
machine.
4. If side-to-side registration is still shifting to either the rear or front of the machine, correct it. (Skew
and Side-to-Side Registration)
5. Print out some sheets with center-folding and make sure that the sheets are folded evenly into
equal halves.
6. If the center folding is not aligned, correct it. (Booklet Finisher Center Fold Correction)
Auxiliary Trays
1. Choose one of the three pairs of holes on the back of the finisher for installing the auxiliary tray
235
2.Installation
holder.
2. Position the holder at the selected holes, and then push in the plastic rivets.
236
2.Installation
The trailing edges of excessively curled or Z-folded paper can activate the tray full sensors before the
tray is actually full. When this occurs and the "Exit Tray Full" message appears, the job stops and
cannot continue until some sheets are removed from the tray even though it is only partially full. The
auxiliary trays, numbered [1], [2], and [3] on their undersides, are designed to prevent this problem.
Set auxiliary tray 1 on the proof tray when using thin or soft paper that may not exit completely and may
interfere with the tray full sensor.
When using Z-folded paper or small-sized low-stiffness paper or short grain paper, the curl of the paper
may cause the tray full sensor to signal tray full before the tray is actually full.
237
2.Installation
Set auxiliary tray 3 only when the Multi-Folding Unit is installed, especially when working with Z-folded
paper.
1. The pegs [A] on the bottom of this tray fit into the holes in the shift tray [B].
238
2.Installation
2. When you set the tray, position feelers [1] and [2] on top of the tray.
3. Confirm that the tray is perfectly flat on the shift tray below. There should be no gap between the
trays.
RTB 41
Installing the cushion (Accessory item 20)
239
2.Installation
Accessory Check
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list.
No Description Qty
1 Paper Chip Guide 1
2 Hopper Bracket 1
3 Punch Unit Slide Stay 1
4 Registration Guide Plate 1
5 Registration Sensor Bracket 1
6 Punch Unit 1
7 Punch Waste Hopper 1
8 Stepper Motor Bracket 1
9 Harness Connector Cable-PCB 1
10 Tapping Screw (M3 x 6) 14
11 E-ring 1
Installation Procedure
• Always switch the machine off and unplug the machine before doing the following procedure.
1. If the finisher is connected to the machine, disconnect it.
2. If the finisher is installed on the machine, remove it.
240
2.Installation
5. Open the front door [A], and then remove the punch hopper bracket [B].
241
2.Installation
6. Pull out the stapler unit [A]. (Booklet Finisher SR4130 (D3CH) only)
7. Remove the inner upper cover [A] from the front side of the finisher.
• Disconnect the harness from the back side of the inner upper cover when you
remove the inner upper cover.
242
2.Installation
8. Remove screw [A] of the transport guide plate from the rear side of the finisher.
10. Install the punch unit slide stay [A] from the rear side of the finisher.
11. Fasten the punch unit slide stay. (Front side [A], Rear side [B])
243
2.Installation
• Front side:
• Rear side:
12. Insert the paper chip guide [A] into the finisher as shown below.
13. Install the paper chip guide. (Front side [A]: hook x 2, Rear side [B]: hook x 2, snap ring x 1)
• Hook the paper chip guide onto the front side of the finisher first, and then hook it onto the
rear side of the finisher.
244
2.Installation
• Front side:
• Rear side:
14. Fasten the paper chip guide with an E-ring at the rear side of the finisher. (snap ring x 1)
• When fastening the paper chip guide with the snap ring, make sure the front side of
245
2.Installation
the paper chip guide is hooked into the slot with the small diameter [A].
15. Insert the hopper bracket [A] into the finisher as shown below.
246
2.Installation
16. Hook the hopper bracket onto the frame [A] [B] of the finisher.
• Make sure the hooks [A] and [B] of the hopper bracket are also hooked onto the
finisher.
247
2.Installation
18. Route the harness of the hopper bracket [A] inside the finisher as shown.
19. Route the harness of the hopper bracket to the rear side of the finisher.
248
2.Installation
20. Insert the registration guide plate [A] from the rear side of the finisher.
• Hook [A] and [B] of the registration guide plate into the slotted holes of the finisher.
249
2.Installation
• Rear side:
22. Insert the registration sensor bracket from the rear side of the finisher.
• Hook [A] of the registration sensor bracket into the slotted holes of the finisher.
250
2.Installation
24. Insert the punch unit [A] from the rear side of the finisher.
251
2.Installation
• Make sure the shaft [A] on the finisher is inserted into the punch unit [B].
• When inserting the punch unit, make sure the bracket [A] of the punch unit is in the right
position as shown below.
252
2.Installation
• Make sure the bracket of the punch unit fits the embossed parts [A] on the finisher.
26. Install the stepper motor bracket [A] from the rear side of the finisher.
Fit the hole [A] of the stepper motor bracket over the shaft [B] on the rear side of the finisher.
253
2.Installation
Make sure the rack [A] of the punch unit is engaging with the pinion [B] of the stepper motor
bracket when you insert the stepper motor bracket.
254
2.Installation
28. Connect the harness [A] of the registration sensor bracket to the harness [B] from the hopper
bracket.
29. Connect the harness [A] of the registration sensor bracket to the harness [B] from the punch unit.
30. Connect the harness connector cable provided with the punch unit to the main board [A] of the
255
2.Installation
finisher.
• The end that is split into two connectors must be connected to the main board.
31. Route the harness connector cable as shown below.
• Route the harness under the I/F bracket [A] as shown below. The dotted line shows where
256
2.Installation
32. Connect the harness connector cable to the PCB [A] on the punch unit.
33. Connect the harness [A] of the stepper motor bracket to the PCB [B] in the punch unit.
257
2.Installation
34. Connect the harness [A] of the registration sensor bracket to the PCB [B] in the punch unit.
35. Gather the harnesses of steps 32-34 [A] with your hands, and then fasten them with the clamps as
shown below.
• When you clamp the harness in clamp [A], clamp the harness between the two binds
[B].
• Route the harness [A] of the punch unit over the PCB as shown below by the dotted
258
2.Installation
blue line.
36. Slide the punch waste hopper [A] into the finisher from the rear.
259
2.Installation
Accessory Check
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list.
No Description Qty
1 Support Plate 1
2 Extension Tray 1
3 Relay Tray 1
Installation Procedure
If the finisher has been used, the shift tray may be raised. If it is raised, lower it by opening and closing
the finisher front door while the power is turned ON.
Always switch the machine off and unplug the machine before doing the following procedure.
260
2.Installation
When attaching the tray, make sure that the extension of the finisher shift tray reaches the position
shown in the picture below.
261
2.Installation
Insert the pins [A] of the support plate into the holes [B] in the shift tray.
SP Setting
After starting up the main machine, change the SP setting to let the banner sheet tray be recognized.
1. Enter the SP mode.
2. Change SP5-150-002 from [0] to [1].
3. Exit the SP mode.
4. Restart the main machine.
262
2.Installation
This option can be installed on the Finisher SR4120 or Booklet Finisher SR4130 after installing the
Output Jogger Unit.
This option cools down the sheets delivered to the finisher shift tray.
Accessory Check
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list.
No Description Qty
1 Cooling Fan Assembly 1
2 Interface Unit 1
3 Harness: Decurler: Off (for use with MP C6503/C8003 only) 1
4 Harness: Shift Tray: Switch 1
5 Locking Wire Saddle CKN-13 3
6 Tapping Screw 3 X 16 1
7 Tapping Screw 3 X 6 6
8 Tapping Screw 3 X 8 1
9 Tapping Screw: Round Point: 3 X 6 1
10 Front Cover 1
11 Rear Cover 1
Installation Procedure
Always switch the machine OFF and unplug the machine before installation.
263
2.Installation
Check the positions of the bosses and hooks before removing the cover.
264
2.Installation
4. Attach the connector [A] of the harness provided with the cooling fan unit.
265
2.Installation
266
2.Installation
8. Remove the connector cover [A] from the rear middle cover.
267
2.Installation
268
2.Installation
8. Turn over the cooling fan assembly, and remove the screws from the upper cover [A].
269
2.Installation
9. Turn over the cooling fan assembly, and then remove the base unit [B] from the upper cover [A].
2. Hold the stay [A], and then pull out the base unit towards the direction of the arrow.
270
2.Installation
11. Remove the screw at the center of the paper guide unit which fastens the shaft.
Make sure that the hooks at the center on the lower side are hooked onto the plate of the jogger
unit.
271
2.Installation
13. Using the screw removed in step 11, fasten the center of the cover and the shaft of the paper guide
unit.
14. Pass the harness [A] put temporarily in step 5 through the edge saddle and close it. Pull the
harness [A] toward you.
272
2.Installation
15. Fasten the cooling fan unit with the screws removed in step 2.
16. Connect the harness [A] to the switch board and clamp it.
273
2.Installation
18. Pass the harness [A] of the interface unit through the hole in the bracket [B] removed in step 10.
Insert the hook of the harness bracket into the square hole in the bracket [B].
19. Attach the harness bracket [A] with the silver screw, and pass the harness [B] through the edge
saddle.
20. Route the harness [A] and attach the grounding wire [B] with the blue screw.
21. Clamp the harnesses.
22. Attach the bracket [A] with two screws, and connect the cooling fan unit harness to the interface
274
2.Installation
unit harness.
23. Attach the front cover [A] provided with the cooling fan unit.
24. Attach the rear cover [A] provided with the cooling fan unit.
25. Attach the upper cover [A] removed from the base unit of the cooling fan assembly in step 9.
Use the screws removed in step 8.
275
2.Installation
276
2.Installation
If the screw hole shown in the red circle is too high or too low, press the cord [B] with your finger
and adjust the position of the hole.
277
2.Installation
27. Attach the finisher rear upper cover [A] removed in step 1.
28. Pro C5200S/C5210S only: Remove the connector cover [A] from the main machine.
Check the positions of the hooks before removing the connector cover.
278
2.Installation
29. Remove the upper screw [A] from the rear lower cover.
30. Peel off the tapes from the Velcro [B] attached to the interface unit [A] (accessory #2).
31. Align the screw hole [C] with the screw hole in the cover [A], and attach the interface unit [B] with
its Velcro against the surface of the cover.
279
2.Installation
32. Attach the interface unit [A] to the lower left cover with an M3x16 screw (accessory #6).
34. Bind the harness of the interface unit [A] and clamp it with Locking Wire Saddle CKN-13 [B]
(accessory #5).
• Depending on the number of options installed between the copier and Finisher, 3 pcs of
Locking Wire Saddle CKN-13 might be needed to clamp the harness.
280
2.Installation
Cooling Fan Unit Type M26 activates under the following condition.
• Always keep the main power switch of the Cooling Fan Unit Type M26 ON, because the power
is supplied from mainframe.
• If the printer is in ready status, the cooling fan unit does not activate even with the mainframe
power switched ON. The cooling fan is activated only while printing or copying.
281
2.Installation
• You cannot install more than one finisher at the same time.
Accessories
282
2.Installation
Spacer
A spacer for correcting paper skew is attached to the bottom right of the finisher.
Installation Procedure
• Turn the machine off and disconnect the machine power cord before you do this procedure.
1. Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure.
283
2.Installation
2. Unpack the finisher and remove all tapes and shipping retainers.
RTB 26
The correct way to hold the finisher
6. If the upstream device is the main machine, prepare the guide sheet [A] provided with the main
machine.
If the upstream device is not the main machine, proceed to step 10.
284
2.Installation
8. Remove the release paper from the guide sheet [A], and attach the guide sheet to the side of the
upper entrance guide plate [B] which becomes the inner side when assembled.
[C]: Align the edge of the guide sheet with the edge of the upper entrance guide plate.
[D]: Align the edge of the adhesive tape with the edge of the upper entrance guide plate.
285
2.Installation
286
2.Installation
14. Insert the shift tray [A] into the grooves and fasten it. (M3 x 8)
287
2.Installation
288
2.Installation
A spacer for correcting paper skew is attached to the bottom right of the finisher.
289
2.Installation
1. Check to see if the paper is skewed when it is exited from the machine.
2. If skew correction is required, dock the finisher to the copier using the M4x20 screws included with
the finisher.
• This is because the M4x14 screws will not be long enough when the spacer(s) are
attached.
290
2.Installation
• This is because without the spacer, the M4x20 screws are too long and the bracket
cannot be fastened in place.
291
2.Installation
SP Setting
292
2.Installation
Component Check
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following list:
No. Description Q'ty
1. Punch Unit 1
2. Punch Waste Collection Hopper 1
3. Spacer (2 mm) 1
4. Spacer (1 mm) 2
5. Knob 1
6. Step Screw 1
7. Screw (M4 x 6) Black 1
8. Screw (M3 x 10) 2
9. Spring 1
10. Sensor Arm and Sensor 1
Installation Procedure
• Switch the machine off and unplug the machine before starting the following procedure.
1. If the finisher is connected to the main machine, disconnect it.
293
2.Installation
2. Unpack the punch unit and remove the stepped screw from the lower section of the unit.
294
2.Installation
13. Position the 2 mm spacer [A] and attach the punch unit [B]. (M3 x 10)
295
2.Installation
14. Use one of the screws removed from the motor protector plate to fasten the remaining two spacers
to the frame as shown.
• These extra spacers can be used to adjust the position of the punch holes (front to rear,
across the page).
15. At the front, fasten the punch unit knob [A] (M4 x 6).
296
2.Installation
16. Remove the harness cover [A] and middle cover [B].
17. Install the sensor arm [A] (small stepped screw (M3 x 4)). Make sure that the sensor arm swings
freely on the stepped screw.
18. Attach the spring [B].
19. Connect the PCB harness connector [A] to CN135 of the finisher PCB and to CN600 of the punch
unit PCB.
20. Connect the harness [B] to CN136 of the finisher PCB.
21. Connect the single end of the hopper full sensor connector cable [C] to the hopper full sensor on
the arm.
• No special DIP switch settings are required for this punch unit. A signal from the punch
identifies itself by sending a signal to the copier.
297
2.Installation
22. Reattach the harness cover [A] and middle cover [B].
23. Slide the punch waste collection hopper [A] into the finisher.
298
2.Installation
Component Check
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list.
No Description Qty
1 Cooling Fan Assembly 1
2 Interface Unit 1
3 Tapping Screw M3 X 16 1
4 Locking Wire Saddle CKN-13 3
5 Harness: Fan: Separation 1
6 Harness: Fan 1
7 Tapping Screw M3 X 6 3
8 Wire Saddle : LWSM-0511A 1
9 PCB: OKB 1
10 Bracket (for Finisher SR4110) 1
11 Lower Cover (for Finisher SR4110) 1
12 Upper Cover (for Finisher SR4110) 1
299
2.Installation
• Always switch the machine off and unplug the machine before doing the following procedure.
1. Remove the rear middle cover.
Check the positions of the bosses and hooks before removing the cover.
300
2.Installation
301
2.Installation
4. Attach the connector [A] provided with the cooling fan unit.
5. Connect the harness [A] provided with the cooling fan unit to the connector, and then clamp the
harness.
302
2.Installation
8. Remove the connector cover [A] from the rear middle cover.
303
2.Installation
12. Peel off the tapes from the Velcro [B] attached to the interface unit [A] (accessory #2).
13. Align the screw hole [C] with the screw hole in the cover [A], and attach the interface unit [B] with
its Velcro against the surface of the cover.
14. Attach the interface unit [A] to the lower left cover with an M3x16 screw (accessory #3).
304
2.Installation
1. Remove the upper cover [A] from the cooling fan assembly.
2. Remove the lower cover [A] from the cooling fan assembly.
305
2.Installation
3. Place the fan assembly [A] on a table with the upper and lower covers removed.
306
2.Installation
7. Remove the rocker switches [B] and [C] from the bracket [A] removed in step 6 (connectors [D], [E]
and [F]).
307
2.Installation
9. Remove the spring plate [B] and the resistor harness [C] from the bracket [A].
10. Assemble the fan motor [A] and bracket [B] (for Finisher SR4110) (accessory #10).
11. Remove the knob screw [C] and snap ring [B] from the upper cover [A] removed from the cooling
fan unit in step 1.
308
2.Installation
12. Remove the air shield [B] from the upper cover [A].
13. Remove the bracket [B] from the air shield [A].
14. Assemble the air shield [A] and Upper Cover (for Finisher SR4110) [B] (accessory #12) with the
309
2.Installation
15. Attach the spring plate [B] removed in step 9 to the Lower Cover (for Finisher SR4110) (accessory
#11) [A].
310
2.Installation
17. Route the harnesses through the openings [D], and attach the rocker switches [B] and [C] to the
lower cover of Finisher SR4110 [A].
• Attach the rocker switch [B] so that the white dot is to the side indicated with the arrow in
the photo below.
• Attach the rocker switch [C] so that the side connected with the harness corresponds to
the direction of the arrow shown in the photo below.
18. Insert the resistor harness [A] into the spring plate [B].
311
2.Installation
21. Remove the clamp [B] from the bracket [A] removed in step 7. Then attach the clamp [B] to the
hole [C] in the lower cover of Finisher SR4110.
22. Remove the jogger unit cover [A] from Finisher SR4110.
23. Mount the fan motor unit on Finisher SR4110 by aligning the hooks [A] and [B] with the cutouts [C]
312
2.Installation
and [D].
24. Attach the lower cover [A] assembled in step 21 by inserting the tabs [B] and [C] into the grooves
[D] and [E] located under the cooling fan unit.
• Grooves [D] and [E] refer to the wider groove (towards the upstream direction from the
unit).
313
2.Installation
26. Fix the harness [A] from the interface unit mounted on the copier in Preparing the Main Machine.
(Ground wire [B], bracket [C], and connector [D])
314
2.Installation
28. Mount the upper cover [A] assembled in step 14 on the cooling fan unit.
29. Bind the harness of the interface unit [A] and clamp it with Locking Wire Saddle CKN-13 [B]
315
2.Installation
(accessory #4).
• Depending on the number of options installed between the copier and Finisher SR4110, 3
pcs of Locking Wire Saddle CKN-13 might be needed to clamp the harness.
Cooling Fan Unit Type M31 activates under the following condition.
• Always keep the main power switch of the Cooling Fan Unit Type M31 ON, because the power
is supplied from mainframe.
• If the printer is in ready status, the cooling fan unit does not activate even with the mainframe
power switched ON. The cooling fan is activated only while printing or copying.
316
2.Installation
317
2.Installation
• You cannot install more than one finisher at the same time.
Accessory Check
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following illustration and list.
No Description Q’ty
SR5070 SR5080
1 Screws M4×20 (Joint Bracket) 4 4
2 Screws M3×8 (Shift Tray) 4 4
3 Screws M3×6 (Ground Plate) 2 2
4 Screws M3×6 (Paper Guide) 2 2
5 Leveling Shoes 4 4
6 Ground Plate 1 1
7 Power Cord*1 1 1
8 Joint Bracket 1 1
9 Sponge Strip 1 1
10 Entrance Guide Plate 1 1
11 Auxiliary Tray - Z-Fold Paper 1 1
12 Shift Tray 1 1
13 Booklet Tray - 1
14 Front Cover - 1
15 Rear Cover - 1
16 Screw M4×14 - 2
17 Screw M3×8 - 2
Coupling Seal 1 1
Shift Auxiliary Tray 1 1
*1 In China, do not use this power cord provided with this unit's accessories. Contact your supervisor
and use the power cord specified for use in China.
318
2.Installation
Installation Procedure
Turn OFF the machine and disconnect the machine power cord before you do this procedure.
The shipping plates prevent the staple unit from moving during transport. The plates should be kept and
re-attached before the unit is transported to another location.
1. Remove all tapes and retainers from the external covers.
RTB 26
The correct way to hold the finisher 319
2.Installation
2. Open the front door [A], and then remove the tapes from the upper part of the stacker/stapler unit
[B].
320
2.Installation
This step relieves stress on the rails of the stacker/stapler unit when it is pulled out of the machine.
If the casters come off the floor after the height adjustment of finisher, adjust the height of caster.
Otherwise, the guide rail might be strained when you pull out the stacker/stapler unit.
7. Hold the grip [A], and then pull out the stacker/stapler unit [B].
When pulling out the stacker/stapler unit, remove the retainer [A].
321
2.Installation
If you turn on the machine while the shoulder screw is attached, an SC error occurs. Remove the
shoulder screw with tag and wire.
9. Remove the shipping plate [A].
10. Remove the screw [A], and then remove the shipping plate [B].
Do not loosen the shoulder screw [C], because it is fastened with a loosening preventer to prevent
the screw from becoming loose. The shipping plate [B] is stuck to the screw [C], but the shipping
plate [B] can be removed without removing the screw [C].
322
2.Installation
323
2.Installation
12. Remove the retainers [A] and tapes [B] from the left side of the stacker/stapler unit.
13. Remove the tape and retainers left on the stacker/stapler unit [A].
14. Put the stacker/stapler unit back into the machine, and then remove the tapes from the staple
waste box [A].
324
2.Installation
Ground Plate
1. Attach the grounding plate [A] to the bottom right edge of the finisher. (M3×6)
Sponge Strips
When you install the finisher on another unit, install the sponge strips.
1. Peel the tape from the sponge strip, and then attach the strip to the top right edge of the unit.
325
2.Installation
1. If the upstream device is the main machine, prepare the guide sheet [A] provided with the main
machine.
If the upstream device is not the main machine, proceed to step 5.
3. Remove the release paper from the guide sheet [A], and attach the guide sheet to the side of the
upper entrance guide plate [B] which becomes the inner side when assembled.
326
2.Installation
[C]: Align the edge of the guide sheet with the edge of the upper entrance guide plate.
[D]: Align the edge of the adhesive tape with the edge of the upper entrance guide plate.
4. Reassemble the entrance guide plate [A].
5. Attach the entrance guide plate to the right side of the finisher. (M3×6)
327
2.Installation
Shift Tray
1. Attach the shift tray to the left side of the finisher. (M3×8)
2. Align the edge of the plate on the tray with the slot on the side of the finisher, and then rotate the
finisher up against the side of the machine.
328
2.Installation
3. Make sure that the tabs at the rear [A] and front [B] are inserted in the slots.
5. Fasten the bottom of the tray at the rear [A] and front [B]. (M4×14)
6. Set the tab of the front tray cover [A] into the hole in the tray frame, and then install the front tray
cover on the booklet tray.
329
2.Installation
8. Set the tab of the rear tray cover [A] into the hole in the tray frame, and then install the rear tray
cover on the booklet tray.
9. Fasten the rear tray cover at the bottom [B]. (M3×8)
1. Install the connecting bracket [A] on the left side of the upstream device.
Example picture: Docking the finisher to the main machine
• When the upstream device is the multi-folding unit, use the screw (M4×14) provided with
the multi-folding unit.
330
2.Installation
• When the upstream device is the de-curl unit, use the screw (M4×14) provided with the
de-curl unit.
• When the upstream device is not the multi-folding unit or the de-curl unit, use the screw
(M4×20).
2. Peel off the tape from the cushion [A], and then attach it to the left side of the main machine as
shown below.
7. Confirm that the height of the finisher entrance [A] is at the same height as the upstream device's
paper exit [B].
8. Push the finisher close to the side of the upstream device, and once again confirm that the height
331
2.Installation
of the finisher entrance [A] is at the same height as the upstream device's paper exit [B].
9. If the finisher is not at the same height as the upstream device, place the leveling shoes [A] and
raise or lower the feet with the accessory wrench.
10. Push the finisher against the side of the upstream device.
11. Push the lock bar in completely so that it slides up into the notches in the arms on both ends of the
connecting bracket, and then fasten the lock bar.
Use the screw removed in Step 3.
12. Check the height of the exterior of the upstream device and downstream device, and then adjust
the height until the units are leveled.
When the upstream device of the finisher is Cover Interposer Tray CI4020, follow the steps below to
prevent the cover interposer unit from falling down.
332
2.Installation
1. Remove the rear upper cover [A] of the cover interposer tray.
2. Remove the rear lower cover [A] of the cover interposer tray.
333
2.Installation
5. Loosen the fixing screws of the bracket [A] installed at the rear side of the cover interposer tray.
334
2.Installation
7. Fasten the fixing screws of the bracket [A] at the rear side of the cover interposer tray.
8. Reattach the rear upper cover and rear lower cover of the main machine.
9. Reattach the rear upper cover and rear lower cover of the cover interposer tray.
1. If Z-folded paper is fed from the multi-folding unit, install the Z-fold support tray [B] on the shift tray
[A].
Instruct the operator about when to use the Z-fold support tray.
335
2.Installation
2. Connect the power cord [A] to the finisher, and then install the mounting bracket [B] removed in the
previous step.
In China, do not use this power cord provided with this unit's accessories. Contact your supervisor
and use the power cord specified for use in China.
3. Load some DLT or A3 paper in the paper tray of the main machine, and make several prints.
4. Check paper skew and side-to-side registration and correct if necessary. (Adjustment 005:
Registration)
For details, see "Special Adjustment" of "Replacement and Adjustment" in the Field Service Manual for
Booklet Finisher SR5080 (D3CA) and Finisher SR5070 (D3CB).
336
2.Installation
Accessory Check
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list.
No Description Qty
1 Punch Drive Unit 1
2 Punch Unit 1
3 Punch Registration Unit 1
4 Punch-out Hopper 1
5 Sensor Arm and Sensor 1
6 Punch Control Board 1
7 Harness: Long 3
8 Harness: Board Relay 1
9 Screws M3x6 9
10 Step Screw 1
11 Spring 1
337
2.Installation
Installation Procedure
Make sure that the main machine is switched off and that its power cord is disconnected before doing
the following procedure.
Shipping Materials
Rear Cover
338
2.Installation
339
2.Installation
Sensor Arm
340
2.Installation
2. Attach the punch mechanism [A] to the rails of the punch unit.
• If you are installing the punch unit for Europe [1], connect the harness [B].
• The punch unit for North America [2] has no punch switching motor, so this harness is not
required.
341
2.Installation
3. At the front, insert the punch unit [A] into the finisher and fasten it.
4. Remove the shoulder screw with red tag [B], and detach the tag and wire.
5. After removing the screw from hole (1), re-attach it at hole (2).
6. At the front, slide the punch-out hopper [A] into the finisher.
7. Route the harnesses from the CIS unit [A] through the hole.
8. Connect the harnesses at (1) and (2).
342
2.Installation
9. If you are installing the punch unit for Scandinavia, fasten the extra connector at (3).
343
2.Installation
2. Connect the punch relay harness [B] to the punch control board and punch main control board [C].
Final Connection
344
2.Installation
345
2.Installation
Accessory Check
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list.
No Description Qty
1 Support Plate 1
2 Extension Tray 1
3 Relay Tray 1
4 Tapping Screw: 3 x 10 2
Installation Procedure
Always switch the machine off and unplug the machine before doing the following procedure.
346
2.Installation
4. Use the shift tray emergency stop switch of the finisher to lower the shift tray, and then attach the
support plate [A] provided with this option.
Raise the shift tray by using the shift tray emergency stop switch after attaching this support plate.
347
2.Installation
Insert the pins [A] of the support plate into the holes [B] in the shift tray.
SP Setting
After starting up the main machine, change the SP setting to let the banner sheet tray be recognized.
1. Enter the SP mode.
2. Change SP5-150-002 from [0] to [1].
3. Exit the SP mode.
4. Restart the main machine.
348
2.Installation
To use Output Jogger Unit Type M25, one of the following is also required: Finisher SR4120 or Booklet
Finisher SR4130
Component Check
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list.
No Description Qty
1 Jogger Unit Cover 1
2 Jogger Unit 1
3 Rear End Cover 1
4 Front End Cover 1
5 Cushions 5
6 Shoulder Screws 2
7 Screws (Blue) M3x6 2
8 Tapping Screw: Round Point: 3x8 5
Installation
• Always switch the machine off and unplug the machine before doing the following procedure.
1. Disconnect the finisher from the main frame.
349
2.Installation
350
2.Installation
351
2.Installation
8. Carefully, separate the front tabs at [A], and then remove the main paper guide cover [B].
10. Slowly, disconnect the bracket from the rail above, and then remove it.
352
2.Installation
353
2.Installation
14. Move the jogger arms on the jogger unit to the center.
15. Hold the jogger unit so that the hooks [A] on both ends of the unit are in line with the installed
shoulder screws [B].
16. Rotate the jogger unit slightly up under the output tray so that the motors on both ends of the unit
go under the tray, and then hang the hooks on the shoulder screws at the front and rear.
17. Confirm that the rear bracket [A] is on the shoulder screw.
18. Confirm that the rear motor [B] is up under the tray.
19. Confirm that the front bracket [A] is on the shoulder screw.
354
2.Installation
20. Confirm that the front motor [B] is up under the tray.
21. Fasten the jogger unit at the rear [A] and front [B].
355
2.Installation
24. Attach the cushions to the front [A] and rear [B] of the lower arms of the output tray.
25. Set the front end cover [A]. Do not attach the screw yet.
26. Set the rear end cover [A], and then fasten it [B].
27. Look at the jogger cover. Note the tabs and slots on the rear end [A], center arm covers [B], and
356
2.Installation
28. Slowly, set the jogger cover [A] on the jogger unit.
29. At the rear [A], confirm that the tab inserts correctly.
30. At the front [B], confirm that both tabs set correctly.
31. In the center under the jogger unit, make sure the rear arm cover [A] and front arm cover [B] fit
over the edge of the plate as shown.
357
2.Installation
32. After making sure that all tabs are set correctly, fasten the cover to the jogger unit.
35. To avoid a jam at power on, before you turn the machine on you can:
Raise the jogger arms [A] slightly so that they are not touching the shift tray below.
-or-
You can spread the jogger arms [B] away from the center so that they are not touching the surface
358
2.Installation
of the tray.
359
2.Installation
Component Check
360
2.Installation
Installation Procedure
• Turn the machine off and disconnect the machine power cord before you do this procedure.
MP C6503/C8003: Start from step 1.
Pro 5200S/5210S: Start from step 11.
361
2.Installation
Check the positions of the bosses and hooks before removing the cover.
362
2.Installation
4. Attach the connector [A] of the harness provided with the cooling fan unit.
363
2.Installation
5. Connect the harness provided with the copy tray [A] to the connector, and then clamp the harness.
364
2.Installation
8. Remove the connector cover [A] from the rear middle cover
12. Attach the sheet [A] to the left side of the drawer unit.
RTB 46
Step 12 was modified
365
2.Installation
13. Attach the paper height sensor [A] and harness clamp [B] to the sensor bracket [C].
14. Attach the actuator [F] to the actuator arm bracket [D].
15. Attach the actuator bracket [D] to the sensor bracket [C]. (M3 x 6)
16. Connect the sensor harness [E] to the sensor [A].
17. Attach the sensor bracket [C] to the main machine. (M4 x 12)
18. To make it easier to remove the left middle cover [A], remove the screws from the rear middle
366
2.Installation
20. Hold the positions shown below and pull the left middle cover [A] toward you to remove it.
367
2.Installation
21. Make four holes [A] in the left middle cover with a screwdriver.
368
2.Installation
• Remove the retainer from the copy tray before attaching the tray.
25. Install the cooling unit [A] on the cooling unit bracket [B]. (hook x2)
26. Fasten the cooling unit to the cooling unit bracket. (M3 x 6)
369
2.Installation
27. Install the cooling unit bracket [A] on the left side of the main machine. (M4 x 20)
28. Attach the cable clamp [A] provided with the copy tray to the main machine. Then route the
harness as shown below.
370
2.Installation
• If you leave this connector unconnected, SC530-10 (Copy Tray Cooling Fan Lock) occurs.
30. Turn the machine main power switch ON.
31. Set SP1-907-001 (Exit Tray Full Detection) to “1: ON”.
• The default setting of this SP is “0: OFF”. It must be set to “1: ON” in order for tray full
detection to work.
32. Attach the decal [A] to the left side of the main machine.
371
2.Installation
• Align the lower side of the decal with the marker [A] on the main machine.
33. Turn the power switch [A] of the cooling fan ON.
• Always keep the power switch of the cooling fan ON. This is because the fan is installed to
prevent paper from sticking together and jamming during duplex printing due to undried toner.
(The fan stops when the print/copy job is complete.)
• If the sound of the fan is unacceptable to the customer, or the air from the fan pushes thin
paper off the exit tray, advise the customer to power off the fan as necessary.
• If jams still occur while the fan is ON, tilt the fan 90 degrees as described in Troubleshooting
for Blocking on the Paper Output Tray.
372
2.Installation
• The decurl unit is top heavy and has an extremely narrow base. It can fall over easily. Work
carefully to avoid knocking it over.
• Do not set this unit upright until you are ready to install it and connect it to the side of the main
machine.
• Never leave this unit standing upright and unattended in the work area during installation.
Accessories
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following illustration and list.
No. Description Q'ty
1. Screws M3x6 3
2. Screws M4x8 1
3. Screws M4x16 4
4. Screws M4x8 4
5. Leveling Shoes 3
6. Joint Bracket – L 1
7. Joint Bracket – R 1
8. Small Bracket 1
9. Sponge Strip 1
10. Entrance Guide Plate 1
11. Sheet – Black 1
373
2.Installation
Installation Procedure
• Make sure that the main machine is switched off and that its power cord is disconnected
before doing the following procedure.
1. Remove the retainers [A].
• Keep the screws. They will be needed to reinstall the retainers after connecting the decurl
unit with the main unit.
374
2.Installation
375
2.Installation
7. Peel the tape from the sponge strip [A] and attach it to the top right edge of the unit.
376
2.Installation
Attach the entrance guide plate [A] while pressing the K4 button [B] which opens the lower
transport guide [C].
377
2.Installation
10. Remove the interface connector cover [A] from the main machine.
brackets.
15. Push in the lock bar [A] and fasten it with the screw removed in step 12.
379
2.Installation
17. Connect the I/F cable [A] of the decurl unit to the main machine.
• [C]: 0 to 1 mm
• [D]: 0 to 1 mm
380
2.Installation
• If the downstream device is Buffer Pass Unit Type S6 (D3D0), don’t attach the black
sheet. The sheet for the buffer pass unit is provided with the buffer pass unit.
If the downstream device is Finisher SR4120, Booklet Finisher SR4130, Finisher SR5070, or
Booklet Finisher SR5080
If the downstream device is Cover Interposer Tray CI4040 or Cover Interposer Tray CI4020
1. Install the small bracket [A] on the cover interposer tray [B].
If the downstream device does not have a connecting section (such as Buffer Pass Unit
381
2.Installation
Type S6)
382
2.Installation
• When you remove the decurl unit, hold it in the lower half, lower than the middle.
Paper Curl Adjustment When Decurl Unit DU5020 Connects with Finisher SR4120 or Booklet Finisher
SR4130
383
2.Installation
Accessory Check
Installation
• The unit must be connected to a power source that is close to the unit and easily accessible.
• Make sure that the main machine is switched off and that its power cord is disconnected
before doing the following procedure.
• The buffer pass unit is unstable and can fall over easily. To avoid personal injury or damage to
the unit, use caution when you pull out the buffer pass unit drawer until the unit has been
docked to the main machine.
• The power cord that comes with the buffer pass unit is for use with this equipment only. Do not
use it with other appliances. Doing so could result in fire or electric shock.
• Rated Voltage of Output Connector [A] for Accessories: Max. DC 24 V.
384
2.Installation
2. Open the front door [A] and remove all visible tapes.
385
2.Installation
386
2.Installation
#01: When Connecting the Buffer Pass Unit with the Mainframe
• If the Buffer Pass Unit is to be connected to the Decurl Unit DU5020 (D727), go to " #02:
When Connecting the Buffer Pass Unit with the Decurl Unit DU5020 (D727)".
This section describes the procedure for attaching the Wide Guide Sheet to the entrance guide plate
that was removed in step 5.(Removing the Entrance Guide)
387
2.Installation
Attaching the Wide Guide Sheet to the Upper Entrance Guide Plate
1. Peel off the release paper from the double-sided tape [C] on the Wide Guide Sheet.
2. Attach the Wide Guide Sheet to the upper entrance guide plate by aligning the edge [D] of the
Guide Sheet with the edge (1) of the upper entrance guide plate, and edge [E] of the double-sided
tape with the edge (2) of the upper entrance guide plate.
3. Confirm that the Wide Guide Sheet is attached correctly to the upper entrance guide plate as
388
2.Installation
Attaching the Wide Guide Sheet to the Lower Entrance Guide Plate
1. Peel off the release paper from the double-sided tape [C] on the Wide Guide Sheet.
2. Attach the Wide Guide Sheet to the lower entrance guide plate by aligning the edge [D] of the
Guide Sheet with the edge (1) of the lower entrance guide plate, and edge [E] of the double-sided
tape with the edge (2) of the lower entrance guide plate.
3. Confirm that the Wide Guide Sheet is attached correctly to the lower entrance guide plate as
389
2.Installation
3. Attach the right connecting bracket [A] (accessories item #5) and left connecting bracket [B]
390
2.Installation
5. Open the front door, then pull out the locking lever [A].
6. Push the buffer pass unit against the mainframe to dock the units.
391
2.Installation
7. Push the lock lever [A] and fasten it with the screw removed in step 5.
8. Connect the I/F cable of the buffer pass unit to the socket [A] on the mainframe.
Go to Common Procedure.
#02: When Connecting the Buffer Pass Unit with the Decurl Unit DU5020 (D727)
This section describes the procedure for attaching the Wide Guide Sheet to the entrance guide that was
removed in step 5. (Removing the Entrance Guide)
392
2.Installation
1. Peel off the release paper from the double-sided tape [C] on the Wide Guide Sheet.
2. Attach the Wide Guide Sheet to the upper entrance guide by aligning the edge [D] of the Guide
Sheet with the edge (1) of the guide plate, and the shorter edge [E] of the Guide Sheet with the
edge (2) of the guide plate.
• The alignment position of edge [E] is different from when connecting the buffer pass unit
to the mainframe.
3. Confirm that the Wide Guide Sheet is attached correctly to the upper entrance guide as shown in
393
2.Installation
1. Peel off the release paper from the double-sided tape [C] on the Wide Guide Sheet.
2. Attach the Wide Guide Sheet to the lower entrance guide by aligning the edge [D] of the Guide
Sheet with the edge (1) of the guide plate, and edge [E] of the double-sided tape with the edge (2)
of the guide plate.
3. Confirm that the Wide Guide Sheet is attached correctly to the lower entrance guide as shown in
394
2.Installation
395
2.Installation
5. Attach the right connecting bracket [A] (accessories item #5) and left connecting bracket [B]
396
2.Installation
(accessories item #4) to the paper exit side of the Decurl Unit.
6. Connect the I/F cable of the Decurl Unit to the socket [A] of the mainframe. Then connect the
Buffer Pass Unit with the Decurl Unit similarly to steps 4 through 6 of #01: When Connecting the
Buffer Pass Unit with the Mainframe.
7. Go to Common Procedure.
397
2.Installation
Common Procedure
1. Set the leveling shoes [A] and adjust the height of the unit.
2. Remove the 2 screws [A] on the front side of clamping bracket [D].
3. Turn the Kc5 lever [B] counter clockwise and pull out the buffer pass unit drawer [C].
4. Remove the clamping bracket [D].
5. Remove the 4 shipping brackets [E].
6. Slide in the buffer pass unit drawer [C].
7. Close the front door [F].
8. Attach the connecting bracket [A] of the downstream device to the left side of the buffer pass unit.
398
2.Installation
9. Attach the Narrow Guide Sheet [A] (35.5mm, accessories item #7) to the entrance guide of the
downstream device (for example, the SR4110) by referring to the procedure in the following
section.
1. Peel off the release paper from the double-sided tape [A] on the Narrow Guide Sheet.
2. Attach the Narrow Guide Sheet to the upper entrance guide by aligning the edge [B] of the double-
sided tape with the edge (1) of the guide plate, and the edge [C] of the double-sided tape with the
edge (2) of the guide plate.
3. Confirm that the Narrow Guide Sheet is attached correctly to the upper entrance guide as shown in
399
2.Installation
1. Peel off the release paper from the double-sided tape [A] on the Narrow Guide Sheet.
2. Attach the Narrow Guide Sheet to the lower entrance guide by aligning the edge [B] of the Guide
Sheet with the edge (1) of the guide plate, and edge [C] of the double-sided tape with the edge (2)
of the guide plate.
3. Confirm that the Narrow Guide Sheet is attached correctly to the lower entrance guide as shown in
the photo below.
400
2.Installation
unit.
3. Connect the buffer pass unit power cord to the wall socket, and then connect the mainframe power
cord to the wall socket.
• Make sure the power cords are plugged into the wall sockets in the above order.
Otherwise, the buffer pass unit will not be recognized by the mainframe when turning on
the power in the following step, and this will cause a paper jam in the buffer pass unit.
4. Turn ON the main power switch on the mainframe.
5. Confirm proper function of the buffer pass unit to complete the procedure.
401
2.Installation
• Pro C5200S/C5210S: To use Multi-Folding Unit FD4000, one of the following is also required:
Finisher SR4120, Booklet Finisher SR4130, Finisher SR5070, or Booklet Finisher SR5080
• MP C6503/C8003: To use Multi-Folding Unit FD4000, one of the following is also required:
Finisher SR4120, Booklet Finisher SR4130, or Finisher SR4110
Accessories
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following illustration and list.
No. Description Q'ty
1. Joint Bracket 1
2. Entrance Guide Plate – Long (for MP C6503/MP C8003/Pro C5200S/Pro C5210S) 1
3. Entrance Guide Plate – Short (Not used) 1
4. Proof Tray Auxiliary Plate - Bottom 1
5. Ground Plate 1
6. Screws 3x6 2
7. Screws M3x6 2
8. Screws M4x20 4
9. Screws M4x14 (Not used) 4
10. Leveling Shoes 5
11. Power Cord *1 1
12. Sponge Strip 1
*1: When using this unit in China, do not use this power cord provided with this unit. Contact your
supervisor and use the power cord specified for use in China.
Installation
• The unit must be connected to a power source that is close to the unit and easily accessible.
• Make sure that the main machine is switched off and that its power cord is disconnected
402
2.Installation
Tapes
1. Remove all tapes and retainers from the front, left, rear, and right sides.
403
2.Installation
1. Fasten the connecting bracket [A] to the left side of the upstream device. (M4x20)
2. Fasten the connecting bracket provided with the downstream device to the left side of the multi-
folding unit, if a downstream device is going to be installed. (M4x14)
• If the upstream device is the Decurl Unit DU5020 (D727), attach the black mylar provided
with the cover interposer tray (Cover Interposer Tray CI4040) or decurl unit to this
entrance guide plate.
4. If the upstream device is the main machine, prepare the guide sheet [A] provided with the main
machine.
If the upstream device is not the main machine, proceed to step 8.
404
2.Installation
6. Remove the release paper from the guide sheet [A], and attach the guide sheet to the side of the
upper entrance guide plate [B] which becomes the inner side when assembled.
[C]: Position the edge of the guide sheet 5 mm inside from the edge of the upper entrance guide
plate.
[D]: Align the edge of the adhesive tape with the edge of the upper entrance guide plate.
405
2.Installation
8. Attach the long entrance guide plate [A] to the left side of the multi-folding unit. (M3x6)
9. Peel the tape from the sponge strip [B], and attach the strip to the top right edge of the multi-folding
unit.
406
2.Installation
Ground Plate
1. Attach the grounding plate [A] to the lower right edge of the unit. (M3x6)
Docking
Do steps 8 to 12 only if the upstream device is the Cover Interposer Tray CI4020 (D712).
1. Open the front door [A].
2. At the front right corner, remove the screw of the lock bar [B] (M3x6). Keep this screw.
3. Pull out the lock bar.
4. Slowly push the unit [C] against the left side of the upstream device (or main machine) so that the
lock bar is directly and squarely under the arms of the connecting bracket.
5. Push in the lock bar so it slides up into the notches in the arms on both ends of the connecting
bracket [D].
6. Fasten the lock bar by re-attaching the screw removed in Step 2.
7. Connect the I/F cable [E] to the upstream device (or main machine).
• If you are connecting to the main machine, you must first remove the plastic cap on the I/F
cable connection point.
407
2.Installation
408
2.Installation
Power Cord
1. Insert the power cord [A] into the power connection point.
• In China, do not use the power cord provided with this unit. Contact your supervisor and
use the power cord specified for use in China.
2. Plug in the power cord for the Multi-Folding Unit into an AC wall outlet.
3. Disconnect the power cord from the copier, and then press the main power switch.
• This releases the charge remaining inside the machine. If you do not do this step, the
copier will not recognize the Multi-Folding Unit and paper jams will occur. (See Notes
on the Main Power Switch.)
4. Plug in the power cord for the copier into an AC wall outlet.
409
2.Installation
• If the copier main power turns on automatically when you plug in the cord, wait until the
machine finishes warming up. Then, turn the main power OFF and ON again.
6. Make sure that the Multi-Folding Unit operates correctly.
Height Adjustment
Adjust the height of the unit and make sure that it is level.
1. Turn the lower nut to lower the bolt.
2. Set the leveling shoes [A] below the bolt.
Three parts must be removed before the tray unit of the cover interposer tray can be mounted on top of
the Multi Folding Unit.
1. Open the front door.
• The following parts require removal only if the upstream device is the Cover Interposer
Tray CI4020 (D712).
• These parts must be removed so that the tray unit of the Cover Interposer Tray will fit on
top of the Multi Folding Unit.
2. Remove:
• [A] Bracket
• [B] Cross-piece
• [C] Metal plate from the door
410
2.Installation
411
2.Installation
• Be sure to read the correct scale for the paper size in use.
Correcting Skew
3. Loosen the screws of the connecting bracket attached to the upstream device.
4. Insert a spacer and tighten the screws.
If the trailing edge is skewing toward the front of the machine, insert a spacer [B] under the rear
end of the bracket and tighten the screws.
-or-
412
2.Installation
If the trailing edge is skewing toward the rear of the machine, insert a spacer [A] under the front
end of the bracket and tighten the screws.
5. Do another run to check the adjustment. If skew is still present, insert another spacer.
• Each spacer is 2 mm thick.
• Only two spacers are provided, so the maximum adjustment is 4 mm (using two spacers).
Do this procedure to confirm that the paper is centered in the paper path.
1. Make sure that the I/F cable of the unit is connected to the upstream device.
2. Disconnect the unit to the left of the unit to be tested.
3. Execute a run by feeding paper from Tray 2 of the host machine.
4. When each sheet exits, check the position of the paper on the scale to see if the paper is centered.
• Read the rear scale for DLT-size paper
• Read the front scale for A3-size paper.
• The scale lines are spaced 2 mm apart.
5. The paper must not deviate more than ±2 mm on the scale.
413
2.Installation
-or-
If the edge of the paper is ±2 mm off the center line on the scale, adjustment is required. Do the
procedure in the next section.
2. On the connecting bracket attached to the upstream device, loosen screws , , , and .
3. Remove bracket [A], rotate it 90 degrees, and re-fasten the screw. Changing the position of this
bracket aligns the oval cut-out horizontally and frees the connecting bracket so that it can slide
from side to side.
4. Look at the scale [B].
5. Slide the bracket to the left or right and tighten the screw.
6. If the deviation from center was toward the front, slide the bracket to the rear and tighten the screw
.
-or-
If the deviation from center was toward the rear, side the bracket to the front and tighten the screw
.
7. Tighten screws , , and .
8. Do another test run, so that you can check the results of the adjustment.
414
2.Installation
Accessories
Installation Procedure
• Turn the machine off and disconnect the machine power cord before you start this procedure.
1. Remove the filament tape [A].
• Move the mail box carefully. It is easy to cause damage to the corner leaf plate [B].
415
2.Installation
2. If the Cover Interposer Tray CI4040 is installed on the Finisher SR4120 or Booklet Finisher
SR4130, remove it.
• The Cover Interposer Tray CI4040 and mail box cannot be installed on the finisher at the
same time.
3. Remove the finisher from the main machine.
• Disconnect the finisher connector [A] from the machine.
416
2.Installation
• Open the front door [A] of the finisher, and pull the lock lever [B].
Be careful that the guide plates and other parts inside the finisher do not become deformed.
417
2.Installation
418
2.Installation
7. Attach the mail box [A] to the top of the finisher (M3 x 8).
8. Attach the 9 trays [B] to the mail box.
9. Give the decals [C] to the customer. The customer will write on these and attach them at the
correct location.
419
2.Installation
420
2.Installation
Scanner Heater
The scanner heater is an option for the main machine. Check the accessories and their quantities
against this list.
No. Description Q'ty
1 Scanner Heater 1
2 Screws M3x6 2
421
2.Installation
8. At the right front corner of the machine [A], turn the scanner motor belt and move the 1st scanner
unit to the left edge of the lens cover [B].
9. With the harness on the left, slide the scanner heater [A] under the 2nd carriage, and then arrange
422
2.Installation
10. Pull the heater harness through the left side of the scanner unit.
11. Disconnect the left edge cover [A], and then remove it, so you can see cut-out [B].
12. Insert a screwdriver into the cut-out [A], and then loosely fasten the left end of the heater.
13. Attach the right end of the heater [B].
423
2.Installation
15. On the left side of the scanner unit, clamp the heater harness, and then connect it to the harness
pre-installed on the side of the machine.
424
2.Installation
Internal Options
List of Slots
Slot Option
[A] USB port -
[B] USB mini -
[C] I/F slot A • USB Device Server Option Type M19*1
• Extended USB Board Type M19
• IEEE 1284 Interface Board Type M19
• IEEE 802.11a/g/n Interface Unit Type M19
• File Format Converter Type M19
Only one option can be connected at one time.
[D] I/F slot B • Copy Connector Type M25
• USB Device Server Option Type M19*1
Only one option can be connected at one time.
*1: USB Device Server Option Type M19 can be connected to either of I/F slot A and B.
425
2.Installation
Accessories
Installation
• Before doing this procedure, turn the machine off and disconnect its power cord from the
power source.
• Before you handle the boards, touch a metal surface to discharge accumulated static charge
from your hands. A static discharge could damage the boards.
• Handle the boards carefully to avoid damaging them.
426
2.Installation
• To avoid damage to the board, never tighten these knob screws with a screwdriver.
4. In the same way, install the other board in the right slot of the other machine.
5. Connect the provided LAN cable to both boards.
427
2.Installation
Component Check
No Description Q'ty
1 USB Cable 1
2 Interface Board 1
3 Ferrite Core 2
4 Cable Ties 2
When installing the USB device server option, make sure that the labels 'USB-A' and 'Ethernet' are
428
2.Installation
upside down.
Installation Procedure
When installing this option, turn OFF the main power and unplug the power cord from the wall socket. If
installing without turning OFF the main power, an electric shock or a malfunction may occur.
The USB device server option has an IP address stored on the PCB. This is different from the
machine's IP address. The IP address and other network settings of the USB device server option must
be configured after installing this option.
1. Turn OFF the main power of the machine, and unplug the power cord from the wall socket.
2. Remove the cover [A].
429
2.Installation
• The USB Device Server Option Type M19 can be connected to either of I/F slot A and B.
4. Insert the interface board [A] into the slot.
5. Insert the USB cable [A] into the USB port (Type A) on the machine I/F.
6. Insert the other side of the USB cable [B] into the USB port (Type B) on this option board.
7. Attach the ferrite cores to the Ethernet cable, while looping the cable at 3 cm (approx. 1.2 inch) [A]
430
2.Installation
8. Only for installing this option in North America, bind both cores with cable ties [A] as shown below.
9. Insert the Ethernet cable [A] into the Ethernet port on this option.
431
2.Installation
10. Insert the other end of the Ethernet cable to a PC for network setting.
11. Plug the power cord into the wall socket and turn on the main power of the machine.
Do not unplug the USB cable while the machine is recognizing this option. It may take between 30
seconds to 1 minute to finish recognizing it (the LEDs on the Ethernet port of this option light up
after recognizing this option; see below). If unplugged, connect the cable again.
12. Make sure that the machine recognizes this option correctly by doing one of the following:
1. Access the option’s IP address from a web browser.
2. Ping the option’s IP address from a command prompt on a Windows PC in the same network
as the mainframe. If the IP address cannot be found (DHCP server), use the MAC address.
This is the number printed on the seal attached to the printed circuit board for the USB server.
3. Use "RX" + the option’s MAC address and access a web browser. Example:
http://RX0080926A3264
4. Ping "RX" + "MAC address" from the command prompt on a windows PC which is on the
same network as the mainframe.
• When installing the USB Device Server Option Type M19, the installation status is not shown
on the Configuration Page.
432
2.Installation
• The customer should keep the slot covers which were removed.
When this option is properly installed and recognized by the main machine, the LED indicators light up
under the following conditions.
If the machine which has this option enters into the energy save mode, you cannot print because there
will be a communication error. Follow the instructions below to disable the machine’s entering into the
energy save mode.
1. Enter SP mode, and then set SP5-191-001 (Power Setting: Power Str) to "0 (Off)".
IP Address Setting
This section describes how to set an IP address on this option manually. Note that you can set an IP
address which is not only on the same network segment but also on a different network segment to
share a single printer with devices in multiple networks.
You cannot change the IP address for this option from the operation panel of the main machine. The
setting must be done from a web browser on your PC.
The network setting of this option is initially assigned as follows:
IP address: 192.168.100.100 / Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
The network setting of your PC must be in the same network segment to change the network setting of
this option.
1. Make a note of the current network settings of your PC.
2. Change the IP address on your PC to [192.168.100.xxx (*0 - 255)].
3. Change the subnet mask on your PC to [255.255.255.0].
4. Open a web browser.
433
2.Installation
434
2.Installation
You can only install one of the following units at the same time: IEEE 802.11a/g/n Interface Unit Type
M19, IEEE 1284 Interface Board Type M19, File Format Converter Type M19.
Component Check
Installation Procedure
When installing this option, turn OFF the main power and unplug the power cord from the wall socket. If
installing without turning OFF the main power, an electric shock or a malfunction may occur. Do not put
your hand into the controller box. It will result in a malfunction or injury. Before doing any work, touch a
metal object to discharge static electricity from the body.
1. Remove the slot cover [A] from the I/F slot A.
The customer should keep the slot covers which were removed.
436
2.Installation
• You can only install one of the following units at the same time: IEEE 802.11a/g/n Interface
Unit Type M19, IEEE 1284 Interface Board Type M19, File Format Converter Type M19.
Component List
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following list.
No Description Q'ty
1 IEEE 1284 Interface Board 1
2 FCC document 1
3 Notes for users 1
Installation Procedure
• When installing this option, turn OFF the main power and unplug the power cord from the wall
socket. If installing without turning OFF the main power, an electric shock or a malfunction may
occur.
• Do not put your hand into the controller box. It will result in a malfunction or injury.
• Before doing any work, touch a metal object to discharge static electricity from the body. There
is a possibility that the IEEE 1284 Interface Board may malfunction due to static electricity.
1. Remove the slot cover [A] from the I/F slot A.
437
2.Installation
2. Insert the IEEE1284 interface board into the slot A and fasten it with the screws.
3. Turn ON the main power.
4. Check that the system settings list is output, and that the board is recognized correctly.
The customer should keep the slot covers which were removed.
438
2.Installation
Component List
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following list.
No Description Q'ty
1 IEEE802.11a/g/n Unit 1
2 Clamps 8
3 Velcro Fasteners 2
4 Notes for Users 2
Installation Procedure
• When installing this option, turn OFF the main power and unplug the power cord from the wall
socket. If installing without turning OFF the main power, an electric shock or a malfunction may
occur.
439
2.Installation
• Do not put your hand into the controller box. It will result in a malfunction or injury.
• Before doing any work, touch a metal object to discharge static electricity from the body. There
is a possibility that the wireless LAN board may malfunction due to static electricity.
• When using wireless LAN (IEEE802.11 b/g/n:2.4-GHz band), this radio product uses the 2.4-
GHz band. Check that industrial, scientific and medical devices using the same frequency
bands, such as a microwave oven or a cordless telephone, are not used nearby.
• If there is interference, communication may become unstable. Check that there are no devices
likely to cause interference in the surrounding area.
2. Insert the wireless LAN board [A] into the slot A and fasten it with the screws.
• Press the wireless LAN board firmly in, and check it is firmly connected.
• The customer should keep the slot covers which were removed.
440
2.Installation
441
2.Installation
6. Set the cables of Antenna 1 and Antenna 2 in the 8 clamps and close them.
• Make sure that the cables are not slack. Keep them wired tightly along the covers.
7. Turn ON the main machine.
8. Make sure that the machine can recognize the option: User Tools > Machine Features > Printer
Features > List/Test Print > Configuration Page.
You may have to move the machine if the reception is not clear.
• Make sure that the machine is not located near an appliance or any type of equipment that
generates strong magnetic fields.
• Put the machine as close as possible to the access point.
Go into the User Tools mode and do the procedure below. These settings take effect every time the
machine is powered on.
• Select “Interface Settings” > “Network” > “LAN Type”. The “LAN Type” (default: Ethernet)
must be set for either Ethernet or wireless LAN.
3. Select “Interface Settings” > “Wireless LAN”. Only the wireless LAN options show.
4. Set the “Communication Mode“.
5. Enter the “SSID setting”. (The setting is case sensitive.)
6. Set the “Ad-hoc Channel”. You need this setting when Ad Hoc Mode is selected. The allowed range
for the channel settings may vary for different countries.
• For mainly Europe and Asia
2412 - 2462 MHz (1 - 11 channels)
5180 - 5240 MHz (36, 40, 44 and 48 channels)
(default: 11)
442
2.Installation
• In some countries, only the following channels are available: 2412 - 2462 MHz (1 - 11
channels)
• For mainly North America
2412 - 2462 MHz (1 - 11 channels)
5180 - 5240 MHz (36, 40, 44 and 48 channels)
(default: 11)
7. Set the “Security Method” to specify the encryption of the Wireless LAN.
• The “WEP” (Wired Equivalent Privacy) setting is designed to protect wireless data
transmission. The same WEP key is required on the receiving side in order to unlock encoded
data. There are 64 bit and 128 bit WEP keys.
• Range of Allowed Settings:
64 bit: 10 characters
128 bit: 26 characters
• Specify “WPA2” when “Communication Mode” is set to “Infrastructure Mode”. Set the “WPA2
Authent. Method”.
• WPA2 Authent. Method:
Select either “WPA2-PSK” or “WPA2”.
If you select “WPA2-PSK”, enter the pre-shared key (PSK) of 8-63 characters in ASCII
code.
When “WPA2” is selected, authentication settings and certificate installation settings are
required.
8. Press “Wireless LAN Signal” to check the machine's radio wave status using the operation panel.
• Press “Restore Factory Defaults” to initialize the wireless LAN settings.
The following SP commands and UP modes can be set for IEEE 802.11
SP No. Name Function
5840 Channel MAX Sets the maximum range of the channel settings for the country.
006
5840 Channel MIN Sets the minimum range of the channels settings allowed for your
007 country.
5840 Transmission Sets the transmission speed.
008 Speed Auto, 54 Mbps, 48 Mbps, 36 Mbps, 24 Mbps, 18 Mbps, 12 Mbps, 9
Mbps, 6 Mbps, 11 Mbps, 5.5 Mbps, 2 Mbps, 1 Mbps (default: Auto).
5840 WEP Key Select Used to select the WEP key (Default: 00).
011
UP SSID Used to confirm the current SSID setting.
443
2.Installation
444
2.Installation
• You can only install one of the following units at the same time: IEEE 802.11a/g/n Interface
Unit Type M19, IEEE 1284 Interface Board Type M19, File Format Converter Type M19.
Component List
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following list.
No Description Q'ty
1 File Format Converter 1
2 Notes for Users 1
Installation Procedure
• When installing this option, turn OFF the main power and unplug the power cord from the wall
socket. If installing without turning OFF the main power, an electric shock or a malfunction may
occur.
• Do not put your hand into the controller box. It will result in a malfunction or injury.
• Before doing any work, touch a metal object to discharge static electricity from the body. There
is a possibility that the board may malfunction due to static electricity.
1. Remove the slot cover [A] from the I/F slot A.
2. Insert the file format converter into the slot A and fasten it with the screws.
3. Check the system settings list is output, and that the option is recognized correctly.
445
2.Installation
User Tools > Machine Features > Printer Features > List/Test Print > Configuration Page
The customer should keep the slot covers which were removed.
446
2.Installation
Overview
The service program "SD Card Appli Move" (SP5-873) lets you move application programs from one
SD card to another SD card.
Be very careful when you do the SD Card Appli Move procedure:
• The data necessary for authentication is transferred with the application program from an SD card
to another SD card. Authentication fails if you try to use the SD card after you move the application
program from one card to another card.
• Do not use the SD card if it has been used before for other purposes. Normal operation is not
guaranteed when such an SD card is used.
• Open the tandem tray [A] and remove the paper cassette decal [B]. Keep the SD card inside after
you move the application program from one card to another card. This is done for the following
reasons:
• The SD card can be the only proof that the user is licensed to use the application program.
• You may need to check the SD card and its data to solve a problem in the future.
Move Exec
The menu "Move Exec" (SP5-873-001) lets you move application programs from the original SD card to
another SD card.
• Do not turn ON the write protect switch of the system SD card or application SD card on the
machine. If the write protect switch is ON, a download error (e.g. Error Code 44) occurs during
a firmware upgrade or application merge.
1. Turn the main switch off.
2. Make sure that a target SD card is in SD Card Slot 1 [A]. The application program is moved to this
SD card.
3. Insert the source SD card with the application program in SD Card Slot 2 [B].The application
447
2.Installation
Undo Exec
"Undo Exec" (SP5-873-002) lets you move back application programs from an SD card in SD Card Slot
1 (upper) to the original SD card in SD Card Slot 2 (lower). You can use this program when, for
example, you have mistakenly copied some programs by using Move Exec (SP5-873-001).
• Do not turn ON the write protect switch of the system SD card or application SD card on the
machine. If the write protect switch is ON, a download error (e.g. Error Code 44) occurs during
a firmware upgrade or application merge.
1. Turn the main switch off.
2. Insert the original SD card in SD Card Slot 2 [B]. The application program is copied back into this
card.
3. Insert the SD card with the application program in SD Card Slot 1 [A]. The application program is
448
2.Installation
Caution
• If the SD card is lost, it will be impossible to determine which application has been installed in
the case of a machine failure.
• Also, the empty SD card will required when moving back an application.
449
2.Installation
1. Pull out the tandem tray [A] and remove the paper cassette decal [B].
450
2.Installation
451
2.Installation
Accessories
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following list.
No. Description Q’ty
1 PostScript3 Emulation SD Card 1
2 Decal 1
Installation Procedure
When installing more than one SD card, perform the merge operation (SD Card Appli Move).
1. Remove the SD card slot cover [A].
2. Insert the SD card in SD slot 2 (lower) [A] with its label face towards the front of the machine.
452
2.Installation
6. Print out the "Configuration Page", and then check if this option is correctly recognized.
User Tools > Machine Features > Printer Features > List/Test Page > Configuration Page
• The PDF firmware installed as standard contains a program required to print PS3 data as
default. However, this PS3 program is normally disabled.
• The PS3 firmware is a dongle (key) which enables PS3 data printing functions. When the PS3
firmware is installed, the PS3 program in the PDF firmware is enabled. Due to this
specification, the self-diagnosis result report shows the ROM part number/software version of
the PDF firmware contained in the PS3 program.
453
2.Installation
Accessories
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following list.
No. Description Q’ty
1. SD Card 1
Installation Procedure
When installing more than one SD card, perform the merge operation (SD Card Appli Move).
454
2.Installation
2. Insert the SD card (OCR Unit) in SD card slot 1 (upper) [A] or SD slot 2 (lower) [B] with its label
face towards the front of the machine. Then push it slowly into the SD slot until you hear a click.
On the first run, SP5-878-004 links the SD card, and on the second run, copies dictionary data.
8. Turn OFF the main power.
9. Remove the SD card from the SD card slot.
Keep the SD card in the SD card storage location of the MFP. The original SD card is needed in the
455
2.Installation
• After installation, the OCR setting can be changed on the "OCR setting" screen.
• When setting up OCR, set [OCR setting] to [Yes]. (Default setting: [No])
Recovery Procedure
When this option is installed, a function is saved on the HDD, and ID information on the SD card is
saved in the NVRAM. Therefore, when replacing the HDD or NVRAM, this option must be reinstalled.
456
2.Installation
Accessories
Installation Procedure
When installing more than one SD card, perform the merge operation (SD Card Appli Move).
1. Remove the SD card slot cover [A].
2. Insert the SD card in SD slot 1 (upper) [A] with its label face towards the front of the machine.
457
2.Installation
User Tools > Machine Features > Printer Features > List/Test Page > Configuration Page
458
2.Installation
Accessories
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following list.
No Description Q'ty
1 IPDS Emulation SD Card 1
2 Decal 1
- EULA Sheet 1
- Caution Sheet 1
- CD-ROM 1
Installation Procedure
When installing more than one SD card, perform the merge operation (SD Card Appli Move).
1. Remove the SD card slot cover [A].
2. Insert the SD card in SD slot 1 (upper) [A] with its label face towards the front of the machine.
459
2.Installation
460
2.Installation
Overview
The machine's hard disk stores all document data from the Copier, Printer, and Scanner functions. It
also stores the data of users’ Document Server and code counters, and the Address Book. To prevent
data on the hard disk being leaked before disposing of the machine, you can overwrite all data stored
on the hard disk (Erase All Memory). You can also automatically overwrite temporarily-stored data (Auto
Erase Memory).
The function of this option is completely the same as the Data Overwrite Security in Security Functions,
which is standard on this machine. (Security Function Installation (MP C6503/C8003))
This option should be installed only for the customer who requires the CC certified Data Overwrite
Security function.
Component List
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following list.
No. Description Q’ty
1. SD Card 1
- Comments Sheet 1
- Operating Instructions CD-ROM 1
1. Confirm that the Data Overwrite Security unit SD card is the correct type for the machine. The
correct type for this machine is "Type M19".
• If you install any version other than "Type M19" for this machine, you will have to replace
the NVRAM and do this installation procedure again.
2. Make sure that the following settings are not at their factory default values:
• Supervisor login password
• Administrator login name
461
2.Installation
• See the Operating Instructions (Security Guide) for the factory default values.
Before opening the corrugated envelope, make sure that the seal has not been broken or peeled off. If
the seal has been broken or peeled off (even partially), this is considered an arrival defect. Note that
once the seal is peeled off, this will leave a mark on the bag.
• You must check the box seals to make sure that they were not removed after the items were
sealed in the box at the factory before you do the installation.
1. Check the box seals [A] on each corner of the box.
• Make sure that a tape is attached to each corner.
• The surfaces of the tapes must be blank. If you see "VOID" on the tapes, do not install the
components in the box.
462
2.Installation
2. If the surfaces of the tapes do not show "VOID", remove them from the corners of the box.
3. You can see the "VOID" marks [B] when you remove each seal. In this condition, they cannot be
attached to the box again.
Installation Procedure
When installing more than one SD card, perform the merge operation (SD Card Appli Move).
1. Turn the main power off, and then remove the power plug and cables that are connected.
2. Remove the SD card slot cover [A].
3. Insert the DataOverwriteSecurity Unit Type M19 SD card in SD slot 1 (upper) [A] with its label face
towards the front of the machine.
If the customer continues using the same hard disk, the overwriting of the data stored on the disk
before the option is installed cannot be guaranteed. It is highly recommended to replace the hard
disk with a new one.
8. Set SP5-836-001 (Capture Function (0:Off 1:On)) to a value of 0 (disable).
9. Execute SP5-878-001 ([Option Setup: Data Overwrite Security)
If the installation fails, "Installation failed" is displayed when this SP is executed.
10. Print out the System Settings List and make sure that the option was installed successfully.
11. Reconnect the network cable.
12. Execute SP5-990-005 (SP print mode Diagnostic Report).
Make sure to shut down and reboot the machine once before printing the SMC. Otherwise, the
latest settings may not be collected when the SMC is printed.
13. Make sure that ROM number "D3BC5757A" and firmware version "1.02" appear in both of the
following areas on the report (they must match):
• "ROM Number / Firmware Version" - "HDD Format Option"
• "Loading Program"
7. Press [On].
464
2.Installation
The Random Numbers method overwrites the data using random numbers. You can set the
overwrite to be performed anywhere from 1-9 times, with a default of 3 times.
11. Press [OK].
12. Make sure that the Data Overwrite icon is displayed in the bottom right hand corner of the screen.
13. Take a test copy, and then make sure that the Data Overwrite icon changes from "Dirty" (solid) to
"Dirty" (blinking), and then to "Clear".
• If the Data Overwrite icon does not change to Clear, check to see if there are any active
Sample Print or Locked Print jobs. A Sample Print or Locked Print job can only be overwritten
after it has been executed.
• The Dirty icon blinks while an overwrite is in progress.
• If you use your machine for a while with Auto Erase Memory disabled, and then suddenly
enable it, the overwrite process may take 10 or more hours depending on HDD usage.
Data Overwrite icon:
Icon This icon is lit when there is temporary data to be overwritten, and blinks
[1] during overwriting.
465
2.Installation
SP descriptions
• SP5-801-014 (Memory Clear: Clear DCS Setting)
Initializes the DCS (Delivery Control Service) settings.
• SP5-832-001 (HDD Formatting : HDD Formatting (ALL))
Initializes the hard disk.
• SP5-832-002 (HDD Formatting : HDD Formatting (IMH))
Initializes the hard disk.
• SP5-836-001 (Capture Settings: Capture Function (0:Off 1:On))
With this function disabled, the settings related to the capture feature cannot be initialized,
displayed, or selected.
• 5-878-001 (Data Overwrite Security)
Enables the Data Overwrite Security unit. Press "EXECUTE" on the operation panel. Then turn the
machine off and on.
• SP5-990-005 (SP Print Mode: Diagnostic Report).
Prints the configuration sheets of the system and user settings : SMC.
Make sure to shut down and reboot the machine once before printing the SMC. Otherwise, the
latest settings may not be collected when the SMC is printed.
466
2.Installation
Component Check
Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list.
No. Description Q’ty
1 Key Counter Interface Board 1
2 Harness Clamp 1
3 Stud Stay 4
4 Band 1
5 Tapping Screw: M3 x 6 4
6 Harness (Not used) 1
7 Harness (Not used) 1
8 Harness (Not used) 1
Installation Procedure
• Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following procedure.
1. Remove the rear middle cover. (Exterior Covers)
467
2.Installation
468
2.Installation
5. Install the optional counter interface board [A] on the four stud stays.
6. Connect the harness [A] to CN3 [B] on the optional counter interface board.
7. Remove the part [A] of the rear middle cover with a flathead screwdriver.
8. Connect the harness from the optional counter device to CN4 [A] on the optional counter interface
469
2.Installation
board.
9. Fix the ground cable with a screw and clamp it together with the unused connector (white, 7-pin).
10. Route the harness from the optional counter device [A].
470
2.Installation
Accessory Check
Installation Procedure
• When installing this option, turn OFF the main power and unplug the power cord from the wall
socket. If installing without turning OFF the main power, an electric shock or a malfunction may
occur.
471
2.Installation
1. Remove the screw covers [B] on the back of the operation panel. Remove the arm upper cover [A].
2. Remove the screw cover [B] from the rear cover [A].
472
2.Installation
4. Remove the cover [A] from the right side of the operation panel.
5. Insert the USB cable [A] into the media slot of the operation panel.
6. Route the USB cable [A] on the back side of the operation panel, and then secure it together with
the operation panel harness [B] as shown below.
473
2.Installation
8. Pull out the USB cable [A] from the cut-out [B].
12. Insert the hooks [A] of the upper cover into the base cover [B], and then attach the upper cover to
474
2.Installation
When removing the upper cover from the base cover, release the hooks of the upper cover by
pushing the upper cover [A] as shown below.
13. Peel off the tape [A] from the mounts on the back side of the base cover.
475
2.Installation
14. Attach the base cover to the upper front cover [A] of the main machine.
When attaching the base cover to the upper front cover of the main machine, align the base cover
with the lines [A] and [B] as shown below.
476
2.Installation
Accessory Check
Installation Procedure
• When installing this option, turn OFF the main power and unplug the power cord from the wall
socket. If installing without turning OFF the main power, an electric shock or a malfunction may
occur.
1. Remove the following covers.
• Upper front cover (Upper Front Cover (MP C6503/C8003))
• Upper rear cover (Upper Rear Cover (Small))
• Upper right cover (Upper Left Cover, Upper Right Cover)
477
2.Installation
2. Remove the screws and clamps on the lower cover of the operation panel.
4. Turn over the lower cover of the panel, and route the USB cable [A].
478
2.Installation
• Attach the sponge flush with the corner of the hole [A].
479
2.Installation
480
2.Installation
Accessory Check
No. Description
1 IC Card Reader Upper Cover
2 IC Card Reader Base Cover
3 IC Card Reader Spacer
4 Sponge
- RoHS Decal
- RoHS Label
Installation Procedure
• When installing this option, turn OFF the main power and unplug the power cord from the wall
socket. If installing without turning OFF the main power, an electric shock or a malfunction may
occur.
481
2.Installation
1. Remove the screw covers [B] on the back of the operation panel. Remove the arm upper cover [A].
2. Remove the screw cover [B] from the rear cover [A].
482
2.Installation
4. Remove the cover [A] from the right side of the operation panel.
5. Insert the USB cable [A] into the media slot of the operation panel.
6. Route the USB cable [A] on the back side of the operation panel, and then secure it together with
the operation panel harness [B] as shown below.
483
2.Installation
8. Pull out the USB cable [A] from the cut-out [B].
12. Insert the hooks [A] of the upper cover into the base cover [B], and then attach the upper cover to
the base cover.
484
2.Installation
When removing the upper cover from the base cover, release the hooks of the upper cover by
pushing the upper cover [A] as shown below.
13. Peel off the tape [A] from the mounts on the back side of the base cover.
14. Attach the base cover to the upper front cover [A] of the main machine.
When attaching the base cover to the upper front cover of the main machine, align the base cover
with the lines [A] and [B] as shown below.
485
2.Installation
486
2.Installation
Accessory Check
Installation Procedure
• When installing this option, turn OFF the main power and unplug the power cord from the wall
socket. If installing without turning OFF the main power, an electric shock or a malfunction may
occur.
• An IC card reader and a USB cable are not included with this unit. The customers must obtain
these themselves, and the technicians must install them.
1. Remove the following covers.
• Upper front cover (Upper Front Cover (MP C6503/C8003))
• Upper rear cover (Upper Rear Cover (Small))
• Upper right cover (Upper Left Cover, Upper Right Cover)
487
2.Installation
2. Remove the screws and clamps on the lower cover of the operation panel.
4. Turn over the lower cover of the panel, and route the USB cable [A].
488
2.Installation
• Attach the sponge flush with the corner of the hole [A].
489
2.Installation
490
2.Installation
Common Adjustments
• The main machine should be installed first and adjusted to level front-to-back, and side-to-side.
• Note the settings on the leveling gauge. Due to the length of the paper path with optional peripheral
units installed, it is extremely important that every unit be leveled to match the front-to-back and
side-to-side measurements of the main machine.
• The height and level of each peripheral unit must be adjusted at installation.
• The height and level of each unit must be adjusted before testing for the presence of skew and
checking that side-to-side registration is correct.
1. Use the wide end [A] of the accessory wrench provided with the machine to adjust the front and
rear feet of the main machine.
2. The narrow end of the wrench [B] is for the feet of the peripheral units.
• The upper bolt is spot-welded to the frame and does not move.
491
2.Installation
4. Set a level on the front, rear, and side edges to determine if the unit is level.
5. Adjust the height at each corner until the unit is level.
6. Check the results of the adjustments.
• The tops of the peripheral units on the left where the units are joined must be at the same
height.
Pro C5200S/C5210S
MP C6503/C8003
492
2.Installation
• Make sure that the plate at the paper exit on the left side of the main machine [A] moves freely
and is not bent. It must be able to move to handle thick paper.
• Between the right side [B] of the main machine and the LCIT, make sure that the LCIT guide
plate moves freely and does not interfere with the main machine guide plate.
The paper feed path is extremely long when many peripheral units are installed. In such a long path,
the cumulative effect of paper skew or deviation in side-to-side registration may require adjustment.
• Skew [A] occurs when the trailing edge of the paper rotates away from the direction of paper feed.
• If side-to-side registration shift [B] occurs, the sheet remains straight but shifts left or right away
from center of the paper path.
• Before adjusting skew manually, be sure to enter the SP mode and set SP1-206-001 to
"2" (OFF). This disables side-to-side registration in the main machine’s registration unit.
Scales
493
2.Installation
• Skew and side-to-side registration are checked with graduated scales (shown below) where paper
exits the units.
• The scales are provided so that you can visually check and measure the amount of skew or
deviation in side-to-side registration.
• A scale for detecting skew and checking side-to-side registration ("S-to-S") is provided on the
following peripheral units.
• Correction for both skew and side-to-side registration are possible.
Name Skew S- Comment
to-S
LCIT --- --- Correction is done in the registration unit of the main machine.
Other Yes Yes Correction for both skew and side-to-side registration are possible
Peripheral when the unit is attached to the upstream device with the single-
Units piece bracket (see the red lines in the illustration later in this
section).
• Use either the rear scale or front scale, depending on the type of paper used in your area:
• Rear [A]: DLT SEF (LT LEF for Ring Binder)
• Front [B]: A3 SEF (A4 LEF for Ring Binder)
• The scale is located at the paper exit for each peripheral unit.
The illustration shows the scale on the left side of the Booklet Finisher tray:
494
2.Installation
No. Name
[1] LCIT
[2] Main Machine
[3] Decurl Unit
[4] Buffer Pass Unit
[5] Two-tray Cover Interposer
[6] Multi-folding Unit
[7] One-tray Cover Interposer
[8] Finisher (SR4110*1, SR4120, SR4130, SR5070*2, SR5080*2)
*1 MP C8003 only
*2 Pro C5200S/C5210S only
495
2.Installation
• Here are some general rules for testing and adjusting for paper skew or a shift in side-to-side
registration.
1. After installation of each peripheral device, do some test prints and check for the presence of
skew, and check that side-to-side registration is correct.
2. When you detect a problem with skew or side-to-side registration, do the adjustment on the
connecting bracket attached to the peripheral unit upstream of the unit where the problem
occurred.
3. Side-to-side registration is corrected by shifting the upstream connecting bracket left or right.
4. Skew is eliminated by inserting spacers (shims) under the rear or front end of the connecting
bracket. These attached by screws to the peripheral units before they leave the factory.
Do this procedure to confirm that the paper is centered in the paper path.
1. Make sure that the I/F cable of the unit is connected to the upstream device.
2. Disconnect the unit to the left of the unit to be tested.
3. Execute a run by feeding paper from Tray 2 of the host machine.
4. When each sheet exits, check the position of the paper on the scale to see if the paper is centered.
• Read the rear scale for DLT-size paper
• Read the front scale for A3-size paper.
• The scale lines are spaced 2 mm apart.
5. The paper must not deviate more than ±2 mm on the scale.
496
2.Installation
Each peripheral unit for this machine has the same single-piece connection bracket shown below. This
adjustment can be done for every unit on the connection bracket attached to the upstream device
1. Enter the SP mode and set SP1-206-001 to "2" (OFF).
2. Disconnect the peripheral unit from the upstream device.
3. On the connecting bracket attached to the upstream device, loosen screw , , , and .
4. Remove bracket [A] ( x1), rotate it 90 degrees, and re-fasten the screw. Changing the position of
this bracket aligns the oval cut-out horizontally and frees the connecting bracket so it can slide from
side to side.
5. Look at the scale [B].
6. Slide the bracket to the left or right and tighten the screw.
7. If the deviation from center was toward the front, slide the bracket to the rear and tighten screw .
-or-
If the deviation from center was toward the rear, side the bracket to the front and tighten screw .
8. Tighten screws , , and .
9. Do another test run, so that you can check the results of the adjustment.
10. When you are finished, enter the SP mode and re-set SP1-206-001 to "1".
497
2.Installation
Correcting Skew
Removing Spacers
1. Enter the SP mode and set SP1-206-001 to "2" (Off).
2. Disconnect the peripheral unit from the upstream device.
3. Remove the spacers from the peripheral unit where the problem occurred.
The photos below show where you can find the spacers for each unit.
Multi-folding Unit
498
2.Installation
Inserting Spacers
1. Loosen the screws of the connecting bracket attached to the peripheral upstream of the unit where
the problem occurred.
2. Insert a spacer and tighten the screws.
If the trailing edge is skewing toward the front of the machine, insert a spacer [B] under the rear
end of the bracket and tighten the screws.
-or-
If the trailing edge is skewing toward the rear of the machine, insert a spacer [A] under the front
end of the bracket and tighten the screws.
499
2.Installation
3. Do another run to check the adjustment. If skew is still present, insert another spacer.
• Each spacer is 2 mm thick.
• Only two spacers are provided, so the maximum adjustment is 4 mm (using two spacers).
4. Enter the SP mode and re-set SP1-206-001 to "1".
500
3.Preventive Maintenance
3. Preventive Maintenance
501
3.Preventive Maintenance
PM Parts Settings
PM parts replacement procedure for this model is different from many older models. If the PM counter is
reset in “PM parts display”, a flag is set (SP3-701-XXX) and initial process SPs are run automatically for
the replaced part. See below for details. If the PM counter is reset in SP7-622-XXX, the procedure is
the same as many older models.
• If the counter for the Lubricant Bar is reset in SP7-622-XX, make sure to set SP3-701-XXX to
"1". Otherwise, the lubricant end detection (SP3-810-XXX) will not be reset and the banner
message indicating near-end will remain on the operation panel.
1. Turn OFF the power on the operation panel button, and unplug the AC power cord.
2. Turn OFF the main power switch located inside the door.
3. Replace the PM parts.
502
3.Preventive Maintenance
4. Plug in the AC power cord and turn on the main power switch with either the bypass tray door [A]
or vertical transport door [B] opened.
• Make sure to open either the bypass tray or vertical transport door before turning on the
main power. Otherwise, problems could occur as a result of unnecessary initialization
processes.
5. Enter the SP mode and push the PM parts counter reset button in the PM Parts display. (PM
Counter Display)
• Pressing the reset button in the PM Counter Display does not reset the PM counter. The
PM counter is reset after closing the door in step 6.
6. Close the bypass tray door (or the vertical transport door). The machine will reset the PM counters
automatically followed by an initialization process.
7. Execute initialization in the SP mode, if required. (For details about which SPs to execute, see the
replacement and adjustment procedures for each part.)
8. Enter SP5-990-004 and check the counter values in the SMC logging data.
Make sure that the PM counters for the replaced units are "0" in the PM parts display.
If a PM counter for a unit that had been replaced does not display “0,” reset that counter in the
procedure described above.
9. Exit the SP mode.
• The machine will automatically stop when the PM counters for the fusing cleaning web and
drum lubricant bar reach their yield.
• Counter clearance is not required when replacing the developer, because this counter is
cleared by SP3-024 (Developer Fill: Execute).
• Counter clearance triggers the initialization of the parts described in this section. When
initialization is required for these parts, open the front door and clear the counter.
503
3.Preventive Maintenance
1. Clean the exposure glasses (for DF and book scanning). Check the PM table to see if any other
cleaning is scheduled at this time.
2. Display the "Machine Features" screen.
• Pro C5200S/C5210S:
• When using the standard operation panel: Press the "User Tools" key.
• When using the smart operation panel: Press the "User Tools" icon, and then press
"Machine Features".
• MP C6503/C8003: Press the "User Tools" icon, and then press "Machine Features".
3. Press "Maintenance", and then press "Auto Color Calibration".
4. Perform auto color calibration for the copier mode & printer mode.
5. Exit the "Machine Features" screen, and then enter the SP mode.
6. Do the "Forced line position adjustment"
• First do SP2-111-3 (Mode c).
• Then do SP2-111-1 (Mode a).
• Check the process by viewing the operation panel to confirm successful results. Results can
also be viewed in SP 2-194-10 to 12.
7. Exit the SP mode.
Adjustment for the Nip Width of the Fusing Unit (Pro C5200S/C5210S only)
After installing the new fusing unit for Pro C5200S/C5210S, adjust the nip width of the fusing unit with
the following procedure.
1. Open the drawer unit [A].
2. Check the label [B] attached to the fusing front cover [A].
The adjustment value for the fusing nip width is printed on the label.
504
3.Preventive Maintenance
3. Take a note of the first half of the number [A] and the second half of the number [B] on the label.
Operation Check
505
3.Preventive Maintenance
PM Counter Display
The PM Counter main menu and sub menu allow you to view the PM counts for both units and
individual components.
There are menus for estimated usage ratio, remaining days, and commissioning status report. The
machine applies the running distance calculation to display the usage ratio and remaining days of parts.
With this system, PM can be scheduled with more accuracy in accordance with the machine usage
conditions unique to every user. Please refer to the usage ratio and remaining days when doing PM for
the machine.
Since the PM parts yield is based on set conditions (for example, Pro C5200S/C5210S: A4LEF, 26P/J,
FC70%, etc), if a machine is used in an unexpected manner, parts could reach their life before the
prescribed yield (EM), or could exceed the prescribed yield.
However, if the machine uses the running distance of the parts (which is a calculation based on the total
number of revolutions made by the parts), PM can be carried out at more precise times, because the
running distance reflects the actual status of the machine.
506
3.Preventive Maintenance
Displays all PM items (all PM items, not only PM units). Lists all PM items regardless of PM yield
indicator settings.
[2] Parts List for PM yield indicator: New Unit Set
Displays only the items with their PM yield indicator settings set to "Yes".
[3] Clear all PM settings
Resets all PM counter settings to "0" at the same time. PM items can be reset one by one in the
"All PM Parts List: New Unit Set" menu.
[4] Counterlist print out
Prints the PM counter on paper.
[5] Estimated usage ratio/Remain Days: New Unit Set
Displays the estimated usage ratio (0 to 100%) and remaining days (255 to 0 days) of the PM
items, in which the calculation is based on page counter value and running distance, allowing more
accuracy in comparison to the conventional PM page counter.
[6] Commissioning Status Report Print
507
3.Preventive Maintenance
The "All PM Parts list" displays all PM units and individual items. This list shows all PM items,
regardless of their "PM yield indicator settings".
• The fusing belt smoothing roller and fusing cleaning web unit are prescribed as PM parts only
for Pro C5200S/C5210S. These parts do not appear in the "All PM Parts list" because the PM
counter of these parts is not based on page count. To check if PM is needed or not for these
parts, check the "Remain Days" on the "Estimated usage ratio/Remain Days : New Unit Set"
screen. (See Estimated Usage Ratio/Remaining Days) Make sure to clear the counter after
replacing these parts.
Press any number button to open the sub menu for a part. In the example below, the number button
[003: #Development Unit: K] was pressed.
508
3.Preventive Maintenance
This list shows the PM Parts Main Menu with only items with the PM yield indicator set to "Yes"
displayed.
An asterisk (*) will appear in the Exceed column [A] to show items that have exceeded their target PM
yields.
509
3.Preventive Maintenance
Displays the estimated usage rate (0 to 100%) and remaining days (255 to 0 days) of the PM items
against the PM yield, which are based on calculations using the page counter and running distance.
Calculation of Estimated remaining days (255 to 0 days) and Estimated usage ratio (0 to
100%)
C: Average PM page counter per day = PM page counter (SP7-621-xxx)/Number of days since last
replacement
Remaining days by running distance (SP7-952-XXX) = (A – B) / C
A: Standard end value as distance (SP7-940-xxx)
B: PM distance counter (SP7-944-xxx)
C: Average distance per day = PM distance counter (SP7-944-xxx) /Number of days since last
replacement
• Calculation of estimated usage rate (0 to 100%)
Displays either the page counter (SP7-954-xxx) and running distance (SP7-942-xxx), whichever is
larger. Note that parts such as rollers always show the page counter value, because running
distance is not counted.
Estimated usage ratio % (by Page counter) is calculated as follows.
Current page counter value <SP7-621-xxx> / Standard page end value <SP7-623-xxx> x 100
Estimated usage ratio % (by Running distance) is calculated as follows.
Current distance <SP7-944-xxx> / Standard distance end value <SP7-940-xxx> x 100
511
3.Preventive Maintenance
Cleaning Points
Scanner
Exposure Glass, ADF Exposure Glass, 1st Mirror, 2nd Mirror, 3rd Mirror, Original Size Sensors
4. First, turn the gear [A] and move the 1st scanner carriage [B] to the center.
• Do not touch the mirror or light guide plate in the scanner carriage.
512
3.Preventive Maintenance
5. Clean the 1st mirror [A], 2nd mirror [B] and 3rd mirror [C] with a dry optical cloth.
Laser Unit
3. Insert the Toner Shield Glass Cleaning Tool [A] into the slot (red circles in the photo below), and
513
3.Preventive Maintenance
slide it back-and-forth about 5 times to clean the toner shield glass on the laser units. Do this
procedure for all 4 colors.
Developer
Development Unit
3. Clean off the toner adhering around the unit with a dry cloth.
Doctor Gap
Prepare the cleaning tool [A] (D0749547: DG CLEANER 5PCS/SET) in advance. This is a service part,
and is not supplied with the machine with the accessories.
514
3.Preventive Maintenance
3. Tilt the development unit 90 degrees so that the left side (viewed from the front) faces the bottom.
Then rotate the development roller in the direction indicated with the arrow (counterclockwise
viewed from rear) until the loose developer on the roller surface is removed.
Do not rotate the development roller in the opposite direction because this will cause the Mylar to
get sucked into the roller.
4. Insert the corner of the cleaning tool [A] without the folded tab into the doctor gap. The tab scrapes
515
3.Preventive Maintenance
off the toner/dust adhered to the doctor blade as you slide the cleaning tool across the doctor gap.
5. Slide the cleaning tool [A] from right to left. Keep it level as you slide it, to prevent scratches on the
development roller.
Both ends of the cleaning tool can be used. Locate the hole [A] on the cleaning tool. Slide
the cleaning tool from right to left when inserting the end that has the hole. Slide the cleaning tool
from left to right when using the other end.
516
3.Preventive Maintenance
• [B]: Use this end to slide the cleaning tool from left to right.
• [C]: Use this end to slide the cleaning tool from right to left.
Make sure to note the following points to prevent scratches on the surface of the development
roller.
• Do not push or pull the cleaning tool.
• Do not press the cleaning tool against the development roller with your thumb.
• Do not touch the development roller with your fingers.
6. After sliding the cleaning tool [A] across the doctor gap, remove it by taking out the corner without
the tab first.
• For a thorough cleaning of the doctor gap, it is recommended to repeat the cleaning
procedure 2 to 3 times.
• The cleaning tool can be used many times. Use the other end of the cleaning tool or use a
new one when the tab becomes worn and jagged.
517
3.Preventive Maintenance
Toner Supply
• In order to prevent the scattering of toner, do not use a blower brush to clean.
ITB Unit
518
3.Preventive Maintenance
1. ID Sensor
2. ITB Drive Roller
3. Pre-Transfer Roller
4. ITB Cleaning Blade Counter Roller
5. ITB Lubricant Blade Counter Roller
6. Back-up Roller
7. ITB Driven Roller
Rollers
ID Sensor
519
3.Preventive Maintenance
2. With a damp cloth, wipe the ID sensor (three areas indicated below).
Fusing
1. Pull the fusing unit out and then raise the stripper unit to open it.
2. With a dry cloth, wipe the circled areas shown below.
Fusing Stripper Plate: Clean the surface and the back.
Pressure Stripper Plate: Clean the seven pawls of the stripper plate.
520
3.Preventive Maintenance
2. With a dry cloth, wipe the top of the fusing entrance guide [A].
1. Access the thermistor (hot roller shaft) (Thermistor (Hot Roller Shaft))
2. With a dry cloth, wipe the circled area shown below.
Thermopile
521
3.Preventive Maintenance
Other
1. Access the pressure roller intake filter. (Fusing Pressure Roller Intake Fan (Pro C5200S/C5210S
only))
2. Clean the pressure roller dust filter [A] with some dry cloth.
522
3.Preventive Maintenance
3. With a dry cloth, clean the paper transfer belt cooling fan (front) dust filter [A].
Paper Feed
523
3.Preventive Maintenance
2. Wipe the 1st to 4th feed rollers (drive) with a damp cloth.
524
3.Preventive Maintenance
2. Open the registration section and wipe the registration roller (drive/idle) with a damp cloth.
525
3.Preventive Maintenance
Registration Sensor
Relay Sensor
526
3.Preventive Maintenance
3. Remove the paper dust, and then wipe the dust collection unit [A] with a dry cloth.
527
3.Preventive Maintenance
Duplex
528
3.Preventive Maintenance
2. Wipe the paper exit roller (drive) [A] with a damp cloth.
4. Wipe the paper exit roller (idle) [A] with a damp cloth
• When wipe the paper exit roller (idle), squeeze a damp cloth very well.
529
3.Preventive Maintenance
3. Wipe the inverter feed out roller (drive/idle) with a damp cloth.
• Before you wipe the inverter feed out roller (idle), squeeze the damp cloth very tightly.
530
3.Preventive Maintenance
• Before you wipe the inverter exit roller (idle), squeeze the damp cloth very tightly.
531
3.Preventive Maintenance
3. Wipe the paper exit relay roller (drive/idle) with a damp cloth.
• Before you wipe the paper exit relay roller (idle), squeeze the damp cloth very tightly.
532
3.Preventive Maintenance
• Before you wipe the inverter feed roller (idle), squeeze the damp cloth very tightly.
533
3.Preventive Maintenance
534
3.Preventive Maintenance
6. Wipe the paper exit feed guide plate (upper/middle) with a dry cloth.
3. Wipe the 1st to 4th duplex feed rollers (drive) and the 2nd to 4th duplex feed rollers (idle) with a
535
3.Preventive Maintenance
damp cloth.
536
3.Preventive Maintenance
537
3.Preventive Maintenance
538
3.Preventive Maintenance
2. Move the purge guide plate (lower) [A] to the upright position.
3. Wipe the area [A] under the transport guide plate (lower) with a damp cloth.
539
4.Replacement and Adjustment
Push Switch
The main power button of this machine has been changed to a push-button switch (push button) from
the conventional rocker switch. The push switch has characteristics and specifications different from the
rocker switch. Care must be taken when replacing and adjusting parts.
Power is supplied to the machine even when the main power switch is turned OFF.
The push switch in this machine uses DC (direct current). Therefore, if the AC power cord is connected
to an electrical outlet, power is supplied to the controller board, the operation unit and other modules
even when the main power is turned OFF. When replacing the controller board and the operation unit in
this state, it will damage these boards and other electrical components.
So, when performing maintenance work such as replacing parts, in addition to turning off the main
power with the push switch, always unplug the AC power cord.
When you disconnect the power cord from the AC wall outlet, inside the machine there is
still residual charge.
When you disconnect the power cord from the AC wall outlet, inside the machine for a while there is still
residual charge. Therefore, if you remove boards in this state, it can cause a blown fuse or memory
failure.
• How to remove the residual charge inside the machine
After you unplug the power cord from the AC wall outlet, in order to remove the residual charge
from inside the machine, be sure to press the main power switch. Thus, the charge remaining in
the machine is released, and it is possible to remove boards.
When you reconnect the AC power cord into an AC wall outlet, the machine will start
automatically.
In order to remove the residual charge, push the main power switch while you disconnect the AC power
cord. At that time, the power ON flag inside the machine is set. Therefore, after you finish work on the
machine and reconnect the power cord to the AC, even if you do not press the main power switch, the
machine will start automatically and the moving parts will begin to move. When working on moving
parts, be careful that fingers or clothes do not get caught.
• Automatic restart deals with cases when you accidentally unplugged the AC power cord or
unexpected power outages. By keeping the power flag ON, after the resumption of power, the
540
4.Replacement and Adjustment
• If an option that is powered independently from a different power source, i.e. the Multi-Folding
Unit FD4000 (for MP C6503/C8003, Pro C5200S/C5210S) or the Buffer Pass Unit Type 5020
(for Pro C5200S/C5210S), is included in the configuration, always follow the procedure below
when reconnecting the AC power cord into an AC wall outlet after disconnecting it and
pressing the main power switch to release the charge. If you do not follow the procedure
below, the option that is powered independently will not be recognized by the copier and paper
jams will occur.
1. Connect the AC power cord of the option into an AC wall outlet, and then connect the AC
power cord of the copier into an AC wall outlet.
2. After the copier starts up automatically, press the main power switch of the copier again to
power the machine off and on, and then run a copy job to check the operation.
Shutdown Method
1. Press the main power switch [A] on the left side of the machine.
2. Take out the power cord
3. Wait 3 minutes (this is the time required if you will remove the rear cover and access the interior of
the machine, to take out the controller board for example).
Note: If some LEDs on any of the boards are blinking or lit, current is still flowing.
After the shutdown process, the main power is turned off automatically.
• To start the machine, press the main power switch. However, if you press the main power
541
4.Replacement and Adjustment
switch between the beginning and the end of a shutdown, the machine will not start.
Forced Shutdown
In case normal shutdown does not complete for some reason, the machine has a forced shutdown
function.
To make a forced shutdown, press and hold the main power switch for 6 seconds.
In general, do not use the forced shutdown.
• Forced shutdown may damage the hard disk and memory, and can cause damage to the
machine. Use a forced shutdown only if it is unavoidable.
542
4.Replacement and Adjustment
543
4.Replacement and Adjustment
Exterior Covers
Right Cover
1. Open the vertical transport door [A]. Remove the LCIT cover [B].
2. Remove the screw covers [B] on the arm cover [A] of the operation panel.
544
4.Replacement and Adjustment
4. Remove the fixing screws of the right middle front cover [A].
5. Open the toner supply unit front cover [A] and bypass tray unit [C]. Slide the right middle front
cover [B] to the left.
545
4.Replacement and Adjustment
• Check the position of the hooks in the photo below before removing.
1. Open the vertical transport door [A]. Remove the LCIT cover [B].
546
4.Replacement and Adjustment
2. Remove the fixing screws of the right middle front cover [A].
3. Open the toner supply unit front cover [A] and bypass tray unit [C]. Slide the right middle front
cover [B] to the left.
• Check the position of the hooks in the photo below before removing.
547
4.Replacement and Adjustment
1. In order to easily remove the right middle upper cover [A], remove the fixing screws on the left side
of the rear middle cover [B].
2. Open the bypass tray unit [A]. Remove the right middle upper cover [B], moving it downward.
• Check the position of the hooks in the photo below before removing.
548
4.Replacement and Adjustment
1. In order to easily remove the right middle upper cover [A], remove the fixing screws on the left side
of the rear middle cover [B].
2. Open the bypass tray unit [A]. Remove the right middle upper cover [B], moving it downward.
• Check the position of the hooks in the photo below before removing
1. Remove the right middle upper cover (Pro C5200S/C5210S). (Right Middle Upper Cover (Pro
549
4.Replacement and Adjustment
C5200S/C5210S))
2. Open the vertical transport door [A]. Remove the LCIT cover [B].
• Check the position of the hooks in the photo below before removing.
550
4.Replacement and Adjustment
1. Remove the right middle upper cover (MP C6503/C8003). (Right Middle Upper Cover (MP
C6503/C8003))
2. Open the vertical transport door [A]. Remove the LCIT cover [B].
1. Open the vertical transport door [A]. Remove the LCIT cover [B].
551
4.Replacement and Adjustment
3. Open the vertical transport door [A]. Remove the right lower cover [B], moving it downward.
• Check the position of the bosses in the photo below before removing.
552
4.Replacement and Adjustment
Left Cover
1. In order to easily remove the left middle cover [A], remove the fixing screws on the left side of the
rear middle cover [B] and rear lower cover [C].
553
4.Replacement and Adjustment
• Check the position of the hooks in the photo below before removing.
554
4.Replacement and Adjustment
• Attach the left middle cover to align the left middle cover [A] and the upper cover [B].
555
4.Replacement and Adjustment
• Check the position of the hooks in the photo below before removing.
556
4.Replacement and Adjustment
Rear Cover
• Check the position of the hooks and bosses in the photo below before removing.
557
4.Replacement and Adjustment
• Check the position of the bosses in the photo below before removing.
558
4.Replacement and Adjustment
Upper Cover
1. Open the ADF and remove the fixing screws of the upper front cover [A].
• Check the position of the hooks in the photo below before removing.
559
4.Replacement and Adjustment
1. Open the ADF and remove the fixing screws of the upper front cover [A].
560
4.Replacement and Adjustment
• Check the position of the hooks in the photo below before removing.
1. Open the ADF and remove the fixing screws of the upper rear cover (small) [A].
1. Remove the upper front cover. (Pro C5200S/C5210S: Upper Front Cover (Pro C5200S/C5210S),
MP C6503/C8003: Upper Front Cover (MP C6503/C8003))
2. Remove the upper rear cover (small). (Upper Rear Cover (Small))
561
4.Replacement and Adjustment
3. Remove the upper left cover [A] and upper right cover [B] by sliding them toward the front.
• Check the position of the hooks in the photo below before removing.
• Upper left cover
• When attaching the upper right cover, be careful not to pinch the harness.
562
4.Replacement and Adjustment
1. Remove the screw covers [B] on the back of the operation panel. Remove the arm upper cover [A].
2. Remove the screw cover [B] from the rear cover [A].
563
4.Replacement and Adjustment
6. Remove the operation panel [A] from the hooks of the operation panel arm [B].
564
4.Replacement and Adjustment
LDCD
565
4.Replacement and Adjustment
OPU, OPR
1. Disconnect the connectors and the clamps that are connected to the LDCD [A].
566
4.Replacement and Adjustment
LCD
1. Disconnect the connectors and the clamps that are connected to the LDCD board [A].
567
4.Replacement and Adjustment
568
4.Replacement and Adjustment
1. Remove the screw covers [A] and arm upper cover [B].
2. Remove the operation panel rear lower cover [A] and operation panel rear upper cover [B].
3. Remove the fixing screws of the operation panel [A], and then release the clamps.
4. Remove the operation panel [A] from the hooks of the operation panel arm [B], and then place the
569
4.Replacement and Adjustment
operation panel on the upper front cover of the main machine with the LCD facing down.
570
4.Replacement and Adjustment
8. Remove the harness from the cut-out [A] of the arm bracket, and then remove the arm bracket [B].
9. Make sure that DIP switches 3 and 7 of the operation panel [A] are set to ON.
If the DIP switch setting is not correct, the machine will issue SC672.
10. Remove the rear middle cover. (Rear Middle Cover)
11. Remove the controller box cover [A].
12. Make sure that all the DIP switches [B] on the controller board [A] are set to OFF.
571
4.Replacement and Adjustment
13. Attach the controller box cover and rear middle cover.
14. After replacing the operation panel, make sure that the latest version of the Smart Operation Panel
firmware has been installed. For details, refer to "Updating the Smart Operation Panel" in the
Smart Operation Panel manual.
Internal Parts
For details about disassembling the Smart Operation Panel, see the service manual for Smart
Operation Panel 2nd Generation.
572
4.Replacement and Adjustment
1. Remove the upper right cover. (Upper Left Cover, Upper Right Cover)
2. Cover the exposure glass [A] to protect it.
573
4.Replacement and Adjustment
5. Turn over the operation panel [A] and the lower cover [B] towards the scanner.
6. Disconnect the USB connector and the grounding wire of the operation panel [A].
• When you disconnect or connect the USB cable, hold the connector part of the cable.
7. Remove the harnesses from the harness guide.
574
4.Replacement and Adjustment
10. Before you replace the operation panel, make sure that DIP switches 3 and 7 of the new operation
panel are set to ON.
• If the DIP switch settings are not correct, the machine will issue SC672.
11. After replacing the operation panel, make sure that the latest version of the Smart Operation Panel
firmware has been installed. For details, refer to "Updating the Smart Operation Panel" in the
Smart Operation Panel manual.
Internal Parts
For details about disassembling the Smart Operation Panel, see the service manual for Smart
Operation Panel 2nd Generation.
575
4.Replacement and Adjustment
4. Lift the lower cover [A]. Align the cover [A] with the ribs [B].
576
4.Replacement and Adjustment
5. Fix the ribs and lower cover with the screws you removed in step 2.
e.g.: right side
577
4.Replacement and Adjustment
578
4.Replacement and Adjustment
579
4.Replacement and Adjustment
580
4.Replacement and Adjustment
ADF
ADF Removal
3. Disconnect the interface cable [A]. Remove the bracket [C] of the CIS unit cable [B].
581
4.Replacement and Adjustment
8. While holding the left and right sides of the ADF, lift up to remove it.
582
4.Replacement and Adjustment
Enter the four-digit numeric values for RGB that are listed on the paper that comes with the ADF into
the following SP.
R: SP4-712-001 (CIS GB Adj Value: R)
G: SP4-713-001 (CIS GB Adj Value: G)
B: SP4-714-001 (CIS GB Adj Value: B)
1. Make sure that the difference between both ends of the line [A] is within 0±2mm.
583
4.Replacement and Adjustment
2. If not within the standard, change the position of the fixing screw [A] to the long hole [B] at the right
hinge.
Platen Adjustment
1. Open the ADF and remove the white cover [A] (magic tape x 10).
2. Put the white cover [A] in the correct position on the exposure glass, aligning it with the glass cover
[B] and the rear scale [C].
584
4.Replacement and Adjustment
3. Close the ADF [A] slowly and attach the white cover [B] to the ADF with the magic tapes.
ADF Cover
585
4.Replacement and Adjustment
• Check the position of the hooks in the photo below before removing.
586
4.Replacement and Adjustment
• Check the position of the hooks in the photo below before removing
587
4.Replacement and Adjustment
3. Remove the original feed unit [A]. (Pull the original feed unit, and remove the back side of the shaft.
Then remove the bushing in the foreground.)
• At re-assembly, make sure that the tab on the front guide plate [A] is above the pick-up
588
4.Replacement and Adjustment
roller [B].
4. Lift the left and right sides of the feed belt holder [A], then remove it.
5. Remove the feed belt [B] from the feed belt holder [A].
3. Remove the snap-fit. Then, remove the ADF separation roller [A] and torque limiter clutch [B].
590
4.Replacement and Adjustment
3. Remove the original registration sensor [A] along with the bracket.
4. Disconnect the hooks, and remove the original registration sensor [A].
591
4.Replacement and Adjustment
592
4.Replacement and Adjustment
4. Remove the original exit sensor [B], which is mounted on the upper guide [A]. ( x 6)
5. Remove the original exit sensor [B] from the upper guide [A].
593
4.Replacement and Adjustment
1. Remove the feed upper guide [A] in the ADF feed cover.
3. Remove the separation sensor [A] and skew correction sensor [B].
594
4.Replacement and Adjustment
4. Remove the original width sensor guide plate [A], then remove the original width sensors (x 5) [B].
595
4.Replacement and Adjustment
1. Raise the document tray [A], then remove the lower cover [B].
2. Remove the original length sensor (B5) [A], original length sensor (A4) [B] and original length
sensor (LG) [C].
APS Feeler
596
4.Replacement and Adjustment
2. Remove the ADF lift-up interlock switch [A] along with the bracket.
597
4.Replacement and Adjustment
3. Disconnect a hook, and remove the original length sensor (A4/LT) [A].
598
4.Replacement and Adjustment
599
4.Replacement and Adjustment
right.)
4. Remove the pick-up roller HP sensor [A] along with the bracket.
600
4.Replacement and Adjustment
2. Remove the ADF entrance motor [A] along with the frame.
1. Remove the ADF entrance motor along with the frame. (ADF Entrance Motor)
601
4.Replacement and Adjustment
2. Remove the ADF scanning motor [A] along with the bracket.
602
4.Replacement and Adjustment
1. Remove the ADF entrance motor along with the frame. (ADF Entrance Motor)
2. Remove the ADF bottom plate lift motor [A].
603
4.Replacement and Adjustment
604
4.Replacement and Adjustment
605
4.Replacement and Adjustment
3. Remove the ADF entrance motor along with the frame. (ADF Entrance Motor)
4. Remove the ADF feed motor [A] along with the bracket.
CIS Unit
• To prevent scratches on the surface of the CIS glass, removal of the CIS unit must be done
606
4.Replacement and Adjustment
607
4.Replacement and Adjustment
• Do not fold or bend the guide plate [A], because the mylar [B] is attached to the plate.
7. Remove the mylar [A] from the front side.
8. Pull the CIS unit [A] out slowly, and lay it on a flat and clean surface.
• To re-install the CIS unit, two pegs [A] of the CIS unit fit into two holes [B] at the back of
the ADF unit. Set the CIS in its channel so it is perfectly flat, and push it slowly to the rear
608
4.Replacement and Adjustment
After replacing the CIS unit, perform the CIS gray balance adjustment as follows.
The parameters written in FROM (GB coefficient, pixel interpolation coefficient) are saved to the
machine by executing these SPs.
1. Execute SP4-730-001 (FROM ADF Factory Setting: CIS Parameter).
2. Execute SP4-730-004 (FROM Data Update).
3. Execute SP4-730-002 (FROM Main Factory Setting: Execution ON/OFF).
• When executing the SPs, the ADF and the ADF feed cover should be closed.
• Frequently inspect the CIS white roller. A dirty or incorrectly installed white roller will cause the
machine to issue SC152-00 (White Level Error: Back Side).
1. Open the ADF.
609
4.Replacement and Adjustment
2. Release the pawl at the upper left corner, and open the white plate.
3. Keep the white cover opened, and rotate the white roller [A] by its gear [B], while using a clean, dry
cloth to wipe the surface of the roller clean.
610
4.Replacement and Adjustment
Scanner Unit
Exposure Glass
• When attaching the glass cover, ensure that the glass cover is not riding on the upper
front cover or the upper rear small cover.
611
4.Replacement and Adjustment
• The document transport system of the ADF is different between MP C6503/C8003 and Pro
C5200S/C5210S. MP C6503/C8003 uses a new non-contact transport system, so the glass
replacement procedure is changed accordingly.
How to Remove the ADF Exposure Glass and the Gap Sheet
How to Attach the ADF Exposure Glass and the Gap Sheet
1. Clean the place to attach the exposure glass seal on the exposure glass bracket with alcohol.
2. Attach the exposure glass seal [C] so that the corner with the angle cut off aligns with the marking
[B] on the exposure glass bracket [A].
612
4.Replacement and Adjustment
• Attach the ADF exposure glass, so that the marking [A] is on the upper left.
5. Attach in the order of exposure glass, glass cover and rear scale.
6. Clean the ADF exposure glass with a dry cloth.
7. Peel off the release paper of the gap sheet.
8. Fit the gap sheet [C] to the indented part [A] of the glass cover so that the corner with the angle cut
613
4.Replacement and Adjustment
• When replacing an ADF exposure glass, replace with a new exposure glass seal and a
gap sheet as well.
• ADF Exposure Glass (Pro C5200S/C5210S): Same as for MP C6503/C8003, except there
is no gap sheet.
For MP C6503/C8003, if you change from contact transport to non-contact transport, it is necessary to
replace parts of the scanner unit and the ADF.
614
4.Replacement and Adjustment
• Entrance lower guide unit for non-contact transport: the areas [A] are black.
• Entrance lower guide unit for contact transport (part number: D6833401): the areas [B]
are clear and colorless.
• Scanning guide plate for non-contact transport: the area [A] is black.
• Scanning guide plate for contact transport (part number: D6833350): the area [B] is white.
615
4.Replacement and Adjustment
6. Enter the SP mode, set "98" at SP4-688003 (Scan Image Density Adjustment 1-pass).
616
4.Replacement and Adjustment
3. Remove the original length sensor [A] and the sensor cradle [B].
• Pro C5200S/C5210S
• MP C6503/C8003
SP4-008-001: Sub Scan Magnification Adj (”Sub Scan Magnification Adjustment” in Magnification and
Registration Adjustment)
SP4-010-001: Sub Scan Registration Adj (”Sub Scan Registration Adjustment” in Magnification and
Registration Adjustment)
SP4-011-001: Main Scan Reg (”Main Scan Registration Adjustment” in Magnification and Registration
617
4.Replacement and Adjustment
Adjustment)
• Do not touch the mirror, reflector, or light guide plate in the scanner carriage.
4. Remove the exposure lamp (LED) [A] on the right side.
618
4.Replacement and Adjustment
• When attaching the exposure lamp, put the harness under the hook.
1. Remove the upper right cover. (Upper Left Cover, Upper Right Cover)
• In the case of MP C6503/C8003, also remove the operation panel. (Operation Panel Unit)
2. Pull out the toner supply unit. (Toner Supply Unit)
619
4.Replacement and Adjustment
4. Remove the scanner drive motor [A] along with the bracket.
620
4.Replacement and Adjustment
• When attaching the motor, make sure that the timing belt does not come off. Slide the
motor a few times. Screw the motor into place while the spring is pulled.
4. Move the 1st scanner carriage [A] to the center. Peel off the shielding plate [B], then remove the
621
4.Replacement and Adjustment
DF Position Sensor
• The operator call light is not attached to MP C6503/C8003, so this step is not required.
622
4.Replacement and Adjustment
Scanner Unit
1. Remove the upper left cover and upper right cover. (Upper Left Cover, Upper Right Cover)
• In the case of MP C6503/C8003, also remove the operation panel. (Operation Panel Unit)
2. Remove the rear middle cover.
3. Slide the controller box cover [A] to the right.
623
4.Replacement and Adjustment
4. Disconnect the interface cables [A], [B] and [C] from the rear of the machine.
5. Remove the interface cables [A], [B] and [C] through the right side [D] of the machine.
6. Pro C5200S/C5210S: Remove the fixing screws on the left side stay [A].
624
4.Replacement and Adjustment
7. Pro C5200S/C5210S: Remove the fixing screws on the right side stay [A].
• For steps 6-7 in the procedure described above, in the case of MP C6503/C8003, remove
the operation panel bracket [A].
625
4.Replacement and Adjustment
626
4.Replacement and Adjustment
10. Hold the handles at the left and right, and remove the scanner unit [A] from the machine.
Scanner Wire
1. Remove the upper left cover/ the upper right cover. (Pro C5200S/C5210S: Upper Front Cover (Pro
C5200S/C5210S), MP C6503/C8003: Upper Front Cover (MP C6503/C8003))
• In the case of MP C6503/C8003, also remove the operation panel. (Operation Panel Unit)
2. Pro C5200S/C5210S: Remove the left side stay [A].
627
4.Replacement and Adjustment
• For steps 2-3 in the procedure described above, in the case of MP C6503/C8003, remove
the operation panel bracket [A].
628
4.Replacement and Adjustment
5. Remove the left stay [A] and the right stay [B].
1. Move the 1st scanner carriage [B] to a position where the screw [A] of the bracket can be seen.
629
4.Replacement and Adjustment
2. Remove the springs of the tension brackets (rear: [A] / front: [B]).
3. Loosen the fixing screws of the tension brackets (rear: [A] / front: [B]).
630
4.Replacement and Adjustment
4. Remove the retaining brackets (rear: [A] / front [B]) from the wire.
5. Remove the tip and the rear end of the wire (rear / front).
6. Unscrew the wire pulleys (rear: [A] / front [B]) and drive pulley [C]. Remove the wire pulleys from
the shaft.
1. Pass the wire from the side where there is no projection on the pulley. [A]
2. Place the beads on the middle of the wire in the groove. [B]
631
4.Replacement and Adjustment
3. Attach tape across the pulley to temporarily hold the wires in place. [C]
1. Remove the 1st scanner carriage [A] from the scanner unit.
2. Position the 2nd scanner carriage [C] with the positioning pins [D] (part number: A1849501)
3. Set the wire pulley through the shaft. (Do not tighten the screw of the front side pulley yet.)
4. Turn the wire and remove the tape.
5. Set the spring. (Do not tighten the screw yet.)
6. Tighten the screw of the drive pulley.
7. Remove the positioning pins temporarily. Then move the 2nd carriage to fit in the wire.
8. Set the positioning pins again and tighten screws of the front pulley and tension bracket.
• If the scanner does not move smoothly, and it is possible to set positioning pins, re-adjust
using the above procedure.
9. Set the 1st scanner carriage [A] with the positioning pins [B]. Attach the retaining bracket. Then fix
the wire and the carriage [E].
• If replacing anything other than the wire, adjust SP4-010-001 (Sub Scan Registration Adj).
632
4.Replacement and Adjustment
Accessories
No Description Q'ty
1 Heater 1
2 Tapping Screw - M3x6 2
• The part number for the scanner heater is the same across all models except the Pro C5200S
(NA). See the table below.
Model Area Voltage Part number
NA 120 to 127V B2291678
CHN 220 to 240V D2611688
Pro C5200S EU 220 to 240V D2611688
AP 220 to 240V D2611688
NA 208 to 240V D2611688
CHN 220 to 240V D2611688
Pro C5210S EU 220 to 240V D2611688
AP 220 to 240V D2611688
Installation
• Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure.
• Do the following procedure not to damage any harnesses.
• Check that all harnesses are not damaged nor pinched after installation.
1. Exposure Glass (Exposure Glass)
2. Left middle cover (Left Middle Cover)
633
4.Replacement and Adjustment
3. First, turn the gear [A] and move the 1st scanner carriage [B] next to the lens cover [C].
4. Pass the scanner heater [A] under the 2nd carriage [B]. Then insert the connector [C] from the left
side of the scanner unit [D].
634
4.Replacement and Adjustment
• The screw on the left side of the scanner heater is accessed from the scanner frame.
6. Connect the connector [A] of the scanner heater to the machine ( x 1, x 2).
Measuring Tool
150 mm scale
Adjustment Method
Copy the scale and check that the length of the 100 mm scale on the copy is the same as the original,
within the standard value (±0.8%) for a 100 mm scale.
It should be measured 10 minutes after the copy has been fed out.
635
4.Replacement and Adjustment
Adjustment Procedure
1. Enter SP mode.
2. Select SP4-008.
If you decrease the adjustment value, this will increase the scanner speed, and the output image is
compressed in the feed direction.
If you increase the adjustment value, this will decrease the scanner speed, and the output image is
extended in the feed direction.
Measuring Tool
C4 chart
Adjustment Method
Copy the C4 chart. Check whether there is an image in the center of the paper.
Adjustment Procedure
1. Enter SP mode.
2. Select SP4-803.
The image is moved downward by increasing the adjustment value.
The image is moved upward by decreasing the adjustment value.
Measuring Tool
C4 chart
Adjustment Method
Copy the C4 chart. Check whether there is an image in the center of the paper.
636
4.Replacement and Adjustment
Adjustment Procedure
1. Enter SP mode.
2. Select SP4-011.
The image is moved to the right by increasing the adjustment value.
The image is moved to the left by decreasing the adjustment value.
637
4.Replacement and Adjustment
Laser Unit
• This laser unit employs 80 laser beams produced by a Class III LD with a wavelength of 772 to
792 nm and intensity of 1.4 mW (40 beams). Direct exposure to the eyes could cause
permanent blindness.
• Before adjusting or replacing the laser unit, push the main power switch to power the machine
off then unplug the machine from the power source. Allow the machine to cool for a few
minutes. The polygon motor continues to rotate for approximately one to three minutes after
the machine is switched off.
• Do not turn on the power when the laser unit and the polygon cover are not installed. Ensure
that after assembly, the polygon cover is completely closed.
• Do not turn on the power when the synchronization detectors are disconnected. Ensure that
after assembly, the synchronization detectors are set correctly.
Caution Decals
MP C6503/C8003 only
638
4.Replacement and Adjustment
Laser Unit
Before Replacement
1. Plug in the power cord, and then turn ON the main power switch.
2. Enter the SP mode, and note the following SP values.
• SP2-104-040 (Skew Adjustment: Manual: K: CE)
• SP2-104-041 (Skew Adjustment: Manual: K: User)
• SP2-104-002 (Skew Adjustment: Manual: C)
• SP2-104-003 (Skew Adjustment: Manual: M)
• SP2-104-004 (Skew Adjustment: Manual: Y)
3. Set the following SP values to "0".
• SP2-104-040 (Skew Adjustment: Manual: K: CE)
• SP2-104-041 (Skew Adjustment: Manual: K: User)
• SP2-104-002 (Skew Adjustment: Manual: C)
• SP2-104-003 (Skew Adjustment: Manual: M)
• SP2-104-004 (Skew Adjustment: Manual: Y)
• If you do not do the above adjustment, MUSIC may not work. This is because one or more
of the motors may be at or near the upper or lower limit (± 100). In such a case, if you do
not zero the motor positions before MUSIC is done, the range that the motor can move
will be restricted and the adjustment may not be done correctly.
4. Enter the SP mode, and set the following SPs.
• SP2-102-001 (Magnification Adjustment: Main Mag.: K): set to "123" (for the CK laser unit)
• SP2-102-007 (Magnification Adjustment: Main Mag.: M): set to "123" (for the YM laser unit)
• SP2-102-016 (Magnification Adjustment: Main/Sub: K): set to "0"
• SP2-102-019 (Magnification Adjustment: Main/Sub: C): set to "0"
• SP2-102-022 (Magnification Adjustment: Main/Sub: M): set to "0"
• SP2-102-025 (Magnification Adjustment: Main/Sub: Y): set to "0"
• For the Magnification Adjustment values of SP2-102-001/007, set to "123" only for the
color of the new laser unit.
• For the Magnification Adjustment values of SP2-102-016 through 025, set to "0" only for
the color of the new laser unit.
Replacement
639
4.Replacement and Adjustment
2. For the laser unit (CK) [A], remove the stay [B] first.
• When reinstalling, fix the harness [A] with the clamp as shown below and put it back in the
original state. If it is not fixed sufficiently with the clamp, SC204-03 (polygon motor error)
will occur due to noise.
Laser Unit (CK)
640
4.Replacement and Adjustment
5. Grasp the handles on the left and right, and lift out the laser unit.
6. After removing the laser unit, place a sheet of paper [A] as shown to guard the OPC drum from
direct light.
641
4.Replacement and Adjustment
The polygon mirror of the new laser unit contains protective material. Therefore, when installing the unit
in the machine, it is necessary to remove this material.
1. Remove the polygon cover [A].
2. Turn over the polygon cover [A], remove the protective material [B] and the red tag [C].
• During the download of the correction values, you can turn off the power, or open the
door.
• If an SC or a display of "failure" occurs, you can run the download again after turning the
power OFF and ON.
3. Correct the color registration with the User Tools.
• HOME screen [User Tools]-[Machine Features]-[Maintenance]-[Color Registration]-[OK]
642
4.Replacement and Adjustment
4. If necessary, adjust the registration, skew, and magnification. For information about how to adjust,
refer to Adjustment in Troubleshooting.
The layout of the charge roller cleaning roller lift solenoids (KCMY)
643
4.Replacement and Adjustment
2. Remove two pawls, and remove the laser unit cooling fan (right) [A].
644
4.Replacement and Adjustment
2. Remove the toner supply unit front cover [A] by sliding it to the left.
645
4.Replacement and Adjustment
• The screw [B] under the fixing screw [A] of the toner supply unit fixes the faceplate. Take
care not to remove it.
646
4.Replacement and Adjustment
6. Pull out the toner supply unit [A], and remove it from the slide rail with the handles on the left and
right.*
• When attaching the toner supply unit to the machine, the hooks of the toner supply unit
647
4.Replacement and Adjustment
648
4.Replacement and Adjustment
1. Remove the toner supply unit front cover. (Toner Supply Unit Front Cover)
2. Remove the drawer unit cover. (Drawer Unit Cover)
3. Remove the ITB cleaning intake fan [A] along with the duct.*
• When removing the toner supply unit inner cover, the harness is also disconnected from
the drawer connector attached inside the cover.
1. Remove the drawer connector [B] from the toner supply unit inner cover [A].
649
4.Replacement and Adjustment
2. Connect the drawer connector [B] to the harness [C] of the toner supply unit.
3. Attach the toner supply unit inner cover to the machine, and then insert the drawer connector from
the front side of the inner cover.
1. Remove the toner supply unit inner cover. (Toner Supply Unit Inner Cover)
2. Remove the sub hopper unit [A].
e.g.: Y
• For the following models and colors, the toner fall prevention sheet is attached to the
toner supply unit side.
• Pro C5200S/C5210S: K, C
• MP C6503/C8003: K
• When installing the sub hopper unit [A], take care not to tuck the toner fall prevention
650
4.Replacement and Adjustment
After replacing the sub hopper unit, you have to execute Density Adjustment Process Control.
1. Turn ON the main power switch with the bypass tray unit [A] or the vertical transport door [B] open.
2. Enter SP mode and close the bypass tray unit or vertical transport door.
3. Execute SP3-011-002 (Manual ProCon:Exe > Density Adjustment).
4. Confirm that SP3-012-001 (ProCon OK? > History:Latest) shows “11111111”.
651
4.Replacement and Adjustment
1. Remove the sub hopper unit (K). (Sub Hopper Unit (KCMY))
2. Remove the toner supply board (TSB) [A].
1. Remove the toner supply unit inner cover. (Toner Supply Unit Inner Cover)
652
4.Replacement and Adjustment
653
4.Replacement and Adjustment
• When installing, tighten the screws on the bottom [A] while holding from the top as shown
below.
654
4.Replacement and Adjustment
• When installing, hook the hooks [A] under the bottom of the guide correctly.
655
4.Replacement and Adjustment
3. Remove the toner supply motor [A] along with the bracket.
• It will be easier to access the clamp shown below if you remove the development intake
fan. (Development Intake Fans (KCMY)
After replacing the toner supply motor, apply grease to the motor shaft gear to reduce motor noise
(Grease: G-1077).
656
4.Replacement and Adjustment
657
4.Replacement and Adjustment
Drawer Unit
• When you have replaced the drawer unit, you must adjust the paper transfer belt unit.
(Adjustment of the Paper Transfer Belt Unit)
Layout (Motors)
To replace the motors on the front of the drawer unit, first remove the drawer unit cover. (Drawer Unit
Cover)
658
4.Replacement and Adjustment
Layout (Boards)
659
4.Replacement and Adjustment
• After removing the drawer unit cover, when the drawer unit is returned to the machine,
you can close the guide plate [A] of the paper exit and duplex unit.
660
4.Replacement and Adjustment
• After removing the drawer unit cover, when the drawer unit is pushed all the way in, the
drawer is locked by the lock lever at the right side of the handle. If the drawer is locked,
pull out the drawer unit while holding the lock lever [A] as shown in the picture below.
When the drawer is locked, deal with the problem depending on the symptom. (Drawer Unit Lock Motor
Emergency)
This section shows the procedure to unlock when there is a failure of the drawer unit lock sensor or
drawer unit lock motor.
1. Remove the left middle cover of the outer cover (Left Middle Cover)
2. Remove the right middle front cover of the outer cover (Pro C5200S/C5210S: Right Middle Front
Cover (Pro C5200S/C5210S). MP C6503/C8003: Right Middle Front Cover (MP C6503/C8003))
3. Remove the fixing screws of the left and right sides of the drawer unit cover [A].
661
4.Replacement and Adjustment
4. Open the paper feed tray, then remove the fixing screw on the bottom of the drawer unit cover [A].
5. Insert the driver from the flapper handle [A], and remove the bracket screw [B].
6. Put a hand in the flapper handle [A] and pull the drawer unit cover [B] to the front. Then hold the
guide plate [C] of the paper exit and duplex unit, and remove the drawer unit cover [B] in an
upward direction.
662
4.Replacement and Adjustment
7. Disconnect the connectors, clamps, etc., in order to remove the drawer unit lock motor cover [A].
663
4.Replacement and Adjustment
11. Turn the lock shaft [A] clockwise to release the lock.
12. Turn the paper transfer roller shaft [A] clockwise by using the link [B] to separate the paper transfer
664
4.Replacement and Adjustment
roller unit from the ITB. You can pull the drawer unit out.
• When mounting the motor block, screw the motor in first. Then, assemble links [A], [B] and
[C] as shown below. There is also a diagram embossed on the motor cover to help you to
install the links correctly.
• Lock shaft (Cut surface to the upper left) [A]
• Link [B]
• Paper transfer roller shaft (Cut surface to the lower side) [C]
1. Remove the paper transport belt unit. (Paper Transport Belt Unit)
665
4.Replacement and Adjustment
• When you install the DUB, take care not to pinch the harness between the DUB cover and
666
4.Replacement and Adjustment
Curled Cord
667
4.Replacement and Adjustment
7. Remove the curled cord support material [A] that is connected to the rear of the machine.
• When mounting the curled cord, fit the support material in the hole in the rear of the
machine.
8. Remove the left and right clamps fixing the curled cord [A].
668
4.Replacement and Adjustment
1. In order to facilitate the work, pull the drawer unit out half way, then press the release levers (one
on the left side and one on the right side, shown by the red arrows) and pull the drawer unit [A] out
fully.
• In a low-temperature environment (below 15°C), the tension of the curled cord may be
reduced. So, do not pull the drawer unit out for a long time, or the curled cord will be
deformed and will not curl up again when you try to slide the drawer unit back in. As a
guide, every 30 minutes, push the drawer unit back to the half-way position. There is no
decrease in tension of the curled cord with a low-temperature environment if the drawer
unit is open half-way.
669
4.Replacement and Adjustment
670
4.Replacement and Adjustment
1. Remove the IOB along with the bracket, located on the back side of the machine. (When removing
the motors that are behind the IOB)
671
4.Replacement and Adjustment
1. In order to facilitate the work, pull the drawer unit out half way, then press the release levers (one
on the left side and one on the right side, shown by the red arrows) and pull the drawer unit [A] out
fully.
• In a low-temperature environment (below 15°C), the tension of the curled cord may be
reduced. So, do not pull the drawer unit out for a long time, or the curled cord will be
deformed and will not curl up again when you try to slide the drawer unit back in. As a
guide, every 30 minutes, push the drawer unit back to the half-way position. There is no
decrease in tension of the curled cord with a low-temperature environment if the drawer
unit is open half-way.
672
4.Replacement and Adjustment
673
4.Replacement and Adjustment
LED 1
674
4.Replacement and Adjustment
LED 2
675
4.Replacement and Adjustment
LED 3
676
4.Replacement and Adjustment
677
4.Replacement and Adjustment
678
4.Replacement and Adjustment
• When mounting the motor block, screw the motor in first. Then, assemble links [A], [B] and
[C] as shown below. There is also a diagram embossed on the motor cover to help you to
install the links correctly.
• Lock shaft (Cut surface to the upper left) [A]
679
4.Replacement and Adjustment
• Link [B]
• Paper transfer roller shaft (Cut surface to the lower side) [C]
7. Take off the gears, and remove the drawer unit lock motor [A].
Registration Motor
Exit Motor
681
4.Replacement and Adjustment
1. In order to facilitate the work, pull the drawer unit out half way, then press the release levers (one
on the left side and one on the right side, shown by the red arrows) and pull the drawer unit [A] out
fully.
• In a low-temperature environment (below 15°C), the tension of the curled cord may be
reduced. So, do not pull the drawer unit out for a long time, or the curled cord will be
deformed and will not curl up again when you try to slide the drawer unit back in. As a
guide, every 30 minutes, push the drawer unit back to the half-way position. There is no
decrease in tension of the curled cord with a low-temperature environment if the drawer
unit is open half-way.
682
4.Replacement and Adjustment
683
4.Replacement and Adjustment
2. Disconnect the connectors, clamps, etc., in order to remove the drawer unit lock motor cover [A].
684
4.Replacement and Adjustment
4. Remove the cleaning web motor [A] along with the bracket.
1. In order to facilitate the work, pull the drawer unit out half way, then press the release levers (one
on the left side and one on the right side, shown by the red arrows) and pull the drawer unit [A] out
685
4.Replacement and Adjustment
fully.
• In a low-temperature environment (below 15°C), the tension of the curled cord may be
reduced. So, do not pull the drawer unit out for a long time, or the curled cord will be
deformed and will not curl up again when you try to slide the drawer unit back in. As a
guide, every 30 minutes, push the drawer unit back to the half-way position. There is no
decrease in tension of the curled cord with a low-temperature environment if the drawer
unit is open half-way.
2. Remove the exit inverter motor [A] along with the bracket.
686
4.Replacement and Adjustment
687
4.Replacement and Adjustment
3. Remove the hooks and remove the fusing heat pipe cooling fan [A] along with the duct.
688
4.Replacement and Adjustment
3. Remove the hooks, and remove the IH coil cooling fan [A] along with the duct.
689
4.Replacement and Adjustment
4. Disconnect the connectors, clamps, etc., of the duct [A] for the fusing heat pipe cooling fan and IH
coil cooling fan.
5. Remove the hooks, and remove the duct [A] for the fusing heat pipe cooling fan and IH coil cooling
fan.
690
4.Replacement and Adjustment
691
4.Replacement and Adjustment
PCDU
Faceplate
4. Pull out the units using both handles [A] and [B] in the circled areas as shown below. Pull out little
692
4.Replacement and Adjustment
It is necessary to apply the grease (KS660B) to the top edge of the drum shaft every 300K.
• When you do not apply the grease to the shaft, it causes rust, and the faceplate and the PCDU
may become stuck and not possible to pull out.
• The PCDU must be installed when you do cleaning or apply the grease, because the drum
shaft is weak and unstable without the PCDU in the machine.
1. Remove the faceplate. (Faceplate)
693
4.Replacement and Adjustment
2. Wipe the top edge of the drum shaft [A] with a damp cloth.
3. Apply the grease (KS660B) to the contact part of the faceplate bearings [A] as shown below.
PCDU
694
4.Replacement and Adjustment
3. Place the PCDU [A] on the cradle [B] that was laid down on paper in advance.
• When installing the PCDU, ensure that the lock lever is fit into the hole in the machine frame.
[A]: The lock lever is properly fit into the hole in the machine frame.
[B]: The lock lever is not properly fit into the hole in the machine frame.
• After installing the faceplate, check the status of the lock levers (four) again by looking through the
holes as shown below. The levers should be straight, as shown above [A], and not at an angle [B].
However, some force is required to attach the faceplate, and this could knock the levers out of their
horizontal alignment.
[A]: The lock lever is properly fit into the hole in the machine frame.
[B]: The lock lever is not properly fit into the hole in the machine frame.
695
4.Replacement and Adjustment
• After installing the faceplate, check the status of the lock levers by pushing the PCDU.
• If you cannot push the PCDU all the way in or fit the lock lever properly, remove the PCDU from the
machine and do the following procedure.
1. Remove the charge roller unit.
2. Use the drum holders for the OPC drum, turn the drum counterclockwise for about 0.5 teeth of
the gear and push it again.
• Pro C5200S/C5210S: After you take the PCDU out of the machine and put it back, or replace it
with a new one, carry out SP3-040-001 (DEMS: Execute).
696
4.Replacement and Adjustment
• After removing the charge roller unit, place it on a clean, flat surface with the roller facing
up.
697
4.Replacement and Adjustment
698
4.Replacement and Adjustment
• When installing the drum cleaning unit, ensure that the front side [A] is fit into the grooves
699
4.Replacement and Adjustment
• After removing the drum cleaning unit, lubricant and toner streaks [B] remain on the
surface of the OPC drum [A]. This will cause stains on the charge roller. Therefore, rotate
the OPC drum in the direction of the arrow [C] before you install the new drum cleaning
unit.
• Attach the drum holders [A] to the OPC drum (these are shipped with the cleaning unit) so
that the drum rotates precisely on its axis. Make sure the drum holders [A] are inserted all
700
4.Replacement and Adjustment
• After replacing or removing the drum cleaning unit, clean the toner receptacle [A].
Notes on Replacing the Drum Cleaning Unit and Drum Cleaning Blade
Do not replace the drum cleaning unit or the drum cleaning blade at the same time as the following
parts.
• ITB
• ITB Cleaning Unit
• ITB Cleaning Blade (ITB Cleaning Unit Component)
• ITB Lubricant Bar (ITB Cleaning Unit Component)
• ITB Lubricant Blade (ITB Cleaning Unit Component)
After replacing the drum cleaning unit or the drum cleaning blade, cleaning initial setting is performed
automatically. On the other hand, after replacing the above five parts, you need to run SP2-696-001
(Force Apply Lubricant Execute) manually before cleaning initial setting runs. (Lubrication after
replacement). This is because, if cleaning initial setting runs automatically before running SP2-696-001
(Force Apply Lubricant Execute) manually, the ITB cleaning blade will be turned up.
701
4.Replacement and Adjustment
If you need to replace the above five parts at the same time as replacing the drum cleaning unit or the
drum cleaning blade, use the following procedure.
1. In the PM counter screen, set "New Part Set" to ON for the drum cleaning unit or the drum cleaning
blade.
2. Replace the drum cleaning unit or the drum cleaning blade. (The cleaning initial setting
automatically runs)
3. In the PM counter screen, set "New Part Set" to ON for the above five parts.
4. Replace the above five parts.
5. Enter the SP mode and run SP2-696-001 (Force Apply Lubricant Execute) manually.
OPC Drum
1. When replacing, apply the lubricant powder (D0159501) (zinc stearate) to the OPC drum evenly
with a brush.
702
4.Replacement and Adjustment
• Use the blower brush (D0747690) when applying lubricant powder (zinc stearate) to the
OPC drum.
2. Remove the protective sheet (black) [B] from around the new OPC drum and lay it on the
development unit [A].
3. Attach the new OPC drum [A] and remove the protective sheet (black) [B] from the bottom.
• The surface of a newly replaced drum needs to be lubricated. In the lubrication process
where the drum is manually rotated, the two drum holders [A] fix the shaft so that the
703
4.Replacement and Adjustment
704
4.Replacement and Adjustment
3. Remove the following five gears. Remove the E ring for the gear [A].
705
4.Replacement and Adjustment
5. Remove the fixing screw on the rear side and separate the cleaning unit [A] from the lubrication
unit [B].
• When installing the cleaning unit and the lubrication unit, ensure that the shaft of the
cleaning unit is fit into the hole in the vibration plate [A].
706
4.Replacement and Adjustment
Lubrication Unit
1. Separate the drum cleaning unit into the lubrication unit and cleaning unit. (Separation of the
Lubrication Unit and Cleaning Unit)
2. Remove the lubricant blade [A].
• When assembling, position the lubricant blade on the grounding plate [A] of the lubrication
unit.
707
4.Replacement and Adjustment
6. Remove the bearing with the side seal (front) [A], bearing with the side seal (rear) [B] and
708
4.Replacement and Adjustment
• When installing a new lubricant bar, a new lubrication roller must be installed.
• When installing the lubrication roller, ensure that the roller is fit into the groove [A] in the
lubrication unit.
709
4.Replacement and Adjustment
7. Remove the side seal (front) [A] and the side seal (rear) [B] from the bearings.
Cleaning Unit
1. Separate the lubrication unit and cleaning unit. (Separation of the Lubrication Unit and Cleaning
Unit)
2. Remove the drum cleaning blade [A].
710
4.Replacement and Adjustment
3. Remove the side seal (front) [A] and the side seal (rear) [B] from the cleaning unit.
Assembling the Cleaning Unit and Lubrication Unit with New Seals
• Replace the cleaning blade, lubrication blade and side seals as a set.
1. Assemble the cleaning unit and the lubrication unit. (Drum Cleaning Unit Internal Components)
2. Clean the area [A] of the cleaning unit and the lubrication unit where the side seals were attached
with alcohol and a cloth.
e.g.: cleaning unit
3. Attach new side seals [A] to both sides of the cleaning unit and the lubrication unit.
Align the edges of the side seal with the edges of the unit and attach them.
Ensure there is no gap between the side seals and the blade [B].
e.g.: cleaning unit
711
4.Replacement and Adjustment
4. After attaching the side seals (x 2 each) on the cleaning unit and the lubrication unit, apply the
lubricant powder (D0159501) (zinc stearate) with a brush on the side seals [A].
e.g. (enlarged): cleaning unit
5. Apply the lubricant powder (D0159501) (zinc stearate) and yellow toner (D0159500) at the
lubrication roller [A].
• Use the blower brush (D0747690) when applying lubricant powder (zinc stearate) and
712
4.Replacement and Adjustment
The potential sensor consists of the main part (front side of the machine) and sub part (rear side of the
machine).
1. Remove the PCDU. (PCDU)
2. Remove the ITB unit. (ITB Unit Removal)
3. Remove the hook of the sub part [B] first, and then remove the hook of the main part [A]. Then
713
4.Replacement and Adjustment
When attaching the potential sensor, hook the main part first, and then hook the sub part.
714
4.Replacement and Adjustment
Development Unit
Development Unit
• Pro C5200S/C5210S: After you take this part out of the machine and put it back, or
replace it with a new one, carry out SP3-040-001 to SP3-040-005 (DEMS: Execute).
• Since the development unit and face plates (front [A], rear [B]) are integrated, do not
remove the following screws.
• When carrying the development unit, do not hold the frame [A]. The frame may become
715
4.Replacement and Adjustment
Development Filter
716
4.Replacement and Adjustment
General
Replacing the developer without completely removing old developer causes the machine to operate in a
condition in which the applied toner density value is lower than the actual value. This happens because
the toner density sensor (TD sensor) initialization process (SP3-030-001 to 006), which is performed
when replacing the developer, always sets back the toner density readings to the prescribed standard
value 7.0% regardless of the actual toner density, e.g. actual toner density could be 8% after replacing
with fresh developer but the TD sensor is calibrated to read this as 7%.
Continuous machine operation in this condition and incomplete developer replacement will eventually
cause the actual toner density to become too high and result in toner scattering.
This procedure explains how to remove old developer to prevent toner scattering, in two parts.
Following are the expected effects:
• Easier developer removal as a result of improved developer fluidity
• Toner density will come close to the standard 7% after developer replacement even if the dev unit
is not completely cleared and contains a slight amount of old developer.
1. Before removing the developer, enter the SP mode and check the current toner density.
SP No. Color
SP 3-200-001 K
SP 3-200-002 C
SP 3-200-003 M
SP 3-200-004 Y
If the toner density is 7%±0.5, skip the following steps and go to PART 2.
If the toner density is not 7%±0.5 (7.5% or higher), continue this procedure.
2. Refer to the table below and determine the print volume according to the toner density that was
found in the previous step. The actual printing will be done in step 5.
717
4.Replacement and Adjustment
• The default value “4” supplies toner in DANC (Divided Image Active Noise Control) mode.
• The changed value “0” supplies toner in constant supply mode.
SP No. Settings
SP 2-109-003 26 Solid
SP 2-109-005 Specify color
5. Print the test pattern on A4/LT or A3/DLT for the print volume determined in step 2.
6. Check the latest toner density in SP3-200-001 to 004. (Table 1)
7. Repeat steps 1 to 5 until you achieve the standard toner density 7%±0.5.
8. Set the SP settings for toner supply mode and supply rate (changed in step 3) back to the default
values; “4” for toner supply mode and “5%” for supply rate.
• Make sure to set the toner supply mode and supply rate back to the defaults. Otherwise,
image density will appear light.
9. Continue with the procedure in “Part 2”.
1. Take out the PCDU and remove the OPC drum so that only the development unit remains.
(Development Unit)
718
4.Replacement and Adjustment
2. Take out the old developer from the supply port [A], and put it into the plastic bag that came with
the new developer.
• When lifting the development unit, hold it with the development roller facing up and the
development supply port facing down.
• When lifting the development unit, do not hold the frame. It may become bent or broken if
load is applied to the frame.
• First, tilt the development unit to 60° and take out the old developer, and then tilt the unit
to 90°. If you take out the old developer with the unit at 90° from the start, the developer
will spread out and stack in the supply port.
• When the old developer cannot be removed smoothly, try the following procedure while
doing step 3, in addition to the operation specified in step 3.
Tilt the development unit, and rotate the screw [B] clockwise using the development jig [A]
to remove the old developer.
3. When the developer is no longer ejected from the supply port, rotate the development roller [B]
719
4.Replacement and Adjustment
4. Repeat step 2 until the developer does not come out of the supply port.
5. Shake the development unit [A] up and down, left and right, and back and forth 5 times each. (The
swing width is about 10 cm.)
• This improves the fluidity of the remaining developer, and makes it easier to remove.
6. Repeat steps 3 and 2 (in that order) until developer does not come out of the supply port.
7. Tilt the development unit [A] towards the development roller. The developer in the unit is gathered
at the development roller side.
8. Turn the development roller clockwise, and make sure that there is no adhesion of developer
around the roller.
9. Keep removing the old developer until the developer adhered to the front development roller is
about 1cm from the edge. When you cannot take out the old developer, try these steps in the
720
4.Replacement and Adjustment
10. When there is a lot of remaining developer, tilt the development unit toward the development roller
and shake it (in the same way as in step 5).
Before you refill a development unit, remove all the old developer in accordance with the ‘Removing Old
Developer’ procedure above.
If there is no toner, add the new developer after installing new toner. This is because when there is no
toner, TD sensor initialization and process control for density adjustment do not start after adding new
developer.
721
4.Replacement and Adjustment
722
4.Replacement and Adjustment
• Protrusion [A] at the bottom of the funnel is a stopper. Make sure that the protrusion is
inserted securely into the slot at the back side of the supply port [B] of the development
unit.
11. Enter SP mode and execute SP3-024-00x (Developer Fill). See the table below.
723
4.Replacement and Adjustment
Filling Developer SP
SP Description
3-024-001 Developer Fill :Exe Execute: ALL
3-024-002 Developer Fill :Exe Execute: COL
3-024-003 Developer Fill :Exe Execute: K
3-024-004 Developer Fill :Exe Execute: C
3-024-005 Developer Fill :Exe Execute: M
3-024-006 Developer Fill :Exe Execute: Y
3-024-007 Developer Fill :Exe Choose: From Left: YMCK
3-024-008 Developer Fill :Exe Execute: Chosen Color
12. Fill the developer [A] while tapping the funnel. It should finish within 60 seconds. Make sure that
the error message "Failed" does not appear.
• Execution time for filling developer is 60 seconds as the default. The time interval for
execution can be adjusted. If more time is needed to empty the developer pack, increase
the time interval with SP3-024-11 (Developer Fill: Exe Drive Time Upper Limit).
• If the filling is not completed in time, see the result code table below.
• If the error message "Failed" is displayed after executing SP3-024-XXX (Developer
Fill :Exe Execute), check the execution result code with SP3-025-001 (Dev Fill OK?).
Then perform the recovery procedure shown in "Result code table for filling developer"
below. After performing the recovery procedure, make sure that "1" is displayed in SP3-
025-001 (Dev Fill OK?).
13. After the filling completion message is displayed on the touch panel display, enter SP3-025-001
(Dev Fill OK? From Left:YMCK) to confirm that developer installation succeeded.
You will see a 4-digit number: 1111. Reading from left-to-right, each number is a result code for the
Y, M, C, K developer execution with SP3-024-00. Refer to the result code table below.
• After turning on the main power switch, initialization for the TD sensor and process control
automatically starts.
16. Check the initialization results for the TD sensor (SP3-031-00x (Init TD Sensor: Exe Execute)). If
the initialization is successful, the result shows “1111”.
• If "1111" is not displayed, solve using the steps that are described in the table above.
17. Check the initialization results for process control (SP3-012-001 (ProCon OK? History:Latest)). If
the initialization is successful, the result shows “11111111”.
727
4.Replacement and Adjustment
• When you have replaced the ITB unit, you must adjust the paper transfer belt unit. (Adjustment
of the Paper Transfer Belt Unit)
1. Remove the ITB cleaning unit. (ITB Cleaning Unit)
2. Remove the faceplate. (Faceplate)
3. Remove the bracket [A].
4. Check that the image transfer rollers (YMC) do not contact the transfer belt. You can check it with
the lever shown in the picture below. The lever indicates either “HP” or “O” depending on the state
of the image transfer rollers.
• HP: Image transfer rollers contact the ITB.
• O: Image transfer rollers are detached from the ITB.
728
4.Replacement and Adjustment
5. Pull the drawer unit. Then pull the ITB unit [A] out to detach it.
• When you remove or install the ITB unit, be sure not to let the transfer belt touch the
drawer unit.
• Be sure to place the ITB unit on a flat surface.
• Execute SP2-924-004 after you remove and re-install the ITB unit.
ITB Replacement
729
4.Replacement and Adjustment
730
4.Replacement and Adjustment
731
4.Replacement and Adjustment
8. Hold the frames [A] of the encoder roller and pull them towards you.
732
4.Replacement and Adjustment
• Be sure to install the new transfer belt with the number at the rear of the machine (the
lower side in the picture below).
• Be sure to attach the new transfer belt without slackness.
• After the replacement, some procedures need to be done. See “Lubrication after
replacement” described below.
733
4.Replacement and Adjustment
7. Rotate the blade release lever [A] to move the cleaning blade away from the ITB.
• The automatic adjustment will not be performed when the machine is turned ON, since
the drawer unit is pulled out/opened.
12. Enter the SP mode and choose SP2-696-001 (Force Apply Lubricant Execute).
13. Push [Execute] on the operation panel and then push the drawer unit into the machine.
• When the drawer unit is pushed into the machine, lubrication starts automatically. This
operation takes about 3 minutes to complete.
14. Turn OFF the machine when the lubrication finishes (the machine stops).
15. Withdraw the drawer unit and rotate the blade release lever in order to make the cleaning blade
contact the ITB.
16. Re-install the belt cleaning fan.
17. Re-attach the paper transfer belt unit.
18. Push the drawer unit into the machine.
19. Turn ON the machine.
734
4.Replacement and Adjustment
ID/MUSIC Sensors
735
4.Replacement and Adjustment
3. Detach the paper transfer belt separation sensor [A] from the bracket.
736
4.Replacement and Adjustment
2. Rotate the cam [A] to the position (HP side) shown below.
• Be sure to re-rotate the cam to the previous position (O side) and drop the image transfer
roller down after the replacement.
3. Remove the hook. Remove the ITB lift (YMC) sensor [A].
737
4.Replacement and Adjustment
• Be sure to push down the lever and drop the image transfer roller down after the
replacement.
3. Remove the clip that fixes the image transfer roller (K) [A].
738
4.Replacement and Adjustment
4. Slide the image transfer roller (K) [A] towards you and remove it.
• Be sure to re-rotate the cam to the O side and drop the image transfer roller down after
the replacement.
3. Slide the image transfer roller (C) to the rear side and remove it.
• Replace the image transfer roller (M), (Y) and (C) using the same steps.
739
4.Replacement and Adjustment
740
4.Replacement and Adjustment
741
4.Replacement and Adjustment
9. Drop the ITB bias roller [A] down and remove the parallel pin [B].
10. Pull the ITB bias roller [A] upward and release its lower end to remove it.
742
4.Replacement and Adjustment
2. Remove the image transfer roller (K). (Image Transfer Roller (K))
3. Remove the image transfer roller (C). (Image Transfer Roller (YMC))
4. Remove the bracket [A].
Anti-condensation Heater
744
4.Replacement and Adjustment
745
4.Replacement and Adjustment
3. Detach the paper transfer belt separation motor [A] from the bracket.
1. Remove the image transfer roller (C). (Image Transfer Roller (YMC))
2. Remove the AC transfer power pack [A].
ITB Motor
746
4.Replacement and Adjustment
747
4.Replacement and Adjustment
• Be sure to handle the gear carefully. Take care not to break the encoder [A].
• To prevent breaking the encoder [A] when you install the ITB drive shaft gear, remove the
ITB drive shaft encoder sensor from the housing first. Then install the ITB drive shaft gear.
748
4.Replacement and Adjustment
2. Remove the pins, and remove the ITB driven shaft encoder sensor [A].
749
4.Replacement and Adjustment
1. Remove the ITB cleaning intake fan. (ITB Cleaning Intake Fan)
2. Release the lock lever [A].
• When re-installing the ITB cleaning unit in the machine, pay attention to the following.
• Ensure that the lock lever is unlocked.
750
4.Replacement and Adjustment
• Lift and set the ITB cleaning unit to put the two positioning pins into the unit.
• Do not peel off the side seals [A]. Take care not to touch the side seals [A] and the
plate [B], because the side seals [A] might peel off.
Bottom Cover
1. Remove the ITB cleaning intake fan. (ITB Cleaning Intake Fan)
2. Pull the bottom cover [A] to remove it.
751
4.Replacement and Adjustment
• ITB cleaning blade, ITB lubricant brush and ITB lubricant bar must be replaced together as a
set.
1. Pull the ITB cleaning unit out. (ITB Cleaning Unit)
2. Remove the ITB cleaning blade [A].
• Use a brush to apply yellow toner (D0149500) evenly on the faces of the new blade
752
4.Replacement and Adjustment
• Use the blower brush (D0747690) when applying yellow toner to the new ITB cleaning
blade.
• ITB cleaning blade, ITB lubricant brush and ITB lubricant bar must be replaced together as a
set.
1. Pull the ITB cleaning unit out. (ITB Cleaning Unit)
753
4.Replacement and Adjustment
2. Rotate the lock lever [A] in the arrowed direction as shown below.
754
4.Replacement and Adjustment
• ITB cleaning blade, ITB lubricant brush and ITB lubricant bar must be replaced together as a
set.
1. Remove the ITB lubricant brush. (ITB Lubricant Brush)
2. Detach the ITB lubricant bar [A] from the ITB cleaning unit.
• ITB cleaning blade, ITB lubricant brush and ITB lubricant bar must be replaced together as a
set.
1. Pull the ITB cleaning unit out. (ITB Cleaning Unit)
755
4.Replacement and Adjustment
756
4.Replacement and Adjustment
2. Rotate the lock lever [A] in the arrowed direction as shown below.
757
4.Replacement and Adjustment
5. Remove the coupling [A] and the bearing [B] (including the spacer).
8. Install the new cleaning brush roller and then use a brush to apply zinc stearate (D0149501) and
yellow toner (D0149500) in an area 40 ~ 50 mm wide (shown below) on the installed cleaning
758
4.Replacement and Adjustment
brush roller.
• Use the blower brush (D0747690) when applying zinc stearate and yellow toner to the
cleaning brush roller.
After the replacement of the ITB cleaning unit or its components (ITB cleaning blade, Lubricant bar, ITB
lubricant blade), you should follow these steps below to lubricate:
1. Turn ON the machine, and enter the SP mode. Then push the PM parts counter reset button in the
PM Parts display (ITB cleaning unit or its components; ITB cleaning blade, lubricant bar, ITB
lubricant blade).
2. Turn OFF the machine.
3. Replace the ITB cleaning unit or its components (ITB cleaning blade, lubricant bar, ITB lubricant
blade).
4. Attach the faceplate and toner supply unit.
759
4.Replacement and Adjustment
5. Rotate the blade release lever to move the cleaning blade away from the ITB.
• The automatic adjustment will not be performed when the machine is turned ON, since
the drawer unit is pulled out/opened.
10. Enter the SP mode and choose SP2-696-001 (Force Apply Lubricant Execute).
11. Push [Execute] on the operation panel and then push the drawer unit into the machine.
• When the drawer unit is pushed into the machine, lubrication starts automatically. This
operation takes about 3 minutes to complete.
12. Turn OFF the machine when the lubrication finishes (the machine stops).
13. Withdraw the drawer unit and rotate the blade release lever in order to make the cleaning blade
contact the ITB.
14. Re-install the belt cleaning fan.
15. Re-attach the paper transfer belt unit.
16. Push the drawer unit into the machine.
17. Turn ON the machine.
760
4.Replacement and Adjustment
4. Hold the handles. Remove the paper transfer belt unit [A].
When replacing the paper transfer belt unit or when doing the 500K PM, apply grease to the inner
diameter of the joint of the unit rotation fulcrum shaft (Grease: Barrierta-S552R).
1. In order to facilitate the work, pull the drawer unit out half way, then press the release levers (one
761
4.Replacement and Adjustment
on the left side and one on the right side, shown by the red arrows) and pull the drawer unit [A] out
fully.
• In a low-temperature environment (below 15°C), the tension of the curled cord may be
reduced. So, do not pull the drawer unit out for a long time, or the curled cord will be
deformed and will not curl up again when you try to slide the drawer unit back in. As a
guide, every 30 minutes, push the drawer unit back to the half-way position. There is no
decrease in tension of the curled cord with a low-temperature environment if the drawer
unit is open half-way.
2. Apply the grease to the inner surface of the joint on the right rear side of the drawer unit.
762
4.Replacement and Adjustment
When you have replaced the following parts, the position of the paper transfer belt unit must be
adjusted with the adjustment jig packed with the main machine accessories.
Adjust the paper transfer belt unit after replacing any of these parts
• You also need to adjust the paper transfer belt unit when you have replaced the paper
transfer belt adjustment bracket [A]. The adjustment is also required when you have
763
4.Replacement and Adjustment
loosened the adjustment screws [B] of the paper transfer belt adjustment bracket.
Adjustment Procedure (Example: When replacing the paper transfer belt adjustment bracket)
1. Remove the paper transfer belt unit. (Paper Transfer Belt Unit)
2. Remove the drawer unit cover. (Drawer Unit Cover)
3. Remove the inner cover [A].
764
4.Replacement and Adjustment
5. Remove the connectors and clamps to take out the drawer unit lock motor cover [A].
765
4.Replacement and Adjustment
9. Remove the ITB cleaning intake fan [A] along with the duct.
10. Remove the ITB roller drive pulley [A] and the timing belt [B].
766
4.Replacement and Adjustment
13. Remove the coupling [A] of the paper transfer belt drive shaft.
767
4.Replacement and Adjustment
16. Replace the paper transfer adjustment bracket, and attach the new bracket to the paper transfer
belt drive shaft.
17. Attach the coupling to the paper transfer belt drive shaft.
18. Insert a driver into the holes [A] and [B], and loosely attach the adjustment screws [C] and [D] of
768
4.Replacement and Adjustment
23. Position the three corners (blue circles in the photo) of the adjustment jig [A], and fix it with the clip
769
4.Replacement and Adjustment
ring [B].
24. Rotate the paper transfer belt shaft counterclockwise by using the link [A] to make the paper
transfer belt unit touch the ITB unit.
25. Insert the driver into the holes [A] and [B] in the bracket, and tighten the adjustment screws [C] and
[D] while holding the adjustment jig.
• When inserting the driver into the holes, be careful not to be caught by the harness. If the
driver is caught by the harness, this could be the cause of defective contact of connectors.
• When tightening the adjustment screws, be careful not to be caught the driver by the
770
4.Replacement and Adjustment
surrounding components.
• When tightening the adjustment screws, tighten the screws in the order of [D] and [C] with
one hand while holding the adjustment jig with the other free hand.
26. Remove the adjustment jig.
27. Re-install the parts removed in previous steps.
• When mounting the motor block, screw the motor in first. Then, assemble links [A], [B] and
[C] as shown below. There is also a diagram embossed on the motor cover to help you to
install the links correctly.
• Lock shaft (Cut surface to the upper left) [A]
• Link [B]
• Paper transfer roller shaft (Cut surface to the lower side) [C]
Belt Unit
1. Remove the paper transfer belt unit. (Paper Transfer Belt Unit)
2. Remove the guide plate [A].
771
4.Replacement and Adjustment
772
4.Replacement and Adjustment
6. Hold the edges on both sides of the belt unit [A], and slide it to remove it.
RTB 39
Steps added at the end of this procedure
RTB 39
Lubrication procedure added after this procedure
1. Remove the paper transfer belt unit. (Paper Transfer Belt Unit)
2. Remove the guide plate [A].
773
4.Replacement and Adjustment
5. Remove the two screws, and then rotate the bracket [A] in the direction of the blue arrow.
RTB 39 When installing the bracket, make sure that the bracket [A] fits over the embossed part of the paper
Note reworded transfer belt unit. Then rotate the bracket [A] so that the embossed part is at the position shown
below.
774
4.Replacement and Adjustment
6. Hold the edges on both sides of the belt unit [A], and slide it to remove it.
RTB 39
Steps added at the end of this procedure
RTB 39
Lubrication procedure added after this procedure
Cleaning Blade
1. Remove the paper transfer belt unit. (Paper Transfer Belt Unit)
2. Remove the guide plate [A].
775
4.Replacement and Adjustment
RTB 39
4. Remove the cleaning blade [A]. Yellow toner lubrication added to this step
RTB 39
Lubrication procedure added
after this procedure
1. Remove the paper transfer lubrication roller. (Paper Transfer Lubrication Roller (Pro
C5200S/C5210S Only))
776
4.Replacement and Adjustment
RTB 39
3. Remove the cleaning blade [A]. Yellow toner lubrication added to this step
RTB 39
Lubrication procedure added
after this procedure
1. Remove the paper transfer belt unit. (Paper Transfer Belt Unit)
2. Remove the guide plate [A].
777
4.Replacement and Adjustment
3. Release the springs [B] of the paper transfer lubricant bar [A], and then remove it.
RTB 39
Lubrication procedure added
after this procedure
1. Remove the paper transfer belt unit. (Paper Transfer Belt Unit)
2. Remove the paper transfer lubricant bar. (Paper Transfer Lubricant Bar (Pro C5200S/C5210S
Only))
3. Remove the bracket [A].
778
4.Replacement and Adjustment
779
4.Replacement and Adjustment
2. Remove the paper transfer belt cooling fan (front) [A] with the bracket.
1. Remove the paper transfer belt unit. (Paper Transfer Belt Unit)
2. Remove the registration unit. (Registration Unit)
3. Remove the spring [A].
780
4.Replacement and Adjustment
781
4.Replacement and Adjustment
782
4.Replacement and Adjustment
Tandem Tray
3. Remove the left tandem tray [A] (M3 x 8; on the left side, shoulder screws; on the right side).
783
4.Replacement and Adjustment
4. Remove the front cover [A] from the left tandem tray.
5. Pull out the right tandem tray [A] and remove it.*
784
4.Replacement and Adjustment
4. Open the vertical transport door and remove the separation roller [C].
1. Remove the right lower cover of the machine exterior. (Right Lower Cover)
785
4.Replacement and Adjustment
786
4.Replacement and Adjustment
787
4.Replacement and Adjustment
7. Remove the vertical transport LED [B] along with the bracket.
788
4.Replacement and Adjustment
10. Pull out the left side of the paper feed unit for tray 1 [A], and then remove it.
(Remove the bracket [B] in order to remove the paper feed unit for tray 1 easily)
789
4.Replacement and Adjustment
790
4.Replacement and Adjustment
6. Remove the rear fence home position sensor [A] and the left tray paper sensor [B].
791
4.Replacement and Adjustment
Paper Height Sensors 1-3, Tray Down Sensor, Right Tray Set Sensor
1. Remove the right lower cover of the machine exterior. (Right Lower Cover)
2. Pull out paper trays 1 and 2.
3. Remove the right side of paper tray 1 [A].*
792
4.Replacement and Adjustment
793
4.Replacement and Adjustment
794
4.Replacement and Adjustment
8. Remove the vertical transport LED [B] along with the bracket.
795
4.Replacement and Adjustment
10. Remove the 5 sensors [A] along with the bracket, located inside the rear face of the machine.
11. Remove the paper height sensors 1, 2, 3 [A], tray down sensor [B] and right tray set sensor [C].
1. Remove the right lower cover of the machine exterior. (Right Lower Cover)
2. Pull out paper trays 1 and 2.
796
4.Replacement and Adjustment
797
4.Replacement and Adjustment
798
4.Replacement and Adjustment
8. Remove the vertical transport LED [B] along with the bracket.
10. Remove the rear end fence closed sensor [A], located inside of the rear face of the machine.
799
4.Replacement and Adjustment
1. Remove the PSU1 / PSU2 along with the bracket, located on the back side of the machine (When
removing the motors and sensors that are behind the PSU1 and PSU2)
2. Disconnect the connectors for the rear end fence closed sensor and the end fence rear solenoid.
800
4.Replacement and Adjustment
1. Remove the PSU1 / PSU2 along with the bracket, located inside the rear face of the machine.
(When removing the motors and sensors that are behind the PSU1 and PSU2)
2. Remove the left tray lock solenoid [A] along with the bracket.
801
4.Replacement and Adjustment
1. Remove the PFB along with the bracket, located on the back side of the machine. (When removing
the motors that are behind the PFB)
2. Remove the PSU1 / PSU2 along with the bracket, located on the back side of the machine. (When
removing the motors and sensors that are behind the PSU1 and PSU2)
3. Remove the rear fence drive motor [A].
1. Remove the PFB along with the bracket, located on the back side of the machine. (When removing
the motors that are behind the PFB)
2. Remove the PSU1 / PSU2 along with the bracket, located on the back side of the machine. (When
removing the motors and sensors that are behind the PSU1 and PSU2)
3. Remove the vertical transport motor along with the bracket. (Vertical Transport Motor)
4. Remove the 1st tray lift motor.
802
4.Replacement and Adjustment
Paper Tray
For MP C6503/C8003, a side fence support plate to help feed the paper straight can be installed in the
paper tray.
This is provided as a service part for MP C6503/C8003. (The paper tray for Pro C5200S/C5210S is
originally equipped with the side fence support plate.)
Accessories
No. Description Q'ty
1 Plate Nut for Tray 1
2 Tapping Screw: 3x10 1
3 Side Fence Support Plate 1
4 Screw: 2.5mm 1
5 Plate Nut Holder 1
6 Plate Nut for Side Fence 1
7 Spacer 1
8 Knob Screw for Support Plate 1
9 Knob Screw for Side Fence 1
10 E-Rings 1
1. Remove the cover [A] and handle [B] from the paper tray.
803
4.Replacement and Adjustment
2. Install the plate nut for tray [A] as shown below. (M3x10)
4. Attach the plate nut for side fence [B] to the plate nut holder [A].
804
4.Replacement and Adjustment
7. Attach the E-ring to the knob screw for the support plate.
8. Place the spacer [A], and then secure the side fence by fastening the knob screw for the side fence
[B].
805
4.Replacement and Adjustment
9. Attach the E-ring to the knob screw for the side fence.
3. Open the vertical transport door, and then remove the separation roller [C].
e.g.: Tray 2
806
4.Replacement and Adjustment
1. Remove the right lower cover of the machine exterior. (Right Lower Cover)
2. Pull out paper tray 2 (in the case of the paper feed unit for tray 2).
3. Remove the vertical transport unit [A].
807
4.Replacement and Adjustment
808
4.Replacement and Adjustment
Pick-up Solenoid
Transport Sensor
809
4.Replacement and Adjustment
• When removing the paper end sensor, remove the hook from the opposite side as shown
810
4.Replacement and Adjustment
811
4.Replacement and Adjustment
3. Remove the vertical transport LED [A] along with the bracket.
1. Remove the PSU1 / PSU2 along with the bracket, located on the back side of the machine. (When
removing the motors and sensors that are behind the PSU1 and PSU2)
2. Disconnect two connectors [A] from the paper size sensors.
3. Pull out the paper trays from the front side of the machine and remove the two paper size sensors
812
4.Replacement and Adjustment
[A].
1. Remove the PSU1 / PSU2 along with the bracket, located on the back side of the machine. (When
removing the motors and sensors that are behind the PSU1 and PSU2)
2. Disconnect two connectors [A] from the paper tray set sensors.
3. Pull out the paper trays from the front side of the machine and remove the two paper tray set
sensors [A].
1. Remove the PFB along with the bracket, located on the back side of the machine. (When removing
the motors that are behind the PFB)
2. Remove the PSU1 / PSU2 along with the bracket, located on the back side of the machine. (When
813
4.Replacement and Adjustment
removing the motors and sensors that are behind the PSU1 and PSU2)
3. Remove the paper feed motor for paper tray 2, or the paper feed motor for paper tray 3. (2nd
Paper Feed Motor, 2nd Transport Motor, 3rd Paper Feed Motor, 3rd Transport Motor)
4. Remove the tray pull-in device [A].
814
4.Replacement and Adjustment
Tray Heater
815
4.Replacement and Adjustment
5. Remove the upper tray heater [A] along with the bracket.
816
4.Replacement and Adjustment
4. Remove the lower tray heater [B] along with the bracket.
817
4.Replacement and Adjustment
1. Remove the right middle rear cover. (Right Middle Rear Cover (Pro C5200S/C5210S))
2. Remove the screw.
1. Disconnect the metal studs that connect the paper feed unit [A] to the bottom plate [B] of the
818
4.Replacement and Adjustment
2. Disconnect the arms [A] and separate the paper feed unit and bottom plate of the bypass tray unit.
819
4.Replacement and Adjustment
5. Pull out the harness and separate the bypass tray unit.
820
4.Replacement and Adjustment
3. Open the bypass tray unit and remove the cover [A].
821
4.Replacement and Adjustment
5. Remove the bypass separation roller [A] from the back of the bypass tray unit.
1. Separate the paper feed unit and bottom plate of the bypass tray unit. (Bypass Tray Unit
Separation)
822
4.Replacement and Adjustment
823
4.Replacement and Adjustment
1. Turn over the bottom plate. (Bypass Tray Paper End Sensor)
824
4.Replacement and Adjustment
1. Separate the paper feed unit and bottom plate of the bypass tray unit. (Bypass Tray Unit
Separation)
825
4.Replacement and Adjustment
826
4.Replacement and Adjustment
2. Remove the fixing screws of the bypass tray lift motor block.
3. Remove the stay [A] (including the shaft) for the bypass tray lift motor block.
827
4.Replacement and Adjustment
5. Remove the bypass tray lift motor [A] along with the bracket [B].
6. Remove the bypass tray lift motor [A] from the bracket [B].
1. Separate the paper feed unit and bottom plate of the bypass tray unit. (Bypass Tray Unit
Separation)
2. Remove the bypass paper feed unit cover [A].
828
4.Replacement and Adjustment
3. Remove the fixing screws and joints [B] of the bypass paper feed unit [A].
829
4.Replacement and Adjustment
830
4.Replacement and Adjustment
831
4.Replacement and Adjustment
10. Remove the fixing screws and the damper [A] of the bracket.
11. Remove the bearing [A] and remove the bracket [B].
832
4.Replacement and Adjustment
13. Remove the bypass tray upper limit sensor [A] and the bypass paper feed sensor [B].
1. Remove the bracket of the bypass paper feed unit. ( Bypass Tray Upper Limit Sensor, Bypass
Paper Feed Sensor)
833
4.Replacement and Adjustment
1. Remove the bracket of the bypass paper feed unit. ( Bypass Tray Upper Limit Sensor, Bypass
Paper Feed Sensor)
2. Remove the bypass tray set sensor [A].
1. Open the bypass tray unit and remove the LED cover [A].
834
4.Replacement and Adjustment
835
4.Replacement and Adjustment
1. Remove the right middle rear cover. (Right Middle Rear Cover (MP C6503/C8003))
2. Remove the bypass tray unit [A] from the machine.
836
4.Replacement and Adjustment
4. Separate the paper feed unit [A] and bottom plate [B] of the bypass tray unit.
837
4.Replacement and Adjustment
• Move the arm out of the hole, or the harness might be snapped.
838
4.Replacement and Adjustment
10. Turn over the bypass tray [A], then disconnect the connectors and clamps of the bypass paper
width sensor [B] / bypass paper length sensor [C].
839
4.Replacement and Adjustment
3. Open the bypass tray unit and remove the cover [A].
840
4.Replacement and Adjustment
5. Remove the bypass separation roller [A] from the back of the bypass tray unit.
841
4.Replacement and Adjustment
3. Remove the hooks and remove the bypass paper width sensor [A].
842
4.Replacement and Adjustment
2. Remove the bottom plate [A] of the bypass tray and turn it over.
1. Separate the paper feed unit and bottom plate of the bypass tray unit. (Bypass Tray Unit
Separation)
843
4.Replacement and Adjustment
2. Remove the fixing screws and joints [A] of the bypass paper feed unit.
844
4.Replacement and Adjustment
3. Remove the bracket [A] and connectors, then take out the paper feed unit.
845
4.Replacement and Adjustment
6. Remove the screws and springs, open the clamps, and disconnect the connector.
7. Remove the bypass pick-up roller and the bypass feed roller. (Bypass Pick-up Roller, Bypass Feed
Roller, Bypass Separation Roller)
846
4.Replacement and Adjustment
847
4.Replacement and Adjustment
1. Remove the bracket of the bypass paper feed unit. (Bypass Paper Feed Sensor)
2. Remove the bypass pick-up solenoid [A].
848
4.Replacement and Adjustment
1. Open the bypass tray unit and remove the LED cover [A].
849
4.Replacement and Adjustment
Registration Unit
3. Remove the connectors and clamps to remove the drawer unit lock motor cover [A].
850
4.Replacement and Adjustment
851
4.Replacement and Adjustment
9. Move the registration unit [A] to the left and lift it, then remove the registration adjustment bracket
[B].
1. Adjust the dial of the registration adjustment bracket [B] to the factory set position.
The factory set position is marked with a black* line [C] as shown below.
*The color is subject to change.
852
4.Replacement and Adjustment
• If the width of [1] is more than [2] in the paper feed direction, adjust the position of the
adjustment bracket in the [-] direction.
Relay Unit
853
4.Replacement and Adjustment
2. Remove the duplex exit motor [A] along with the bracket.
854
4.Replacement and Adjustment
Registration Sensor
855
4.Replacement and Adjustment
856
4.Replacement and Adjustment
2. Remove the relay unit bracket [B] where the paper type sensor [A] is located.
Relay Sensor
857
4.Replacement and Adjustment
858
4.Replacement and Adjustment
4. Turn over the bracket and remove the bypass tray paper type sensor [A].
859
4.Replacement and Adjustment
Separation Lever
• When removing the springs, be sure not to overextend the springs, because they are
extended easily.
• When reinstalling the paper transport belt unit, be sure to insert the connector fully.
2. Open the paper transport belt unit [A], and remove the separation lever [B].
860
4.Replacement and Adjustment
• Ensure that the actuator [C] on the separation lever enters the sensor.
3. Open the paper transport belt unit. Remove the connector [A].
861
4.Replacement and Adjustment
1. Remove the paper transport belt unit. (Paper Transport Belt Unit)
862
4.Replacement and Adjustment
1. Remove the paper transport belt unit. (Paper Transport Belt Unit)
2. Remove the clamps and connectors of the paper transport belt fans.
3. After sliding the paper transport belts [A] to the left or right, remove the paper transport belt fans
863
4.Replacement and Adjustment
[B].
1. Remove the paper transport belt unit. (Paper Transport Belt Unit)
2. Remove the paper transport belt sensor [A].
1. Remove the paper transport belt unit. (Paper Transport Belt Unit)
2. Remove the bracket [A].
864
4.Replacement and Adjustment
865
4.Replacement and Adjustment
Fusing Unit
• Because there is a danger of burns on contact with hot parts of the fusing unit, start work when
the temperature drops to a low enough temperature.
Screw List
Due to the large number of screws and types used in the fusing unit, a list of the screws is shown
below.
No. Name Picture Notation used in
Illustrations
1 FLANGED HEXAGONAL HEAD BOLT:
M4×8 (TCRU)
4 SHOULDER SCREW: M3
5 SCREW: M3×6
866
4.Replacement and Adjustment
9 SCREW: DIA5: M3
867
4.Replacement and Adjustment
• In a low-temperature environment (below 15°C), the tension of the curled cord may be
reduced. So, do not pull the drawer unit out for a long time, or the curled cord will be
deformed and will not curl up again when you try to slide the drawer unit back in. As a
guide, every 30 minutes, push the drawer unit back to the half-way position. There is no
decrease in tension of the curled cord with a low-temperature environment if the drawer
unit is open halfway.
3. Remove the inner cover [A].
868
4.Replacement and Adjustment
869
4.Replacement and Adjustment
870
4.Replacement and Adjustment
871
4.Replacement and Adjustment
872
4.Replacement and Adjustment
1. Remove the fusing front cover, fusing rear cover, entrance drawer cover, and exit drawer cover.
(Fusing Unit Cover)
2. Remove the fusing unit plate [A] at the front side.
873
4.Replacement and Adjustment
874
4.Replacement and Adjustment
IH Coil Unit
875
4.Replacement and Adjustment
876
4.Replacement and Adjustment
1. Remove the fusing stripper plate unit. (Fusing Stripper Plate Unit)
2. Remove the springs from the fusing stripper plate unit.
After replacing the fusing stripper plate, apply grease to the shaft (front and rear sides) to prevent
scratches (Grease: Barrierta-S552R).
877
4.Replacement and Adjustment
The part number of the fusing stripper plate for Pro C5200S/C5210S is different from that for MP
C6503/C8003. Be sure to attach the correct stripper plate when replacing it, because the properties of
the stripper plate are selected to match the fusing belt material. If the wrong stripper plate is attached, a
paper jam will occur.
Bar-code: 2TBP-XXXXXXXX
878
4.Replacement and Adjustment
Bar-code: 2TBO-XXXXXXXX
1. Remove the fusing unit plate at the front side. (Fusing Unit Plates)
2. Remove the thermistor (hot roller shaft) [A] along with the bracket.
879
4.Replacement and Adjustment
3. Remove the fixing screw [A] and the bracket [B] on the front side.
4. Remove the bracket [A], connector [B] and fixing screw [C] on the rear side.
5. Separate the fusing unit into the upper part [A] and the lower part [B].
880
4.Replacement and Adjustment
1. Separate the fusing unit into the upper part and the lower part. (Separating the Fusing Unit)
2. Remove the fusing stripper plate unit. (Fusing Stripper Plate Unit)
3. Remove the fusing belt smoothing roller. (Fusing Belt Smoothing Roller (Pro C5200S/C5210S
Only))
4. Turn over the upper part [A] of the fusing unit.
5. Remove the gear [A], bracket [B] and screw [C] on the rear side.
881
4.Replacement and Adjustment
882
4.Replacement and Adjustment
10. Remove the bracket [A] on the front side, and grounding plate [B].
883
4.Replacement and Adjustment
14. Turn back the upper part of the fusing unit, and remove the stay [A].
15. Turn over the upper part of the fusing unit, and remove the entrance stay [A].
884
4.Replacement and Adjustment
16. Remove the bearings [A], and detach the fusing belt unit [B].
17. Detach the hot roller [A] and the heating roller [B] from the fusing belt [C].
• When you detach the rollers and the belt from the frame, hold the ends of the hot roller
shaft to lift it. Then move it above the heating roller to detach the whole thing (hot/heating
rollers and fusing belt).
1. Remove the heating roller from the fusing belt. (Heating Roller, Fusing Roller, Fusing Belt)
885
4.Replacement and Adjustment
3. Pull out the heating roller shaft [B] from the heating roller [A].
• The spacers [A] are not installed on the new heating roller shaft. You need to remove the
886
4.Replacement and Adjustment
spacers from the old heating roller shaft and attach them to the new shaft.
1. Separate the fusing unit into the upper part and the lower part. (Separating the Fusing Unit)
2. Remove the pressure roller stripper guide plate [A].
887
4.Replacement and Adjustment
3. Release the springs on both sides of the pressure roller stripper plate [A].
4. Rotate the pressure roller stripper plate [A] clockwise, and lift it to remove.
• The frame of the pressure roller stripper plate has C-cut holes.
• In the pictures in the procedure below, the fusing unit is separated. But you need only to
remove the fusing unit plates to remove or install the fusing lamp.
1. Remove the fusing unit plates. (Fusing Unit Plates)
888
4.Replacement and Adjustment
Pressure Roller
1. Separate the fusing unit into the upper part and the lower part. (Separating the Fusing Unit)
2. Remove the pressure roller stripper plate. (Pressure Roller Stripper Plate)
3. Remove the pressure roller fusing lamp. (Pressure Roller Fusing Lamp)
889
4.Replacement and Adjustment
5. Remove the screws of the pressure roller fixing plates [A], [B].
890
4.Replacement and Adjustment
7. Remove the pressure roller fixing plates [B] and the bearings [C] from the pressure roller [A].
• When re-installing the bearings on the pressure roller, pay attention to the direction of the bearings
[A] (the brimmed part comes to the outside) as shown below.
• When re-installing the pressure roller on the fusing unit frame, be sure to make the brimmed parts
891
4.Replacement and Adjustment
[A] of the bearings come to the outside of the frame [B] as shown below.
When replacing a gear individually or at the 600K PM, apply grease to reduce the wearing of the gears
in the fusing drive gear train and to prevent abnormal noise (Grease: Fluotribo MG).
1. Apply the grease to the pressure roller gear [A] and the small diameter of the two layers gear [B]
while rotating the pressure roller gear [A].
2. Check that the grease is applied to all the gears in the gear train (whole circumference and full
width).
892
4.Replacement and Adjustment
Pressure Roller Gear: Grease Amount ([A]: lower limit, [B]: upper limit)
Coaxial Gears: Grease Amount ([A]: lower limit, [B]: upper limit)
When replacing a bearing individually or at the 600K PM, apply grease to reduce the wear of the
bearings and to prevent abnormal noise (Grease: Barrierta-S552R).
1. Remove the bearing (fusing roller). (Heating Roller, Fusing Roller, Fusing Belt)
Remove the bearing (pressure roller). (Pressure Roller)
2. Apply the grease to the inner surface of the bearings.
3. Rotate the ball bearing to check that the ball bearing and the inner surface move smoothly without
touching each other.
893
4.Replacement and Adjustment
1. Separate the fusing unit into the upper part and the lower part. (Separating the Fusing Unit)
2. Remove the thermistor (fusing belt) [A] along with the bracket.
1. Remove the fusing front cover and fusing upper cover. (Fusing Unit Cover)
894
4.Replacement and Adjustment
2. Remove the thermistor (hot roller shaft) [A] along with the bracket.
895
4.Replacement and Adjustment
3. Remove the pressure roller sensor (rear) [A] along with the bracket.
896
4.Replacement and Adjustment
1. Separate the fusing unit into the upper part and the lower part. (Separating the Fusing Unit)
2. Remove the cover [A].
897
4.Replacement and Adjustment
898
4.Replacement and Adjustment
6. Remove the thermopile (pressure roller) [A] along with the bracket.
7. Release the pawls, and remove the thermopile (pressure roller) [A].
1. Separate the fusing unit into the upper part and the lower part. (Separating the Fusing Unit)
2. See “Thermopile (Pressure Roller) Steps 1 to 6”. (Thermopile (Pressure Roller))
3. Remove the harness guide [A].
899
4.Replacement and Adjustment
1. Separate the fusing unit into the upper part and the lower part. (Separating the Fusing Unit).
2. Remove the pressure roller stripper plate. (Pressure Roller Stripper Plate)
3. Detach the fusing paper feed sensor [A].
Do the following procedure after replacing the fusing paper feed sensor.
1. Make sure the entire paper path is clear of paper.
2. Close the drawer unit and front right cover.
3. Do SP1-134-001.
4. Confirm the value in SP1-134-002 is in between 200 and 400.
5. Reboot.
below.
3. Raise the fusing cleaning web unit [A] as shown below to make it upright, and then remove it.
1. Remove the fusing cleaning web unit. (Fusing Cleaning Web Unit (Pro C5200S/C5210S Only))
2. Remove the cover [A] of the fusing cleaning web unit.
901
4.Replacement and Adjustment
902
4.Replacement and Adjustment
9. Loosen the gear [A] with the hexagonal wrench, and then remove it.
903
4.Replacement and Adjustment
904
4.Replacement and Adjustment
• When you re-install the ring, put the ring through the shaft with the protruding part [A] of
the ring facing outside. Push the ring until it reaches the step [B] in the shaft.
• When you re-install the shaft in the frame, put the concave part [A] of the ring over the
905
4.Replacement and Adjustment
906
4.Replacement and Adjustment
3. Hold the handgrips of the fusing belt smoothing roller [A]. Slide and remove the roller.
1. Remove the fusing rear cover. (Fusing Front and Rear Covers)
2. Remove the cover [A].
907
4.Replacement and Adjustment
908
4.Replacement and Adjustment
• Rotate the cleaning web motor [A] counter-clockwise, to make a space in the drawer unit
to remove the cleaning web contact sensor.
909
4.Replacement and Adjustment
3. Remove the fusing entrance sensor [A] along with the bracket.
910
4.Replacement and Adjustment
4. Release the two pawls to remove the resin cover, and remove the thermopile (fusing belt).
911
4.Replacement and Adjustment
912
4.Replacement and Adjustment
7. Remove the inverter exit motor [A] along with the bracket.
913
4.Replacement and Adjustment
914
4.Replacement and Adjustment
915
4.Replacement and Adjustment
916
4.Replacement and Adjustment
917
4.Replacement and Adjustment
918
4.Replacement and Adjustment
8. Remove the inverter feed-in sensor [A] along with the bracket.
919
4.Replacement and Adjustment
920
4.Replacement and Adjustment
and connectors.
3. Remove the inverter junction gate motor [A] along with the bracket.
1. Remove the inverter junction gate motor. (Inverter Junction Gate Motor)
921
4.Replacement and Adjustment
2. Remove the duplex inverter solenoid [A] along with the bracket.
922
4.Replacement and Adjustment
2. Open the paper exit upper guide plate [A] and remove the paper exit upper guide plate sensor [B].
923
4.Replacement and Adjustment
Duplex Unit
924
4.Replacement and Adjustment
5. Remove the purge relay sensor [A] along with the bracket.
6. Remove the duplex invert sensor [A] along with the bracket.
925
4.Replacement and Adjustment
926
4.Replacement and Adjustment
5. Remove the harness clamp. Remove the clamp [A] from the plate.
927
4.Replacement and Adjustment
928
4.Replacement and Adjustment
1. Remove the cover of the duplex transport shift motor 2. (Duplex Transport Shift Motor 1)
929
4.Replacement and Adjustment
2. Disconnect the connector of the horizontal feed guide plate open sensor.
3. Open the horizontal feed guide plate [A], press the positions in the photo below, and remove the
horizontal feed guide plate open sensor [B].
1. Remove the paper transport belt unit. (Paper Transport Belt Unit)
930
4.Replacement and Adjustment
931
4.Replacement and Adjustment
• Duplex transport home position sensor 2 and sensor shift home position switch are in close
proximity. When you connect a harness to the duplex transport home position sensor 2 or
sensor shift home position switch after the replacement, be careful not to connect the harness
932
4.Replacement and Adjustment
to the incorrect sensor. If you connect the harness to the incorrect sensor, SC515-02 occurs
when duplex copying. The SC does not occur when turning on the machine or when making
one-sided copies.
3. Remove the paper transfer belt unit. (Paper Transfer Belt Unit)
4. Remove the edge detection sensor shift motor [A] along with the bracket.
933
4.Replacement and Adjustment
• When installing the motor, attach the timing belt [A] at the edge detection unit.
1. Remove the paper transport belt unit. (Paper Transport Belt Unit)
2. Remove the paper transfer belt unit. (Paper Transfer Belt Unit)
3. Remove the registration unit. (Registration Unit)
4. Remove the drawer unit lock motor. (Drawer Unit Lock Motor)
5. Remove the springs [A].
934
4.Replacement and Adjustment
935
4.Replacement and Adjustment
• After replacing the paper transfer belt bracket, be sure to adjust the paper transfer belt
unit. (Adjustment of the Paper Transfer Belt Unit)
9. Remove the duplex exit motor along with the bracket [A].
11. Remove the paper transfer belt cooling duct cover [A].
936
4.Replacement and Adjustment
937
4.Replacement and Adjustment
938
4.Replacement and Adjustment
• Duplex transport home position sensor 2 and sensor shift home position switch are in close
proximity. When you connect a harness to the duplex transport home position sensor 2 or
sensor shift home position switch after the replacement, be careful not to connect the harness
to the incorrect sensor. If you connect the harness to the incorrect sensor, SC515-02 occurs
when duplex copying. The SC does not occur when turning on the machine or when making
one-sided copies.
1. Remove the paper transport belt unit. (Paper Transport Belt Unit)
2. Remove the pressure roller duct [A].
939
4.Replacement and Adjustment
4. Open the horizontal feed guide plate [A] and remove the cover [B].
1. Remove the paper transport belt unit. (Paper Transport Belt Unit)
940
4.Replacement and Adjustment
941
4.Replacement and Adjustment
5. Remove the hook, and remove the cover [A] of the duplex transport shift motor 2.
6. Open the horizontal feed guide plate [A] and remove the cover [B].
7. Remove the duplex transport shift motor 2 [A] from the bracket.
942
4.Replacement and Adjustment
943
4.Replacement and Adjustment
944
4.Replacement and Adjustment
PCB: LSB
1. Remove the left lower cover of the machine exterior. (Left Lower Cover)
2. Remove the purge door [A].
945
4.Replacement and Adjustment
5. Pull out the drawer unit [A] and remove the upper inner cover [B].
946
4.Replacement and Adjustment
Push Switch
1. Remove the left lower cover of the machine exterior. (Left Lower Cover)
947
4.Replacement and Adjustment
3. Pull out the drawer unit and remove the duplex inverter motor unit [A].
948
4.Replacement and Adjustment
1. Remove the left lower cover of the machine exterior. (Left Lower Cover)
949
4.Replacement and Adjustment
4. Remove the purge tray LED [A] from the bracket [B].
950
4.Replacement and Adjustment
951
4.Replacement and Adjustment
952
4.Replacement and Adjustment
Drive Unit
Layout (Motors)
To replace the motors and sensors on the back of the machine, first remove the outer cover. (Rear
Cover)
To replace the motors and sensors on the back of the machine, first remove the outer cover. (Rear
Cover)
953
4.Replacement and Adjustment
954
4.Replacement and Adjustment
To replace the motors and sensors on the back of the machine, first remove the outer cover. (Rear
Cover)
To replace the motors on the front of the drawer unit, first remove the drawer unit cover. (Drawer Unit
955
4.Replacement and Adjustment
Cover)
• Insert a sheet of paper [A] as shown below when removing the drum motor.
• This will prevent the grease coated on the tip of the drum shaft from contacting the ITB unit.
e.g.: K
• The following four screws located on the outside of the bracket were positioned on the
bracket with a special jig. Do not loosen or remove these screws. If their position is
shifted, the drum shaft will become eccentric, and this may cause abnormal images.
• When removing or installing the drum shaft [A] and motor [B], the parts where the drum
958
4.Replacement and Adjustment
shaft [A] connects to the motor [B] must be kept horizontal so that excessive load is not
put on the drum shaft. In order to avoid deformation of the fixing screw [C], use a box-type
driver.
• For Pro C5200S/C5210S, there is a sensor and an actuator on the drum motor for
detecting the drum home position. If the actuator is not installed, DEMS goes out of
control and uneven density appears at 190 mm intervals on the output. Therefore, check
the DEMS execution results with SP3-041-001 (DEMS Exe OK?) after replacing the drum
motor. The DEMS execution results are displayed with 8 digits and they indicate the result
of each color from left to right (YYMMCCKK). If "11111111" is displayed, DEMS has
executed successfully for all color drums and development rollers. If "4" is displayed,
there is a possibility that the actuator is not installed.
7. Remove the rivets [A] (×4), and remove the drum encoder sensor [B] (×2).
959
4.Replacement and Adjustment
Removing the Drive Exhaust Fan and the Potential Sensor Board
1. Slide the drive exhaust fan [A] upward along with the duct.
2. Remove the potential sensor board [A] along with the bracket.
1. Remove the drum motor. (Drum Motor (KCMY) / Drum Encoder Sensor (KCMY))
960
4.Replacement and Adjustment
2. Remove the rivets [A] (×2), and remove the drum home position sensor [B].
2. Remove the drum cleaning motor [A] along with the bracket.
e.g.: K
961
4.Replacement and Adjustment
After replacing the drum cleaning motor, apply grease to the motor shaft gear to reduce motor noise
(Grease: G-1077).
Lower Limit Upper Limit
Removing the Drive Exhaust Fan and the Potential Sensor Board
1. Slide the drive exhaust fan [A] upward along with the duct.
2. Remove the potential sensor board [A] along with the bracket.
962
4.Replacement and Adjustment
963
4.Replacement and Adjustment
After replacing the development motor, apply grease to the motor shaft gear to reduce motor noise
(Grease: G-1077).
Lower Limit Upper Limit
964
4.Replacement and Adjustment
Removing the Drive Exhaust Fan and the Potential Sensor Board
1. Slide the drive exhaust fan [A] upward along with the duct.
2. Remove the potential sensor board [A] along with the bracket.
• Access to the development motor (M) [A] and development motor (Y) [B] is possible.
965
4.Replacement and Adjustment
1. Remove the ozone exhaust fan along with the duct. (Ozone Exhaust Fan)
For Pro C5200S/C5210S, in order to remove the ITB lift unit, you must remove the fusing belt
smoothing roller contact motor. (Fusing Belt Smoothing Roller Contact Motor (Pro
C5200S/C5210S))
966
4.Replacement and Adjustment
2. Remove the ITB lift motor [A] along with the bracket.
After replacing the ITB lift motor, apply grease to the motor shaft gear to reduce motor noise (Grease:
G-1077).
967
4.Replacement and Adjustment
1. Remove the IOB along with the bracket, located on the back side of the machine. (When removing
the motors that are behind the IOB)
2. Remove the paper transfer belt motor [A].
3. Remove the rivets [A] (×4), and remove the paper transfer belt encoder sensors [B] (x 2).
968
4.Replacement and Adjustment
• When installing the paper transfer belt encoder sensors, put the sensors [B] on the
encoder cover [A] and fasten the sensors with rivets [C].
After replacing the paper transfer belt motor, apply grease to the motor shaft gear to reduce motor noise
(Grease: G-1077).
Lower Limit Upper Limit
1. Remove the IOB along with the bracket, located on the back side of the machine. (When removing
969
4.Replacement and Adjustment
3. Remove the bypass feed motor [A] and relay motor [B] from the bracket.
1. Remove the IOB along with the bracket, located on the back side of the machine. (When removing
the motors that are behind the IOB)
970
4.Replacement and Adjustment
2. Remove the 1st paper feed motor [A] and 1st transport motor [B] along with the bracket.
3. Remove the 1st paper feed motor [A] and 1st transport motor [B] from the bracket.
1. Remove the PFB along with the bracket, located on the back side of the machine. (When removing
the motors that are behind the PFB)
971
4.Replacement and Adjustment
2. Remove the vertical transport motor [A] along with the bracket.
2nd Paper Feed Motor, 2nd Transport Motor, 3rd Paper Feed Motor, 3rd Transport Motor
1. Remove the PFB along with the bracket, located on the back side of the machine. (When removing
the motors that are behind the PFB)
The 2nd paper feed motor, 2nd transport motor [A], 3rd paper feed motor, and 3rd transport motor
[B] are attached to one bracket.
972
4.Replacement and Adjustment
2. Remove the paper feed motors and transport motors (x 4) [A] along with the bracket.
3. 2nd transport motor [A], 2nd paper feed motor [B], 3rd transport motor [C] and 3rd paper feed
973
4.Replacement and Adjustment
motor [D].
974
4.Replacement and Adjustment
975
4.Replacement and Adjustment
2. Remove the paper transfer belt fusing exhaust fan [A] along with the duct.
976
4.Replacement and Adjustment
After replacing the fusing drive unit, apply grease to the motor shaft and joint to prevent abnormal motor
noise (Grease: G-1077).
Grease range: whole of the shaft, Grease amount: 0.05g to 0.15g
1. Push the joint [A], and apply the grease (G-1077) to the whole of the shaft [B].
2. Put back the joint and turn it to spread the grease evenly.
977
4.Replacement and Adjustment
978
4.Replacement and Adjustment
2. Remove the paper transfer belt fusing exhaust fan [A] along with the duct.
• For Pro C5200S/C5210S, in order to remove the fusing release motor, you must remove
the bracket of the fusing belt smoothing roller drive motor. (Removing the Fusing Belt
Smoothing Roller Drive Motor and the Bracket)
979
4.Replacement and Adjustment
Removing the Fusing Belt Smoothing Roller Drive Motor and the Bracket
1. Remove the fusing belt smoothing roller drive motor. (Removing the Fusing Belt Smoothing Roller
Drive Motor and the Bracket)
2. Remove the bracket [A] of the fusing belt smoothing roller drive motor.
980
4.Replacement and Adjustment
2. Remove the paper transfer belt fusing exhaust fan [A] along with the duct.
3. Remove the fusing drive motor [A] along with the bracket.
• For Pro C5200S/C5210S, in order to remove the fusing drive motor along with the
bracket, you must remove the bracket of the fusing belt smoothing roller drive motor.
(Removing the Fusing Belt Smoothing Roller Drive Motor and the Bracket)
981
4.Replacement and Adjustment
After replacing the waste toner collection motor, apply grease to the motor shaft gear (Grease: G-1077).
Lower Limit Upper Limit
Removing the Fusing Belt Smoothing Roller Drive Motor and the Bracket
982
4.Replacement and Adjustment
2. Remove the bracket [A] of the fusing belt release roller drive motor.
983
4.Replacement and Adjustment
2. Remove the paper transfer belt fusing exhaust fan [A] along with the duct.
984
4.Replacement and Adjustment
1. Remove the fusing release motor. (Removing the Fusing Release Motor)
2. Remove the fusing drive motor [A] along with the bracket.
985
4.Replacement and Adjustment
3. Remove the fusing belt release roller contact motor [A] along with the bracket.
4. Remove the fusing belt release roller contact motor [A] from the bracket.
986
4.Replacement and Adjustment
1. Open the waste toner bottle door [A] and take out the waste toner bottle [B], holding the bottle at
the decal location.
• To prevent the waste toner from spilling from the rear side [A], do not tilt the bottle towards
the rear when replacing the waste toner bottle.
• Replace the waste toner bottle while the main power is ON.
• If the waste toner bottle is replaced while the main power is OFF, the main machine
cannot recognize that the waste toner bottle is replaced. In this case, the waste toner full
state or near full state, which has been displayed on the operation panel, may not
disappear after the replacement. If the waste toner full state or near full state displayed on
the operation panel does not disappear after the replacement, remove and install the
waste toner bottle again while the main power is ON.
987
4.Replacement and Adjustment
• The PM counter for the waste toner bottle is not reset even when [New Unit Set] is set to
[Yes] in the [PM Counter/New Unit Set] Menu.
• When the new waste toner bottle is set while the waste toner full is detected, the PM
counter for the waste toner bottle is automatically reset. Therefore, there is no need to set
to [Yes] on the [PM Counter/New Unit Set] Menu after the replacement.
• If the waste toner bottle is replaced when the waste toner bottle does not need to be replaced
(*1 in the flow chart above), the main machine cannot recognize that the waste toner bottle is
replaced. Then the PM counter keeps counting after the replacement. In this case, the waste
toner near full state may be reported soon after the replacement.
• When the machine recognizes the waste toner bottle replacement, the values of SP3-800-004
(Waste Toner Full Detection: Volume Count 1 After Replacement) and SP3-800-005 (Waste
Toner Full Detection: Volume Count 2 After Replacement) are reset to "0". After that, the value
of SP3-800-004 or SP3-800-005 starts counting up by using the OPC drum rotation as a
trigger when an image is printed.
• If neither SP3-800-004 nor SP3-800-005 are counted up after printing, this means that the
main machine does not recognize the waste toner bottle replacement. In this case, remove
and install the waste toner bottle while the main power is ON. Then check the SP values of
SP3-800-004 or SP3-800-005.
988
4.Replacement and Adjustment
Flow Chart for the Machine Which Does Not Support @Remote Service
• If the waste toner bottle is replaced when the waste toner bottle does not need to be replaced
(*1 in the flow chart above), the main machine cannot recognize that the waste toner bottle is
replaced. Then the PM counter keeps counting after the replacement. In this case, the waste
toner near full state may be reported soon after the replacement.
• When the machine recognizes the waste toner bottle replacement, the values of SP3-800-004
(Waste Toner Full Detection: Volume Count 1 After Replacement) and SP3-800-005 (Waste
Toner Full Detection: Volume Count 2 After Replacement) are reset to "0". After that, the value
of SP3-800-004 or SP3-800-005 start counting up by using the OPC drum rotation as a trigger
when an image is printed.
• If neither SP3-800-004 nor SP3-800-005 are counted up after printing, this means that the
main machine does not recognize the waste toner bottle replacement. In this case, remove
and install the waste toner bottle while the main power is ON. Then check the SP values of
989
4.Replacement and Adjustment
SP3-800-004 or SP3-800-005.
990
4.Replacement and Adjustment
7. Release the pawls, and pull the relay duct [A] and the swinging plate [B] to remove them.
8. Remove the IH inverter [A] and AC drive board [B] along with the bracket.
991
4.Replacement and Adjustment
Install the relay duct and swinging plate using the following procedure.
1. Remove the relay duct seal [A] and hook the cutout [B] onto the relay duct [C].
2. Attach the relay duct [A] to the waste toner bottle unit, and drop the swinging plate [B] into the unit.
992
4.Replacement and Adjustment
3. Clean the attachment surface with alcohol and attach a seal [A].
1. Remove the IH inverter [A] and AC drive board [B] along with the bracket. (PSU1, PSU2)
2. Remove the waste toner bottle motor sensor [A].
1. Remove the waste toner bottle unit. (Waste Toner Bottle Unit)
2. Remove the waste toner near full sensor [A].
1. Remove the waste toner bottle unit. (Waste Toner Bottle Unit)
993
4.Replacement and Adjustment
1. Remove the waste toner bottle unit. (Waste Toner Bottle Unit)
2. Remove the waste toner transport motor [A].
After replacing the waste toner transport motor, apply grease to the motor shaft gear (Grease: G-1077).
Lower Limit Upper Limit
994
4.Replacement and Adjustment
4. Remove the fixing screws (×4) of the waste toner upper transport [A].
5. Remove the hooks of K [B], M, C and Y in that order, then remove the waste toner upper transport
[A].
995
4.Replacement and Adjustment
3. Remove the fixing screws of the waste toner vertical transport [A].
5. Because of the cam [B] at the bottom, remove the waste toner vertical transport [A] in the upper-left
direction.
1. Remove the PSU1/PSU2 along with the bracket. (When removing the motors and sensors that are
behind the PSU1 and PSU2)
2. Remove the relay duct with swinging plate. (Waste Toner Bottle Unit)
996
4.Replacement and Adjustment
• Check the position of the hooks [A] in the photo below before removing.
• When installing, first install the waste toner lower transport, then install the relay duct with
swinging plate. (Installing the Relay Duct)
997
4.Replacement and Adjustment
Layout (Boards)
To replace the electrical components on the back of the machine, first remove the outer cover. (Rear
Cover)
998
4.Replacement and Adjustment
Controller Board
999
4.Replacement and Adjustment
• There are two types of controller boards, one for Pro C5210S/MP C8003 SP and one for
Pro C5200S/MP C6503 SP. Because there are different part numbers for these two
controller boards, when replacing, check the parts catalog to make sure that you install
the correct type. If you install the wrong board, the machine will not work.
There are two NVRAMs ([A] and [B]) on the controller board. The two NVRAMs are one set. NVRAM [A]
is labeled "2M-1", and NVRAM [B] is labeled "2M-2".
When replacing the controller board, remove the NVRAMs from the old controller board. Then install
them at the same position on the new controller board. If this is not done, SC195-00 occurs.
• Install NVRAM (2M-1) in the socket that has "FRAM-1" [C] printed next to it on the controller board.
Install so that the indentation [E] on NVRAM (2M-1) is facing the direction of the arrow [G] that is
printed on the controller board.
• Install NVRAM (2M-2) in the socket that has "FRAM-2" [D] printed next to it on the controller board.
Install so that the indentation [F] on NVRAM (2M-2) is facing the direction of the arrow [H] that is
printed on the controller board.
1000
4.Replacement and Adjustment
• Note that if you install incorrectly, both the controller board and NVRAMs will be damaged.
• When replacing the controller board, first, check which ESA applications have been installed. After
replacing the controller board, re-install the ESA applications by following the installation
instructions for each application.
• After reinstalling the ESA applications, print the SMC (SP-5-990-024/025 (SMC: SDK/Application
Info)). Then open the tandem tray [A] and remove the paper set sheet [B]. Store the SMC sheet [C]
and the SD card(s) [D] that were used to install the ESA application(s).
HDD Unit
The HDD contains two separate hard disks (160 Gigabytes each x2 = 320 Gigabytes).
Before replacing the HDD unit, copy the address book data to an SD card from the HDD with SP5846-
051 if possible.
• Never remove an HDD unit from the work site without the consent of the client.
• The two disks are always replaced together as a unit. Never attempt to replace a single disk.
1. Remove the rear middle cover. (Rear Middle Cover)
1001
4.Replacement and Adjustment
• Make sure the cables are correctly connected on the controller board.
Red cable: Upper socket
Blue cable: Lower socket
• If the connections are reversed, the machine will issue an error at startup. If it occurs just
reconnect the HDD correctly and start again. The HDD will not be damaged by such an
incorrect startup.
• If the customer has any concerns about the security of any information on the HDD, the HDD must
remain with the customer for disposal or safe keeping.
• The HDD may contain proprietary or classified (Confidential, Secret) information. Specifically, the
1002
4.Replacement and Adjustment
HDD contains document server documents and data stored in temporary files created
automatically during copy job sorting and jam recovery. Such data is stored on the HDD in a
special format so it cannot normally be read but can be recovered with illegal methods.
Reinstallation
• Explain to the customer that the following information stored on the HDD is lost when the HDD is
replaced: document server documents, fixed stamps, document server address book
• The address book and document server documents (if needed) must be input again.
• If the customer is using the Data Overwrite Security, the Data Encryption feature or OCR Scanned
PDF, these applications must be installed again.
BICU
1003
4.Replacement and Adjustment
Wiring path
A BICU procured as a service part does not contain the NVRAM (EEPROM) [A].
When installing a new BICU procured as a service part, make sure to remove the NVRAM from the old
BICU and install it on the new BICU.
1004
4.Replacement and Adjustment
• When installing the NVRAM [A], install it so that the indentation [B] on the NVRAM
corresponds with the mark [C] printed on the BICU.
• Incorrect installation of the NVRAM will damage both the BICU and NVRAM.
• If you forget to install the NVRAM on the new BICU, the machine will not activate and will
remain in "Please wait" status even with the main power switch turned on.
1. Turn ON the main power switch and register the machine serial number onto the new BICU by
entering the machine serial number in SP5-811-004 (Machine Serial / Set: BICU).
Inputting the wrong serial number will cause the machine to display SC995-001 (CPM set error).
2. Select the paper size system in SP5-131-001.
0: DOM (Japan)
1: NA
2: EU
3. Specify the area code in SP5-807-001.
1: DOM (Japan)
2: NA
3: EU
4: TWN
5: AA
6: CHN
1005
4.Replacement and Adjustment
• Setting the wrong area code will cause the machine to display SC995-04 (CPM set error).
4. Turn the main power OFF/ON.
• When removing the NVRAM, do not put the NVRAM where static charges are generated. The
data stored in the NVRAM might be damaged by the static charges.
There are three NVRAMs in the machine: two are on the controller board, and one is on the BICU.
1. Make sure that you have the SMC report (factory settings). This report comes with the machine.
2. Print out the SMC data (“ALL”) in SP5-990-001.
3. Turn OFF the main power switch.
4. Insert a blank SD card into slot #2, and then turn on the main power switch.
5. Upload the Address Book Data to the blank SD card in SP5-846-051 (UCS Setting / Back Up All
Addr Book).
• Make sure to note the following SP settings as they will not be automatically uploaded to
the SD card. These settings will be input manually in Step 16.
• SP5-193-001 (External Controller Info. Setting)
0: No external controller, 1: EFI controller
• SP5-895-001 (Application invalidation / Printer )
1006
4.Replacement and Adjustment
0: Valid, 1: Invalid
• SP5-895-002 (Application invalidation / Scanner )
0: Valid, 1: Invalid
• SP5-985-001 (Device Setting / On Board NIC )
0: Invalid, 1: Valid
• SP5-985-002 (Device Setting / On Board USB )
0: Invalid, 1: Valid
10. Turn OFF the main power switch, and then unplug the AC power cord.
11. Remove the SD card containing the NVRAM data from slot #2.
12. Replace the two NVRAMs on the Controller Board with the new ones.
• There are two NVRAMs on the controller board as mentioned in When installing the New
Controller Board. Make sure to replace the two NVRAMs as a set.
• NVRAMs [A] and [B] installed on the Controller Board at the factory are labeled "2M-1"
and "2M-2" respectively. NVRAMs procured as service parts are labeled "FRAM1/D261E"
and "FRAM2/D261E".
• Install NVRAM "FRAM1/D261E" in the socket printed "FRAM-1" [C] on the controller
board. Install so that the indentation [E] on the NVRAM faces toward the direction
indicated with the arrow [G] printed on the controller board.
• Install NVRAM "FRAM2/D261E" in the socket printed "FRAM-2" [D] on the controller
board. Install so that the indentation [F] on the NVRAM faces toward the direction
indicated with the arrow [H] printed on the controller board.
• Work carefully to avoid mistakes when installing the NVRAM. Incorrect installation will
1007
4.Replacement and Adjustment
13. Plug in the AC power cord, and then turn ON the main power switch.
• DO NOT insert the SD card containing the NVRAM data that you removed in Step 7
before turning on the main switch.
• SC995-02 (Defective NVRAM) will appear when powering on the main power switch, but
ignore this SC. DO NOT turn off the main power switch. Continue with this procedure.
14. Re-insert the SD card containing the NVRAM data that you removed in Step 7 back into slot #2.
15. Download the old NVRAM data from the SD card onto the new NVRAM in SP5-825-001 (NVRAM
Data Download).
• After the download completes, "Completed. You have to reboot." will appear, but ignore
this message and press the “Exit” button. DO NOT reboot at this moment.
• SC870-11 (Address Book Data Error) will appear in the banner, but DO NOT turn off the
main power switch. Continue with this procedure.
16. Input the following SP settings according to the notes took in Step 5.
• SP5-193-001 (External Controller Info. Setting)
• SP5-895-001 (Application invalidation / Printer)
• SP5-895-002 (Application invalidation / Scanner)
• SP5-985-001 (Device Setting / On Board NIC)
• SP5-985-002 (Device Setting / On Board USB)
• "Completed. You have to reboot." will appear after inputting each of the above SP
settings, but ignore this message and press the “Exit” button. DO NOT reboot at this
moment.
17. Turn OFF the main power switch. This will take about 3 minutes. Wait until the machine power is
turned off completely, and then remove the SD card from slot #2.
1008
4.Replacement and Adjustment
• SP5-846-052 will fail, if the settings in SP5-193-001, SP5-985-001 and SP5-985-002 input
in Step 16 are incorrect.
• "Completed. You have to reboot." will appear if SP5-846-052 results in success.
21. Turn OFF the main power switch and remove the SD card from slot #2.
22. Turn ON the main power switch.
• The total counter value is reset to “0” when the NVRAM is replaced.
24. Do the self-check Process Control.
25. Do ACC for the copier application program.
26. Do ACC for the printer application program.
• If you cannot execute SP5-824-001 (NVRAM Data Upload) and SP5-825-001 (NVRAM
Data Download) for some reason, try the following.
• Restore the settings manually with all the data on the SMC report (factory default
setting) provided with the machine.
• Re-install the Data Overwrite Security function and HDD Encryption feature.
• If the message “SD card for restoration is required.” appears after the NVRAM
replacement, restore the encryption key.
Before performing the following procedure, contact your supervisor to obtain information on how to
input the machine serial number in the new NVRAM.
1. Make sure that you have the SMC report (factory settings). This report comes with the machine.
2. Print out the SMC data (SP5-990-001).
3. Turn OFF the main power switch.
4. Install an SD card into SD card slot #2 and then, turn on the main power switch.
5. Copy the NVRAM data to an SD card (SP5-824-001).
1009
4.Replacement and Adjustment
6. Turn OFF the main power switch, and then unplug the power cord.
7. Replace the NVRAM on the BCIU and put back the covers.
8. Plug in the power cord, and then turn on the main power switch.
9. Select the paper-size system in SP5-131-001 (Paper Size Type Selection).
0: DOM (JAPAN)
1: NA
2: EU
10. Specify the area code in SP5-807-001.
1: DOM (JAPAN)
2: NA
3: EU
4: TWN
5: AA
6: CHN
• Setting the wrong area code will cause the system to display SC995-04(CPM Set Error).
11. Input the machine serial number according to the procedure instructed by your supervisor.
• Inputting an incorrect serial number will cause the system to display SC195-00 (Serial
Number Set Error).
12. Turn the main power switch off and on.
13. Copy the data from the SD card to the NVRAM (SP5-825-001).
14. Turn OFF the main power switch, and then remove the SD card from SD card slot #2.
15. Turn ON the main power switch.
16. Specify the SP and UP mode settings, if necessary.
17. Do the self-check Process Control.
18. Do ACC for the copier application program.
19. Do ACC for the printer application program.
• If the message “SD card for restoration is required.” appears after the NVRAM
replacement, restore the encryption key.
IOB
1010
4.Replacement and Adjustment
Wiring path
1011
4.Replacement and Adjustment
2. Remove the IOB [A] along with the bracket by sliding it to the right.
PFB
1012
4.Replacement and Adjustment
Wiring Path
1. Remove the PFB [A] along with the bracket by sliding it upwards.
IH Inverter
1013
4.Replacement and Adjustment
• The screw in the picture below is a screw with a washer, different from the others.
Wiring path
AC Drive Board
1014
4.Replacement and Adjustment
• A shoulder screw is used at the location highlighted in the picture below, which is a
different type from the others.
Wiring path
1015
4.Replacement and Adjustment
PSU1, PSU2
NEVER touch the areas outlined in red in the photos below. This is to prevent electric shock caused by
residual charge.
A residual charge of about 100V-400V remains in the AC circuits on the PSU board for several months,
even when the board has been removed from the machine after turning off the machine power and
unplugging the power cord.
The procedure to discharge residual charge from the machine by unplugging the power cord from the
AC wall outlet and pressing the main power switch works only for the DC circuits on this board.
Residual charge remains in the AC circuits.
PSU1
PSU2
1016
4.Replacement and Adjustment
1. Remove the IH Inverter [A] and AC drive board [B] along with the bracket.
3. Remove the PFB along with the bracket. (When removing the motors that are behind the PFB)
4. Remove the PSU1 [A].
When removing the motors and sensors that are behind the PSU1 and PSU2
1017
4.Replacement and Adjustment
3. Remove the fixing screws of the paper transfer belt fusing exhaust fan [A].
4. Remove the fixing screws of the fusing pressure roller exhaust fan [A]. (Pro C5200S/C5210S only)
1018
4.Replacement and Adjustment
6. Remove the PSU1 and PSU2 [A] along with the bracket.
Wiring path
1019
4.Replacement and Adjustment
3. Remove the connectors of the harness guide [A] and the potential sensor board [B].
1020
4.Replacement and Adjustment
3. Remove the combined high-voltage power supply board (KC) [A] along with the bracket.
1021
4.Replacement and Adjustment
1. Remove the combined high-voltage power supply board (KC) [A] along with the bracket.
(Combined High-Voltage Power Supply Board (KC))
2. Disconnect the connectors of the combined high-voltage power supply board (MY) [A].
3. Remove the screws from the combined high-voltage power supply board (MY) [A].
4. Open the clamps, and remove the combined high-voltage power supply board (MY) [A] along with
1022
4.Replacement and Adjustment
the bracket.
Heater Switch
1023
4.Replacement and Adjustment
1024
4.Replacement and Adjustment
Layout (Fans)
1025
4.Replacement and Adjustment
1026
4.Replacement and Adjustment
Drawer (Inside)
1027
4.Replacement and Adjustment
1028
4.Replacement and Adjustment
1029
4.Replacement and Adjustment
2. Disconnect the harness to remove the development exhaust fans [A] along with the duct.
3. Disconnect the left clamp to remove the development exhaust fan (right) [A].
5. Remove the development exhaust fans (Right / Left) [A] along with the duct.
e.g.: Development exhaust fan (right)
1030
4.Replacement and Adjustment
6. Remove the hooks and take out the development exhaust fans (right / left) [A].
e.g.: Development exhaust fan (right)
1. Remove the toner supply unit inner cover. (Toner Supply Unit Inner Cover)
1031
4.Replacement and Adjustment
• For development intake fan (Y) [A], pull the toner supply unit (Toner Supply Unit) and
1032
4.Replacement and Adjustment
remove the development intake fan (Y) [A] from the right side.
1034
4.Replacement and Adjustment
1035
4.Replacement and Adjustment
3. Remove the paper transfer belt fusing exhaust fan [A] along with the duct.
4. Remove the fusing pressure roller exhaust fan [A] along with the duct.
5. Remove the fusing pressure roller exhaust fan [A] from the duct.
1. Remove the fusing exit exhaust fan. (Fusing Exit Exhaust Fan)
1036
4.Replacement and Adjustment
3. Remove the hooks of the duct [A], and take out the heat pipe panel exhaust fan [B].
1037
4.Replacement and Adjustment
1038
4.Replacement and Adjustment
7. Remove the heat pipe panel intake fan [A] along with the bracket.
8. Remove the heat pipe panel intake fan [A] from the bracket.
1039
4.Replacement and Adjustment
1040
4.Replacement and Adjustment
4. Remove the ITB motor cooling fan [A] from the bracket.
1. Remove the IOB along with the bracket. (When removing the motors that are behind the IOB)
2. Remove the ITB motor cooling fan. (ITB Motor Cooling Fan)
3. Remove the frame [A].
1041
4.Replacement and Adjustment
4. Remove the ozone exhaust fan [A] along with the duct.
1042
4.Replacement and Adjustment
1043
4.Replacement and Adjustment
3. Remove the IH coil power cooling fan [A] along with the bracket.
4. Remove the hooks, and remove the IH coil power cooling fan [A].
1044
4.Replacement and Adjustment
1045
4.Replacement and Adjustment
3. Remove the ID sensor cleaning fan [A] along with the bracket.
1. Remove the IH inverter and AC drive board along with the bracket. (PSU1, PSU2)
1046
4.Replacement and Adjustment
2. Remove the PSU fan (right) [A] and PSU fan (left) [B].
Layout (Filters)
1047
4.Replacement and Adjustment
4. Remove the duplex exhaust fans [A] along with the bracket.
1048
4.Replacement and Adjustment
1049
4.Replacement and Adjustment
1050
4.Replacement and Adjustment
Particulate Filters
1051
4.Replacement and Adjustment
2. Remove the particulate filters (transfer/fusing) [A] and particulate filters (fusing pressure roller) [B].
Deodorizing Filters
1052
4.Replacement and Adjustment
1053
4.Replacement and Adjustment
1054
5.System Maintenance
5. System Maintenance
• Make sure that the data-in LED ( ) is not on before you go into the SP mode. This LED
indicates that some data is coming to the machine. When the LED is on, wait for the copier to
process the data.
• The Service Program Mode is for use by service representatives only. If this mode is used by
anyone other than service representatives for any reason, data might be deleted or settings
might be changed. In such case, product quality cannot be guaranteed any more.
Entering SP Mode
Pro C5200S/C5210S
• When using the standard operation panel: For details, ask your supervisor.
• When using the smart operation panel: If there are no Classic Application
(copy/printer/scanner/fax) icons on the HOME screen, see When using the smart operation panel.
MP C6503/C8003
If there are no Classic Application (copy/printer/scanner/fax) icons on the HOME screen, see When
using the smart operation panel.
If there are no Classic Application (copy/printer/scanner/fax) icons on the Home screen, follow the
procedure below to display the number keyboard.
1. Press and hold the button [A] located at the left side of the operation panel and "Check Status [B]"
1055
5.System Maintenance
For details of the key code to enter the SP mode, ask your supervisor.
Exiting SP Mode
Types of SP Modes
1056
5.System Maintenance
1057
5.System Maintenance
8 Press to scroll to the previous or next display in segments the size of the screen display (page).
9 Press to scroll to the previous or next line (line by line).
10 Press to move the highlight on the left to the previous or next selection in the list.
1. In the SP mode, select the test print. Then press "Copy Window".
2. Use the copy window (copier mode) to select the appropriate settings (paper size, etc.) for the test
print.
3. Press "Start" to start the test print.
4. Press SP Mode (highlighted) to return to the SP mode screen and repeat from step 1.
1058
5.System Maintenance
At locations where the machine contains sensitive data, the customer engineer cannot operate the
machine until the Administrator turns the service mode lock off. This function makes sure that work on
the machine is always done with the permission of the Administrator.
1. If you cannot go into the SP mode, ask the Administrator to log in with the User Tools and then set
"Service Mode Lock" to OFF after he or she logs in:
"Machine Features" screen > "System Settings" > "Administrator Tools" > "Service Mode Lock" >
OFF
• You can access the "Machine Features" screen with the following procedure.
• Pro C5200S/C5210S:
• When using the standard operation panel: Press the "User Tools" key.
• When using the smart operation panel: Press the "User Tools" icon, and then press
"Machine Features".
• MP C6503/C8003: Press the "User Tools" icon, and then press "Machine Features".
• This unlocks the machine and lets you access all the SP codes.
• The CE can service the machine and turn the machine power OFF then ON. It is not
necessary to ask the Administrator to log in again each time the main power is turned ON.
2. Go into the SP mode and set SP5-169 to "1" if you must use the printer bit switches.
3. After machine servicing is completed:
• Change SP5-169 from "1" to "0".
• Turn the machine power OFF then ON. Tell the administrator that you have completed
servicing the machine.
• The Administrator will then set the "Service Mode Lock" to ON.
Remarks
The maximum number of characters which can show on the control panel screen is limited to 30
characters. For this reason, some of the SP modes shown on the screen need to be abbreviated. The
following are abbreviations used for the SP modes for which the full description is over 20 characters.
Item Description
Paper Weight Pro C5200S/C5210S
• Paper Weight 1: 52.3-65.9 g/m2, 14.0-17.9lb. Bond
• Paper Weight 2: 66.0-80.9 g/m2, 18.0-21.9lb. Bond
• Paper Weight 3: 81.0-100.9 g/m2, 22.0-27.0lb. Bond
1059
5.System Maintenance
Item Description
• Paper Weight 4: 101.0-127.4 g/m2, 27.1-34.0lb. Bond
• Paper Weight 5: 127.5-150.0 g/m2, 34.1-40.0lb. Bond
• Paper Weight 6: 150.1-216.0 g/m2, 40.1-57.9lb. Bond
• Paper Weight 7: 216.1-256.0 g/m2, 58.0-68.0lb. Bond
• Paper Weight 8: 256.1-300.0 g/m2, 68.1-80.0lb. Bond
• Paper Weight 9: 300.1-360.0 g/m2, 80.1-96.0lb. Bond
MP C6503/C8003
• Thin Paper: 52.3-65.9 g/m2, 14.0-17.9lb. Bond
• Plain Paper 1: 66.0-80.9 g/m2, 18.0-21.9lb. Bond
• Plain Paper 2: 81.0-100.9 g/m2, 22.0-27.0lb. Bond
• Middle Thick: 101.0-127.4 g/m2, 27.1lb.Bond-46.9lb. Cover
• Thick Paper 1: 127.5-150.0 g/m2, 47.0-55.0lb. Cover
• Thick Paper 2: 150.1-216.0 g/m2, 55.1-79.9lb. Cover
• Thick Paper 3: 216.1-256.0 g/m2, 80.0lb. Cover-141.0lb.Index
• Thick Paper 4: 256.1-300.0 g/m2, 141.1-165.0lb. Index
Paper Type N: Normal paper
MTH: Middle thick paper
TH: Thick paper
Paper Feed Station P: Paper tray
B: Bypass table
Print Mode S: Simplex
D: Duplex
Others
The settings of each SP mode are explained in the right-hand column of the SP table in the following
way.
[Adjustable range / Default setting / Step] Alphanumeric
• If "Alphanumeric" is written to the right of the bracket as shown above, the setting of the SP
mode shows on the screen using alphanumeric characters instead of only numbers. However,
the settings in the bracket in the SP mode table are explained by using only numbers.
1060
5.System Maintenance
1061
5.System Maintenance
SP Tables
See "Appendices" for the following information:
• SP Group 1000
• SP Group 2000
• SP Group 3000
• SP Group 4000
• SP Group 5000
• SP Group 6000
• SP Group 7000
• SP Group 8000
• Input and Output Check
• Printer SP Mode
• Scanner SP Mode
1062
5.System Maintenance
Overview
In order to update the firmware of this machine, it is necessary to download the latest version of
firmware to an SD card.
Insert the SD card into SD card slot 2 beside the rear left of the controller box.
Firmware Types
Procedure
• An SD card is a precision device, so when you handle an SD card, respect the following.
• When the power is switched ON, do not insert or remove a card.
• During installation, do not switch the power OFF.
• Since the card is manufactured to high precision, do not store it in a hot or humid location, or
in direct sunlight.
• Do not bend the card, scratch it, or give it a strong shock.
• Before downloading firmware to an SD card, check whether write-protection of the SD card is
canceled. If write-protection is enabled, an error code (error code 44, etc.) will be displayed
during download, and the download will fail.
• Before updating firmware, remove the network cable from this machine.
• If SC818 is generated during software update, switch the power OFF -> ON, and complete the
update which was interrupted.
1064
5.System Maintenance
• During software update, disconnect network cables and interface cables, remove wireless
boards, etc., (so that they are not accessed during the update).
Update procedure
• Check whether the card is properly in the SD card slot. When a SD card is inserted, a
click is heard, and it is locked.
• To remove the card, release by pressing once.
5. Turn ON the main power.
6. Wait until the update screen starts (about 45 seconds).
When it appears, "Please Wait" is displayed.
7. Check whether a program installation screen is displayed. (English display) When the SD card
1065
5.System Maintenance
• Depending on the combination of modules to update, it may not be possible to select all of
them simultaneously.
• In the middle row, the name of the module currently being updated is displayed. (in this case,
the printer module is being updated)
• In the lower row, a progress bar is displayed in ten steps. (The more *, the more the progress.)
<<Firmware update end screen>>
• This screen is displayed when all selected firmware modules are to be updated. "Printer" in the
second row shows that the module updated last is the printer. (When more than one were
updated simultaneously, only the module that was updated last is displayed.)
• When Verify has completed normally, the Update done display of the above screen is "Verify
done." If "Verify Error" is displayed, reinstall the software of the application displayed in the
lower row.
11. After turning the main power OFF, remove the SD card.
12. Turn the main power ON again, and check whether the machine is operating normally.
13. Return the SD card slot cover to the original position.
• When the power supply is switched OFF during firmware update, update is interrupted, and
the power is switched ON again, normal operation cannot be guaranteed.
• To guarantee operation, an update error continues to be displayed until update is successful.
• In this case, insert the SD card again, switch the power ON, and continue download of
firmware from the SD card automatically.
• The PS3 firmware program is included in the preinstalled PDF firmware. In the default state,
although the PS3 firmware program is hidden in the disabled state, the function is enabled by
installing the PS3 card. (The program installed in the PS3 card is a dongle (key) for enabling
1067
5.System Maintenance
1068
5.System Maintenance
1070
5.System Maintenance
• The PDF firmware installed as standard contains the program required to print PS3 data by
default. However, this PS3 program is normally disabled.
• The PS3 firmware is a dongle (key) which enables PS3 data printing functions. When the PS3
firmware is installed, the PS3 program in the PDF firmware is enabled. Due to this
specification, the self-diagnosis result report shows the ROM part number/software version of
the PDF firmware contained in the PS3 program.
1071
5.System Maintenance
1072
5.System Maintenance
• A HDD unit must be installed on the machine to enable the SFU or the package firmware
update via SD card.
Overview
Each firmware module (such as System/Copy, Engine, etc.) used to be updated individually. However,
an all-inclusive firmware package (package_ALL) is now available.
There are two ways to update using the firmware package.
• Package Firmware Update via a network: SFU (Smart Firmware Update)
• Package Firmware Update with an SD card
• SFU requires the connection to @Remote via a device which has the embedded @Remote
communicating function. When a machine is connected to @Remote via an intermediate
device (RC Gate), the SFU function is disabled.
Package firmware update can also be performed using the conventional SD card method by writing the
package firmware directly to the SD card.
1073
5.System Maintenance
Immediate Update
Enter the [Firmware Update] menu in the SP mode and update the package firmware.
• The [Firmware Update] button will appear even when a machine is connected to @Remote
with a device which does not have an embedded @Remote communicating function.
• If an error code is displayed, refer to Error Screens During Updating.
1. Enter the SP mode.
2. Touch [Firmware Update].
3. Touch [Update].
1074
5.System Maintenance
5. Touch [YES].
• If the error code E66, which indicates that the download of the firmware has failed, is
displayed, go back to step 1.
• Update will be started automatically after the download is finished.
• When the machine is in the update mode, the automatic update is suspended if a print job
is started. After the print job is finished, touch [YES] on the display shown below to restart
1075
5.System Maintenance
updating.
• The figures at the lower right of the display indicate "Number of updated items/ All items to
be updated".
It is possible to set the machine to download the package firmware which is necessary for SFU in
advance, and then perform the actual installation at the next service visit. This saves waiting time for
the firmware to download at the service visit.
1076
5.System Maintenance
Enter the [Firmware Update] menu in the SP mode and update the package firmware.
• The [Firmware Update] button will appear even when a machine is connected to @Remote
with a device which does not have an embedded @Remote communicating function. If an
error code is displayed, refer to Error Screens During Updating.
1. Enter the SP mode.
2. Touch [Firmware Update].
3. Touch [Reserve].
5. Enter the dates and times of the next visit and the start of receiving data.
• "Next time to visit this customer": The package firmware will be automatically downloaded by
1077
5.System Maintenance
this time/date.
• "When to receive? (1-7)": The download of the package firmware will begin this number of
days before the next visit.
Successful Download
In the two diagrams below, the firmware is set to be downloaded by the day before the next scheduled
visit. In the first diagram, the download is successful on the first try. In the second diagram, the
download fails three times and is successful on the fourth try.
• If the firmware download fails or cannot be completed due to the network settings/condition, no
power to the machine, or other reason, the machine will continue retrying every six hours until the
scheduled deadline (up to a maximum of four tries). For example, if the download is set for the day
before the next visit, the machine will attempt the download at 24 hours before the visit, and then
continue trying every six hours (max. four tries total).
• The retry is only performed in cases when the firmware download has failed.
• If the machine is in Energy Saver mode when the download is scheduled to begin, the download
will be performed in the background and the machine/panel will stay in Energy Saver mode.
• The download will continue uninterrupted even if the customer initiates a print job, copy job, fax
receiving or other operation while the download is in progress.
• The download will be terminated if the customer turns the power off while the download is in
progress.
• If the download cannot be completed successfully by the time of the next scheduled visit, the
1078
5.System Maintenance
3. Touch [Reserve].
1079
5.System Maintenance
• This information will only be displayed if the reserved firmware has already been
downloaded. If not, all the data items are indicated with "-".
3. Touch [Update].
1080
5.System Maintenance
5. Check the version of the received package firmware, and then touch [YES].
• Update is started.
• If the version of the reserved package in the HDD is older than the latest version, the
messages shown in the following picture are displayed.
• If you wish to download the latest version, touch [Execute] beside the message
"Download and update the latest package." Then update of the package firmware will be
started.
• If you wish to update using the firmware in the HDD (old version), touch [Execute] beside
the message "Update to the received package."
6. [Update done] is displayed.
1081
5.System Maintenance
• The figures at the lower right of the display indicate "Number of updated items/ All items to
be updated".
Update with an SD card, which is the conventional method, is available if you write the package
firmware to the SD card.
• If you copy the package firmware into the conventional "romdata" folder, the update will
1082
5.System Maintenance
not work.
• Only one version of the package firmware should be copied into the folder. If you copy
multiple versions of package firmware to the SD card, the machine will select only one
version of the firmware randomly.
3. Turn the power OFF.
4. Insert the SD card which contains the package into SD card slot 2 (for service).
5. Turn the power ON and touch [Update].
• When the SD card contains both a firmware package and one or more modules, the
following display may show up. Select [Package] and touch [OK] to move to step 5 above.
6. Update is started automatically after the package firmware download to the HDD has been
completed.
1083
5.System Maintenance
• The figures at the lower right of the display indicate "Number of updated items/ All items to
be updated".
8. Turn the main power switch OFF, and then pull out the SD card from SD card slot 2.
9. Turn the power ON.
1084
5.System Maintenance
• Auto remote firmware update (ARFU) requires connection to the Internet. Be sure to get
permission from the customer before setting up this feature.
Overview
By Auto Remote Firmware Update (ARFU), the firmware is updated by checking the global server every
76 hours and downloading the latest package if it is newer than the one installed on the machine.
Function Overview
Modules included in the firmware package are indicated by ticks ( ) in the firmware download web site.
Firmware not included in the package require updating by SD cards, etc.
Included Firmware
- aics
animation
Application Site
BluetoothService
CheetahSystem
- CSPF
- Data Erase Onb
- EcoInfoWidget
Engine
- External Auth
Fax
- FaxInfoWidget
1085
5.System Maintenance
Included Firmware
GWFCU3.8-9(WW)
The machine checks the server for the latest package version.
If the version of the package on the global server is later than that of the package installed on the
machine, or if the machine has not downloaded the firmware package, the machine downloads the
latest package in the background even when the customer is using the machine.
If download fails, the machine will retry downloading 76 hours later.
The downloaded package can also be used with SFU (Smart Firmware Update). A package
downloaded with SFU (Smart Firmware Update) can be used with ARFU (Auto Remote Firmware
Update) and vice versa.
When replacing the hard disk, the firmware package data becomes lost from the hard disk. Even if the
latest firmware is on the new hard disk, be sure to receive the latest package data.
When the machine connects to the server where the package files are stored, the DNS settings and the
name solution by DNS are needed. The machine will still try to download the package even if the name
cannot be resolved, but will fail because the name is not resolved.
The time and date to send the next inquiry to the global server can be checked with SP5-886-116 (Firm
Update Setting: Auto Update Next Date).
The auto remote firmware update is executed every 76 hours.
Judgement of ARFU
Update judgement is done when the latest update package is successfully downloaded, or the package
has already been downloaded.
1086
5.System Maintenance
If the judgement timing is in the range of the update prohibited time or day set with SP or WIM, the
machine will retry the update after 76 hours.
If the machine is in use when the judgement process runs, the process is retried. Retry is done up to
three times every hour (can be changed with SP) and if the machine is in use for all three retries, the
machine will retry the update after 76 hours.
1087
5.System Maintenance
Update Process
When the machine has decided to run the auto firmware update, the following message is displayed.
1088
5.System Maintenance
The popup will have "Cancel" and "OK" buttons and the update process will start either when the "OK"
button is selected or 30 seconds has passed.
When the "Cancel" button is selected, the machine will run the "Retry update" process.
When the device update and three retries in recovery mode both fail, it is determined as a device defect
and will display an SC for the defective device. If such an SC appears, replace the indicated board. In
the case of SC845, the SC cannot be reported to the call center.
It is possible to cancel the Auto Remote Firmware Update (ARFU) or update in recovery mode from the
operation panel.
But this is not possible while updating the operation panel itself. On the other hand, the update for the
operation panel will run at the final stage of the update. Thus canceling the update at that stage has no
real effect.
When the update is cancelled, the machine will reboot when updates for all modules of one of the
1089
5.System Maintenance
Related SP
1093
5.System Maintenance
1094
5.System Maintenance
Updating JavaVM
1. Download the update modules from Firmware Download Center. As one of the model modules,
"Java VM v11 UpdateTool" is available for download. (The version differs depending on the model.)
2. Unzip the downloaded file. Copy the whole "sdk" folder to the root of the SD card directly below.
• When unzipping the downloaded file, two subfolders ("update" and "sdk") exist in the "sdk"
folder. Rather than just copying the subfolder "sdk", copy the whole folder "sdk".
Updating Procedure
When you fail to update, "Update SDK/J done FAIL" is displayed. You can confirm the cause of the
error message below.
9. Turn ON the main power.
10. Reconfigure the Heap size from Web Image Monitor. ("Extended Feature Settings" ->
"Administrator Tools" -> "Heap Size")
See the manual for the ESA application to know what value to set for the heap size.
11. Return to the previous setting for the boot priority application.
Update results are output as a text file on the SD card called "sdkjversionup.log" in the "\sdk \update"
folder.
Result File contents Description of the output
Success script file = /mnt/sd0/sdk/update/bootscript Boot script path
2012/08/22 17:57:47 start Boot scripts processing start time
2012/08/22 17:59:47 end SUCCESS End time boot script processing, the results
Failure script file = /mnt/sd0/sdk/update/bootscript Boot script path
2012/08/22 17:57:47 start Boot scripts processing start time
XXXX Error Error message (Possibly multiple)
2012/08/22 17:57:57 end FAIL End time boot script processing, the results
1097
5.System Maintenance
• This data should always be uploaded to an SD card before the NVRAM is replaced.
• Make sure that the write protection of an SD card is unlocked.
1. Do SP5-990-001 (SP Print Mode: All(Data List)) before you switch the machine off. You will need a
record of the NVRAM settings if the upload fails.
Make sure to shut down and reboot the machine once before printing the SMC. Otherwise, the
latest settings may not be collected when the SMC is printed.
2. Turn OFF the main power.
3. Remove the SD card slot cover [A].
uploaded data with the number of the machine from which the data was uploaded.
• You can upload NVRAM data from more than one machine to the same SD card.
Do the following procedure to download SP data from an SD card to the NVRAM in the machine.
• The NVRAM data download may fail if the SD card with the NVRAM data is damaged, or if the
connection between the controller and BICU is defective.
• Do the download procedure again if the download fails.
• Do the following procedure if the second attempt fails:
• Enter the NVRAM data manually using the SMC print you created before uploading the NVRAM
data.
1. Turn OFF the main power.
2. Remove the SD slot cover.
3. Insert the SD card with the NVRAM data into SD Card Slot 2 (lower).
4. Switch ON the main power.
5. Do SP5-825-001 (NVRAM Data Download) and press the "Execute" key.
• The serial number of the file on the SD card must match the serial number of the machine
for the NVRAM data to download successfully. The download fails if the serial numbers do
not match.
This procedure does not download the following data to the NVRAM:
• Total Count
• C/O, P/O Count
1099
5.System Maintenance
Information List
Download
1100
5.System Maintenance
• If the capacity of SD card is not enough to store the local user information, an error message
is displayed.
• Carefully handle the SD card, which contains user information. Do not take it back to your
location.
Upload
1101
5.System Maintenance
Overview
The SMC List Card Save (SP Text Mode) function is used to save the SMC list as CSV files to the SD
card inserted into the operation panel SD card slot.
• Make sure to shut down and reboot the machine once before exporting the SMC sheet data.
Otherwise, the latest settings may not be collected when the SMC is exported.
Procedure
6. Select a third level SP number (Detail No.) from the table below to select what data to save on the
SD card.
SP5-992-xxx (SP Text Mode)
Detail SMC Categories to Note
No. Save
001 All (Data List)
002 SP (Mode Data List)
003 User Program
004 Logging Data
005 Diagnostic Report
006 Non-Default
007 NIB Summary
008 Capture Log
1102
5.System Maintenance
1103
5.System Maintenance
The SMC list data saved on the SD card will be named automatically. The file naming rules are as
follows.
Example:
A:
Machine serial number (fixed for each machine)
B:
SP number saved in this file.
First four digits (5992) in this part are fixed. The other one or two digits are the detail SP number(s). In
this case, it is one digit. Therefore, this file is of SP5-992-001 (All data list). See the upper SP table for
the correspondence between SP detail numbers and the contents.
C:
File creation date
Year/Month/Day ("Zero" will be omitted if each is one digit.)
D:
File creation time
Hour/Minute/Second ("Zero" will be omitted if each is one digit.)
E:
File Extension CSV (Comma Separated Value)
1104
5.System Maintenance
• A folder named by the machine serial number will be created on the SD card when this
function is executed.
• This function can save the SMC list data only to an SD card inserted into the operation panel
SD card slot.
Error Messages
1105
5.System Maintenance
UP Data Import/Export
1. Insert an SD card into the media slot on the side of the control panel.
2. Log in from the control panel as an administrator with all privileges.
3. Display the "Machine Features" screen.
• Pro C5200S/C5210S:
• When using the standard operation panel: Press the "User Tools" key.
• When using the smart operation panel: Press the "User Tools" icon, and then press
"Machine Features".
• MP C6503/C8003: Press the "User Tools" icon, and then press "Machine Features".
4. Press [System Settings].
5. Press [Administrator Tools].
6. Press [Device Setting Information: Export (Memry Strge Devc)].
• Specify whether to [Include] or [Exclude] the "Device Unique Information". "Device Unique
Information" includes the IP address, host name, fax number, etc.
• Specify an encryption key.
8. Press [Run Export].
9. Press [OK].
10. Press [Exit].
11. Log out.
• If data export fails, the details of the error can be viewed in the log.
1107
5.System Maintenance
• When device Information is periodically imported, it is necessary to create the device setting
information file with special software and store it on the web server.
• Press [Select] of the "Device Setting Info. File" to select the file(s) to import.
• When inserting a file into a home screen, press [Select] for the Image for Home screen and
select the file. You cannot use this setting when using the Smart Operation Panel.
• Specify whether to [Include] or [Exclude] the "Device Unique Information". "Device Unique
Information" includes the IP address, host name, fax number, etc.
• Enter the encryption key that was specified when the file was exported.
8. Press [Run Import].
9. Press [OK].
10. Press [Exit].
The machine restarts.
• If data export fails, the details of the error can be viewed in the log.
1108
5.System Maintenance
SP Data Import/Export
• System SP
• Printer SP
• Fax SP
• Scanner SP
When exporting SP device information from the control panel, the data is saved on an SD card.
1. Insert an SD card into the media slot on the side of the control panel.
2. Enter SP mode.
3. Press SP5-749-001 (Import/Export: Export)
4. Select "Target" SP settings (System/Printer/Fax/Scanner/Smart Operation Panel) to be exported.
5. Select "Option" settings (Unique/Secret).
Item Specification Note
Unique Unique information of the machine is Unique information that can be updated
included in the exported file if you #1. Items that are to be used to identify the
select "Unique" setting. machine.
Example: Network Information/ Host name /
Information related to fax number /Mail
address assigned to the machine
#2. Items for specifying the options equipped
on the machine.
Example: Lot number for developer
Unique information that cannot be
updated
#1. Items that may cause a problem if
imported
Example: Serial number / Information related
to @Remote
#2. Items for managing the history of the
machine
Example: Time and date / Counter
information / Installation date
#3. Setting values for the Engine
Secret Secret information is exported if you Secret information
select "Secret" setting. #1. Data that cannot be exported without
being encrypted.
1109
5.System Maintenance
• If data export fails, the details of the error can be viewed in the log.
1110
5.System Maintenance
• If data export fails, the details of the error can be viewed in the log.
The access log file is created when export/import is executed. The file is stored in the same location as
the exported device setting information file.
If an error occurs, check the log's result code in the access log file first. Values other than 0 indicate that
an error occurred.
The result code will appear in the circled area illustrated below.
- Example of a log file
If you cannot solve the problem or do not know how to solve it after checking the code, note down the
error log entry, then contact your supervisor.
Result Code Cause Solutions
2 (INVALID A file import was attempted between Import files exported from the same
REQUEST) different models or machines with model with the same device
different device configurations. configurations.
4 (INVALID Failed to write the device information Check whether the destination device is
OUTPUT DIR) to the destination device. operating normally.
7( MODULE An unexpected error occurred during Switch the power off and then back on,
ERROR) import or export. and then try the operation again. If the
error persists, contact your supervisor.
8 (DISK FULL) The available storage space on the Execute the operation again after making
external medium is insufficient. sure there is enough storage space.
9 (DEVICE Failed to write or read the log file. Check whether the path to the folder for
ERROR) storing the file or the folder in which the
file is stored is missing.
1111
5.System Maintenance
• When exporting device information from the control panel, the data can be saved only on an
SD card.
• The file format for exports is CSV.
1112
5.System Maintenance
Overview
With this feature, you can save device logs that are stored in the machine (HDD or operation panel) on
an SD card. It allows the Customer Engineer to save and retrieve error information for analysis.
The Capturing Log feature saves device logs for the following four.
• Controller device log including operation log
• Engine device log
• FCU device log
• Operation panel log
• In older models, a technician enabled the logging tool after a problem occurred. After that,
when the problem had been reproduced, the technician was able to retrieve the device log.
• However, this new feature saves the device logs at the time that problems occur. Then you can
copy the logs to an SD card.
• You can retrieve the device logs using a SD card without a network.
• Analysis of the device log is effective for problems caused by the software. Analysis of the
device log is not valid for the selection of defective parts or problems caused by hardware.
• Make sure to shut down and reboot the machine once before retrieving the Debug Logs.
Otherwise, the latest settings may not be collected when the debug logs are retrieved.
• Retrieve device logs to identify the date of occurrence of the problems and to find details of the
1114
5.System Maintenance
problems
• e.g.: At around 8:00 am on March 10, an engine stall occurred. The operation panel does not
respond. Turn the main power supply off / on.
• Analysis of the device log is effective for problems caused by the software. Analysis of the
device log is not valid for the selection of defective parts or problems caused by hardware.
1. Insert the SD card into the slot on the side of the operation panel or the service slot.
1115
5.System Maintenance
• The approximate time it takes to transfer the debug log is as follows. Transfer time may be
affected by the type or format of the SD card.
Controller device log (GW device log): 2 - 20 minutes
Engine device log: 2 minutes
Operation panel device log: 2 - 20 minutes
If the estimated time is not calculated due to an error, an error code will be displayed.
Error Description
Code
-1 Other.
-2 No SD card is inserted in the service slot or in the SD slot on the side of the operation
panel. In this case, insert an SD card into either of the SD slots.
1116
5.System Maintenance
Error Description
Code
-3 The SD card is locked. In this case, unlock the SD card, as shown below.
9. After a message stating that the process has completed appears on the operation panel, confirm
that the LED light next to the SD card slot is not flashing and then remove the SD card.
10. Make sure that the SD card access LED is off, then remove the SD card.
The device logs can be retrieved via the Web Image Monitor.
1. Access the following URL and logon as an administrator:
http://[IP address or host name]/web/entry/df/websys/direct/getSysInfo.cgi
1117
5.System Maintenance
2. Specify the date that the problem occurred and the number of days to download the logs. If the fax
destinations need to be included in the fax information, set "On" as "Obtain Fax Destination(s)
Information". Then click "Download".
• "3" is set by default for "Number of days, including date fault occurred, to obtain".
However "2", which is the minimum needed for investigating the problems, is
recommended for reducing the downloading time.
• "Obtain Fax Destination(s) Information" is set to "Off" by default.
3. The confirmation screen will appear and the information and/or logs will start downloading. To
proceed to download the information and/or logs, wait for the open-or-save dialog to appear.
1118
5.System Maintenance
4. After a while, the open-or-save dialog will appear. Specify where to download and save the file.
• The debug logs are saved with the following file names. These names are the same as
the files downloaded with SD card.
The device logs are saved with the following file names.
1119
5.System Maintenance
1120
5.System Maintenance
Overview
Card Save:
• The Card Save function is used to save print jobs received by the printer on an SD card with no
print output. Card Save mode is toggled using printer Bit Switch #1 bit number 4. Card Save will
remain enabled until the SD card becomes full, or until all file names have been used.
• Captures are stored on the SD card in the folder /prt/cardsave. File names are assigned
sequentially from PRT00000.prn to PRT99999.prn. An additional file PRT.CTL will be created. This
file contains a list of all files created on the card by the card save function.
• Previously stored files on the SD card can be overwritten or left intact. Card Save SD has "Add"
and "New" menu items.
• Card Save (Add): Appends files to the SD Card. Does not overwrite existing files. If the card
becomes full or if all file names are used, an error will be displayed on the operation panel.
Subsequent jobs will not be stored.
• Card Save (New): Overwrites files in the card's /prt/cardsave directory.
Limitation:
• Card Save cannot be used with PJL Status Read Back commands. PJL Status Read Backs will not
work. In addition they will cause the Card Save to fail.
Procedure
6. Select "Bit Switch 1 Settings" and use the numeric keypad to turn bit 4 ON and then press the "#"
to register the change. The result should look like: 00010000. By doing this, Card Save option will
1121
5.System Maintenance
10. Card Save (ADD) and Card Save (NEW) should be displayed on the screen. Select Card Save
(ADD) or Card Save (NEW).
1122
5.System Maintenance
14. Send a job to the printer. The Communicating light should start blinking.
15. As soon as the printer receives the data, it will be stored on the SD card automatically with no print
output.
Nothing is displayed on the screen, indicating that a Card Save operation was successful.
16. Press "Reset" to exit Card Save mode.
17. Change the Bit Switch Settings back to the default 00000000, then press the "#" in the numeric
keypad to register the changes.
18. Remove the SD card after the main power switch is turned OFF.
Error Messages
1124
6.Troubleshooting
6. Troubleshooting
Self-Diagnostic Mode
The ‘SC Table’ section shows the SC codes for controller errors and other errors. The latter are put into
four types. The type is determined by their reset procedures. The table shows the classification of the
SC codes.
Type Display How to reset SC call or SC alarm in
customer support
system
A The SC is immediately displayed on Reset the SC (set SP5-810- Occurrence & alarm
the operation panel when SC occurs. 1) and then cycle the main count
The error involves the fusing unit. The power off and on.
machine operation is disabled. The Immediate alarm
user cannot reset the error.
B When a function is selected, the SC is Turn the operation switch Occurrence & alarm
displayed on the operation panel. off and on. count
The machine cannot be used (down-
time mitigation). Power OFF and ON
1125
6.Troubleshooting
SC Logging
When an SC is generated, the "total count value when the SC is generated" and the "SC code" are
logged. However, if the total count value during the SC is the same as last time, logging is not
performed.
Logged data can be checked by outputting an administrative report (SMC print). The SC history is
logged up to the last 10 entries, and if there are more than 10 entries, data are progressively deleted
starting from the oldest.
SC Automatic Reboot
• Timing of SC reboot
When @Remote is enabled, and when a NRS alarm*1 is not generated, the corresponding SC is
the object of an automatic reboot.
*1 NRS alarm: Issued when an ordinary SC (type D) is generated twice while the total counter
counts 10 times.
• Time to automatic reboot
Reboot is performed 30 seconds after an engine reboot is possible, after the end of post-
processing during printing, etc.
At that time, a reboot is performed even if the MFP is operating. The engine does not start process
control when a reboot is possible.
• Automatic reboot
See the flowchart below.
1127
6.Troubleshooting
SC Manual Reboot
When the automatic reboot is disabled in SP5-875-001 (SC automatic reboot setting), the user reboots
the machine manually. See the flowchart below.
1128
6.Troubleshooting
1129
6.Troubleshooting
1130
6.Troubleshooting
1131
6.Troubleshooting
1133
6.Troubleshooting
1135
6.Troubleshooting
1136
6.Troubleshooting
1137
6.Troubleshooting
1138
6.Troubleshooting
1142
6.Troubleshooting
1144
6.Troubleshooting
1147
6.Troubleshooting
1148
6.Troubleshooting
1149
6.Troubleshooting
1154
6.Troubleshooting
1155
6.Troubleshooting
1156
6.Troubleshooting
1157
6.Troubleshooting
1158
6.Troubleshooting
1159
6.Troubleshooting
1160
6.Troubleshooting
1161
6.Troubleshooting
1162
6.Troubleshooting
1163
6.Troubleshooting
1164
6.Troubleshooting
1165
6.Troubleshooting
1166
6.Troubleshooting
1167
6.Troubleshooting
1170
6.Troubleshooting
1171
6.Troubleshooting
1172
6.Troubleshooting
1173
6.Troubleshooting
1174
6.Troubleshooting
1175
6.Troubleshooting
1176
6.Troubleshooting
1177
6.Troubleshooting
1178
6.Troubleshooting
1179
6.Troubleshooting
1183
6.Troubleshooting
1184
6.Troubleshooting
1187
6.Troubleshooting
1189
6.Troubleshooting
1193
6.Troubleshooting
1194
6.Troubleshooting
1197
6.Troubleshooting
1198
6.Troubleshooting
1199
6.Troubleshooting
1202
6.Troubleshooting
1203
6.Troubleshooting
1204
6.Troubleshooting
1205
6.Troubleshooting
1206
6.Troubleshooting
1207
6.Troubleshooting
1208
6.Troubleshooting
1209
6.Troubleshooting
1210
6.Troubleshooting
1211
6.Troubleshooting
1212
6.Troubleshooting
1213
6.Troubleshooting
1214
6.Troubleshooting
1215
6.Troubleshooting
1216
6.Troubleshooting
1217
6.Troubleshooting
1218
6.Troubleshooting
1219
6.Troubleshooting
1220
6.Troubleshooting
1221
6.Troubleshooting
1223
6.Troubleshooting
1224
6.Troubleshooting
1226
6.Troubleshooting
1227
6.Troubleshooting
1228
6.Troubleshooting
1229
6.Troubleshooting
1230
6.Troubleshooting
1231
6.Troubleshooting
1232
6.Troubleshooting
1236
6.Troubleshooting
1237
6.Troubleshooting
1238
6.Troubleshooting
1239
6.Troubleshooting
1240
6.Troubleshooting
1242
6.Troubleshooting
1243
6.Troubleshooting
1245
6.Troubleshooting
1246
6.Troubleshooting
1247
6.Troubleshooting
1248
6.Troubleshooting
1250
6.Troubleshooting
1251
6.Troubleshooting
1252
6.Troubleshooting
1253
6.Troubleshooting
SC600 (Controller)
SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution
SC632- D Counter device error 1
00 After 3 attempts to send a data frame to the optional counter device via the serial
communication line, no ACK signal was received within 100 ms.
Serial line between the optional counter device, the relay board and copier control
board is disconnected or damaged.
• Turn the main power off/on.
• Check the serial communication line.
1255
6.Troubleshooting
1256
6.Troubleshooting
1257
6.Troubleshooting
1258
6.Troubleshooting
1259
6.Troubleshooting
1260
6.Troubleshooting
1261
6.Troubleshooting
1262
6.Troubleshooting
1265
6.Troubleshooting
1266
6.Troubleshooting
1270
6.Troubleshooting
1271
6.Troubleshooting
1272
6.Troubleshooting
1273
6.Troubleshooting
1274
6.Troubleshooting
1275
6.Troubleshooting
1276
6.Troubleshooting
1277
6.Troubleshooting
1278
6.Troubleshooting
1279
6.Troubleshooting
1280
6.Troubleshooting
1281
6.Troubleshooting
1282
6.Troubleshooting
1283
6.Troubleshooting
1284
6.Troubleshooting
1285
6.Troubleshooting
1286
6.Troubleshooting
1287
6.Troubleshooting
1288
6.Troubleshooting
1289
6.Troubleshooting
1290
6.Troubleshooting
1292
6.Troubleshooting
1293
6.Troubleshooting
1294
6.Troubleshooting
1295
6.Troubleshooting
1296
6.Troubleshooting
1297
6.Troubleshooting
1298
6.Troubleshooting
Cause
Interface cable (downstream device side) connector disconnected or broken, PCB of downstream
device defective, Controller PCB defective, Connecter disconnected, Short-circuit, Overload, Motor
defective, Solenoid defective, Home position sensor defective
1299
6.Troubleshooting
Solution
Check Points
1301
6.Troubleshooting
1302
6.Troubleshooting
1303
6.Troubleshooting
1304
6.Troubleshooting
1305
6.Troubleshooting
1306
6.Troubleshooting
1307
6.Troubleshooting
1308
6.Troubleshooting
1309
6.Troubleshooting
1310
6.Troubleshooting
1311
6.Troubleshooting
1312
6.Troubleshooting
1313
6.Troubleshooting
1314
6.Troubleshooting
1315
6.Troubleshooting
1316
6.Troubleshooting
1317
6.Troubleshooting
1318
6.Troubleshooting
1319
6.Troubleshooting
1320
6.Troubleshooting
1323
6.Troubleshooting
1325
6.Troubleshooting
1326
6.Troubleshooting
1327
6.Troubleshooting
1328
6.Troubleshooting
1329
6.Troubleshooting
1331
6.Troubleshooting
SC800 (Controller)
SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution
SC816-** [0x0000] Energy save I/O subsystem error
SC816-01 D Subsystem error
SC816-02 D Sysarch (LPUX_GET_PORT_INFO) error
SC816-03 D Transition to STR was denied.
SC816-04 D Interrupt in kernel communication driver
SC816-05 D Preparation for transition to STR failed.
SC816-07 D Sysarch (LPUX_GET_PORT_INFO) error
SC816-08 D Sysarch (LPUX_ENGINE_TIMERCTRL) error
SC816-09 D Sysarch (LPUX_RETURN_FACTOR_STR) error
SC816-10 D Sysarch (LPUX_GET_PORT_INFO) error
to 12
SC816-13 D open() error
SC816-14 D Memory address error
SC816-15 D open() error
to 18
SC816-19 D Double open() error
SC816-20 D open() error
SC816-22 D Parameter error
SC816- D read() error
23, 24
SC816-25 D write () error
SC816-26 D write() communication retry error
to 28
SC816- D read() communication retry error
29, 30
SC816-35 D read() error
SC816-36 D Subsystem error
to 96
SC816- Subsystem error
98, 99
Energy save I/O subsystem detected some abnormality.
• Energy save I/O subsystem defective
• Energy save I/O subsystem detected a controller board error (non-
response).
• Error was detected during preparation for transition to STR.
• SC816-99 occurs as a subsystem error except any error from -06 to 96.
1332
6.Troubleshooting
1333
6.Troubleshooting
1335
6.Troubleshooting
1336
6.Troubleshooting
1337
6.Troubleshooting
1338
6.Troubleshooting
1339
6.Troubleshooting
1340
6.Troubleshooting
1341
6.Troubleshooting
1342
6.Troubleshooting
1343
6.Troubleshooting
1344
6.Troubleshooting
1345
6.Troubleshooting
1346
6.Troubleshooting
1347
6.Troubleshooting
1348
6.Troubleshooting
1. Turn the main power off and check the SD card insertion status.
2. If no problem is found, insert the SD card and turn the main power on.
3. If an error occurs, replace the SD card.
4. If the error persists even after replacing the SD card, replace the controller
board.
1. In the case of a file system error, reformat the SD card (using the "SD
Formatter" made by Panasonic).*
1. Turn the main power off and check the SD card insertion status.
2. If no problem is found, insert the SD card and turn the main power on.
1349
6.Troubleshooting
1351
6.Troubleshooting
1352
6.Troubleshooting
1353
6.Troubleshooting
1354
6.Troubleshooting
1355
6.Troubleshooting
1356
6.Troubleshooting
1357
6.Troubleshooting
1358
6.Troubleshooting
1359
6.Troubleshooting
SC900 (Controller)
SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution
SC900-00 A Electric counter error
The electric total counter value is out of specification.
Error is detected when increasing the total counter.
• Unexpected NV-RAM is attached.
• NV-RAM defective
• NV-RAM data corrupted.
• Data written to unexpected area because of external factor etc.
• The count requested by the SRM on receiving PRT is not completed.
Replace the NV-RAM.
1360
6.Troubleshooting
1361
6.Troubleshooting
1362
6.Troubleshooting
1363
6.Troubleshooting
1364
6.Troubleshooting
1365
6.Troubleshooting
Jam Detection
Jam Displays
Pro C5200S/C5210S
1366
6.Troubleshooting
MP C6503/C8003
See the decals on the machine for how to remove jammed paper.
How to check
1367
6.Troubleshooting
Display
• Jam code: Shows the cause of a jam. Appears in the log data.
• Position code: Shows the location of a jam. Appears on the operation panel.
These are lists of jam codes for the main machine and peripheral devices. Please note:
• Late jam. The paper has failed to arrive within the prescribed time due to a jam that has occurred
upstream of the referenced sensor.
• Lag jam. The paper has failed to leave the location of the referenced sensor within the prescribed
time due to a jam downstream of the referenced sensor.
ADF
1368
6.Troubleshooting
Main Machine
1369
6.Troubleshooting
1370
6.Troubleshooting
1371
6.Troubleshooting
1372
6.Troubleshooting
1374
6.Troubleshooting
Finisher SR5070 (D3CB) / Booklet Finisher SR5080 (D3CA) (Pro C5200S/C5210S only)
1375
6.Troubleshooting
1376
6.Troubleshooting
1377
6.Troubleshooting
1378
6.Troubleshooting
Plockmatic Bookletmaker
1379
6.Troubleshooting
Sensor Locations
1380
6.Troubleshooting
Size Code Paper Size Name Orientation Main Scan Length Sub Scan Length
172(ACH) 5 1/2”x8 1/2”(HLT) SEF 1397 2159
045(2DH) 7 1/4"x10 1/2"(Exective) LEF 2667 1842
173(ADH) 7 1/4"x10 1/2"(Exective) SEF 1842 2667
175(AFH) 12” x 18” SEF 3048 4572
177(B1H) 11"x15" SEF 2794 3810
180(B4H) 13"x19" SEF 3302 4826
181(B5H) 13"x19.2" SEF 3302 4877
182(B6H) 13"x18" SEF 3302 4572
194(C2H) 8K SEF 2670 3900
067(43H) 16K LEF 2670 1950
195(C3H) 16K SEF 1950 2670
198(C6H) 12.6x18.5 SEF 3200 4699
199(C7H) 12.6x19.2 SEF 3200 4877
200(C8H) 8.5"x13.4"(Oficio) SEF 2159 3404
080(50H) No.10 (Com10) LEF 2413 1048
208(D0H) No.10 (Com10) SEF 1048 2413
081(51H) No.7 (Monarch) LEF 1905 984
209(D1H) No.7 (Monarch) SEF 984 1905
083(53H) C5 LEF 2290 1620
211(D3H) C5 SEF 1620 2290
212(D4H) C6 SEF 1140 1620
085(55H) DL LEF 2200 1100
213(D5H) DL SEF 1100 2200
121(79H) 226x310 LEF 3100 2260
249(F9H) 226x310 SEF 2260 3100
250(FAH) 310x432 SEF 3100 4320
251(FBH) PostCard: Standard SEF 1067 1397
1382
6.Troubleshooting
When an SC is generated, the voltages of the input power source and the SC code can be displayed
with the following SPs. When the SC is generated, the maximum and minimum voltages of the input
power source within a predetermined period of time (5 seconds before the generation of the SC) are
also stored in SP mode.
SP No. SP Name Range Description
SP5- Power Supply 0 to The voltage during normal operation:
961-001 Voltage: Disp – 300V The machine acquires the voltage every 0.5 seconds,
Power Supply and stores it in SP mode.
Voltage
SP5- SC Number (Error) – 0 to The SC code when the SC is generated:
962-001 SC Number (Error)1 99999 For example, "54702" is displayed when SC547-02 is
to 010 to 10 generated. The newest 10 SC codes are stored in SP
mode.
SP5- Max Power Supply 0 to The maximum voltage when the SC is generated:
963-001 Voltage – Max Power 300V Displays the maximum voltage value within a
to 010*1 Supply Voltage1 to predetermined period of time (5 seconds before the
10 generation of the SC). The most recent 10 maximum
voltage values are stored in SP mode.
SP5- Min Power Supply 0 to The minimum voltage value when the SC is
964-001 Voltage – Min Power 300V generated:
to 010 *1
Supply Voltage1 Displays the minimum voltage value within a
predetermined period of time (5 seconds before the
generation of the SC). The most recent 10 minimum
voltage values are stored in SP mode.
*1 If the SC is generated before the machine acquires the voltage of the input power source, "1" or "2"
is displayed.
• The voltage of the input power source displayed in SP mode has a ±4% deviation from the
actual value.
• If you need to check the voltage of the input power source with the SMC output, execute SP5-
1383
6.Troubleshooting
990-002 (SP Print Mode – SP (Mode Data List)). The voltage of the input power source is not
on the SMC output of SP5-990-004 (SP Print Mode – Logging Data).
Components
Acquisition of the voltage of the input power source is controlled by the following components: AC drive
board, IH inverter, and IOB
AC Drive Board
The AC drive board receives AC power from the power cord. It controls cutoff of the AC power source
by the fusing relay. The machine cannot acquire the voltage of the input power source when the fusing
relay is off because the power supply for the IH inverter is cut off.
IH Inverter
The IH inverter contains the detection circuit for the voltage of the input power source.
The Control IC performs serial communications (start-stop synchronization type full-duplex serial
communication) with the IOB and controls the IH heater.
IOB
1384
6.Troubleshooting
Acquisition of the voltage of the input power source is controlled by the following process.
*1 A predetermined standby time (0.5 seconds) is provided after the voltage of the input power source is
acquired. Therefore, the voltage of the input power source is acquired at 0.5 second intervals.
When an SC is generated, acquisition of the maximum and minimum voltages of the input power
source is controlled by the following process.
1385
6.Troubleshooting
During normal operation, the voltage of the input power source is acquired at 0.5 second intervals.
When an SC is generated, the maximum and minimum voltages of the input power source are obtained
from the voltages which were acquired within a predetermined period of time (5 seconds before the
generation of the SC).
The voltage of the input power source cannot be acquired when the fusing relay on the AC drive board
is OFF, because the power supply for the IH inverter is cut off. After the fusing relay turns ON and the
power supply is provided to the IH inverter, the voltage acquisition is started. Therefore, when an SC is
generated, the maximum and minimum voltages of the input power source can be acquired from Period
1386
6.Troubleshooting
C as shown below.
*1 The fusing relay is turned on when one of the following operations is performed.
• The main power is turned ON.
• Any covers/doors are closed.
• The machine returns from the energy saver mode.
Description
Period When the SC is generated before the fusing relay turns ON, "2" is displayed for the
A maximum voltage (SP5-963-001 to 010) and the minimum voltage (SP5-964-001 to 010).
Period When the SC is generated during a period after the fusing relay turns ON and before the IH
B inverter acquires the voltage, "1" is displayed for the maximum voltage (SP5-963-001 to
010) and the minimum voltage (SP5-964-001 to 010).
Period When the SC is generated after the IH inverter starts acquiring the voltage, the machine
C can display the correct maximum voltage (SP5-963-001 to 010) and the correct minimum
voltage (SP5-964-001 to 010).
1387
6.Troubleshooting
1388
6.Troubleshooting
1389
6.Troubleshooting
Drawer (Inside)
1390
6.Troubleshooting
1391
6.Troubleshooting
1392
6.Troubleshooting
AC Drive Board
100V
200V
1393
6.Troubleshooting
PSU
1394
6.Troubleshooting
DUB
1395
6.Troubleshooting
IH Inverter
1397
6.Troubleshooting
BICU
1398
6.Troubleshooting
IOB
1399
6.Troubleshooting
1400
6.Troubleshooting
1401
6.Troubleshooting
PFB
1402
6.Troubleshooting
TDRB
1405
6.Troubleshooting
Operation Panel
1406
6.Troubleshooting
LED Conditions
LED Function
Address Color Power Use Fuse Lighting Off Blinking
source
voltage
LED1 Green 3.3V Confirming - One of the Normal -
download followings;
status • Downloading
the data from
SD
• Writing the data
via the
download cable
LED2 Red 3.3V Confirming - One of the - Blinking in
machine followings; cycles of 1
status • Downloading second:
the data from Normal
SD Blinking in
• Writing the data cycles of 0.5
via the second:
download cable Abnormal
LED3 Green 3.3V Confirming - Writing the data via Normal
download the download cable
status
LED4 Red 3.3V Confirming - Writing the data via Normal -
download the download cable
status
1407
6.Troubleshooting
BICU
LED Function
Address Color Power source Use Fuse Lighting Off Blinking
voltage
LED1 Red 5VX Power - Normal Abnormal -
Confirmation
LED2 Yellow 5V Power - Normal Abnormal -
Confirmation
LED4 Orange 24V Power - Normal Abnormal -
Confirmation
LED5 Orange 24VS Power - Normal Abnormal -
Confirmation
LED6 Green 3.3V Power - Normal Abnormal -
Confirmation
LED7 Red 3.3V Operation Check - Abnormal Abnormal Normal
1408
6.Troubleshooting
IOB
LED Function
Address Color Power source Use Fuse Lighting Off Blinking
voltage
LED2 Red 5V Power - Normal Abnormal -
Confirmation
LED3 Yellow 24V Power - Normal Abnormal -
Confirmation
LED4 Orange 24VS Power - Normal Abnormal -
Confirmation
LED6 Green 3.3V Operation Check - Abnormal Abnormal Normal
1409
6.Troubleshooting
LED Function
Address Color Power source Use Fuse Lighting Off Blinking
voltage
LED1 Green 3.3V - - Abnormal Normal -
LED2 Orange 3.3V Operation Check - Abnormal Abnormal Normal
LED5 Orange 24VS Power FU2 Normal Abnormal -
Confirmation
1410
6.Troubleshooting
PFB
LED Function
Address Color Power source Use Fuse Lighting Off Blinking
voltage
LED1 Green 3.3V - - Abnormal Normal -
LED2 Red 5V Power FU3 Normal Abnormal -
Confirmation
LED3 Yellow 24V Power FU2 Normal Abnormal -
Confirmation
LED4 Orange 24VS Power FU4 Normal Abnormal -
Confirmation
DUB
LED Function
Address Color Power source Use Fuse Lighting Off Blinking
voltage
LED1 Orange 3.3V Operation Check - Abnormal Abnormal Normal
LED2 Green 3.3V - - Abnormal Normal -
LED3 Green 5V Power FU8 Normal Abnormal -
Confirmation
1411
6.Troubleshooting
LED Function
Address Color Power source Use Fuse Lighting Off Blinking
voltage
LED4 *1
Yellow 24V Power - Normal Abnormal -
Confirmation
LED5*2 Orange 24VS Power FU1 Normal Abnormal -
Confirmation
*1 The fuse is installed on the PFB.
*2 When the doors are open, LED5 is off.
SDCU
LED Function
Address Color Power source Use Fuse Lighting Off Blinking
voltage
LED1 Red 3.3V Operation Check - Normal Abnormal -
LED2 Green 3.3V Access Check of - SD is SD is -
SD present absent
1412
6.Troubleshooting
Controller Board
LED Function
Address Color Power Use Fuse Lighting Off Blinking
source
voltage
LED1 Green 3.3VEP LED lights during the - Accessing Not -
controller board Accessing
access to HDD
LED2 Green 3.3VEP LED lights during the - Accessing Not -
controller board Accessing
access to HDD
LED16 Red 3.3VEP Identify the BIOS/OS - BIOS OFF OS
control
LED8 Red 3.3VEP For POST code - Indicates the POST code
LED9 Red 3.3VEP For POST code - • LED8: MSB bit7
LED10 Red 3.3VEP For POST code - • LED9: bit6
LED11 Red 3.3VEP For POST code - • LED10: bit5
LED12 Red 3.3VEP For POST code - • LED11: bit4
LED13 Red 3.3VEP For POST code - • LED12: bit3
1413
6.Troubleshooting
LED Function
Address Color Power Use Fuse Lighting Off Blinking
source
voltage
LED14 Red 3.3VEP For POST code - • LED13: bit2
LED15 Red 3.3VEP For POST code - • LED14: bit1
• LED15: LSB bit0
RJ45 Red 3.3VE Indicates Ethernet - See "LEDs of RJ45 (Ethernet
connecting status Connector)".
RJ45 Red 3.3VE Indicates Ethernet -
connecting status
1414
6.Troubleshooting
1415
6.Troubleshooting
Required Items
PC applications can be downloaded from the GKM website. GKM Answer ID is "210634".
PC Requirement
When the test chart needs to be scanned, follow the procedure below.
1. Clean the exposure glass and place the test chart so that the bar-code printed on the chart
positions to the left.
2. For secure contact between the exposure glass and chart, put approximately 20 sheets of paper on
top of the chart. Make sure to match the corners of the paper and exposure glass.
• [A]: Scanner
• [B]: Chart
• [C]: Paper
1417
6.Troubleshooting
3. Press the Scan button for the adjustment required on the NICE main menu screen.
• The NICE SD card must be inserted into the service slot on the controller box, NOT the
slot on the operation panel.
1418
6.Troubleshooting
• Make sure to turn off the power before removing the SD card from the card slot on the
controller box.
4. Turn on the main power.
5. The NICE main menu is displayed. Press [SubMenu] to open the NICE sub menu.
If the NICE main menu screen does not appear after doing the above, press the [Program] key.
This is the precise registration adjustment of the reference side. Using this function together with Front
and Back Registration Adjustment will achieve very precise registration.
Preparation
1. Match the 5 hooks to combine the sheet [A] and the cover [B] as shown below.
1420
6.Troubleshooting
Adjustment Procedure
1421
6.Troubleshooting
• [A] and [C]: Blank sheet (3 copies printed respectively before and after the test chart)
• [B]: Test chart (3 sheets)
1422
6.Troubleshooting
The waiting time is displayed on the screen. The waiting time differs depending on the paper
thickness.
8. Press "[Start] OK".
1423
6.Troubleshooting
12. Attach the test chart [A] to the registration tool [B], so that the QR code [C] appears through the
cut-out.
1424
6.Troubleshooting
Make sure that the edge of the test chart is inside the slit of the hook as shown below.
• [A]: Bad
• [B]: Good
13. Place the chart [A] and the attached registration tool on the exposure glass so that the side printed
with the bar code faces down.
Make sure the top and left edges of the chart are set flush against the edges of the exposure glass.
1425
6.Troubleshooting
• If the required waiting time has not elapsed since the test charts were printed, the
following message will appear. Precise adjustment results may not be obtained if you do
not wait for 10 minutes.
• The waiting time for the precise adjustment results differs depending on the paper
thickness.
15. After the scan is completed, remove the chart from the exposure glass. Then press "[Start] OK" on
1426
6.Troubleshooting
• If the chart was scanned incorrectly as in the following list, an error message will appear.
• The same chart was scanned.
• The QR code was not scanned.
• The chart was not placed correctly on the exposure glass.
• If the error message appears, press "[Start] Retry" and scan again to recover from the
error.
1427
6.Troubleshooting
16. Press "[Start] OK" after scanning all three charts to confirm that the adjustments were made.
18. Turn OFF the machine power and remove the NICE SD card from the service card slot.
1428
6.Troubleshooting
This adjustment method is faster and easier compared to the Skilled Operators menu. The front and
back side registration adjustment is performed by NICE with the following method.
• For the registration adjustment, adjust the leading edge of the back side to match the front side.
• For the magnification adjustment, adjust the image size of the back side to match the front side.
• Adjustment is available only for the trays associated with the custom paper library.
• The following media sizes are supported: SRA3, A3, 13” x 19”, 12” x 18”, 11” x 17”, 315mm x
450mm, 318mm x 469mm , custom paper sizes between A4 and 13”x19”
Preparation
Adjustment Procedure
1429
6.Troubleshooting
• Adjustment is available only for trays associated with the custom paper library. Trays used
under manual settings are grayed out and cannot be adjusted for registration.
• 3 copies of the following chart will be printed in duplex along with a few blank sheets.
4. Place the chart on a table, so that the side indicated "FIRST" [A] faces up and fold the 4 corners
1430
6.Troubleshooting
along the dotted lines as shown below. Do the same for the remaining 2 charts.
5. Place the chart [A] on the exposure glass, so that the side indicated "SECOND" [B] faces up.
6. Scan the "FIRST" side of all 3 charts. From the scanned data, the software application contained in
the NICE SD card reads the distance [A] between the dotted lines along the folded edges and the
paper edge on all 4 corners.
7. On the table, fold the same 4 corners in reverse so that the corners appear on the side indicated
1431
6.Troubleshooting
8. Place the chart [A] on the exposure glass so that the side indicated "FIRST" [B] faces up.
FR Density Adjustment
NICE calculates and corrects the shading value in the main scan direction and applies the corrections
to the engine (SP) in order to decrease the density difference in the main scan direction.
1432
6.Troubleshooting
Preparation
Take note of the following points before you begin the adjustment.
• Check if the uneven density can be corrected with "Adjust Density Difference Across Feed
Direction" in the Adjustment Settings for Skilled Operators menu. The adjustments made in this
menu take effect only after power cycling the machine. If there is no improvement, set the value(s)
back to "0" and turn the main power off/on.
• Replace parts exceeding life, if any.
• Clean the dust shield glass of the laser unit.
• Clean the doctor gap.
• For adjustments using the scanner, unzip the installer zip file: "NICE ImageView FR V2.1
Installer.7z" and run "set up .exe". DO NOT apply changes to the file directory.
• For adjustments using the spectrophotometer, run "i1ProfilerSetup.exe" and install "i1 Profiler."
• Prepare A3 or DLT size coated paper.
1. Scanner Calibration
For the correct scanning procedure, see "Common Procedure for Scanning Test Chart" in NICE
Function (Pro C5200S/C5210S).
2. Display the NICE main menu. (How to Activate NICE)
3. Press "Scan: Calibration for FR" on the NICE main menu screen.
Calibration data will be stored in the SD card.
1433
6.Troubleshooting
2. Adjustment Procedure
1. Press " Print: FR Adjust " on the NICE main menu screen.
2. 75%/60% (75U/60L) and 30%/15% (30U/15L) halftone charts will be printed in CMYK (total of 8
sheets).
Use the paper trays for A3 or DLT. Print the halftone chart with the same paper used for step 3 in
1434
6.Troubleshooting
• 75%/60% (75U/60L) and 30%/15% (30U/15L) halftone charts will be printed in CMYK
(total of 8 sheets).
For the correct scanning procedure, see "Common Procedure for Scanning Test Chart" in NICE
Function (Pro C5200S/C5210S).
4. Press "Save SP to SD: FR" to copy the engine SP data onto the SD card.
SP data (SP2-152-xxx) will be saved as a csv file on the SD card.
1435
6.Troubleshooting
5. Turn off the main power and remove the SD card from the service slot and insert the SD card into
your PC.
6. Start up the "Image View FR" and click "START".
8. Click "START" and select the tiff files (75/30U tiff files) requiring the adjustment and csv file
1436
6.Troubleshooting
12. Turn the machine power off/on for the modified SP values to take effect.
13. Repeat the above steps until the desired results are obtained.
1437
6.Troubleshooting
7. Press "Origin".
8. Turn off/on the main power for the original SP value to take effect.
1438
6.Troubleshooting
4. Turn off the main machine and remove the NICE SD card from the service slot.
Install the "Profiler Ver.1.5.6". After installing the i1 profiler, be sure to uncheck the checkbox "Check
version and license status at startup." as shown here below. After unchecking the check box, "Check for
update:" becomes "OFF".
1439
6.Troubleshooting
1. Insert the NICE SD card into the SD card slot on your PC.
2. Open the i1 Profiler and change the user mode to "Advanced".
1440
6.Troubleshooting
8. If the message "Device not calibrated" appears, click "Calibration" and wait for the
spectrophotometer to reach ready status.
• If the calibration fails as a result of insufficient power supply from the USB port, use a bus
powered type USB hub.
• If the calibration fails due to deterioration of the light source, contact the vendor of the
spectrophotometer.
1441
6.Troubleshooting
10. Scan the test chart for the color requiring the adjustment.
• Place the test chart on top of a stack of approximately 10 sheets as shown below.
1442
6.Troubleshooting
• It is recommended to scan from the bottom line to avoid scratches caused by the cable of
the spectrophotometer.
• Look at the PC screen and confirm that scanning has completed before scanning the next
line.
11. After scanning 10 lines, click "Save".
13. Select the following check box on the "CGATS file format options" screen.
• Sample ID
• Asmple Name
• L*a*b*
1443
6.Troubleshooting
"Page Data" is saved in a text file format, for example, "M75_M*.txt". "_M*" is attached
automatically when saving the file.
14. Go back to Step 7 to do the same for the remaining colors.
15. Remove the NICE SD card from the SD card slot on your PC, and then insert the NICE SD card
into the service slot of the main machine.
1444
6.Troubleshooting
2. Press "Load SP: FR: ES1000" to print out the test chart.
3. Confirm that the file which appears in the pop-up dialog matches the file saved in the NICE SD
card, and press "[Start] OK".
NICE calculates the shading adjustment values, and then SP values (SP2-152-xxx) will be
overwritten in the engine.
5. Turn the main power off and on for the modified SP values to take effect.
6. From the NICE sub menu screen, press "TestPrint" to print out the "75%’" test chart and check the
image quality.
• It is not recommended to check the image quality with "Print: FR Adjust: ES1000"
because the pattern is segmented and it is difficult to examine the entire image.
• After completing the adjustment, remove the uploaded files from the SD card.
1445
6.Troubleshooting
5. Turn the main power off and on for the previous SP values to take effect.
Banding Analysis
• Make sure the paper and print parameters applied are always the same when running the
banding analysis.
• Do "Process Setup" or "Manual ProCon (Density Adjustment)" before running the banding
analysis.
• If Banding analysis is performed in order to continuously monitor the color evenness, make
sure to print out the 75% chart under the same conditions as follows.
1446
6.Troubleshooting
• Use the same paper and the same paper settings under the same installation
environment.
• Print out the 75% chart after executing the initialization (SP3-020-001).
• Troubleshoot the other abnormal images, such as vertical streaks and FR density
difference.
Overview
Procedure
• For the correct scanning procedure, see "Common Procedure for Scanning Test Chart" in
NICE Function (Pro C5200S/C5210S).
• The scanned data will be saved on the SD card as a tiff file ((S/N)-YYYYMMDDHHMMSS-
CALB-2014-02-2.tiff).
1447
6.Troubleshooting
• For the correct scanning procedure, see "Common Procedure for Scanning Test Chart" in
NICE Function (Pro C5200S/C5210S).
• Scan the 75% charts one by one. You can scan only the color of the chart which you want
to analyze.
• The scan data is saved on the SD card as five tiff files ((Machine S/N)-
YYYYMMDDHHMMSS-(CMYK)75-yyyymm-0-(0)~(4).tiff) for each color.
1448
6.Troubleshooting
5. Turn OFF the main power. Remove the SD card from the service slot and insert it into the SD card
slot on your PC.
6. Launch the PC application "IQ Evaluation" and click "START".
7. In the main window under "Calibration", click "START" to display the "Calibration" window.
8. In the "Calibration" window, click the folder and select the Calibration Chart scanned and saved in
step 2.
File name: (Machine S/N)-YYYYMMDDHHMMSS-CALB-2014-02-2.tiff
1449
6.Troubleshooting
10. Several windows will appear during the calibration process. After the calibration completes, press
"OK" in the following window and select the folder you wish to save the XML file, which contains
the color shading correction values calculated from the calibration results.
1450
6.Troubleshooting
• The higher the color shading value, the worse the banding.
• Dat files are created in C:\jig\data (default) or a selected folder.
14. Wait for the Banding Analyzer window to appear.
If the Banding Analyzer does not automatically start, start the Banding Analyzer manually.
15. Select the product model from "Menu" -> "Group" -> "Products".
1451
6.Troubleshooting
16. Click "Run", then select and save the dat file created in Step 13.
• Microsoft Excel will launch automatically after the calculation completes to display the
parts/units that should be inspected to resolve banding, in the order of effectiveness.
• The higher the bar, the higher the necessity of inspection.
1452
6.Troubleshooting
• If Microsoft Excel does not automatically start, start Microsoft Excel manually.
Shock-jitter Finder
Shock-jitter Finder is a PC application that helps identify the problem causing the shock-jitter.
If Microsoft Excel is active when launching the SJ Finder, the error message shown below will appear.
Make sure to close all Excel files in advance.
1453
6.Troubleshooting
1. Unzip the installer and check that the following 2 folders appear.
4. In the unzipped folder "NICE SJ Finder V2.1 installer", select "SupportData" and click "Select
Folder".
5. Wait for the message prompting to reboot your PC to appear. Then reboot your PC and activate the
SJ Finder.
1454
6.Troubleshooting
7. To confirm successful installation, start the SJ Finder and see if all the applicable models appear in
the list under "Machine".
If any models are missing, perform Updating the Shock-jitter Finder.
1455
6.Troubleshooting
4. Navigate to the "SupportData" folder unzipped in Step 1, and then click "Current folder".
The following message will appear to indicate that the files/folders have been copied successfully.
1456
6.Troubleshooting
5. Select "Select Type" and make sure that all the applicable models appear in the list.
Operation Procedure
1. Launch the Shock-jitter Finder on your PC and specify the following information:
• Product model
• Simplex or Duplex
• Print speed
1457
6.Troubleshooting
• Troubleshooting instructions are available for items indicated with an asterisk "*".
• If a shock-jitter sample is not at hand and the location of the shock-jitter is unclear, press
"Print: Shock Jitter" on the NICE main menu screen to print out a test chart. The number of
1458
6.Troubleshooting
1459
6.Troubleshooting
Adjustment
Overview
Color Calibration can be performed by the Automatic Color Calibration (ACC) in "Maintenance" in "User
Tools".
There are two types of ACC.
• Copier Function ACC
• Printer Function ACC
ACC for the Printer Function has 5 modes, for different printer resolutions.
Mode Resolution
Calibration 1 600 x 600 dpi 600dpi 1bit Photo/Text
Calibration 2 1800 x 600 dpi 600dpi 2bit Photo/Text Recommended Mode
Calibration 3 9000 x 600 dpi 600dpi 4bit Photo/Text
Calibration 4 1200 x 1200 dpi 1200dpi 1bit Photo/Text
Calibration 5 3600 x 1200 dpi 1200dpi 2bit Photo/Text
Procedure
• When scanning the color test pattern, place about 10 sheets of white paper over the test
pattern, in order to prevent the test pattern from coming away from the exposure glass.
• Please instruct the customer to perform the ACC periodically to keep good image quality.
• Both "Copier Function ACC" and "Printer Function ACC" should be performed as a set.
• ACC can be cancelled by pressing "Previous Settings" if the customer is not satisfied with the
ACC results.
1460
6.Troubleshooting
Overview
Printer Gamma can be adjusted with SP mode. Highlight (H), Shadow (S), Middle (M) and IDmax can
be set independently from the range 0 through 30 (15 is the default).
Overview
Adjustment Procedure
step #11).
See NOTE 3 about the corresponding patch pattern.
9. Adjust the Middle (M) for CMYK with SP1104 (Gamma Adjustment) and save the adjusted value
with SP1105 (Save Toner Control Value).
10. Print out the Color Gray Scale pattern with SP1103-001 again.
11. Compare the Shadow (S) patch pattern on the C-4 test chart for each color and the corresponding
patch pattern on the Color Gray Scale printed with SP1103-001. (If no adjustment is required, go
step #14).
See NOTE 3 about the corresponding patch pattern.
12. Adjust the Shadow (S) for CMYK with SP1104 (Gamma Adjustment) and save the adjusted value
with SP1105 (Save Toner Control Value).
13. Print out the Color Gray Scale pattern with SP1103-001 again.
14. Compare the Highlight (H) patch pattern on the C-4 test chart for each color and the corresponding
patch pattern on the Color Gray Scale printed with SP1103-001. (If no adjustment is required, all
adjustment is completed).
See NOTE 3 about the corresponding patch pattern.
15. Adjust the Highlight (H) for CMYK with SP1104 (Gamma Adjustment) and save the adjusted value
with SP1105 (Save Toner Control Value).
16. Turn the main power switch OFF and ON.
NOTE 1: Adjustment order should be IDmax -> Middle -> Shadow -> Highlight.
NOTE 2: SP1-104
Output ID K C M
Highlight SP1-104-001 SP1-104-021 SP1-104-041
Shadow SP1-104-002 SP1-104-022 SP1-104-042
Middle SP1-104-003 SP1-104-023 SP1-104-043
IDmax SP1-104-004 SP1-104-024 SP1-104-044
NOTE 3: Cross reference between C-4 test chart and Color
1462
6.Troubleshooting
Highlight: 2-5
Middle: 3-7
Shadow: 6-9
IDmax: 10
The following table shows a cross reference between the gradation patch pattern on the C-4 test chart
and the Gray Scale printed with SP1-103-001.
C-4 test chart 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Gray Scale printed with SP1-103-001 C -- 1 3 4 5 8 9 11 13 15-16
M 1 2 5 6 7 10 12 14 15 16
Y 1 3 5 7 9 10 13 14 15 16
K -- 1 3 4 5 7 10 13 16 --
Overview
This procedure shows how to adjust the printer gamma by SP mode manually after the ACC (Automatic
Color Calibration) has been performed. Adjustment should be performed only in the ‘Offset’ part of the
screen, and not in the ‘Option’ part of the screen. Adjustable modes are "Text mode", "Photo mode",
"B&W text mode" and "B&W photo mode".
1. Perform ACC in copier mode with User Tools.
2. Take a copy of a C-4 test chart in the mode which you need to adjust.
3. Enter Copier SP mode.
1464
6.Troubleshooting
5. If you touch the "Change" button, the following 3 screens will be displayed. These screens can be
changed by pressing the "Next" or "Previous" button.
1465
6.Troubleshooting
6. Press the "Copy Window" button on the bottom left, then take a copy of the C-4 test chart. Then
compare the gradation patch pattern on the copied image and the C-4 test chart.
Step Output ID C-4 chart level Adjustment Reference
1 ID max Adjust the 'Offset' value so that the density
(K/C/M/Y) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 of level 10 in the gradation patch pattern
on the copy becomes the same as level
10 on the C-4 chart.
2 Middle Adjust the 'Offset' value so that the density
(K/C/M/Y) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 of level 6 in the gradation patch pattern on
the copy becomes the same as level 10
on the C-4 chart.
3 Shadow Adjust the 'Offset' value so that the density
(K/C/M/Y) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 of level 8 in the gradation patch pattern on
the copy becomes the same as level 10
on the C-4 chart.
4 Highlight Adjust the 'Offset' value so that dirty
(K/C/M/Y) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 background is not visible on the copy and
the density of level 3 is slightly lighter that
of level 3 on the C-4 chart.
5 K Highlight Adjust the 'Offset' value so that black scale
(K/C/M/Y) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 levels 3 through 5 in the copy are seen as
gray (no C, M, or Y should be visible). If
the black scale contains C, M, or Y, redo
step 1 to 4.
- Only in Photo mode -
1466
6.Troubleshooting
Overview
Scanning registration can be adjusted in the Main Scan and Sub Scan directions. Sub Scan
Magnification can also be adjusted.
Adjustment Procedure
Overview
Adjusts the position and scaling applied to scanned images when using the ADF with the copier and
scanner functions. By specifying this setting, you can correct image misalignment, expansion, and
shrinkage due to non-uniform paper feeding.
This adjustment needs to be done before doing “Adjustment 005: Registration Adjustment”
Adjustment Procedure
Overview
This troubleshooting covers all the procedures involving registration adjustments; skew, image position
and front-back magnification adjustment except ADF and scanner registration. Note that these
procedures should be done BEFORE making registration adjustments on the Fiery controller and
scanner/ADF of the machine.
Cause
Skew
1467
6.Troubleshooting
Image Shift
Contents
Check the side fence status for each paper tray. If not correct, adjust the trays.
Step 2-1 Set A3 or DLT plain paper (63.1-80.0 gsm) in Tray 2 and apply the paper tray settings.
Step 2-2 Print 5 copies of the test pattern Trimming Area (SP2109-003-14) in b/w and simplex.
Step 2-3 Measure the two locations [A] and [B] on all 5 copies.
Step 2-4 You need to make an adjustment with SP1-004-001 so that the average values of [A] and [B]
are the same.
Step 2-6 Measure the locations [C] and [D] on the back side.
Step 2-7 You need to make an adjustment with SP1-004-003 so that the average values of [C] and [D]
are the same.
Step 3-1 Set A3 or DLT plain paper (63.1-80.0 gsm) in Tray 2 and apply the tray paper settings.
Step 3-2 Print 5 copies of the test pattern Trimming Area (SP2-109-003-14) in b/w, simplex.
Step 3-3 Measure the distance [A] and [B] on all 5 copies and calculate the average.
Step 3-4 You need to make an adjustment with SP1-003-XXX so that the average values of [A] and [B]
are the same. Refer to ‘Reference Information-2’ below.
(You can make an adjustment for each paper type with SP1-003-008 to 016 for IMSS setting in the Pro
machine.)
Step 3-5 You need to make an adjustment with SP1-001-XXX so that the average values of [A] and [B]
are the same. Refer to ‘Reference Information-2’ below.
(You can make an adjustment for each paper type with SP1-001-004 to 016 for IMSS setting in the Pro
machine.)
Step 3-6 If you finished the adjustment, check that the value of [C] is more than 4mm.
• If the value of [C] is less than 4mm, a jam may occur because of the fusing stripper pawls.
• So adjust the value of [C] so that it is more than 4mm.
1469
6.Troubleshooting
Step 4-1 Print 11 copies of the test pattern Trimming Area (SP2-109-003-14) in b/w, duplex, and select
5 copies (from the 4th to the 8th copy) from among the 11.
• The first 3 and the last 3 copies will not be used due to the higher possibility of image size
variations.
Step 4-2 Measure the distances [A2], [B2], [C2] and [D2] on all 5 copies and calculate the average.
1470
6.Troubleshooting
machine.)
Step 4-4 You need to make an adjustment with SP1-001-003 so that the average values of [C2] and
[D2] are the same. Refer to ‘Reference Information-3’ below.
(You can make an adjustment for each paper type with SP1-001-004 to 016 for IMSS setting in a Pro
machine.)
Step 5-1 Set A3 or DLT plain paper (63.1-80.0 gsm) in Tray 2 and apply the tray paper settings.
Step 5-2 Print 5 copies of the test pattern Trimming Area (SP2109-003-14) in b/w, Duplex.
Step 5-3 Measure the distance [A] and [B] on all 5 copies and calculate the average.
Step 5-4 You need to make an adjustment with SP2-102-043 so that the average values of [A3] and
[B3] are the same. Refer to ‘Reference Information-4’ below.
(You can make an adjustment for each paper type with SP2-102-043 for IMSS setting in a Pro
machine.)
Step 5-5 You need to make an adjustment with SP2-102-006 to 069 so that the average values of [C3]
and [D3] are the same. Refer to ‘Reference Information-4’ below.
(You can make an adjustment for each paper type with SP2-102-006 to 069 for IMSS setting in a Pro
machine.)
1471
6.Troubleshooting
Side-to-Side Registration
1. Do the following calculation: ((average [B] - (average [A])/2 = X
2. Add X to the current values in SP1003. (If you use IMSS, SP1003-008 to 016)
SP1003 Current SP Value X Modified Value
Side-to-Side Reg
Tray 1
Tray 2
Duplex Tray
A3LCT Tray 3
A3LCT Tray 4
A3LCT Tray 5
Bypass Tray
Examples
1472
6.Troubleshooting
Overview
Adjusts the nip width between the fusing belt and pressure roller for envelope printing. Changing this
setting may lead to insufficient fusing or cause the envelopes to wrinkle. When encountering such
problems, do the following adjustment.
1474
6.Troubleshooting
Adjustment Procedure
To correct insufficient fusing, increase the value in the following SP by 5msec and check the result.
To correct wrinkles, decrease the value in the following SP by 5msec and check the result.
Pro/Office Number Description Adjustment Area
SP SP1-996-109 to 254 Envelope Nip Width Setting 0 to 20000um
For IMSS
Pro Number Description Adjustment
Area
IMSS 058 Fusing Nip Width Adjustment: Envelope (for each 0 to 20000um
Custom Papers)
SP SP1-996-145 to Envelope Nip Width Setting (for each paper 0 to 20000um
253 type/thickness)
Overview
What to do when the customer is not satisfied with the glossiness of the copies made with the
suggested temperature is described below.
• Note that the adjustment procedures for Pro C5200S/C5210S and MP C6503/C8003 differ.
1. In the SP mode or IMSS, increase the fusing heat roller temperature until the desired glossiness is
achieved.
SP1-984-XXX Htg Roller Temp Setting 0 to 200 °C
IMSS setting #050 Fusing Temp 100 to 200 °C
• This will increase the temperature of fusing roller but will also slow down the processing
speed.
Overview
The procedure for adjusting the leading edge margin [A] and trailing edge margin [B] is described
below.
• Narrowing the margin too much may cause the side edge of the paper to be dirty.
• Take care because if you narrow the margin too much, paper may jam at the fusing unit
stripper pawls and damage the fusing unit.
Margin adjustment
1476
6.Troubleshooting
• Adjust this SP in increments of ±0.5mm. Higher values will increase the margin, while
lower values will decrease the margin.
2. Make some test prints (simplex and duplex) and make sure that fusing jams and side edge
smudges do not occur.
1477
6.Troubleshooting
Image Quality
Sub-classification 1: Spots
Definition: White spots seen in solid image areas or black/colored spots seen where there should be
nothing printed. The description "white spots" excludes those with toner cores.
Sub-classification 2 Example Definition
Black or colored Stains are visible as crisp black or colored spots.
spots
White spots White spots are visible inside solid images or halftone image
areas because of missing toner.
Spots with toner Toner aggregated inside the machine has been transferred to
paper.
White spots with White spots with pieces of aggregated toner in the center visible
toner cores in solid color areas. Pieces of aggregated toner may be
irremovable.
Fish-shape stains Stains in the shape of small fish which appear to be swimming in
the paper feed direction.
Sub-classification 1: Streaks
Definition: A smudge or a white area inside an image, in a linear shape with 1mm or smaller width.
1478
6.Troubleshooting
Vertical white streaks Parts of the image missing in the shape of streaks in the
paper feed direction.
Sub-classification 1: Bands
Definition: A smudge or a white area inside an image, in a linear shape with 1mm or larger width.
1479
6.Troubleshooting
Fuzzy lines Blurred images in the shape of slightly winding bands in the
paper feed direction.
1480
6.Troubleshooting
Sub-classification 1: Non-reproduction
Definition: Parts of the developed images and text are not reproduced.
Sub-classification Example Definition
2
White zone Part of a solid image or halftone is missing.
Wormholes The outline of a letter (or a line) is reproduced but the inside of it
is missing.
1481
6.Troubleshooting
Negative residual The previously copied image is reproduced with its black and
image white reversed on the same page or the next page.
Positive residual The previously copied image is reproduced on the same page or
image the next page.
Missing image The developed image has slid in the subscan direction or is
missing.
Sub-classification 1: Unevenness
1482
6.Troubleshooting
Uneven glossiness The glossiness is uneven inside a dark solid image. Check it
by looking at the paper from different angles.
Color changes During repeated printing, the color or the density changes from
sheet to sheet.
Color difference The colors differ between the original and the copy.
Rough image Color is uneven and small spots are visible inside a solid
image.
1483
6.Troubleshooting
Sub-classification 1: Stains
Stains on the back side Granular stains are visible on the back side of the paper.
1484
6.Troubleshooting
Sub-classification 1: Irregularity
Sub-classification 1: Scratches
Definition: Stains in the shape of vertical streaks which seem to be caused by scratches from the guide
plate ribs or other parts.
Sub- Example Definition
classification 2
Claw marks Stains of toner that got on the paper when it came into contact with
drum pick-off pawls or fusing iunit stripper pawls.
Definition: Stains in the shape of vertical streaks which seem to be caused by scratches from the guide
plate ribs or other parts.
1485
6.Troubleshooting
Horizontal image shift Images and lines shifted in the direction perpendicular to
the paper feed direction.
Vertical color Color out of position in the paper feed direction where
registration error colors should be overlaid.
Overview
White spots seen in solid colored areas or colored spots seen in areas without images. The description
"white spots" excludes those with toner cores.
Item Description
Colored spots (189mm or Colored spots may appear at 189mm or 40 mm intervals in solid
40mm intervals) areas.
White spots in low- White spots may appear in low-temperature, low-humidity
temperature, low-humidity (10 °C/15 %) environments.
environments
White spots White spots or black spots may appear when printing halftone
images in low-temperature, low-humidity environments immediately
after replacing the developer.
White spots with toner cores White spots with toner cores may appear inside solid images.
White, fish-shape stains White points or short lines may appear in the feed direction at 189
mm intervals.
1486
6.Troubleshooting
Item Description
Random white spots on solid White spots may appear randomly on solid images.
images, caused by paper dust
Symptom
Colored spots appear at 40mm or 189mm intervals in solid image areas (black or white) or throughout
the entire image on the single-color Independent Pattern (1-dot), when printing onto A3 or SRA3
sheets.
Cause
Solution
Do the following:
1. Load A3 or SRA3 paper in the tray.
2. In SP2-109-003, set the test pattern to solid white, solid black, and single color Independent
Pattern 1-dot.
3. Print out the pattern and check the interval of the spots.
If the symptom occurs at 189mm intervals:
• If there are any scratches on the OPC drum, replace the OPC drum.
• If there are no scratches, wipe the OPC drum surface with a damp cloth and then with a dry
cloth.
If the symptom occurs at 40mm intervals:
• If there are scratches on the charge rollers, replace the affected roller(s).
• If there are no scratches, wipe the surface of the roller with a damp cloth and then with a dry
cloth.
Symptom
1. When using paper with a paper weight of 100.9 g/m2 (MP C6503/C8003: Plain Paper 2, Pro
C5200S/C5210S: Paper Weight 3) or lighter: White spots may appear on the 2nd page of duplex
printing when using paper with a rough surface and high electrical resistance in an LL environment.
2. When using paper with a paper weight of 101.0 g/m2 (MP C6503/C8003: Middle Thick, Pro
C5200S/C5210S: Paper Weight 4) or heavier: White spots may appear on paper with a rough
1487
6.Troubleshooting
surface and high electrical resistance. (See the example image below)
Cause
1. The electrical resistance increases when the paper goes through the fusing unit and the moisture
of the paper evaporates.
2. Due to high electrical resistance characteristics of the paper.
Action
SP No. SP Name
SP2-641-001 to 099 PTR Bias:BW
SP2-642-001 to 099 PTR Bias:BW
SP2-651-001 to 099 PTR Bias:FC
SP2-652-001 to 099 PTR Bias:FC
• If the transfer current is too low, the image may not be solid enough.
Symptom
White or black spots appear when printing halftone images in low-temperature, low-humidity
1488
6.Troubleshooting
• Black spots occur more frequently when printing onto coated paper.
Cause
Some carrier particles inside newly-installed developer have a relatively high electrical potential. These
particles may be transferred to the OPC in non-image areas as well, and then fall off before image
transfer. As a result, a white spot is developed on the image.
If these carrier particles are transferred to the ITB, toner around the carrier drops off, forming a black
spot.
Solution
Do the following.
Pro C5200S/C5210S:
Execute “Adjust Image Density” (0201-01) inside the Skilled Operator Settings.
• This is effective when the development gamma is low (about 0.8 or less) or the OPC electric
potential is high, such as in low-temperature, low-humidity environments.
MP C6503/C8003:
Execute “Density Adjustment Process Control” by tapping the following buttons: [User Tools] icon ->
[Machine Features] -> [Management] – [Auto Color Calibration].
• This is effective when the development gamma is low (about 0.8 or less) or the OPC electric
potential is high, such as in low-temperature, low-humidity environments.
• After you do this, color calibration is optional.
CE:
1489
6.Troubleshooting
Symptom
White spots with “toner cores” appear inside solid images/patches when printing under high-
temperature conditions.
Cause
• The machine is left unused for an extended time, and toner tends to clump inside the development
unit. As a result, toner may not be transferred onto the paper correctly.
• The PCDU is subjected to strong vibration or shock. This may cause toner on the wall of the unit to
fall inside the developer and form clumps.
• The toner is left outside the moisture bag too long. This may cause toner to form clumps.
Solution
Do the following, which will clear the toner clumps out of the development unit.
1. Make a test print and determine the affected color(s).
2. Print out 30-200 A3 sheets with solid images of the affected color(s).
3. If the symptom still occurs, replace the toner cartridge of the affected color.
4. Repeat Step 2.
5. If the symptom still occurs, replace the development unit/developer of the affected color.
Symptom
Rows of “Medaka” (small, white, fish-shaped specks) appear in solid image areas along the paper feed
direction at 189mm intervals when printing onto A3/SRA3 paper.
1490
6.Troubleshooting
Cause
Solution
1491
6.Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting for random white spots on solid images casued by paper dust
Symptom
Condition
Cause
2. Paper dust falls on the paper path, causing succeeding sheets to catch the paper dust. Then,
similarly to Cause 1, toner adheres to the dust instead of the paper.
Solution
1492
6.Troubleshooting
• If the paper contains a lot of paper dust to the extent that the dust is clearly visible when
fanning the paper, avoid using such paper stock.
2. Solution if there is paper dust on the paper path
Wipe the paper path leading from the registration unit to the fusing unit [A] with a damp cloth.
Overvew
A smudge or a white area inside an image, in a linear shape with 1mm or smaller width.
Item Description
Vertical streaks caused by contact with Vertical streaks may appear.
the toner adhering to the guide plate
Horizontal white streaks in small solid Horizontal white streaks may appear in small solid black
black areas areas when printing in an HH environment (27° C 80%).
Scratch marks on solid images in the Scratch marks may appear randomly on solid images in
paper feed direction the paper feed direction.
White line along the paper feed One or more white lines may appear along the paper feed
direction direction.
1493
6.Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting for vertical streaks caused by contact with the toner adhering to the guide plate
Symptom
Condition
Scratches tend to stand out when printing on relatively stiff thick coated paper.
Cause
After fusing, paper comes into contact with small convex scratches or adhering toner on the guide plate
and vertical streaks appear.
Action (overview)
1. If the problem occurs at the position of the ribs of the heat pipe entrance guide plate, clean the heat
pipe entrance guide plate ribs.
2. If the problem occurs in other places, clean the paper transport path/duplex unit.
3. If cleaning does not improve the situation, lower the fusing temperature.
Action (detail 1): Clean the heat pipe entrance guide plate ribs.
Action (detail 2): Clean the paper exit transport path/duplex unit.
• If streaks appear on straight-fed one-sided prints or the second side of two sided prints: (1) Clean
the upper part of the Paper Exit transport path.
• If streaks appear on the first sides of two-sided prints: (2) Clean the lower part of the Paper Exit
transport path.
• If streaks appear on inverted one-sided prints: (3) Clean the lower left part of the Paper Exit
transport path.
• If streaks appear on the second side of two-sided prints: (4) Clean the duplex unit.
1494
6.Troubleshooting
[A]: Paper Exit Lower Left Guide Plate (Clean this area thoroughly.)
1495
6.Troubleshooting
[A]: Duplex Transport guide plate (Upper) (Clean the turning point on the right thoroughly.)
[B]: Duplex Transport guide plate (Lower)
Enter SP mode and lower the fusing temperature with SP1-984. (Guideline: Lower it 10° C at a time.)
• There is a risk of decreasing fusing ability. Be sure to check the printed results.
Pro/Office SP No. SP Name Value
Pro/Office SP1-984-109 to 254 Htg Roller Temp Setting 0 to 200
Reference
The following features are unique to this machine that contribute to the vertical streaks.
• Chances of foreign materials to scratch the prints are high because the toner used for this series
has a low melting point.
• Paper contacts the guide plate after fusing because the curve of the switchback exit path is tight.
MPC7501/6501 Pro C5200S/C5210S ProC751EX/651EX
Curvature Average R35 Average R50 Average R70
Supported paper Straight: up to 300gsm Straight: up to 300gsm Straight: up to 300gsm
(gsm) Switchback: up to Switchback: up to Switchback: up to
163gsm 256gsm 256gsm
Duplex: up to 163gsm Duplex: up to 256gsm Duplex: up to 256gsm
Toner CER SPR-F2 CER-gamma
(Low melting point)
1496
6.Troubleshooting
Symptom
Horizontal white streaks may appear in small solid black areas (smaller than 3cm x 3cm). (See the
example below in the red circle)
Cause
Electrical charge of the Bk toner is lower compared to other toners because the Bk station is the most
downstream, and the transfer bias is set higher in FC mode.
This prevents black toner from maintaining the optimum charge level, which may result in poor toner
transfer.
Action
Risks:
Image density may decrease in Bk solid images that have a high coverage ratio. (Density at the
sides become low.)
Ghosting of Bk halftone images
3. Adjust the paper transfer current. (-5 A to -15 A from the default)
To ease the symptom, decrease the paper transfer current in [#026 & #027: Paper transfer current:
FC: Side 1, 2].
Decrease -5 A at a time as you check the results.
Do not decrease by more than -15 A from the default.
Risks:
Low image density
Toner scattering around solid images
4. Increase the maximum image density.
To ease the symptom, increase the maximum image density of Bk in [#011: Maximum Image
Density:K] by adjusting the notch to the [+].
Side effect:
Low toner yield
SP No. SP Name
SP2-451-001 ITB K:Standard:FC
1498
6.Troubleshooting
SP No. SP Name
SP2-451-002 ITB K:Standard:BW
Symptom
Scratch marks appear randomly on solid images in the paper feed direction.
Condition
Cause
1. Toner accumulates on the ribs on the transport guide plate adjacent to the cooling pipe.
2. Scratches, paper dust, contamination on the transport guide plate
• Although the transport guide plates have PEFE sheets attached [A] to prevent foreign
materials from adhering, the problem cannot be completely avoided.
Problem Mechanism
1. Due to the low melting point of the toner used for this series of machines, toner is easy to be
1499
6.Troubleshooting
Action 1 (for scratch marks originating in the ribs of the guide plate adjacent to the cooling
pipe)
1500
6.Troubleshooting
The following explains the location requiring cleaning when scratches are generated, depending on how
the copies are delivered; face up/down, simplex/duplex.
• If scratches appear on straight-fed simplex, or the second side of duplex prints, clean the upper
part of the paper exit transport path as shown below.
1501
6.Troubleshooting
[A]: Paper Exit Lower Left Guide Plate (Clean this area thoroughly.)
[B]: Paper Exit Lower Right Guide Plate
[C]: Junction Gate Ends
1502
6.Troubleshooting
• If scratches appear on the second side of duplex prints, clean the duplex unit as shown below.
[A]: Duplex Transport Guide Plate (Upper): Clean the turning point on the right thoroughly.
[B]: Duplex Transport Guide Plate (Lower)
Symptom
One or more white lines appear along the paper feed direction.
Cause 1
1503
6.Troubleshooting
Cause 2
Flow Chart
Step 1
1504
6.Troubleshooting
Step 2
1505
6.Troubleshooting
1506
6.Troubleshooting
Overview
A smudge or a white area inside an image, in a linear shape with 1mm or larger width.
Item Description
Blurred image at 189mm The first few printouts after turning on the machine may have a
intervals (OPC drum blurred image at 189-mm intervals (which corresponds to the
circumference) OPC drum circumference) on halftone images in high humidity
environments.
1507
6.Troubleshooting
Item Description
Banding at 2-3mm intervals Banding (uneven density) at 2-3mm intervals may appear.
Banding at random intervals Banding may appear on the printouts at random intervals.
caused by lubricant falling from
the drum cleaning unit
Symptom
The first few printouts after turning on the machine may have blurred image at 189mm intervals (which
corresponds to the OPC drum circumference) on halftone images in high humidity environments. (See
the example below)
Cause
Charge failure caused by “corona products” that form on the OPC drum
If the symptom occurs when all of conditions below are met:
• Operation after a long break (as in the initial operation of the day)
• Halftone image
• High humidity
Action
You can access the "Machine Features" screen with the following procedure below.
• Pro C5200S/C5210S:
• When using the standard operation panel: Press the "User Tools" key.
1508
6.Troubleshooting
• When using the smart operation panel: Press the "User Tools" icon, and then press
"Machine Features".
• MP C6503/C8003: Press the "User Tools" icon, and then press "Machine Features".
Symptom
Cause
Vibration of the cleaning unit synchronizes with the vibration generated by the gears that rotate the
Cleaning Brush Roller, creating a resonance.
This occurs specifically when the Cleaning Brush Roller rotates at the following 2 speeds, which are
defined as “Environment Coefficient 7 & 8” based on the absolute humidity detected internally by the
machine.
Operation mode Absolute humidity Cleaning brush roller rotation speed coefficient
Environment Coefficient 7 15-17.5 g/m3 1.63 (default)
Environment Coefficient 8 17.5-20 g/m3 1.76 (default)
Reference
Environment Coefficient 1-3: Low temperature and low humidity
Environment Coefficient 4-6: Optimum machine operational condition (laboratory)
Environment Coefficient 7-10: High temperature and high humidity
Solution
Enter the SP mode and modify the environment coefficient set for Environment Coefficient 7 and 8 as
shown below.
SP2-225-038 1.63 (default) 1.90
Environment Coefficient 7
SP2-225-039 1.76 (default) 1.90
Environment Coefficient 8
1509
6.Troubleshooting
Note: 1.90 is the default environment coefficient set for Environment Coefficient 9.
IMPORTANT
If you are not sure whether the uneven density problem you are trying to resolve is “Banding at 2-3mm
intervals” or not, do the following procedure.
A) Set SP2-225-032 through 041 to “1.50”, and print the job showing the problem.
B) Set SP2-225-032 through 041 to “1.63”, and print the job showing the problem.
C) Set SP2-225-032 through 041 to “1.76”, and print the job showing the problem.
If the problem does not occur in condition A, but occurs either in conditions B or C, the problem is
judged to be Banding at 2-3mm intervals.
• DO NOT print more than 10 pages with the above modified SP setting. Make sure to set each
SP back to the default after the test.
Environment Coefficient SP number Default
1 SP2-225-032 0.70
2 SP2-225-033 0.83
3 SP2-225-034 0.96
4 SP2-225-035 1.10
5 SP2-225-036 1.30
6 SP2-225-037 1.50
7 SP2-225-038 1.63
8 SP2-225-039 1.76
9 SP2-225-040 1.90
10 SP2-225-041 2.00
Side effect
Troubleshooting for Banding at Random Intervals Caused by Lubricant Falling from the Drum Cleaning
Unit
Symptom
1510
6.Troubleshooting
Cause
The lubricant in the drum cleaning unit falls into the registration unit and creates smudges on the ITB
encoder sensor. As a result, the engine speed cannot be controlled correctly.
Solution
Overview
Symptom
A halo may appear especially in low-temperature, low-humidity environments (See the example below)
Cause
Toner particles forming the edges of the halftone image are sucked up by the solid image due to the
substantial difference in the strength of the electric field at the boundaries of the solid and halftone
images.
Action
For a GW controller
Change the dpi from “2400 x 600dpi” (Default setting) to “600 x 600dpi”
For an EFI controller
Change the halftone mode from “200 Dot + Fine Text” to “175 Dot” in the “Image” tab.
Overview
Item Description
Vertical bands in Vertical bands of uneven image density may appear in halftone images on
halftone images the rear side of duplex copies/prints when printing onto coated paper in
low-temperature, low-humidity environments (10°C, 15%).
Uneven density in the Uneven density in halftone images may appear in an area 85mm from the
area 85mm from the trailing edge, which corresponds to the point where the paper leaves the
trailing edge registration rollers.
Grainy image The image density is not uniform across image areas when printing onto
paper that is not smooth in high-temperature, high-humidity environments
(27°C, 80%).
Symptom
Vertical bands of uneven image density appear in halftone images on the rear side of duplex
copies/prints when printing onto coated paper in low-temperature, low-humidity environments (10°C,
15%).
1: Approximately 30mm
2: Approximately 50mm
[A]: Bands of low density (at approx. 30-50mm from the center)
[B]: Density is relatively high at the ends of bands
Cause
Friction between the paper and the registration roller generates an electrical charge on some areas of
the paper, after the paper has passed through the fusing unit to fuse the first side. The areas on the
1512
6.Troubleshooting
paper are charged differently, and these differences are visible as bands.
Solution
• When using plain paper, the setting can be changed using 2-652-001 to 009 (for each paper
thickness and type) and 2-642-001 to 009 (for each paper thickness and type).
MP C6503/C8003:
A customer engineer must perform the following adjustment:
• If the symptom occurs in full-color mode, lower the value of SP2-652-001 to 009 (for each paper
thickness).
• If the symptom occurs in B/W mode, lower the value of SP2-642-001 to 009 (for each paper
thickness).
• The value must be between [default value] and [default value - 20 A].
• The density of solid images may be decreased if the bias is too low (especially for high-density
solid image areas). In addition, other image problems may occur.
Troubleshooting for Uneven Density in the Area up to 85mm from the Trailing Edge
Symptom
Uneven density of halftone image may appear in the area up to 85mm from the trailing edge. (See the
example below)
1513
6.Troubleshooting
Cause
Uneven density may appear because of the difference of both sticking level and distance between the
ITB and the paper immediately before the paper transfer process.
The following factors tend to change the sticking level and the distance:
• When the rotation speed of the transfer timing roller and paper transfer belt differ to a great degree
• Thin paper stocks
In low-temperature, low-humidity environments, an electric field is generated at the entrance of the
paper transfer belt
Action
SP No. SP Name
SP2-661-001 to 099 PTR Spd Adjustment
• Only change the paper type and thickness that the user needs to use.
2. Change either registration motor speed or transport motor speed. If you use this workaround, reset
the transfer roller speed to the default, then change each value by 0.1%.
1514
6.Troubleshooting
SP No. SP Name
SP1-008-001 to 023 Fine Adj Transport Mtr 1 Spd
SP1-010-001 to 023 Fine Adj Transport Mtr 2 Spd
SP1-012-001 to 023 Fine Adj Transport Mtr 3 Spd
SP1-016-001 to 025 Fine Adj Relay Mtr CW Spd
SP1-019-001 to 025 Fine Adj Registration Mtr Spd
SP1-034-001 to 025 Fine Adj Duplx Exit Mtr Spd
• Only change the paper type and thickness that the user needs to use.
• Change all the speeds by the same amount.
Symptom
The image density is not uniform across image areas when printing onto paper that is not smooth in a
high-temperature high-humidity environment. (See the example below)
Cause
When using paper that has a rough surface, the strength of the electrical field between the ITB and the
indents in the paper weakens, causing low image density only in these areas.
1515
6.Troubleshooting
Action
MP C6503/C8003:
Increase toner density with the following SPs.
1. Change the process control target (Ideal setting: +0.03 to 1.0 from the default)
SP: 3-620-111 to 114 (Plain : Maximum M/ A : K, C, M, Y)
2. Execute manual process control.
SP: 3-011-002 (Manual ProCon :Exe: Density Adjustment)
Pro C5200S/C5210S:
Increase the value of Toner Adhesion using the IMSS settings.
No. IMSS setting
011 Maximum Image Density: K
012 Maximum Image Density: C
013 Maximum Image Density: M
014 Maximum Image Density: Y
Symptom
Paper printed and stacked on the output tray stick together (known as “toner blocking”) when printed in
duplex.
Cause
Solution
Activate the Cooling Fan included as an accessory to the Copy Tray Type M26.
If the above does not resolve the problem, set the cooling fan in the procedure described on the
following pages so that it faces at a 90° angle.
1516
6.Troubleshooting
Procedure
3. Fit the bosses on bracket [B] to the holes on bracket [A] and fix the brackets. ( x 2)
1517
6.Troubleshooting
4. Set the cooling unit [B] on the bracket [A] at a 90° angle.
5. Fix the cooling unit [A] with the bracket at a 90° angle. ( x2)
1518
6.Troubleshooting
Paper Transport
Symptom
The following may occur when printing onto the types of envelopes shown below:
• Wrinkles
• Paper transport issues
• Flaps stick (closed) to the body of the envelope
• If the envelopes are fed in the SEF direction, they tend to warp in between the paper transfer
belt unit and fusing unit.
Cause
The heat of the fusing process may cause wrinkles to form or the adhesive on the flaps to melt if the
flaps are folded.
Solution
When feeding the types of envelopes described above, feed them from the bypass tray, in the LEF
direction (from the trailing edge), with the flaps open.
1519
6.Troubleshooting
Scanning
Symptom
Cause
Action
1520
6.Troubleshooting
1521
6.Troubleshooting
4. Attach the scanning guide plate for the Pro C5200S/C5210S (D6833350).
5. Attach the entrance guide plate for the Pro C5200S/C5210S (D6833401).
6. Set SP4-688-002 to a value of "98".
7. Remove the gap sheet (black) [A] from the exposure glass [B].
1522
6.Troubleshooting
Other Problems
Overview
Cause
Solution (Summary)
Solution (Detailed)
1523
6.Troubleshooting
Symptom
Cause
The leading edge of the paper [A] hits the fusing entrance guide plate and the paper floats away from
the transport belt [B] due to the thickness of the paper.
Solution 1
Set the paper in the trays neatly to prevent paper skew at the entrance of the fusing unit.
If this does not solve the problem, do Solution 2.
Solution 2
Adjust the angle of the transport belt against the fusing nip.
Mark on the black bracket: Circle (level) [A]
Effect:
-
1525
6.Troubleshooting
Side effect:
A jam may occur when feeding rough surfaced A4
paper in LEF.
1526
6.Troubleshooting
3. Open the paper transport belt unit [A], and remove the separation lever [B].
4. Adjust the position of the separation lever according to the paper type and paper size.
Symptom
There is a roller sliding noise when the roller is not smoothly rotating in the paper exit section.
1527
6.Troubleshooting
Cause
The shortage of a lubricant at the idle roller shaft of the paper exit section causes the roller sliding
noise.
Solution
3. Apply the grease (Barrierta S552R or Drysurf MDF-2400E) to the edges [B] of the shaft for the idle
rollers [A]. Apply the grease while rotating the rollers [A], so that the grease is spread over the
whole circumference of the shaft.
1528
6.Troubleshooting
5. Apply the grease (Barrierta S552R or Drysurf MDF-2400E) to the edges [B] of the shaft for the idle
rollers [A]. Apply the grease while rotating the rollers [A], so that the grease is spread over the
whole circumference of the shaft.
The correspondence table for Adjustment Settings for Operators and SP settings is as follows.
1529
6.Troubleshooting
1530
6.Troubleshooting
The correspondence table for TCRU adjustment settings and SP settings is as follows.
01 Machine Image Position
No. Item SP No.
0101 Image Position: With Feed SP1-001
0102 Image Position: Across Feed SP1-003
0107 Erase Margin: Leading Edge/Trailing Edge SP2-121
02 Machine: Image Quality
No. Item SP No.
0201 Adjust Image Density/DEMS: Image Density Adjustment: Manual Execute SP3-011
Adjust Image Density/DEMS: Execute DEMS SP3-040
0202 Image Density Adjustment Execute Interval SP3-533
0203 Maximum Image Density SP3-620
0204 Line Width SP3-623
0205 Density Difference: Across Feed SP2-113
0207 Fusing Temperature on Standby SP1-107
0208 Auto Color Selection Setting SP2-907
0209 Photoconductor Special Mode SP2-225
0210 Smooth Fusing Belt SP1-133
0211 Fusing Ability by Feed Speed SP1-135
0212 Slope for Envelope Nip Width SP1-162
0213 PCU Potential SP3-621
0214 Fusing Belt Smoothing Setting: Uneven Gloss SP1-133
03 Machine: Paper Feed/ Output
No. Item SP No.
0103 Registration Gate: Paper Buckle Amount SP1-004
0104 Registration Gate: Paper Buckle Amount: Thick Paper SP1-004
0106 Criteria for Paper Weight SP1-307
1531
6.Troubleshooting
1532
6.Troubleshooting
1533
6.Troubleshooting
1534
6.Troubleshooting
1535
6.Troubleshooting
1536
6.Troubleshooting
1537
6.Troubleshooting
1538
6.Troubleshooting
1539
6.Troubleshooting
Other 005: SC
Symptom
Unusual clattering noise is heard when a duplex job starts and the system starts to feed paper. Jam074
occurs, followed by Jam097, which occurs 3 times in succession. The system finally stops with an
SC516-02 (sensor shift motor edge detection error).
Cause
The paper size (A4 or 81/2) fixed with the end fence on the tandem tray does not match with the size
specified on the control panel.
The shift roller in the duplex unit operates according to the paper size specified on the control panel,
resulting in the above jams and SC.
Solution
1. Check the paper size fixed with the end fence on the tandem tray.
Photo below describes an example of the end fence fixed to A4 size.
2. Check the paper size specified for the tandem tray on the control panel.
3. If the sizes do not match, enter SP5-959-001; Paper Size: 1st Tray (Tandem) and specify the size
according to the paper in use.
0: A4 LEF
1: 81/2 × 11 LEF
4. Turn the main power off/on.
5. Confirm proper duplex printing to complete the procedure.
1540
6.Troubleshooting
Symptom
Solution
Procedure 1
The goal of this procedure is to verify the parts (gear, feeler, sensor, harness, motor) that may be
damaged or not connected properly, causing the SC.
1. Set the value in SP1-133-120 (Fixed Operation Time: Manual) to “1”.
2. Execute SP1-133-110 (Manual Smoothing: Exe).
3. Set the value in SP1-133-120 (Fixed Operation Time: Manual) back to “180”.
4. Check if the gear [A] rotates.
1541
6.Troubleshooting
* The top part of the fusing unit shown in this photo is gray because the unit is of the prototype.
Incorrect Correct
Cut-out [A] on the feeler is visible. Cut-out on the feeler is not visible.
Cause
• Cause 1
• Edge detection sensor shift motor defective, Sensor shift home position switch defective
• Sensors dirty
• Foreign materials interfering with the sensor shift mechanism
• Cause 2
• Duplex transport shift motor 1 defective, Duplex transport home position sensor 1 defective
• Sensors dirty
• Foreign materials interfering with the roller shift mechanism
• Cause 3
• Duplex transport shift motor 1 defective, Duplex transport home position sensor 1 defective
• Sensors dirty
• Cause 4
• The paper settings on the operation panel are not correct.
• The paper is not set in the paper feed tray correctly
• Edge detection sensor shift motor defective, Edge detection sensor defective
• Edge detection sensor dirty
• Foreign materials interfering with the sensor shift mechanism
Execute an input check for the edge detection sensor (SP5-803-166). Check whether the
value changes in the presence or absence of paper.
Action
1543
6.Troubleshooting
1544
6.Troubleshooting
1545
6.Troubleshooting
1546
6.Troubleshooting
Symptom
A J151 or J156 Jam occurs when printing out to the proof tray.
• J151: Entrance Sensor : Lag Jam
• J156: Proof Tray Exit Sensor: Late Jam
The paper jam occurs at the R3 guide plate. There is some damage at leading edge of the jammed
paper, which seems to result from being scratched by the pawls.
Cause
The J151/156 jam is caused by incorrect assembly of the proof guide plate. When the proof guide plate
is not at the correct position, the leading edge of the paper is caught by a groove between the proof
guide plate [A] and the R3 guide plate [B]. Then the paper jam occurs.
Solution
Check whether the proof guide plate, which is integrated with the upper cover, is at the correct position.
Check that the screw of the proof guide plate is fixed at the center of the slotted hole.
1547
6.Troubleshooting
• [A]: OK
• [B]: NG
If the screw is not fixed at the center of the slotted hole, remove the three screws shown below. Then
fasten the screws in the order of , , .
• If you remove the proof guide plate for maintenance, make sure that the proof guide plate is at
the correct position as described above after installing it.
• Do not modify the magnetic part [B] of the R3 guide plate [A]. If you modify the magnetic part
1548
6.Troubleshooting
[B], the R3 guide plate cannot go back to the correct position. Then the paper jam could occur.
1. Moving the upper limit position downwards (When there is a double feed or non feed caused by a
double feed)
The paper is separated when feeding the paper.
2. Moving the upper limit position upwards (When a non-feed occurs)
The resistance to paper feed can be decreased.
Adjustment Procedure
1549
6.Troubleshooting
3. Remove the TCRU/ORU screw and adjust the upper limit sensor bracket [A].
1550
6.Troubleshooting
When the upper limit sensor bracket [D] is moved 0.5 mm in the direction of the red arrow from the
position where the upper limit sensor was installed, the upper limit position moves 0.8 mm
upwards.
After adjusting the upper limit sensor bracket, a paper feed error can occur depending on the type of
paper.
• When the upper limit sensor has been moved downwards: Non-feed can occur.
• When the upper limit sensor has been move upwards: Double feed can occur.
If a paper feed error occurs, install the upper limit sensor bracket [B] so that the top of the bracket is
flush with the long graduation mark [A] as shown below.
1. Moving the upper limit position downwards (When there is a double feed or non feed caused by a
double feed)
The paper is separated when feeding the paper.
2. Moving the upper limit position upwards (When a non-feed occurs)
The resistance to paper feed can be decreased.
1551
6.Troubleshooting
Adjustment Procedure
• The tray weighs 25 kg empty. To prevent damage to the tray and personal injury, never attempt
to lift the tray alone. The tray must be lifted by two or more persons.
1. Pull the tray [A] out of the LCT until it stops.
2. Remove the screws from the right rail [B].
3. Remove the screws from the left rail [C].
4. Lift and remove the tray [A].
• You do not need to remove the screw for the stopper pin bracket at the back of the left rail.
5. Open the front door [A], and then remove the inner cover [B].
1552
6.Troubleshooting
6. Pull out the paper feed unit [A], and then remove the screw [B].
8. Remove the TCRU/ORU screw and adjust the upper limit sensor bracket [A].
1553
6.Troubleshooting
sensor was installed, the upper limit position moves 0.8 mm downwards.
After adjusting the upper limit sensor bracket, a paper feed error can occur depending on the type of
paper.
• When the upper limit sensor has been moved downwards: A non-feed can occur.
• When the upper limit sensor has been move upwards: A double feed can occur.
If a paper feed error occurs, install the upper limit sensor bracket [B] so that the bracket is positioned as
shown below, with relation to the long graduation mark in the center of the scale, and the blue mark [A].
1554
6.Troubleshooting
1555
7.Detailed Descriptions
7. Detailed Descriptions
1556
7.Detailed Descriptions
1559
7.Detailed Descriptions
Product Overview
Component Layout
Component Layout
Paper Paths
1561
7.Detailed Descriptions
Drive Layout
Front Side
1562
7.Detailed Descriptions
Rear Side
1563
7.Detailed Descriptions
Electrical Components
Scanner Unit
1564
7.Detailed Descriptions
Laser Unit
1565
7.Detailed Descriptions
PCDU
1566
7.Detailed Descriptions
1567
7.Detailed Descriptions
1568
7.Detailed Descriptions
1569
7.Detailed Descriptions
1570
7.Detailed Descriptions
1571
7.Detailed Descriptions
Drawer Unit
Drawer Unit 1
1572
7.Detailed Descriptions
Drawer Unit 2
Drawer Unit 3
1573
7.Detailed Descriptions
Fusing Unit
1574
7.Detailed Descriptions
Drive Unit
Drive Unit 1
Drive Unit 2
Drive Unit 3
1577
7.Detailed Descriptions
Fans
Fans 1
1578
7.Detailed Descriptions
Fans 2
1579
7.Detailed Descriptions
Main Boards
Main Boards 1
1580
7.Detailed Descriptions
Main Boards 2
1581
7.Detailed Descriptions
ADF
Mechanism Descriptions
General Specifications
1582
7.Detailed Descriptions
Paper Thickness 35kg 40kg 45kg 55kg 70kg 90kg 110kg Tracing
paper
40.7 46.5 52.8 64 81.4 105 128
g/m2 g/m2 g/m2 g/m2 g/m2 g/m2 g/m2
11lbs 12.5lbs 14lbs 17lbs 22lbs 28lbs 34lbs TA, TE,
TC
Quantity 250 Sheets 250 Sheets 220 60 50 1 Sheet
Sheets Sheets Sheets
Original A3/A4 ○ ● ● ● ● ▲
Size A5 ○ ● ● ● ● -
B4/B5 ○ ● ● ● ● ▲
B6P - ○ ○ ○ ○ -
DLT ○ ● ● ● ● -
LT ○ ● ● ● ● -
HLT ○ ● ● ● ● -
F ○ ● ● ● ● -
●: Possible in simplex and duplex
○: Simplex only
▲: SADF Simplex only
-: Not supported
Component Layout
1583
7.Detailed Descriptions
Sensor
6 Original Length Sensors 18 Pre-Scanning Entrance
(A4 LEF/LT LEF Sensor, B5 Width Sensor, A4 Width Sensor, Roller
LG Width Sensor)
7 Exit Tray 19 Interval Sensor
8 Lift-Up Sensor 20 Original Width Sensor 1
to 5
9 Bottom Plate HP Sensor 21 Skew Correction Sensor
10 Exposure Glass (Book Mode) 22 Separation Sensor
11 Exit Roller 23 ADF Separation Roller
12 White Roller
1. Original Pickup
The pick-up roller feeds the original in from the tray.
2. Original Feed and Separation
With the feed belt and the ADF separation roller, pages of the original are fed and separated.
3. Original Size Detection
Five original width sensors and four original length sensors detect the size.
4. Duplex Original Scanning
A CCD (inside the scanner unit, below the ADF) scans the front side, and a CIS (inside the ADF)
scans the back side.
Drive Components
The rollers in the ADF are driven by the following seven motors.
Mechanism Details
Original Pick-up
Original Detection
When an original is placed on the original tray correctly, the leading edge of the original pushes up the
feeler of the original set sensor.
When no original is placed, the pick-up roller [C] is in the upper position (released). When the original
set sensor detects an original, the ADF pick-up roller lift motor [A] turns ON. When the lift cam [E]
releases the pick-up lever [D], the pick-up roller [C] moves down. To lift the pick-up roller [C] away from
the paper, the ADF pick-up roller lift motor [A] turns on until the bottom plate position sensor [B] turns
off. Then the ADF pick-up roller lift motor [A] turns off.
1585
7.Detailed Descriptions
When the original set sensor detects that an original has just been placed, the pick-up roller drops (the
pick-up roller HP sensor turns off), then the ADF bottom plate lift motor [A] turns ON, and the lift lever
[B] lifts the bottom plate. The bottom plate HP sensor [C] (on the pick-up roller holder) detects when the
bottom plate is at the correct position for original feed, and the ADF bottom plate lift motor [A] stops.
When the bottom plate HP sensor [C] turns off during original feed, the ADF bottom plate lift motor [A]
turns on until the bottom plate HP sensor [C] turns on again. This mechanism ensures that the top of
the original is always at the correct height for feed, even when the maximum number of sheets [220
sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lbs)] is stacked in the original tray.
At the end of a job, the ADF bottom plate lift motor moves the bottom plate down until the bottom plate
HP sensor detects it.
Skew Correction
The skew correction sensor [B] detects the leading edge of the original after it passes through the
separation area. When the leading edge reaches the entrance roller [C], the original is fed a bit more so
that it bumps into the entrance roller [C], to make slack for skew adjustment.
For small paper (B6, A5, B5, HLT) or duplex printing, after detection by the interval sensor [E], the
original bumps into the pre-scanning entrance roller [D] (this is a second skew correction, in addition to
the entrance roller).
1586
7.Detailed Descriptions
Five original width sensors detect the width of the original just when the leading edge of the original
passes the interval sensor. Four original length sensors on the original table detect the length. These
two pieces of size information summarize the original size.
1587
7.Detailed Descriptions
1 Original Length Sensor (A4 LEF/LT LEF Sensor) 6 Original Width Sensor 4
2 Original Length Sensor (B5 Width Sensor) 7 Original Width Sensor 3
3 Original Length Sensor (A4 Width Sensor) 8 Original Width Sensor 2
4 Original Length Sensor (LG Width Sensor) 9 Original Width Sensor 1
5 Original Width Sensor 5
When the machine signals the ADF to start feeding, the ADF feed motor [A] drives the pick-up roller [C],
the feed belt [B], and the ADF separation roller [D], and these rollers feed the original.
This machine uses the FRR method as the separation mechanism, with a feed belt [B] and ADF
1588
7.Detailed Descriptions
After skew correction at the entrance roller, the ADF entrance motor [A] and the ADF transport motor [B]
drive the ADF entrance roller [C] and relay roller [D] to feed the original towards the exposure glass.
When the interval sensor [A] detects the original, the ADF scanning motor [B] drives the pre-scanning
entrance roller [C], scanning relay roller [D], white roller [E], and ADF transport roller [F] in order to pass
the original through the scanning area. (L: Original Registration Sensor)
1589
7.Detailed Descriptions
After the pre-scanning entrance roller starts to rotate, the ADF entrance motor drives faster to make
the space smaller between the former sheet (on the scanner) and the next sheet. However, if the
sheet reaches the pre-scanning entrance roller [C] at this speed, original buckle may occur due to the
disparity of roller rotation speeds. So when the interval sensor [A] detects the leading edge, original
transport speed slows down so that the roller speeds match when the leading edge of the original
reaches the pre-scanning entrance roller [C].
The ADF exit motor [B] drives the exit roller [C] to send original out to the exit tray when the original exit
sensor [A] detects the original.
Duplex Scanning
A CIS (Contact Image Sensor) [A] enables the machine to scan both faces of an original at once.
The front side of the original is scanned by the scanner unit (LED) [C] and the back side of the original
1590
7.Detailed Descriptions
A: CIS
B: White Roller
C: Scanner Unit (LED)
D: White Plate
Jam Detection
1591
7.Detailed Descriptions
1592
7.Detailed Descriptions
List 2
A4 LEF/LT LEF Sensor B5 Width Sensor A4 Width Sensor LG Width Sensor Standard Value
Not detected Not detected Not detected Not detected 226.8
Detected Not detected Not detected Not detected 253.8
- Detected Not detected Not detected 291
- - Detected Not detected 320
- - - Detected 432
Abnormal Detection
1593
7.Detailed Descriptions
1595
7.Detailed Descriptions
Scanner
Mechanism Descriptions
Component Layout
Light from the scanner LED passes to the sensor through the following route:
1st Mirror > 2nd Mirror > 3rd Mirror > Lens Block > Sensor (SBU)
Overview
Mechanism Details
Scanner
Light from the LED lamps [A] passes to the sensor on the SBU board through the following route:
1st Mirror [B] > 2nd Mirror > 3rd Mirror > Lens Block > Sensor
1596
7.Detailed Descriptions
• LED Lamp
LED lamps consume less power and provide better light at start-up so this machine employs LED
lamps instead of xenon lamps. The power consumption is 30% of xenon lamps. To obtain the
optimum light quantity, LED lamps are installed at an angle.
• Sensor
The sensor collects the light that was reflected from the original and converts it to three color digital
signals (R, G, B).
The resolution of this CMOS sensor is 600dpi.
• Shading Adjustment
A white plate for shading adjustment [A] is attached to the back of the scale [B]. Just after the
power switch is turned on, the machine performs shading adjustment, during which the scanner
unit moves to the white plate to emit LED light onto it in order to perform lamp modulation.
For normal (book mode) scanning, the machine performs shading every page regardless of BW or
color.
For ADF scanning, the machine performs shading before the 1st sheet of the original is scanned
regardless of BW or color, and then after that the machine performs shading for following sheets at
regular intervals (one minute or more).
Drive
The scanner unit is driven with scanner wires [D] which are driven by the scanner drive motor [E].
Scanning is done with one run from left to right.
1597
7.Detailed Descriptions
Scanner position control (for the 1st carriage [A]) uses the scanner home position sensor [B] as a
reference point. The scanner home position sensor is near the scan area of the ADF exposure glass.
Two reflective sensors [B] are used to detect the original length. The original width is detected by a 3-
point pre-scan using the CCD.
The DF position sensor [A] is detecting the open/closed state of the ADF. The original length is
determined when the sensor state changes from “not interrupted” to “interrupted” (when the ADF is
closed). Then the machine starts pre-scanning. If the sensor state stays “not interrupted“, the detected
data, that is read just after [Start] is pressed, is used as original length.
1598
7.Detailed Descriptions
The original sensor states depending on original size can be seen with “SP4-301-001”.
The display in “SP4-301-001” varies as shown below.
Smaller paper than B5 cannot be detected because of the location of the sensors; the display shows
“00000000” for all these sizes.
1600
7.Detailed Descriptions
There is a difference between MPC6503SP / C8003SP and Pro C5200S / C5210S in the method of
original transport from the ADF.
MP C6503SP / C8003SP Pro C5200S / C5210S
Transport Non-contact Transport Contact Transport
Method
Descriptions
Because of the film attached to the While passing, the original contacts the
glass, the original does not contact the glass.
glass.
Merit Sticky material does not normally Stripes in images caused by dust on the
transfer from the surface of the glass are rare, because the glass is
originals to the surface of the glass. cleaned by contact with the original as it
passes over the glass.
Demerit Compared with the contact method, More often than in the non-contact method,
dust is more likely to remain in the stripes in the image occur due to foreign
original feed path, and this causes substances that stick to the surface of an
stripes in the image. original and transfer to the exposure glass.
Aim To improve prevention of stripes on Comparing to users of machines for office
images caused by sticky foreign use, users of this machine tend not to use
substances on the surfaces of originals that have sticky substances on the
originals that transfer to the exposure surface. For the main users of this
glass. machine, it’s more important to improve
prevention of stripes on images caused by
dust in the original feed path.
Note 1. Be sure to replace the sheet- -
through glass with the film
attached to the glass.
2. When you attach the film to the
glass, you need to keep the left
scale attached to the glass in
order to ensure the correct
location of the film.
(ADF Exposure Glass, Gap Sheet
(MP C6503/C8003))
3. You can change the method
1601
7.Detailed Descriptions
Dust Detection
• General
After an original is placed in the ADF and the [Start] key is pressed, dust detection starts.
The machine checks for dust on the ADF exposure glass before the first original of a job is fed by
the ADF.
The operation flow varies depending on the SP mode setting.
• Related SP codes
SP4020-001: DF dust detection setting / Detection on/off setting (default “0” = “off”)
SP4020-002: DF dust detection setting / Detection level switch setting
SP4020-003: DF dust detection setting / Adjustment level switch setting
SP7852-001: DF contact glass / Dust detection counter
SP7852-002: DF contact glass / Dust clear counter
1602
7.Detailed Descriptions
When dust detection determines that dust exists, the scan point shifts in order to avoid the dust. There
are three scanning points; one is HP (Default), the others are 0.52 mm to the right (=b) from the HP and
0.52 mm to the left (=c) from the HP. The shift is always in the following order: "a > b > c > a > b".
Anti-Condensation Heater
Under low temperature conditions, optical parts (mirrors) may become moistened. This will cause
“image deletion”, “black out image”, and “gray image”. As a countermeasure against these problems,
1603
7.Detailed Descriptions
A Anti-condensation heater
1604
7.Detailed Descriptions
Laser Unit
Mechanism Descriptions
This machine has two laser units (right: C, K / left: Y, M). Writing is done with a polygon motor, a LD
board, and four synchronization detectors (front / back).
Component Layout
1605
7.Detailed Descriptions
1. LD Board
2. ND Filter
3. PBS
4. Quarter Wave Plate
5. Cylindrical Lens
6. Soundproof Glass
7. Polygon Mirror
8. Laser Synchronization Detector (K) [Front edge]
9. Skew Correction Motor (K)
10. Thermistor
11. Skew Correction Motor (C)
12. Skew Correction Motor (M)
13. Skew Correction Motor (Y)
14. Laser Synchronization Detector (Y) [Rear edge]
Mechanism Details
LD Unit Components
The VCSEL (Vertical Cavity Surface Emitting Laser) method is adopted in this machine, as in the
ProC751 series, but the components are different.
In the ProC751 series, there are VCSELs for each color and hexagonal polygon mirrors. But this
machine has two VCSELs (one for K/C and one for M/Y) [B] and two four-sided double-layered polygon
mirrors [A].
1606
7.Detailed Descriptions
This machine uses VCSEL technology as ProC751 does, and realizes a high image quality (approx.
4800dpi x 4800dpi). But the components and the control method are different from those of the
ProC751.
The polygon mirrors [C] of this machine are smaller than those of the ProC751 series. But this machine
realizes not only the same image quality as the ProC751 series, but also a cost reduction because only
two VCSELs are enough.
There is no shutter in the laser unit for K and C, unlike the previous models in this series (MP
C6502/C8002, Pro C5100S/C5110S).
In the ProC751EX, each VCSEL emits a beam for one color. While in this machine, with the PBS, one
VCSEL can emit a beam for two colors.
In this machine, VCSEL emits beams alternately (K > C > K > C). A beam from VCSEL is divided into
two beams with the PBS. One of the beams is used for K and heads to the upper polygon mirror; the
other beam is used for C and heads to the lower polygon mirror. When the K beam heads to the drum,
the C beam does not head to the drum because there are differences in reflective-surface directions
between the upper polygon mirror and the lower polygon mirror. Likewise, the K beam doesn’t head to
the drum when the C beam heads to the drum.
In the ProC751EX, each color has a separate VCSEL unit, but each polygon mirror handles two colors.
Beams arriving at one side of the mirror are sent to one PCU, and the beams arriving at the other side
of the mirror are sent to another PCU.
In this machine, each VCSEL unit handles two colors. Instead of just one polygon mirror for two colors,
1607
7.Detailed Descriptions
there is a stack of two mirrors (one mirror for each color). The PBS just after the exit from the VCSEL
unit sends some beams to the top mirror and some to the bottom one.
Pro C751EX
1608
7.Detailed Descriptions
LD Safety Switch
1 Toner Supply Unit Front Cover Switch 4 Vertical Transport Door Set Switch
2 Toner Supply Unit Safety Switch 1/2 (Pro 5 Faceplate Set Sensor (Pro
C5200S/C5210S only) C5200S/C5210S only)
3 Drawer Set Sensor 1/2
The LD safety switches prevent laser beams from being emitted when any of the following parts are
open or not installed: bypass tray unit, vertical transport door, drawer unit cover, toner supply unit front
1609
7.Detailed Descriptions
Line Scan
• Mirror / Lens
Each color LD board [A] emits light at the time of paper transfer, which heads to each color drum
through the following parts; the cylinder lens (laser beam radial-adjustment), the polygon mirror
(horizontal-line scan) [D], the scan lens (L1) [C], the 1st mirror [B], the scan lens (L2) [K], 2nd
mirror [J], 3rd mirror [G], the laser synchronization mirror [I], the dust shield glass [H].
Lower layer (C, Y) beams go to each color drum through the following parts: the cylinder lens,
polygon mirror [E], the scan lens (L1) [L], the scan lens (L2) [P], the 1st mirror [O], the
synchronization mirror [N], the dust shield glass [M].
• Polygon Motor
1610
7.Detailed Descriptions
The polygon motor [F] is composed of a motor and two mirrors attached on a drive shaft (four-
sided double-layered mirrors). Laser beams are emitted to the polygon mirrors [D], [E] to write two
colors alternately.
Thermal Control
The laser unit thermistor [A] in each laser unit monitors the temperature of each laser unit constantly.
This sensor has the following role:
• Image location adjustment (adjusts the image location in response to changes in the internal
temperature).
A fan [B] is installed at the back of the LD in order to cool each laser unit.
1611
7.Detailed Descriptions
1612
7.Detailed Descriptions
Toner Supply
Mechanism Descriptions
The toner in the toner cartridge [A], that is installed in the toner supply unit, is transferred to the sub
hopper unit [B]. The toner transferred to the sub hopper unit [B] is provided to the development unit [C]
in the required quantity. Then the toner is mixed into the developer, and provided to the surface of the
drum.
Component Layout
One of the differences is the shape of the toner supply units as shown below. The shape of the toner
supply units are different because the machine dimensions are different between MP C6503/C8003 and
Pro C5200S/C5210S.
[A]: MP C6503/C8003
[B]: Pro C5200S/C5210S
Note: For MP C6503/C8003, the toner supply unit for black is larger because the toner consumption for
black is greater than for other colors.
The other difference is the number of the unit’s agitators for black. MP C6503/C8003 has two agitators
while Pro C5200S/C5210S has one agitator as shown below:
[A]: MP C6503/C8003
[B]: Pro C5200S/C5210S
1614
7.Detailed Descriptions
Arrows in the picture below show the differences for each color.
Pro C5200S/C5210S
MP C6503/C8003
1615
7.Detailed Descriptions
Mechanism Details
Toner Filling
Toner filling means sending toner from the toner cartridge to the sub hopper.
The following pages contain descriptions of the toner filling mechanisms.
When a toner cartridge [A] is placed, the shutter [C] on the cartridge opens and then the toner transport
port [B] also opens. When a toner cartridge [A] is removed, the shutter [C] on the cartridge closes and
the toner transport port [B] also closes.
1616
7.Detailed Descriptions
Each toner cartridge has a toner supply motor [D] that drives the agitator [E] and toner transport coils
[F].
1617
7.Detailed Descriptions
Sub Hopper
Toner filling takes place only when the ID chip and the interlock switch turn on.
- Sensor states and toner filling operations when a toner cartridge is replaced -
Bottle Replacement Procedure ID Chip Interlock Supply Operation
Toner cartridge is placed ON ON Driven
Toner cartridge replacement starts ON OFF Not driven
After toner cartridge is removed OFF OFF Not driven
(No toner cartridge is placed)
During a toner cartridge replacement OFF OFF Not driven
-->ON
Replacement is completed ON ON Driven
Toner Supply
Toner supply means sending toner from the sub hopper to the development unit.
1618
7.Detailed Descriptions
For each color, the sub hopper motor (stepping motor) [A] controls toner supply to the development
unit. When the TD sensor in the development unit detects that toner is needed, the sub hopper motor
turns on.
The two larger coils [B] drive and agitate toner that arrives from the toner cartridge.
1619
7.Detailed Descriptions
There are four remaining-toner states in this machine. This is almost the same as for the ProC751EX
series.
Remaining- Descriptions
toner State
1. Sufficient Sufficient toner exists in the toner cartridge.
Toner The amount is estimated from the pixel count executed during the cartridge life.
2. Pre Toner When the amount of toner estimated from the pixel count drops to a certain value
Near-end (SP3110-011 to 014; Default = 10), the machine warns the user that the toner
cartridge will be empty soon and a new one should be prepared.
This function can be disabled with SP3-110-001. The default is '0: On'.
This function enables an earlier notification before replacement is needed.
”Toner runs out soon. Prepare a toner bottle for replacement.” will be shown as a
banner message.
3. Toner Near- The toner end sensor could not detect toner arriving from the toner cartridge.
end Remaining toner (%) in the bottle is zero. But there is toner in the sub-hopper. 400
sheets (A4/5% chart) can be printed with this toner after toner near end occurs.
Toner remains only in the sub hopper.
”The toner cartridge is empty. The machine will soon stop printing. Replace toner
cartridge” is displayed as a banner message. You can replace the cartridge while
the machine is operating.
4. Toner End Either 400 sheets was printed since toner near-end, or the estimated pixel count
1620
7.Detailed Descriptions
Remaining- Descriptions
toner State
indicates toner end, whichever comes first.
The machine stops and tells the user to replace the cartridge.
Here is a flow diagram of the toner end / near-end states, with explanations.
Flow Diagram Remarks
1. Toner
Full
2. Pre Prerequisite: Toner full
Toner Switch enabled/disabled In SP3110-001 [0:ON /
Near-end 1:OFF]
Set the threshold in SP3110-011~014 [Default:
10%]
The toner cartridge has an ID chip [A] in which toner cartridge information is stored. ID chip information
is read at the terminal (ID chip connector board) [B].
The ID chip helps to detect the toner cartridge placement. ID chip information includes the amount of
toner filling, which is used to control toner end detection. The information also includes which factory
produced the toner, toner type, and toner color.
1621
7.Detailed Descriptions
1622
7.Detailed Descriptions
Drawer Unit
Mechanism Descriptions
The registration unit, the paper transfer belt unit, and the fusing unit are installed in the drawer unit.
This machine does not have a front cover like other series of machines have. To access the inner units
of this machine, you must insert your hand into the flapper to pull the drawer unit out.
This machine has a lock mechanism that prevents paper from ripping when the drawer unit is pulled
out.
Component Layout
Name
A Drawer Unit Lock Shaft
B Drawer Unit Lock Motor
C Drawer Unit Flapper Sensor
D Drawer Unit Flapper
1623
7.Detailed Descriptions
Name
A Curled Cord Guide
B Drawer Unit Lock Shaft (End)
C Drawer Unit Lock Sensor
Mechanism Details
Lock Mechanism
This machine controls the drawer unit lock automatically. It also allows the locked drawer unit to open
when it is necessary, in order to let users open doors in the correct order, to remove jammed paper
without tearing it. The drawer unit lock motor also controls the paper transfer belt release mechanism,
so that the paper transfer belt is always released when the drawer unit is ready to be opened.
1624
7.Detailed Descriptions
• When the drawer unit flapper [A] is pushed in and the drawer unit flapper sensor [B] detects it.
• When a jam has occurred and the LED on the drawer unit blinks.
• When the main power is OFF.
• When a cover is open.
Even if a condition described above is met, the lock is not released when the machine is in sleep mode.
If you want to release the lock, you must make the machine return from sleep mode by doing the
following operation.
• Pro C5200S/C5210S: Press the [Energy Saver] key.
• MP C6503/C8003: Touch the operation panel screen.
The LED on the drawer unit blinks when the drawer unit can be pulled out without ripping jammed
paper.
1625
7.Detailed Descriptions
1. The drawer unit lock motor [A] rotates the drawer unit lock shaft [B].
Lock Operation
2. The drawer set sensor 1 [A] detects the tab [B] on the rear of the drawer unit.
3. The drawer unit lock motor [A] turns on and the drawer unit lock shaft [B] rotates.
4. The drawer unit lock shaft [A] starts to rotate clockwise from the lock release position.
5. When the drawer unit lock sensor [C] detects the edge of the actuator [D], the drawer unit lock
1627
7.Detailed Descriptions
motor stops. The end of drawer unit lock shaft [B] is held by the holder. The drawer unit is locked.
When a paper jam occurs, the drawer unit is locked to prevent jammed paper from being ripped. The
lock is released and the drawer unit can be pulled out after the paper sticking out from the drawer unit is
removed. Also, only in the case of a paper jam, the drawer unit is pushed out 10 mm from the machine
and the drawer unit LED blinks when the lock is released. The drawer unit push mechanism is done by
changing the direction of drawer unit lock shaft rotation.
The holder [B] which locks the end of the drawer unit lock shaft [A] is sloped.
When the drawer unit lock shaft [C] rotates clockwise from the lock position (the end of the drawer unit
lock shaft [A] is held by the holder), it climbs up the slope. Then it is released from the holder and the
drawer unit is pushed out from the machine.
1628
7.Detailed Descriptions
The set condition of the drawer unit is detected by the drawer set sensor 1 [A] and the drawer set
sensor 2 [B]. The set condition is detected when the actuator blocks the light.
The drawer set sensor 2 [B] detects when the drawer unit is pulled out completely. This is used to
control the jam animation when there is jammed paper. The actuator of drawer set sensor 2 [B] is longer
than that of drawer set sensor 1 [A]. The combination of signals from these sensors determines the
condition of the drawer unit (locked/half open/fully open).
1629
7.Detailed Descriptions
There are two states of the drawer unit. The state of the unit varies depending on the machine state.
1. Not Withdrawable
Machine State Remarks
Output Including application output / fax
output at night
Correcting, or Warming-up, Process Control,
Self-adjusting MUSIC, Toner Recovery, Web
Cleaning
Sleep mode The machine is in sleep mode and The drawer unit can be withdrawn
the operation panel display is off. after returning from sleep mode
Forced Power off Forced shutdown due to blackout / Reboot allows you to withdraw the
disconnection, or pressing and drawer unit
holding the power button
SC Issued SC670 / SC672 occurs
*Straddling Jam The drawer unit can be withdrawn
after jammed paper is removed from
vertical transport / bypass tray unit /
purge unit.
Defective Drawer Cannot release the drawer unit lock To solve this problem, you need to
Unit Lock-related correctly. SC525 occurs due to a remove some covers and the
Parts problem with the drawer unit lock drawer unit lock motor to release the
motor. lock manually.
1630
7.Detailed Descriptions
Electrical Supply
The curled cord [B] supplies electrical power (5V, 24V) to the drawer unit. The curled cord guide [A]
1631
7.Detailed Descriptions
holds the curled cord [B], which expands and contracts when the drawer unit is pulled out and pushed
in.
1632
7.Detailed Descriptions
PCDU
Mechanism Descriptions
This machine uses four photoconductor units (PCDUs) in tandem (one PCDU for each color YMCK).
The PCDU is composed of the drum unit [D], the development unit [A], the drum cleaning unit [C], and
the charge roller unit [B]. Each color PCDU can be drawn out of the machine.
In MP C6503/C8003, the parts in each color PCDU are exactly the same (a drum unit [D], a
development unit [A], a drum cleaning unit [C], and a charge roller unit [B]) in order to minimize the cost
of parts. In Pro C5200S/C5210S, the parts in the development unit [A] for K are different from the parts
for YMC.
Component Layout
Mechanism Details
Charge
Charge, Discharge
The charge roller [A] evenly charges the drum for each color. The potential sensor [D] measures the
charge on the surface of the drum. After transfer and before cleaning, LED emission from the
quenching lamp [B] discharges the surface of the drum [C].
The charge roller [B] applies charge to the drum. The charge roller [B] is separated slightly from the
drum surface and rotates in the opposite direction to the drum. The combined high-voltage power
supply board supplies the charge roller shaft with the charge that is applied to the drum.
Uneven charge can occur if the charge roller [B] is dirty. The charge roller cleaning roller [A] cleans the
charge roller to prevent this.
The charge roller cleaning roller [A] rotates in the opposite direction to the charge roller [B] in order to
clean the surface of the charge roller.
1634
7.Detailed Descriptions
The charge roller cleaning roller [A] is usually separated from the charge roller [B]. When the charge
roller [B] needs to be cleaned (such as between the sheets after the charge roller rotates in a certain
distance), the charge roller cleaning roller [A] comes into contact with the charge roller [B]. The charge
roller cleaning roller [A] is lifted by the actuator arm [C] when it is separated from the charge roller [B].
When the charge roller [B] needs to be cleaned, the charge roller cleaning roller solenoid [D] turns ON
to compress the spring of the actuation arm. Then the charge roller cleaning roller [A] comes into
contact with the charge roller [B].
Although the cleaning may be performed automatically at a specified number of pages, it can also be
performed manually by executing SP2-222-001 (Chg Roll Cleaning: Execute all).
PCDU Drive
Each PCDU has two motors. The drum motor drives drum and the development motor drives
development unit. For details about development drive, see Development Unit Drive.
Each color drum has a drum motor [A], and the drum is driven by the drum motor through gears. The
development unit has a different motor, to remove fluctuations in load in order to improve the precision
of color registration.
Two encoder sensors [C] monitor the rotation of the encoder wheel [B] and the signals are fed back to
the drum motor to control the motor speed.
Only Pro C5200S/C5210S has the drum home position sensor [D] which detects drum home position
using an actuator.
1635
7.Detailed Descriptions
Drum Cleaning
The lubricant brush roller [A] and the primary [C] and secondary [B] toner collection coils are driven by
the drum cleaning motor through gears.
A counter blade method is adopted for the lubricant blade [D] and the drum cleaning blade [E]. The
lubricant brush roller [A] rotates in the same direction as the OPC drum in order to lubricate the drum
surface. The lubricant blade [D] keeps lubricant on the surface flat.
Waste toner that is collected with the drum cleaning blade [E] and lubricant are sent to the used toner
transport area by the primary toner collection coil [C].
Lubricant and used toner are sent to the rear side and expelled. The vibration plate prevents the
lubricant from clumping together (which can lead to the exit clogging). This vibration plate shifts up and
down in accordance with the rotation of the secondary toner collection coil [B] and prevents the exit
from clogging.
1636
7.Detailed Descriptions
PPG-Drive
The drum motors in this machine use the planetary gear reduction mechanism (PPG-Drive: Precision
Planetary Gear Drive), and they are more compact and cost less. With FB/FF Control (Feed-
Back/Feed-Forward Control) which accurately suppress the speed variations, the rotation accuracy of
PPG-Drive is almost the same level as earlier models, such as Pro C751EX/Pro C651EX.
This means that this machine is more cost effective, but almost as accurate as the earlier models.
This machine has a detection mechanism for lubricant end in the drum cleaning unit, in order to prevent
the drum cleaning unit from deteriorating due to lubricant depletion.
Lubricant End Detection Details
State Descriptions
Lubricant At each end of the lubricant bar, there is a near-end detection mechanism. As lubricant
Near-end is consumed gradually, a tab in the lubricant holder shifts. When lubricant decreases to
a certain amount, the tab touches the feeler and near-end is detected. When either of
the lubricant end sensors is triggered, a "Near End" alert message is displayed. The
machine can still be used, but a drum rotation counter begins.
Lubricant At 12 km of drum rotation after near-end detection, an "End" alert message is
End displayed. At this time, the machine stops and cannot be used until the lubricant bar is
replaced. This corresponds to about 25.3k sheets (Black) / 22 sheets (Full Color) for
MP C6503/C8003 (5P/J), or about 30.2k sheets (Black) / 29.9 sheets (Full Color) for
Pro C5200S/C5210S (25P/J).
Lubricant End Detection Details
Lubrication end detectors [A] are on the rear of the lubricant blade on the upper side of the drum
cleaning unit.
Two harnesses [A] from each lubrication end detector are connected to the drum cleaning unit. The
drum cleaning unit is connected to the main machine with four harnesses. The harnesses of each
1637
7.Detailed Descriptions
detector come from electrode plate A [B] and electrode plate B [C] within each detector.
In the Pro C5200S/C5210S, DEMS (Development Electric-field Modulation System) reduces banding
and color unevenness which result from the change of distance between the drum and the development
roller.
Small eccentricities in the rotation of the drum, charge roller, and development roller cause variations in
charge on the drum, and this causes uneven image density. To correct for this, the machine monitors
the image density as the drum, charge roller, and development roller rotate. To do this, the machine
makes a pattern, while monitoring the angle of rotation of the drum and development roller (using the
drum home position sensor and development roller home position sensor). The ID sensor above the
ITB monitors variations in density of the pattern. Then, during image creation, development bias and
charge voltage are adjusted for different phases of drum and development roller rotation, based on the
ID sensor. The amount of toner is adjusted and color unevenness is reduced. Because this works for
periodical eccentricities of both the drum and the development roller, it reduces banding at 190-mm
intervals (drum) and banding at 53-mm intervals (development roller).
1638
7.Detailed Descriptions
Descriptions
A Arithmetic Processing
• Average Processing
• AC/DC Detection
• Toner Attached Amount <--> Voltage Conversion
1639
7.Detailed Descriptions
Development Unit
Mechanism Descriptions
Component Layout
Mechanism Details
To keep image density steady, this machine adopts a development system where toner is mixed with a
certain amount of developer before writing and then used developer is replaced by new developer while
operating.
1640
7.Detailed Descriptions
• With the conventional two-component developer, image quality varies gradually as the carrier
ages, and periodical developer replacement is essential to recover image quality. This has
resulted in short replacement intervals and change in image quality each time the developer is
replaced.
• The toner supply method used in this machine prevents carrier degradation in the developer
unit by including a small amount of carrier in the toner bottle and using this to gradually
replace the developer in the development unit. This also helps to keep the developer in good
condition longer and to stabilize image quality. Toner contains some developer (the same
proportion for all colors).
Agitation Method
The development motor [F] drives the development sleeve [C], the three transport augers [B] [D] [E],
and the developer collection coil [A] through couplings.
Each color development unit has a development motor [F] that drives each of the units.
1641
7.Detailed Descriptions
Pro C5200S/C5210S has the development roller home position sensor [A] to counteract banding
(DEMS). The number of teeth of the gears [B] for K is different from Y/M/C in Pro C5210S/C5200S.
Development Bias
Development bias is applied from the combined high-voltage power supply board to the development
sleeve shaft [A].
1642
7.Detailed Descriptions
For MP C6503/C8003, the toner is developed by applying the DC bias as in previous models.
For Pro C5200S/C5210S, the development method differs depending on the colors. For K , the toner is
developed by applying the DC bias in the same way as MP C6503/C8003.
For Y/M/C colors, the toner is developed with the RP (Return Pulse) development method. The toner on
the surface of the drum is made level by applying the return bias as shown below, so that the
color/density unevenness problem, which appears at the same interval as the drum circumference, is
improved.
Toner Density
The TD sensor [B] installed below the left transport auger [A] detects the density of the developer
mixture.
1643
7.Detailed Descriptions
Developer Turnover
In this pre-mixed development system, toner and developer are supplied to the development unit.
If too much developer is supplied to the development unit, the extra amount of developer is discharged
from the rear.
The cam [C] attached to the shaft of the upper transport auger [B] moves the lever [D] in order to rotate
the developer collection coil [A] that discharges developer.
Dust Collection
The spill duct [A] and the toner catcher [B] prevent toner scattering and developer leaks. The spill duct
has holes that take scattered toner in with a fan ([F] in the drawing for the next section). The toner
catcher under the spill duct receives scattered toner that cannot be taken in by the duct. The toner
catcher must be cleaned every 300K.
1644
7.Detailed Descriptions
Ventilation
To remove dust and ozone from air going through the charge roller unit and expel it from the machine,
the development intake fan [F] on the front of each PCDU blows air in, and the development exhaust
fan (left) [A], the development exhaust fan (right) [C], and the ozone exhaust fan [G] expel it. The ozone
exhaust fan [G] has a dust filter [D] and an ozone filter [E], and the development exhaust fan (left) [A]
and the development exhaust fan (right) [C] have a dust filter [B].
1645
7.Detailed Descriptions
[1] Air drawn to the development exhaust fan (left) [A] or the development exhaust fan (right) [C]
[2] Air from the development intake fan [F]
[3] Air drawn to the ozone exhaust fan [G]
The machine prevents the following problems by expelling ozone around the PCDU.
• Uneven image density caused by ozone
• Toner adhesion caused by the increase in temperature
• Toner scattering
• Background stains caused by the increase in drum temperature
• Deterioration of the developer
1646
7.Detailed Descriptions
Mechanism Descriptions
An image that is transferred from the drum to the ITB is carried to the paper transfer area by the ITB.
The carried image is transferred to paper in the paper transfer belt unit, and then the paper with the
image is separated from the ITB. The separated paper is transferred to the fusing unit through the
paper transport belt unit.
Component Layout
1647
7.Detailed Descriptions
3 Image Transfer Roller (M) 10 AC Transfer Power Pack (Pro C5200S/Pro C5210 only)
4 Tension Roller 11 ITB Bias Roller
5 Image Transfer Roller (C) 12 ITB Cleaning Blade Counter Roller
6 Image Transfer Roller (K) 13 ITB Lubricant Blade Counter Roller
7 ID/MUSIC Sensors 14 Back-up Roller
Mechanism Details
Drive
The ITB [A] is driven by the ITB motor [C] through a gear and the ITB drive roller [B].
The ITB drive shaft encoder sensor [D] detects the speed of the ITB motor.
Transfer Bias
Bias is applied to the back of the ITB through each image transfer roller. A negative bias is applied to
the ITB bias roller in order to improve image transfer to damp paper (repulsive transfer method) The
power pack installed in the ITB unit supplies each bias.
Only Pro C5200S/C5210S has the AC/DC transfer method. Toner transfer to paper that has
indentations is improved by switching alternately between DC transfer and AC transfer.
MP C6503/MP C8003
Pro C5200S/C5210S
1648
7.Detailed Descriptions
The ITB is separated from the color drums during black-and-white printing in order to prevent color
drum (PCU) degradation.
In a black-and-white / color mixed job, the ITB separates from the color drums for black pages.
In black-and-white printing, the Y, M, and C drums (color drums) do not contact the ITB.
The ITB contacts only the K drum (black) in the default position. In color printing, the ITB [C] is pushed
up by the ITB lift motor [A] through the cam [B] in order to contact the color drums. In black-and-white
printing, only the K drum contacts the ITB. The ITB lift sensors detect contact/separation status.
For color printing after black-and-white printing, black-and-white printed paper exits the ITB unit, and
then the ITB lift motor [A] turns on and pushes up the ITB in order to contact the ITB against the color
drums (feed timing is controlled to make the interval between the sheets longer).
The feedback control of ITB speed is done during black-and-white printing, color printing, and MUSIC
operation in order to improve color registration.
The ITB drive shaft encoder sensor [C] attached to the ITB drive shaft monitors the rotation speed of
the ITB motor. The ITB driven shaft encoder sensor [B] attached to the ITB driven roller shaft monitors
the rotation of that roller. Readings from both encoders are used to control the speed of the ITB motor.
This process is known as CVEC (see below for more details).
The ITB home position sensor [A] detects the home position of the ITB.
1649
7.Detailed Descriptions
To prevent color registration errors, the machine makes a pattern on the ITB and reads it with the
ID/MUSIC sensor [A] that is installed near the drive roller of the ITB.
Thermal Control
The anti-condensation heater [A] prevents condensation from forming on the ITB. It turns on when the
main power switch is turned off.
The temperature/humidity sensor [B] is on the bottom of the machine (under the lowest PFU). It
monitors the temperature and humidity inside the machine.
1650
7.Detailed Descriptions
CVEC (Compensation function of belt speed Variation of Encoder roller Cycle) is a technology designed
to stabilize the positioning of the belt and control the speed fluctuation of the ITB.
In many older models, an encoder monitors the speed of the driven roller. But errors in speed detection
could occur because of eccentricities in the encoder or vibrations of the roller shaft. Also, the
conventional machines reduce color deviation by relating station pitches with the circumference of a
driven roller, but it is difficult to eradicate the occurrence of belt speed fluctuation and position deviation
completely.
In CVEC technology, two encoders control the speed of the ITB. From the difference between the
detected values from the encoders on the drive roller and on the driven roller, the speed fluctuation of
the driven roller is calculated. From this, the phase amplitude of the driven roller that affects the
fluctuation rate is calculated. Then the ITB motor is controlled to counteract the phase differences. With
CVEC, fluctuation in speed is reduced by more than half.
CVEC-related SC codes are shown below (Logging only)
SC Code SC Name
SC445-01 ITB Control Abnormal : Driven Axis FB
SC445-02 ITB Control Abnormal : Driven Axis Eccentricity Adjustment Control
1651
7.Detailed Descriptions
SC Code SC Name
SC445-03 ITB Control Abnormal : ITB Control Abnormal : Dancing Control
See “Troubleshooting” for finding possible causes and countermeasures.
1652
7.Detailed Descriptions
Mechanism Descriptions
Component Layout
Front View
1653
7.Detailed Descriptions
Cross-Sectional View
Mechanism Details
Belt Cleaning
The ITB cleaning brush [A], the ITB lubricant brush [B], and the toner collection coil [C] are driven by
the paper transfer belt motor [E] through gears [D]. The ITB cleaning brush [A] removes paper dust on
the ITB [F] and then the ITB cleaning blade [G] removes toner. The removed paper dust and waste
toner are transported to the waste toner bottle by the toner collection coil [C]. The paper dust collection
scraper [H] plucks paper dust and waste toner from the ITB cleaning brush, which sends it to the toner
collection coil [C].
1654
7.Detailed Descriptions
ITB Lubrication
The ITB cleaning blade [A] and the ITB lubricant blade [B] are installed against the belt movement
(counter blade method). To enhance the efficiency of cleaning, lubrication is applied to the ITB by the
ITB lubricant brush [C] and the ITB lubricant blade [B] spreads it evenly on the ITB.
When the ITB cleaning unit is inserted and the lock lever is turned, the ITB cleaning unit set sensor [A]
detects the tip of the lever and the machine judges that the ITB cleaning unit is set.
1655
7.Detailed Descriptions
1656
7.Detailed Descriptions
Mechanism Descriptions
The ITB unit has transfer power packs for belt transfer and paper transfer. These power packs supply
charge to the image transfer rollers for each color and the ITB bias roller [A] (above the paper transfer
roller) to transfer the image on the belt to the paper. The paper transfer roller [B] turns in accordance
with the ITB bias roller [A].
Component Layout
1657
7.Detailed Descriptions
Mechanism Details
The ITB unit has a paper transfer belt lift control mechanism for the following reasons (this mechanism
moves the ITB into contact with the paper transfer belt or separates them by a small distance, while
pressure is applied to the paper transfer belt unit).
1. To secure paper transfer efficiency by preventing the ITB bias roller from becoming dented, which
may result from the paper transfer belt and the ITB being always in contact.
2. To suppress the shock occurred when the paper enters the paper transfer section. (This machine is
equipped with the shock jitter cancel mode. The state of paper transfer belt is shifted from the
separated state to the contact state when the paper reaches the paper transfer section.)
Control Specifications
1. General
The paper transfer belt separation motor [A] drives the cam [B] of the ITB bias roller. The paper
transfer belt separation sensor [C] detects the actuator [D]. With this sensor [C], the machine
judges whether the paper transfer belt is in contact with the ITB or not. The detected result is fed
back to paper transfer belt lift control.
As shown below, The paper transfer belt separation motor [A] rotates clockwise in order to rotate
the bias roller cam [B].
[1]: When the paper transfer belt separation motor [A] rotates clockwise, the long diameter part of
the bias roller cam [B] contacts with the bearing [D]. The paper transfer belt contacts with the ITB in
this state.
[2]: When the paper transfer belt separation motor [A] rotates clockwise more, the short diameter
part of the bias roller cam [B] contacts with the bearing [D]. The paper transfer belt is separated
1658
7.Detailed Descriptions
You can find whether the paper transfer belt is in contact or separated by seeing the direction of the
flat face of the ITB bias roller shaft on which the bias roller cam [B] is attached.
• [1]: Contact state The flat face of the shaft points to the upper left.
• [2]: Separated state The flat face of the shaft points to the lower right.
In the "separated" state, the separation space [C] (indicates the space between the paper transfer
belt and the ITB) is 0.8 mm regardless of paper thickness.
2. The direction of the ITB bias roller cam
Separated state
The ITB bias roller cam [B] (bulging part) pushes the bearing of the paper transfer roller [C] down
to slightly separate the paper transfer belt from the ITB [A].
Contact state
1659
7.Detailed Descriptions
The ITB bias roller cam [B] (flat part) contacts the bearing [C]. In this state, the paper transfer belt
[A] moves up slightly.
3. Sensor State
State of Paper Transfer Belt
Interrupted Contact
Not interrupted Separated (Home position)
4. Contact / Separated State List
The list below shows when "contact / separation" operation is performed:
Machine State Paper Transfer Remarks
Belt State
Ready Separated
While Color Contact The belts are also in contact during
printing BW Contact intervals between sheets.
Other Process Control Separated
States MUSIC Separated
Forced Toner Separated
Consumption
Lubrication Mode Contact
5. Shock Jitter Cancel Mode
When the paper enters the nip between the ITB and the paper transfer belt [A] and when the paper
exits the nip between the ITB and the paper transfer belt [B], shock will occur.
1660
7.Detailed Descriptions
This can cause jitter on the printout. To cancel this shock jitter, the ITB bias roller is away from the
paper transfer belt at the start, then the ITB bias roller contacts the paper transfer belt after the
leading edge arrives at the nip, and moves away before the trailing edge passes the nip.
With the default setting, however, shock jitter may occur when thin but hard paper goes between
the ITB and the paper transfer belt. To prevent this, it is possible to configure the
contact/separation timing for each paper type in SP1-023-001 to 099 (Shock Jitter Cancel). If the
paper is custom paper, the contact/separation timing can be set for each paper type using IMSS
(Pro C5200S/C5210S only).
Shock Jitter Cancel Mode: SP1-023-001 to 099
Change the setting value to "1: ON" ~ "5: LOW 3" for each paper type to adjust the
contact/separation timing, so that the shock jitter is improved. (The Default settings are as follows.
Thick 1 to 4: "OFF" / Thick 5 to 9 "ON")
Setting of Description
SP1-023-001
to 099
0 (OFF) The belts are kept in contact while paper passes the nip area.
1 (ON) The "contact / separation" operation is performed according to the following SP
settings:
• SP1-021-001 to 099 (Paper Transfer Belt Cont Timing): Contact timing
• SP1-022-001 to 099 (Paper Transfer Belt Set Timing): Separation timing
2 (WEAK)*1 The nip pressure is lowered (decompression mode) according to the following
SP settings:
• SP1-025-001 to 099 (Paper Transfer Belt Cont: Depressure): Amount of
depressurization
(Pro C5200S/C5210S only)
The machine keep the nip pressure according to the SP settings during
printing, not between the sheets.
3 (LOW 1) The machine reduces the separation speed to 85% based on the separation
1661
7.Detailed Descriptions
Setting of Description
SP1-023-001
to 099
speed of the "1 (ON)" setting. This setting improves the shock jitter at the
trailing edge.
4 (LOW 2) The machine reduces the separation speed to 40% based on the separation
speed of the "1 (ON)" setting. This setting improves the shock jitter at the
trailing edge better than the "3 (LOW 1)" setting.
5 (LOW 3)*1 The machine reduces the separation speed to 40% based on the separation
speed of the "1 (ON)" setting, and adjusts the process speed at the same time.
This setting is used when the next contact timing is delayed since the
separation speed is too low*2.
*1 When "2 (WEAK)" or "5 (LOW 3)" is selected, process speed is lowered according to the setting
of SP1-023-250.
*2 If the separation is not finished until the next contact timing since the separation speed is too
low, the next contact timing is delayed. The machine cannot apply the nip pressure until the target
timing, then the transfer at the leading edge of the paper can be less effective.
When "1 (ON)", "3 (LOW 1)", "4 (LOW 2)", or "5 (LOW 3)" is selected, the timing of contact /
separation can be adjusted in the SP mode. The thickness and stiffness differ between paper types
even if they are in the same paper thickness classification. The adjustment is to compensate for
this.
Contact Timing: You can adjust the contact timing when the shock jitter cancel mode (SP1-023-
001 to 009) is set to "1 (ON)". Larger SP values mean slower contact timing. Shock jitter at the
leading edge could diminish if you delay the contact. However, if the contact timing is delayed too
much, transfer at the leading edge of the paper can be less effective.
Standard Paper: SP1-021-001 to 099 (Paper Transfer Belt Cont Timing)
Custom Paper (Pro C5200S/C5210S only): No.46 (Ppr Trns Gap: On Timing)
Separation Timing: You can adjust the separation timing when the shock jitter cancel mode (SP1-
023-001 to 009) is set to "1 (ON)". Smaller SP values mean an earlier start of the separation.
Shock jitter at the trailing edge could diminish if you make the separation earlier. However, if the
separation timing is too early, transfer at the trailing edge of the paper can be less effective.
Standard Paper: SP1-022-001 to 099 (Paper Transfer Belt Set Timing)
Custom Paper (Pro C5200S/C5210S only): No.47 (Ppr Trns Gap: Off Timing), 045: (Ppr Trns
Contact Mode)
Pressure Reduction Value: You can adjust the nip pressure when the shock jitter cancel mode
(SP1-023-001 to 009) is set to "2 (WEAK)". Smaller SP values mean a lower nip pressure. Shock
jitter could diminish if you make the nip pressure lowered. However, if the nip pressure is too low,
transfer of the whole image can be less effective.
Standard Paper: SP1-025-001 to 099 (Paper Transfer Belt Cont: Depressure)
1662
7.Detailed Descriptions
The pressure of the paper transfer belt is released as follows when the drawer unit is withdrawn or
inserted, so that it does not interfere with the image transfer belt unit.
1. The drawer unit lock motor [A] rotates the link (drive) [E].
2. The link (drive) [E] moves the link (driven) [C].
3. The paper transfer belt release cam [D] moves and the paper transfer belt [B] is released
(separated from the ITB).
Note the difference between the effects of this motor and the paper transfer belt separation motor
(described in the previous section). The paper transfer belt separation motor only moves the paper
transfer belt a small distance from the ITB, to reduce shock jitter. The above mechanism moves the
paper transfer belt completely away from the ITB.
Toner on the paper transfer belt [A] is scraped off by the cleaning blade [B].
1663
7.Detailed Descriptions
Toner that is scraped off the paper transfer belt is transported to the rear side [D] of the drawer unit by
the transport coil [C] which is driven by the paper transfer belt motor [A] via the shaft [B].
Toner that is transported to the paper transfer belt waste toner transport unit [C] at the rear of the
drawer unit, is transported to the vertical waste toner path [E] by the transport coils [B] and [D]. Both of
the transport coils [B] and [C] are driven by the paper transfer belt motor [A]. In the end, it is transported
to the waste toner bottle with the waste toner from the drum cleaning unit and the used developer from
the development unit through the vertical waste toner path [E].
1664
7.Detailed Descriptions
The encoder sensor [B] detects the speed of the rotation for the feedback control to adjust the speed of
the paper transfer belt.
The paper transfer belt motor [A] drives not only the paper transfer roller but also the ITB cleaning and
the paper transport belt.
Pro C5200S/C5210S only: By changing the transfer method (DC or AC) alternately, toner transfer to
paper that has indentations is improved. You need to turn this feature on if you wish to use it. The way
to turn it on is explained later.
1665
7.Detailed Descriptions
Descriptions Applied
Current
1 A portion of the toner is transferred. DC
2 Toner returns and contacts the toner remaining on the ITB, which affects the AC
attachment state of this toner.
3 After the toner attachment state changes, the toner is more likely to be DC
transferred.
This mechanism turns on in the following conditions shown below:
In Copy Mode
• The tray that is used is linked with a paper type registered in the paper library as requiring AC*.
In Printer Mode
• The tray that is used is linked with a paper type registered in the paper library as requiring AC*.
• The tray that is used is linked with a paper type registered in the paper library as requiring AC*.
Then you use the driver to select a paper type that requires AC.
• With SP2-850-101 to 999, you can also turn on/off AC application for each paper thickness.
• But if AC is applied to a paper type that is registered as not requiring AC, problems such as
vertical streaks may occur.
1666
7.Detailed Descriptions
Mechanism Descriptions
Component Layout
The paper feed unit employs an FRR method that has a press-release function, with a hysteretic
maintenance-free torque limiter. Each roller is driven by a DC motor.
Mechanism Details
Bank
Feed/Separation
The paper feed motor [A] turns ON to drive the feed roller [B]. The feed roller rotates the pick-up roller
[C] through the timing belt, and feeds the top sheet of paper. The paper feed motor also drives the
separation roller [D], through the relay gear. The separation roller [D] rotates at the same time as the
feed roller [B] due to the friction between the separation roller [D] and the feed roller [B].
The paper feed motor [A] drives the feed roller [B] via the timing belt [E].
1667
7.Detailed Descriptions
In the 2nd/3rd paper feed drive units of Pro C5200S/C5210S, the paper feed motor drives the feed
roller via the gear [A] instead of the timing belt.
When two or more sheets of paper are fed, the separation roller [D] rotates in reverse to push back the
lower sheet of paper to the tray.
The fed paper is transported to the registration roller.
1668
7.Detailed Descriptions
The separation roller [B] is separated from the feed roller [A] when the paper feed tray is removed.
When the paper feed tray is installed, the separation roller [B] is pressed against the feed roller [A].
Tray Shift-up/down
1. When the paper tray lift motor [A] on the rear side rotates, the coupling [B] engages with the pin [C]
on the lift arm of the bottom plate, and then the arm rotates. The bottom plate [D] is raised by the
rotation of the arm.
When the paper feed tray is removed, the engagement of the coupling [B] and the pin [C] is
released. Then the bottom plate [D] falls down by its own weight.
The remaining amount of paper in the tray is detected by the angle of the paper tray lift motor
rotation.
1669
7.Detailed Descriptions
2. When the paper feed tray is installed, the pick-up roller [A] descends. If the bottom plate is raised in
this state, the pick-up roller [A] is lifted by the top sheet of the paper in the tray. Then the actuator
turns the paper tray upper lift sensor [C] OFF and the paper tray lift motor turns OFF.
The top of the stack of paper in the tray lowers during copying/printing. When the paper tray upper
lift sensor [C] is turned ON because of this, the paper tray lift motor turns ON again and lifts the
paper [B].
When the paper in the paper feed tray runs out, the actuator [A] turns the paper end sensor [B] ON.
Then paper end is detected.
1670
7.Detailed Descriptions
the remaining paper amount. If none of the four sensors are interrupted, the panel shows that the
remaining paper amount is 100%.
The paper end sensor detects when there is no paper in the right tray.
1672
7.Detailed Descriptions
1673
7.Detailed Descriptions
hook [C]. This mechanism prevents the tray from being withdrawn while the paper is being
delivered.
1674
7.Detailed Descriptions
8. Tandem Operation
When the machine detects paper end in the right tandem tray during feeding or when lifting the
bottom plate, the machine proceeds with the following operation after the bottom plate in the right
tray reaches the lowest position, if there is paper in the left tandem tray.
The paper feed tray has a lock lever [A] to help feed the paper straight. (Pro C5200S/C5210S has a
side fence support plate [B].)
After adjusting the side fences [C] in accordance with the paper size, you need to lock the lock lever [A]
to fix the side fence position. Furthermore, you can prevent the rattling of the side fences by tightening
the shoulder screws [D] [E] of the side fence support plate [B] for Pro C5200S/C5210S.
1675
7.Detailed Descriptions
• The side fence support plate [B] for MP C6503/C8003 is provided as a service part. For details
about installing the side fence support plate for MP C6503/C8003, see Installing the Side
Fence Support Plate (MP C6503/C8003).
The paper feed tray has a pressure plate [A] on the rear side fence to help feed the paper straight. The
pressure plate [A] pushes the paper towards the front side fence [B]. Therefore, the paper is drawn to
the front side fence [B] and it is fed straight.
The bottom plate [A] is raised when the amount of remaining paper in the tray is reduced. In addition to
this, Pro C5200S/C5210S has a lever [B] in the paper tray. When the bottom plate [A] rises, the lever
[B] is pushed up, and the pressure from the pressure plate [C] is decreased.
1676
7.Detailed Descriptions
Pro C5200S/C5210S has a friction ball [A] in the paper feed section to help feed the paper straight. The
friction ball [A] applies a load to the upper side of the paper. The paper is drawn towards the front side
fence [B] while the paper is feeding. This helps feed the paper straight.
Dehumidification Function
Tray heaters [A] are provided as service parts. They can be installed under the 3rd tray and the 1st tray.
To use the heaters, turn on the heater switch [B] at the rear side of the machine. If SP5-965-001 is set
to "0", the heaters are on independent of the ON/OFF status of the main power switch. If the scanner
anti-condensation heater and the LCIT heaters (for RT4020 / RT4050) are also installed on the
machine, those heaters are turned ON at the same time.
1677
7.Detailed Descriptions
For details about installing the heaters for paper feed trays, see Tray Heater.
The machine detects the paper size automatically when the side fences and end fence are adjusted.
The status of the side fences and end fence affect the paper size sensors [A]. The machine figures out
the paper size from the switch combination of the paper size sensors, and then shows it on the
operation panel. The relation between the switch combination and the detected size is shown below.
The machine has a paper tray set sensor [B] on the right rear side of the paper tray.
1678
7.Detailed Descriptions
The pin [A] on the right rear side of a paper tray is pulled in by the pull-in lever in the lever unit [B] when
the paper tray is inserted in the machine, and then the paper tray is pulled in.
1679
7.Detailed Descriptions
Vertical Transport
Mechanism Descriptions
Component Layout
Mechanism Details
The vertical transport is integrated with the outer cover in this machine. This makes it easier to remove
the jammed paper by opening the vertical transport door [A].
1680
7.Detailed Descriptions
Each paper feed unit built into the main machine has vertical transport rollers [A]. The vertical transport
motor [C] drives the vertical transport roller shaft.
The vertical transport door is held by the support pin. When the vertical transport door is closed, the
vertical transport door lever [D] is locked.
Driven belts [B] are installed opposite each vertical transport roller [A]. A spring under pressure brings
the driven belts [B] into pressure contact with the vertical transport rollers [A].
1681
7.Detailed Descriptions
Mechanism Descriptions
Component Layout
The big differences between MP C6503/C8003 and Pro C5200S/C5210S are as follows.
• The location of the bypass tray paper end sensor [A] is different.
• The bypass tray of Pro C5200S/C5210S has a bottom plate lift mechanism [G].
MP C6503/C8003
Pro C5200S/C5210S
1682
7.Detailed Descriptions
Mechanism Details
The bypass tray unit can be opened by pushing down the bypass release lever [A]. This mechanism
prevents the jammed paper from tearing into pieces when removing the paper.
Feed and separation in the bypass tray are controlled by two motors. The bypass feed motor [A] drives
bypass pick-up roller [B] and the bypass feed roller [C]. The relay motor [D] drives the bypass
separation roller and the relay roller.
1683
7.Detailed Descriptions
Pick-up/Feed
1684
7.Detailed Descriptions
MP C6503/C8003
The bypass tray paper end sensor [A] has a feeler. When the paper in the bypass tray runs out, the
feeler moves forward and its upper end interrupts the bypass tray paper end sensor [A]. Then the
machine detects paper end.
Pro C5200S/C5210S
The bypass bottom plate has a bypass tray paper end sensor [A], which is a reflective photo sensor.
When there is paper in the bypass tray, the bypass tray paper end sensor [A] is turned ON (interrupted).
When the paper in the bypass tray runs out, the bypass tray paper end sensor [A] is turned OFF (not
interrupted). Then the machine detects paper end.
1685
7.Detailed Descriptions
The paper size is detected by the bypass paper width sensor [A] and the bypass paper length sensor
[B].
MP C6503/C8003
Pro C5200S/C5210S
1686
7.Detailed Descriptions
When the bypass pick-up roller [C] is lifted due to the elevation of the bottom plate [B], the actuator
interrupts the bypass tray upper limit sensor [A]. Then the machine detects the elevation of the bottom
plate [B].
When the bottom plate [B] is lowered and returned to the home position, the projection [E] on the back
of the bottom plate interrupts the bypass tray lower limit sensor [D]. Then the machine detects the
lowering of the bottom plate [B].
The bottom plate is lifted and lowered by the bypass tray lift motor [G] via the gears [H] and the lever
[F].
Paper Alignment
The pressure plate [A] on the rear side fence helps to feed the paper straight. The pressure plate [A]
pushes the paper towards the front side fence [B]. Therefore, the paper is drawn to the front side fence
[B] and it is fed straight.
1687
7.Detailed Descriptions
Pro C5200S/C5210S has the bottom plate [A] and the lever [B]. The bottom plate [A] is raised when the
paper is used up. When the lever [B] is pushed up by the elevation of the bottom plate [A], the pressing
force of the pressure plate [C] is decreased.
1688
7.Detailed Descriptions
1689
7.Detailed Descriptions
Paper Registration
Mechanism Descriptions
Component Layout
General Layout
1690
7.Detailed Descriptions
Drive Layout
Mechanism Details
Registration
Registration Transport
The paper from the bank/LCIT (option)/duplex transport section is transported to the registration section
through the relay transport section.
The paper from the bypass feed section is transported to the registration section through the bypass
relay transport section. The bypass relay transport section is located in the registration unit.
When the registration sensor [A] detects the leading edge of the paper, the relay motor starts to slow
down.
After the leading edge of the paper hits the registration rollers [B] [C] for the skew correction, the relay
motor stops. Then the registration motor [D] starts to drive the registration rollers [B] [C], to feed the
paper into the machine. (For details about the adjustment of the paper buckle, see "Skew Correction" in
this section. For details about the adjustment of the transport timing, see "Leading Edge Registration" in
this section.)
The registration mechanism is driven by a single motor [D], so this machine does not have a
registration clutch. This prevents shock-jitter which occurs when a registration clutch turns ON.
When a paper jam occurs, lever [E] separates the upper registration roller (idle) [C] from the lower
registration roller (drive) [B] to let the user easily remove the jammed paper.
1691
7.Detailed Descriptions
Skew Correction
The leading edge of the paper is made to hit the registration rollers and the paper buckles in order to be
aligned for the skew correction.
If the paper buckle is too small, the whole width of the paper leading edge does not hit the registration
rollers. Then the paper skew is not corrected completely. The paper buckle can be adjusted with SP1-
004-001 to 012.
SP No. SP Name Value
SP1-004-001 Reg Buckle Adj: Tray1 -5 to 5 mm
SP1-004-002 Reg Buckle Adj: Bypass Tray -5 to 5 mm
SP1-004-003 Reg Buckle Adj: Duplex -5 to 5 mm
SP1-004-004 Reg Buckle Adj: LCIT -5 to 5 mm
SP1-004-005 Reg Buckle Adj: Thick 1 -5 to 5 mm
SP1-004-006 Reg Buckle Adj: Thick 2 -5 to 5 mm
SP1-004-007 Reg Buckle Adj: Thick 3 -5 to 5 mm
SP1-004-008 Reg Buckle Adj: Thick 4 -5 to 5 mm
SP1-004-009 Reg Buckle Adj: Thick 5 -5 to 5 mm
SP1-004-010 Reg Buckle Adj: Tray2 -5 to 5 mm
SP1-004-011 Reg Buckle Adj: Tray3 -5 to 5 mm
SP1-004-012 Reg Buckle Adj: Tray4 -5 to 5 mm
For details about the skew adjustment, see Adjustment 005: Registration.
The leading edge registration is made by adjusting the paper transport timing of the registration rollers.
This registration method is same as that of MP C6000/C7000.
1692
7.Detailed Descriptions
The registration rollers stop the paper and adjust the timing for feeding the paper into the machine order
to match the positions of the paper and the image on the transfer belt. The leading edge registration
can be adjusted by SP1-001-001 to 016 (Lead Edge Reg). For details, see Adjustment 005:
Registration.
The dust collection sheet [A] is attached to the upper registration roller (idle) [B]. The dust collection
sheet [A] stays in contact with the upper registration roller (idle) all the time. This decreases the amount
of paper dust that falls into the machine.
The best conditions for image transfer and fusing depend on paper thickness and paper type.
Therefore, it is important to select the correct paper thickness on the operation panel for high quality
printing. Also, fusing failure or paper jam can occur if the paper thickness is different from the one
selected on the operation panel.
For the above reasons, this machine has a paper thickness/double feed detection feature to prevent
problems caused by selecting the wrong paper thickness on the operation panel.
Basic Operation
The paper type sensor (lever-type encoder sensor) [A] measures the thickness of the paper. Then the
machine uses the measurement results to check that the paper thickness is correct and that there is no
double feed. If the paper thickness is different or a double feed has occurred, the machine stops
feeding the paper.
1693
7.Detailed Descriptions
There are two paper type sensors. One is installed in the bypass relay transport section and the other is
in the relay transport section. The paper type sensor [A] in the bypass relay transport section detects
the thickness of the paper transported from the bypass tray. The paper type sensor [B] in the relay
transport section detects the thickness of the paper transported from the bank feed section/LCIT
(option)/duplex transport section.
1694
7.Detailed Descriptions
If the machine detects the wrong paper thickness or a double feed, you can remove the paper in the
same way as the usual jam removal operation. You need to do the following after removing the paper.
• If the machine detected the wrong paper thickness:
Change the paper in the paper tray, so that the thickness of the paper in the tray matches the one
selected on the operation panel.
-or-
Change the paper thickness on the operation panel, so that the paper thickness selected on the
operation panel matches the one in the paper tray.
• If the machine detected a double feed:
Fan the stack of paper in the paper tray.
After the first sheet of paper reaches the paper thickness measurement section, the paper type sensor
measures the paper thickness and the machine compares the measurement result and the paper
thickness selected on the operation panel (Tray Setting).
If the measured thickness is not within the allowable range as shown in the table below, the machine
determines that the paper thickness is wrong, and stops feeding the paper. Then J098 (JAM) is
displayed on the operation panel.
Alert Paper Thickness Measurement Result
Thin Plain Plain Middle Thick Thick Thick Thick Thick
1 2 Thick 1 2 3 4 5
Tray Thin - JAM JAM JAM JAM JAM
Setting Plain 1 - JAM JAM JAM JAM
1695
7.Detailed Descriptions
The measured paper thickness value, which is used for the double-feed judgement, is reset at the
following times.
• When the main power is turned ON. (The machine resets the measured values of the paper which
has been fed from all the paper trays.)
• When all the doors are closed while the main power is ON.
• When the paper tray is pulled out and inserted again. (The machine resets the measured values of
the paper which has been fed from the paper tray which was pulled out and inserted again.)
• When the status of the bypass tray paper end sensor is shifted from the paper absent state to the
paper present state. (The machine resets the measured value of the paper which was fed from the
bypass tray.)
• When printing on paper for the first time since the paper thickness setting was changed on the
operation panel. (The machine resets the measured value of the paper fed from the paper tray for
which the paper thickness setting was changed.)
• When a double feed occurs. (The machine resets the measured value of the paper transported
from the paper tray in which the double feed occurred)
• When a paper jam occurs.
• After returning from the energy saving mode.
• The paper thickness detection feature and the double feed detection feature can be turned
ON/OFF with UP mode and SP mode for each tray. (The default setting is ON)
SP No. SP Name Value
SP1-302-001 to Dbl-Feed Detect: Tray 1 to Tray 4, LCIT, Bypass Tray 0: OFF
006 1: ON
SP1-313-001 to Paper Thickness Detect: Tray 1 to Tray 4, LCIT, Bypass 0: OFF
006 Tray 1: ON
• If the different paper types are mixed in the paper tray, the machine cannot detect the paper
thickness properly.
1697
7.Detailed Descriptions
Mechanism Descriptions
Component Layout
After the image has been transferred to the paper in the paper transfer belt unit, the paper transport belt
unit feeds the paper to the fusing unit.
Mechanism Details
The paper transfer belt motor [B] drives the paper transport belt [A] via gears and paper transport belt
drive roller [E]. The paper transport belt fans [C] draw air through holes in the paper transport belt [A].
This holds the paper on the belt. Then the paper transport belt feeds the paper from the paper transfer
belt unit to the fusing unit. The paper transport belt sensor [D] in the paper transport belt unit detects
paper jams.
1698
7.Detailed Descriptions
The paper transport belt unit can be lowered by lifting the lever [A], in order to facilitate jam removal.
The paper transport belt unit set sensor [B] detects whether the paper transport belt unit is seated in the
operational position or not.
1699
7.Detailed Descriptions
Fusing Unit
Mechanism Descriptions
Component Layout
Paper transported from the paper transport belt unit enters the fusing unit, where the paper is pressed
between the pressure roller and fusing roller to fuse the toner to the paper. The components in blue are
only for Pro C5200S/C5210S to improve paper handling and maintain quality over a long period. Pro
C5200S/C5210S has a fusing belt smoothing roller that removes the roughness on the fusing belt
caused by the paper edges, and the fusing cleaning web unit that removes material attached to the
fusing belt.
1700
7.Detailed Descriptions
Electrical Components
1701
7.Detailed Descriptions
Component Descriptions
Mechanism Details
Fusing Mechanism
2. Fusing Roller
In this machine, the fusing roller materials are different between Pro C5200S/5210S and MP
C6503/8003 in order to suit different types of users as follows.
1703
7.Detailed Descriptions
Silicone foam roller Silicone foam Silicone solid roller Silicone solid roller
φ57*1 roller φ50 φ57*1 φ50
Details Employed for energy saving improvement. Employed for image quality and
Merits productivity provement.
Shorter warming-up time Merits
• MP C6503/C8003: Less than 55sec • Superior to MP
• MP C6502/C8002: Less than 60sec C6503/8003/C6502/8002 in image
Demerits quality of coated paper
• Lower image quality than Pro • High productivity
C5200S/C5210S/C5100S/C5110S. Demerits
• Lower productivity than Pro Longer warming-up time
C5200S/C5210S/C5100S/C5110S. • Pro C5200S/C5210S: Less than
120sec
• Pro C5100S/C5110S: Less than
300sec
*1 The outer diameter of the fusing roller is larger than the predecessor model. This increases the
nip width and the fusing temperature is lowered.
3. Heating roller
The heating roller (Φ35) is made of a magnetic shunt alloy. The flux shield plate (aluminum) and
the shaft (aluminum) are included in the roller.
4. IH Coil (external heating IH)
In this machine, an IH coil heats the heating roller and the fusing belt.
The IH coil is employed in order to realize fast heating and temperature uniformity.
5. Pressure Roller (Φ55)
The pressure roller (Φ50) surface is made of iron covered with silicone rubber that is coated with a
fluororesin tube. The pressure roller has a fusing lamp in it.
6. Fusing Lamp
There is a fusing lamp [B] inside the pressure roller [A]. This heats the pressure roller when starting
up and when warming up. It also keeps the machine heat during waiting.
1704
7.Detailed Descriptions
Thermal Control
This machine has thermal control sensors that monitor various locations to control the IH coil [I] and the
fusing lamp [J] in order to keep the proper temperature.
Thermal Transition
This machine controls the fusing unit to change the temperature in the fusing unit, depending on the
eight states listed below:
State Descriptions
1. Start-up, The machine detects that all covers (doors) are closed and then starts the fusing
Restart-up warming-up. The machine controls the fusing drive motor, the IH coil, and the fusing
lamp to increase the fusing temperature up to the target temperature.
2. Rotation After fusing warming-up finishes, the fusing drive motor turns on for a certain time to
after Reload keep the fusing temperature at a specified level (adjusted with “SP1107-001: Heating
R”, “SP1107-002: Pressure R”).
3. Before The machine increases the temperature of the fusing roller and of the pressure roller
Paper to reach "Paper Passing-start Temperature".
Passing
4. While While paper is passing through the machine.
Paper
Passing
5. After After the last sheet of a job passes the fusing paper feed sensor, the machine
Paper controls the fusing drive motor, IH coil, and the fusing lamp to keep the target
Passing temperature (target temperature is adjusted with "SP1108-001: Heating R”, “SP1108-
002: Pressure R").
6. Ready When the "After Paper Passing" state finishes, the machine turns to the "Ready"
state.
The machine controls the fusing drive motor, the IH heater, and the fusing lamp in
order to maintain the fusing temperature (can be adjusted with "SP1107-001: Heating
R", "SP1107-002: Pressure R")
7. Low A specified time passes after fusing system is ready to print , and then the IH coil and
1706
7.Detailed Descriptions
State Descriptions
Power Mode fusing drive motor turn off. At the same time, the fusing lamp turns on in order to keep
the target temperature (can be adjusted with "SP1107-006") of the pressure roller.
8. Sleep A specified time (normal: 1 minute) passes after the machine enters the "ready" state,
Mode and then the machine cuts the power supply for the IH coil, the fusing lamp, and the
fusing drive motor.
The tables below show the target temperature for the heating roller and pressure roller for each state.
Reload
MP C6503 MP C8003 Pro C5200S Pro C5210S
Heating Roller 143°C 143°C 148°C 153°C
Pressure Roller 130°C 140°C 100°C 100°C
After Reload/Paper Passing
This machine has 3 ways to prevent overheating: soft-overheat detection, hard-overheat detection,
thermostat
The component call-outs correspond to the diagram below.
1707
7.Detailed Descriptions
Fusing Drive
Through gears, the fusing drive motor [B] drives the pressure roller [A], and that also rotates the fusing
roller [C].
Rotation Detection
The heating roller rotation sensor [A] detects the rotation of the fusing belt and the results are fed back
to the fusing drive motor. The heating roller rotation sensor prevents too much heating by the IH heater
that can cause fire damage or machine break-down. When the heating roller rotation sensor [A] detects
that the fusing belt is not rotating, the machine cuts off the current to the IH coil.
1709
7.Detailed Descriptions
Pressure Mechanism
The pressure roller has a release control mechanism to release fusing pressure when a job is not in
progress. This contributes to reducing deformation of the pressure roller.
When a job starts, the fusing release motor [A] drives, the pressure roller cams [B] turn, and the
pressure roller unit [C] shifts up. When a job finishes, the fusing release motor [A] drives in the opposite
direction, and the pressure roller unit [C] shifts down and pressure is released. With the actuators [D],
the front and rear sensors near the axial points of the pressure roller cams detect the following:
• Pressure Roller Sensor (Front): Detects the angle of the cam in 3 steps to control the nip pressure
• Pressure Roller Sensor (Rear): Detects HP
The fusing release motor [A] is driven by a DC brushless motor with an encoder.
After the motor has applied pressure, it stays on because otherwise the roller rotation while paper is
passing would tend to release the pressure.
In addition, the nip pressure is adjustable in 3 steps by changing the angle of the cam, depending on
thickness of paper.
State Default Value
Pressure Released -
Position 0
Pressure The fusing drive motor drives in reverse to remove 2mm
Position 1 jammed paper (not changeable in SP mode)
Pressure For envelope feeding (changeable with SP1-989-xxx) 3.5mm
Position 2
Pressure For paper feeding (not changeable in SP mode) MP C6503/C8003:
Position 3 16.7±0.2mm
Pro C5200S/C5210S:
1710
7.Detailed Descriptions
To reduce creases in envelopes, this machine lowers nip pressure if the following settings are made:
• Select [Envelope] as [Paper Type] in [Tray Paper Settings]
• MP C6503/C8003: Press the [User Tools] icon -> [System Settings] -> [Tray Paper Settings] to
open the [Tray Paper Settings] screen.
• Pro C5200S/C5210S: Press the [User Tools] key -> [System Settings] -> [Tray Paper Settings]
to open the [Tray Paper Settings] screen.
• Select [Envelope] as [Paper Type] in [Tray Paper Settings] for IMSS setting (Pro C5200S/C5210S
only)
Press the [Paper Settings] key to open the [Tray Paper Settings] screen.
The pressure position 2 (envelope position) is selected automatically as a nip width so that the nip width
for envelope printing becomes narrower in order to reduce the nip pressure.
The nip width adjustment is performed by changing the pressure roller position. The machine predicts
the thermal expansion coefficient of the fusing roller from the output of the thermistor (hot roller shaft).
The machine changes the the pressure roller position according to the thermal expansion coefficient of
the fusing roller, so that the nip width becomes optimal for envelope printing.
1711
7.Detailed Descriptions
The nip width of the fusing unit vary among individual units. Therefore, after replacing the fusing unit
with a new one, the nip width needs to be adjusted by entering the adjustment value on the label
attached to the fusing unit.
By performing this adjustment, the nip width adjustment for the envelope, described above, can be
done correctly.
For details about how to make the nip width adjustment for a new fusing unit, see Adjustment for the
Nip Width of the Fusing Unit (Pro C5200S/C5210S only).
Jam Detection
The fusing paper feed sensor [A] detects jams by monitoring the ejected paper.
The fusing entrance sensor [B] detects paper remaining in the fusing area after a jam occurs. It is not
used during normal printing.
If you replace the fusing entrance sensor [B], do the following initial procedure:
1. Make sure that remaining paper does not block the optical path of the fusing entrance sensor [B]
(blue arrow from the sensor).
2. Close the drawer unit and the right cover.
3. Do "SP1-134-001".
1712
7.Detailed Descriptions
The Pro C5200S/C5210S has a fusing cleaning web unit. Material attached to the fusing belt is
removed by the fusing cleaning web unit [B] through the pressure roller [A], in order to prevent black
spots on prints.
The fusing cleaning web unit [B] uses the cleaning web method (heatproof non-woven fabric).
The fusing cleaning web [D] contacts the pressure roller [A] and wipes off toner and paper dust on the
roller’s surface while being rolled up by the web take-up roller [C]. The fusing cleaning web [D] contains
silicone oil in order to lubricate the pressure roller and the fusing belt. The fusing cleaning web [D] is
driven by the cleaning web motor [E], which turns on every time a certain number of sheets are printed
in a job, and rolls up a certain length of the fusing cleaning web.
The web take-up roller [C] rolls up the used web.
1713
7.Detailed Descriptions
• Web Near-End
When the fusing cleaning web consumption reaches the setting in SP1-902-004, the operation
panel shows "Web Near-End". If the SP setting is 81% (default), the machine shows "Web Near-
End" on the operation panel at 450K.
• Web End
The fusing cleaning web unit has the actuator [A]. As the web take-up roller [B] rolls the used web
up, the actuator [A] shifts down. When the web is all used up, the cleaning web end sensor [C]
detects the actuator [A]. The machine stops printing after this is detected.
1714
7.Detailed Descriptions
The fusing belt smoothing roller [A] removes damage on the belt caused by the edges of the paper.
The fusing belt smoothing roller [A] polishes the surface of the fusing belt [B] in order to remove
roughness caused by the edges of paper that has passed through the fusing unit, and to prevent glossy
streaks on prints.
1715
7.Detailed Descriptions
Item Descriptions
Operators
Adjustment Settings for Operators 0210-01
Operation Specification Roller rotates in 2 minutes in 1 cycle
Yield 260 minutes (133 cycles)
Near-End Pro C5200S: 258 minutes (rest 4 cycles)
Pro C5210S: 254 minutes (rest 6 cycles)
This can be modified with "SP1-133-131".
End 266 minutes
This can be modified with "SP1-133-132".
How to check the use rate With the PM parts list shown on the operation panel
display.
Notes
• When you execute fusing belt smoothing more than six times in a row but no improvement
appears, replace the fusing belt.
• The polishing performance could be deteriorated before the fusing belt smoothing belt roller
reaches the target yield/end, due to variations in each fusing belt smoothing roller. In this case,
replace the fusing belt smoothing roller.
• When using a paper type with which glossy stripes easily appear, the glossy stripes can be
prevented by shortening the execution interval of fusing belt smoothing according to the variations
[A] in paper edge passing position.
If the variation in paper edge passing position [A] is small, adjust the execution interval of fusing
belt smoothing to a shorter value while referring to the table below. If the variation in paper edge
passing position [A] is large, adjust the execution interval of fusing belt smoothing to a longer value
while referring to the table below.
The variation in paper edge passing position is 0.3mm normally in this machine. However, the
variation could be smaller than 0.3mm due to the individual differences between machines. In that
1717
7.Detailed Descriptions
case, the execution interval of fusing belt smoothing should be adjusted to a shorter value, and
because of that, the lifetime of the fusing belt smoothing roller and fusing belt will become shorter.
Variations in paper Execution interval of Lifetime of the fusing belt Lifetime of the
edge passing position fusing belt smoothing smoothing belt roller [kp] fusing roller [kp]
[mm] [kp]
0.2 1.5 90 200
0.4 3 180 400
0.6 4.5 270 600
Fusing Heat-shutout
To prevent the heat of the fusing unit from affecting the laser unit, this machine has fusing heat pipes.
Five heat pipes [G] are integrated in the aluminum panel. The heat pipes reach the heat sink [B] in the
upper left part of the machine.
The heat pipe panel intake fan [A] cools down the heat sink [B] whose temperature rises because of the
circulation in the heat pipes. The heat pipe panel exhaust fan [C] sucks the hot air out of the rear of the
machine.
IH Coil Cooling
The IH coil cooling fan [F] in the front side of the machine sucks in air to cool the IH coil unit [E]. This air
goes through the IH coil unit [E]. Then the paper transfer belt fusing exhaust fan [D] sucks air out of the
rear of the machine.
The paper transfer belt fusing exhaust fan [D] also sucks out the heat around the paper transfer belt
unit.
The fusing pressure roller intake fan [A] sucks air out of the machine to make an air current under the
pressure roller [C], in order to cool the pressure roller down. The fusing pressure roller exhaust fan [B]
1718
7.Detailed Descriptions
This mechanism prevents the temperature of the pressure roller from increasing. This mechanism
allows the machine to reduce the frequency of downtime caused by excessive heating of the pressure
roller during consecutive printing.
1719
7.Detailed Descriptions
Mechanism Descriptions
Component Layout
Section Layout
1720
7.Detailed Descriptions
Transport Layout
1721
7.Detailed Descriptions
Drive Layout
Mechanism Details
Transport Operation
Side-to-side Registration
In this machine, rollers in duplex paper path shift to perform side-to-side registration.
After the leading edge of the paper passes the edge detection unit [A], the edge detection sensor [B]
shifts in the main-scan direction to detect the paper edge. The edge detection sensor [B] is driven by
the edge detection sensor shift motor [C].
1722
7.Detailed Descriptions
For paper with a feed length of 220 mm (8.66 inches) or less (A4 LEF / LT LEF or less), the duplex
transport roller 4 [F] and the duplex exit roller [G] shift in the main-scan direction in order to adjust the
paper position in the main-scan direction after the leading edge of the paper passes the duplex exit
roller [G]. The machine corrects the paper position in the main-scan direction based on the data
detected by the edge detection sensor [B]. The duplex transport roller 4 [F] and the duplex exit roller [G]
are driven by the duplex transport shift motor 2 [H].
For paper with a feed length of more than 220 mm (8.66 inches) (B5 SEF or more), the duplex transport
shift motor 1 [I] drives in addition to the duplex transport shift motor 2 [H], so that the duplex exit roller
[G] and the duplex transport roller 2/3/4 [D] [E] [F] move at the same time to adjust the paper position in
the main-scan direction. The adjustment amount can be set with SP1-003-017 to 022 (Duplex Side-to-
Side Reg Adj: Tray1-3) for each tray. The machine adds the value of SP1-003-017 to 022 to the value of
SP1-003-006 (Side-to-Side Reg: Duplex), and then performs image adjustment for the second side.
This value is fixed within ±3mm.
1723
7.Detailed Descriptions
No. Description
[A] The paper enters the side-to-side registration section.
[B] The machine detects the leading edge of the paper.
[C] The paper exits from the side-to-side registration section.
[D] The paper exits from the machine.
* The machine does not have the mechanism for [B].
1. MPC7501/MPC6501 (Jogger Fence Method)
The registration correction is performed by the jogger fence when the machine transports the paper
from the duplex inverter path to the duplex paper path by switching back. Therefore, the paper
position and distance between the sheets are not adjusted for the first print side of the paper. The
transport distance between the end of the registration section and the image transfer section is
long.
2. MP C6503/C8003, Pro C5200S/C5210S (Roller Shift Method)
The machine detects the leading edge of the paper, and then perform the registration correction
1724
7.Detailed Descriptions
with the paper transport roller using the detected data. The registration correction is performed in
the duplex paper path. Therefore, the paper position and distance between the sheets are not
adjusted for the first side of the paper. The transport distance between the end of the registration
section and the image transfer section is shorter than that of MP C7501/C6501. This means that
the paper transport stability of this machine is superior to MP C7501/C6501.
3. ProC751EX/Proc651EX (Roller Unit Shift Method)
Regardless of first side or second side printing, the machine performs the registration correction
whenever the paper passes the shift unit in the paper transport section. Therefore, the registration
correction is performed before the image transfer for both sides of the paper. This means that this
machine has high stability for transporting the paper and high registration accuracy for both sides
of paper.
Paper Cooling
The fusing heat pipe roller [A] cools the paper ejected from the fusing unit. The fusing heat pipe roller
[A] has a fin [B] at one end. The fusing heat pipe cooling fan [C] cools the fin in order to cool the entire
pipe.
1725
7.Detailed Descriptions
When a paper jam occurs and the paper remains between the fusing heat pipe roller [A] and the fusing
heat pipe guide plate [B], the fusing heat pipe guide plate [B] can be lifted by pulling out the paper as
shown below, so that the paper is not caught by the fusing heat pipe guide plate and the jammed paper
can be easily removed. This mechanism prevents the jammed paper from tearing into pieces.
With straight through output, paper from the fusing unit passes under the fusing heat pipe roller [A].
When the inverter junction gate motor [C] drives counterclockwise for a certain time, the inverter
junction gate [B] is pushed down and the paper is sent to the exit roller [D]. This roller transfers the
paper to the downstream device, under the control of the exit motor.
1726
7.Detailed Descriptions
With inverter output (face-down output), the paper that is passed under the fusing heat pipe roller is
sent to the inverter exit path with the inverter junction gate [A]. The inverter junction gate motor keeps
driving clockwise for a certain time, and then stops.
The leading edge of the paper reaches the exit inverter roller, then the duplex inverter entrance motor
[B] starts and transports the paper to the inverter section. After the trailing edge of the paper is ejected
from the fusing heat pipe roller, the machine speeds up the duplex inverter entrance motor [B] and the
exit inverter motor [C] .
When the inverter exit sensor [A] detects the trailing edge of the paper, the exit inverter motor [B]
rotates in reverse and transports the paper to the exit section (inverter transport). In the exit section, the
paper exit motor [C] drives the paper exit roller [D] and the inverter exit roller [E] to eject the paper.
1727
7.Detailed Descriptions
Duplex
Drive Components
Duplex Transfer
When the inverter feed-in sensor [D] detects the leading edge of the paper, the duplex invert solenoid
[A] turns ON and transports the paper towards the duplex section. The exit inverter motor [B] and the
duplex inverter motor [C] drives to transport the paper to the inverter path. Then the duplex inverter
motor [C] rotates in reverse and transports the paper to the duplex paper path (this is called a
switchback operation).
1728
7.Detailed Descriptions
The paper that has entered the duplex transport path is transported by the three duplex transport rollers
(driven by the duplex transport motor [A]) and the two duplex transport rollers (driven by the duplex exit
motor [B]), and then enters the paper transport section for the second side printing.
Duplex Interleaving
The interleave process during duplex printing is different, depending on the size of the paper as
described below.
Paper Length Interleaved
Sheets
Longer than or equal to 139.7 mm (5.5 inches), shorter than or equal to 220 mm 3
(8.66 inches)
Longer than 220 mm (8.66 inches), shorter than or equal to 487.7 mm (19.2 2
inches)
Paper location and flow in a 3-sheet interleaving pattern
The image transfer order in a 3-sheet interleaving pattern is as follows:
1729
7.Detailed Descriptions
1st sheet (front side) -> 2nd sheet (front side) -> 3rd sheet (front side) -> 1st sheet (back side) -> 4th
sheet (front side) -> 2nd sheet (back side) -> 5th sheet (front side) -> 3rd sheet (back side) -> 6th sheet
(front side) -> 4th sheet (back side) -> 7th sheet (front side)...
1730
7.Detailed Descriptions
Paper Purge
Mechanism Descriptions
When the LED switch [A] at the lower left side of the machine is pressed, the machine ejects paper
which remains in the machine.
• When a paper jam has occurred in the inverter exit path:
When the paper straddles the drawer unit and the main machine, the paper is transported towards
the downstream device by pressing the LED switch [A].
• When a paper jam has occurred in the duplex inverter path:
When the paper straddles the drawer unit and the main machine, the paper is transported to the
paper purge tray by pressing the LED switch [A].
Mechanism Details
If the LED switch at the lower left side of the machine is pressed when a paper jam has occurred, the
paper which straddles the drawer unit and the main machine is transported to the downstream device
or the purge tray.
If the duplex invert sensor [A] or the purge relay sensor [B] detects paper when the LED switch is
pressed, the machine drives the following motors to feed the paper to the purge tray.
• Duplex Inverter Entrance Motor
• Exit Inverter Motor
• Duplex Inverter Motor (Drives only when the duplex inverter sensor is ON.)
• Duplex Transport Motor (Drives only when the duplex entrance sensor is ON. The motor is rotated
in reverse.)
The purged paper sensor [C] detects paper in the purge tray.
1731
7.Detailed Descriptions
If the purged paper sensor detects paper or if the E5 guide plate [B] is opened while the lower left door
[A] is opened, the purge tray LED is lit. Therefore, the status of the purge tray can be easily seen by the
purge tray LED.
1732
7.Detailed Descriptions
Mechanism Descriptions
Component Layout
The used toner, used developer, and paper dust from each unit are automatically collected and
transported to the waste toner bottle.
The waste toner path is composed of three sections; the upper waste toner path, vertical waste toner
path, lower waste toner path.
Mechanism Details
1733
7.Detailed Descriptions
The waste toner and paper dust [D] from the paper transfer belt cleaning section are transported to
the vertical waste toner path.
• Lower Waste Toner Path
The waste toner, used developer, and paper dust fallen from the vertical toner path are transported
to the waste toner bottle [E].
When the transport coil [B] is clogged and cannot rotate while transporting the waste toner, the waste
toner lock sensor [F] detects this, and the machine stops the waste toner collection motor [G]. Then
SC488 (Machine Waste Toner Lock Detection Error) is displayed on the operation panel.
When the torque of the transport coils in the waste toner path increases while transporting the waste
toner, the torque limiter slips. Then the waste toner lock sensor [F] detects the torque increase and the
machine stops the waste toner collection motor [G]. Then SC488 (Machine Waste Toner Lock Detection
Error) is displayed on the operation panel.
Waste Toner Bottle Transfer, Waste Toner Bottle Drive, Torque Detection Part
The waste toner transferred from the lower waste toner path falls into the waste toner bottle [C] via the
toner collection transfer coil [A] and the collection bottle transfer coil [B]. The toner collection transfer
coil [A] and the collection bottle transfer coil [B] are driven by the waste toner transport motor [E] via
gears.
When the torque of the toner collection transfer coil [A] or the collection bottle transfer coil [B] increase,
the torque limiter slips. Then the waste toner bottle motor sensor [D] detects the torque increase and
the machine stops the waste toner transport motor [E]. The machine displays on the operation panel
that the waste toner bottle is full. After removing/installing the waste toner bottle while the main power is
on, the machine displays SC486 (Bottle Waste Toner Lock Detection Error) on the operation panel if the
1734
7.Detailed Descriptions
waste toner bottle motor sensor [D] detects the torque increase again while the waste toner bottle motor
is driving.
Sensor Detection
The waste toner bottle set sensor [A] judges whether the waste toner bottle [B] is set properly or not.
The waste toner near full sensor [C] detects when the waste toner bottle is getting full. As the waste
toner piles up in the waste toner bottle, the feeler [E] is pushed by the waste toner, and then the feeler
interrupts the waste toner near full sensor [C]. Then the machine assumes the waste toner bottle is in a
near-full state. Waste toner bottle full detection occurs at 30K for MP C6503/C8003, or 12K for Pro
C5200S/C5210S after near-full detection. The waste toner flows into the waste toner bottle from the
central part, and then it falls down to the front and rear in order not to pile up all in one place.
When the waste toner bottle [B] is placed in the machine, the magnet catch [D] attracts the plate that is
attached to the waste toner bottle [B] in order to set the waste toner bottle correctly. At this time, the
waste toner bottle pushes the waste toner bottle set sensor [A] that detects whether there is a waste
toner bottle in the machine.
1735
7.Detailed Descriptions
The waste toner full state is reported to the @Remote server and displayed on the operation panel the
following number of days before the waste toner bottle becomes full.
Model @Remote server Operation panel
Pro C5200S/C5210S 14 days *1 5 days *2
MP C6503/C8003 15 days *1 5 days *2
*1 This can be changed with SP7-958-142 (PM Value Setting:DaysThreshold) in accordance with the
user's request or machine usage.
*2 This can be changed with SP3-800-014 (Waste Toner Full Detection: Threshold : Remainder days) in
accordance with the user's request or machine usage.
The machine can print the following number of sheets after the waste toner full state is reported to the
@Remote server and displayed on the operation panel.
Model @Remote server Operation panel
Pro C5200S/C5210S 10K 3K
MP C6503/C8003 15K 3K
The machine can print the number of sheets shown above if the machine is used under the following
conditions.
• Pro C5200S/C5210S: 20P/J, A4 LEF in duplex mode, color ratio 60%, image area ratio 8.75%
• MP C6503/C8003: 5P/J, A4 LEF in simplex mode, color ratio 40%, image area ratio 5%
This machine does not have a new waste toner bottle detection feature.
The machine recognizes that a new waste toner bottle has been installed when the feeler [B] returns to
the regular position after the waste toner bottle [A] is removed.
1736
7.Detailed Descriptions
Even if the waste toner bottle is replaced, the counter for the remaining life of the waste toner bottle
(days until the waste toner bottle becomes full) is not reset automatically. The machine keeps counting
until the counter becomes "0" even after the waste toner bottle is replaced. Therefore, the machine
does not use this counter for new waste toner bottle detection.
The PM counter of the waste toner indicates the amount of toner (mg) in the waste toner bottle.
The capacity of the waste toner bottle is 2280g. The machine detects the near-full state when the toner
in the waste toner bottle becomes 1850g.
The replacement time of the PM part can be estimated from the days remaining counter.
The days remaining counter shows the remaining days until replacement is required for the PM part.
The machine calculates the consumption of the PM part from the number of printed sheets and the
number of days having passed since the last replacement, and then displays the remaining days in the
SP mode. When the waste toner bottle is replaced, the days remaining counter of the waste toner bottle
starts counting . The count starts from 255 (days). The days remaining counter of the waste toner bottle
can be checked with SP7-951-142.
However, the amount of waste toner accumulated inside the waste toner bottle differs according to the
printing conditions, such as the toner coverage of the image. Therefore, the days remaining counter
which is calculated from the number of printed sheets is only a reference value. To bring the days
remaining counter closer to the actual waste toner bottle condition, the output from the waste toner near
full sensor is also used, as follows. Until the waste toner near full sensor detects the near-full state, the
1737
7.Detailed Descriptions
days remaining counter counts from 255 to 30 (days). Then the days remaining counter counts from 30
to 0 (days) after the waste toner near full sensor detects the near-full state.
• When the days remaining counter is faster than the actual waste toner bottle status;
If the waste toner near full sensor does not detect the near-full state when the days remaining
counter reaches 30 (days), this means that the days remaining counter is faster than the actual
waste toner bottle condition. Therefore, the days remaining counter stops counting when the
counter reaches 30 (days). Then, after the waste toner near full sensor detects the near-full state, it
restarts counting from 30 (days).
• When the days remaining counter is slower than the actual waste toner bottle status;
If the waste toner near full sensor detects the near-full state before the days remaining counter
reaches 30 (days), this means that the days remaining counter is slower than the actual waste
toner bottle condition. When the waste toner near full sensor detects the near-full state, the days
remaining counter is reset to 30 (days) and starts counting from there.
The machine does the following based on the value of the days remaining counter.
1. The waste toner bottle is replaced.
2. The days remaining counter starts counting from 255 (days).
3. When the waste toner near full sensor detects the near-full state, the days remaining counter starts
counting from 30 (days).
4. When the days remaining counter reaches 15 (days)*1, an @Remote warning is given (only in the
models with @Remote connection).
5. When the days remaining counter reaches 5 (days)*2, the machine displays the near-full state on
1738
7.Detailed Descriptions
The PM counter of the waste toner bottle can be checked with SP7-621-142. The PM counter indicates
the amount of toner (mg) in the waste toner bottle. The capacity of the waste toner bottle is 2280g. The
machine detects the near-full state when the toner in the waste toner bottle becomes 1850g.
1739
7.Detailed Descriptions
Electrical Components
Mechanism Descriptions
Block Diagram
1740
7.Detailed Descriptions
Board Location
No. Description
1 IOB
1741
7.Detailed Descriptions
1742
7.Detailed Descriptions
No. Description
1 DUB
No. Description
1 Toner Supply Board (TSB)
1743
7.Detailed Descriptions
• Controller Board
Controls whole machine systems such as:
• Printer / Scanner Control
• Memory Control (including the HDD)
• Operation Panel Control
This board has a Dip switch (default: on). But this should not be changed or used normally.
• SBU (Sensor Board Unit)
Converts a CCD scanned image into analog signals and also converts analog signals into digital
signals.
The SBU interfaces with the BICU and controls scanner internal I/O signals according to the
instructions from the CPU.
• Transfer Power Pack/Separation Power Pack
Generates the high voltage power supplies for the copy process.
• AC Transfer Power Pack (Pro C5200S/C5210S Only)
Generates the high voltage power source for AC transfer.
• TDRB (Transfer Driver Board)
Controls the ITB unit.
• LDB (Laser Diode Drive Board)
LD control board that drives the VCSEL.
• OPU
Controls the operation panel.
• AC Drive Board
Performs AC control for the fusing heater and the anti-condensation heater.
• PSU (Power Supply Unit)
Supplies DC power to each board. The major difference between PSU1 and PSU2 is as follows.
• PSU1: The converter for energy saving is fixed on the board (The standing substrate is fixed
on the board). The 24V power supply is cut off by an interlock switch*1.
• PSU2: The 24V power supply is not cut off by an interlock switch*1.
*1 Drawer safety switch 1/2, Vertical transport door set switch, Toner supply unit safety switch 1/2
• IH Inverter
Controls the power supply for the heating roller in the fusing unit and the IH coil.
• If the AC power cord is connected to an electrical outlet, power is supplied to the controller
board, the operation unit and other modules even when the main power is turned OFF.
Therefore, when performing maintenance work such as replacing parts, in addition to turning
off the main power with the push switch, always unplug the AC power cord.
1744
7.Detailed Descriptions
Item Specification
Memory Capacity 320GB×2
Memory Capacity for Document 170GB
Box
Store Capacity Storing only with the copy function (A4):
• BW Original: Approx. 15,000 pages
• Full-color Original: Approx. 5,000 pages
Storing only with the printer function (A4, 600dpi, 2bit):
• BW Original: Approx. 15,000 pages
• Full-color Original: Approx. 15,000 pages
Storing only with the scanner function (A4, 200dpi,
8bit/JPEG):
Approx. 15,000 pages
Document Box Capacity Max. 3,000 docs
Total Page Capacity in All Total 15,000 Pages
Functions
Page Capacity per document Max. 3,000 Pages /document
Memory Sort Capacity Approx. 40GB
- Details -
For copier: 25GB
For printer: 8GB
For printer interruption: 8GB
1745
7.Detailed Descriptions
Image Processing
Mechanism Descriptions
Block Diagram
Mechanism Details
Converts the image reflected from the front side of the originals into digital image signals, then
transmits them to the BICU.
Converts the image reflected from the back side of the originals into digital image signals, then
transmits them to the BICU.
SBU characteristics are stored in the BICU. These characteristic values need adjustment when the lens
1746
7.Detailed Descriptions
block is replaced.
• SP4-008-001 (Sub Scan Magnification Adj)
• SP4-010-001 (Sub Scan Registration Adj)
• SP4-011-001 (Main Scan Reg)
• SP4-688-002 (Scan Image Density Adjustment)
The scanned density difference between ADF and Book scanning can be adjusted with SP4-688-002
(Scan Image Density Adjustment). Adjusting the scanned density difference prevents image problems
such as dirty background.
Test Mode
SP4-699-001 generates a VPU test pattern as a diagnostic tool for SBU malfunctions. Press [Start]
after selecting the VPU test pattern in SP4-699-001. The VPU test pattern is output. The SBU state can
be checked with the output image.
SP4-699-001 (SBU Test Pattern Change)
Setting Value Description
0 (default) Image output
1 Test pattern output / Fixed-value output (682-digit)
2 Test pattern output / Horizontal gradation pattern (10-bit tone, 2-dots/step)
3 Test pattern output / Vertical gradation pattern (10-bit tone, 2-lines/step)
4 Test pattern output / Grid pattern (20mm x 10mm Grid pattern)
In the BICU, digital image signals that are transmitted from the SBU pass through processes such as
shading correction, line-to-line adjustment, and other image processing. Then image data is converted
into digital signals (2-bits/pixel, or 4-bits/pixel) and sent to the printer unit. (For details about image data
flow, see Block Diagram)
1747
7.Detailed Descriptions
Process Control
Mechanism Descriptions
In the electro-photographic process, the optimum parameters for maintaining image quality vary due to
the following factors: fluctuations in humidity and temperature, print mode (image dimensions, P/J), and
ageing and degradation of toner, developer, and drum. So the machine needs to determine the best
conditions by detecting the development ability (development gamma) of the machine at certain times.
Process control adjusts the image writing conditions for keeping image density steady. In this machine,
there are two types of process control as follows:
• Potential Control
Controls development potential, which is the gap between the drum potential and the development
bias, in order to keep the targeted tone.
• Toner Supply Control
Controls the toner supply amount for the development unit in order to keep the amount of toner that
attaches to the paper steady.
To perform process control correctly, the machine requires "initializing" at the initial installation or at
replacement of the development unit, developer, or drum. "Initializing" performs the parameter
initialization for the process control based on the behavior before aging of the development unit,
developer, and drum.
The potential control phase of process control involves many adjustments. Here is list of acronyms
used in the descriptions of process control adjustments.
Acronym Description
Vt TD sensor output value at the present time.
Vtref Target output value of the TD sensor.
Initial μ The value detected by the TD sensor (μ sensor) during the initialization. The initial μ
count count is a counting value which corresponds to the frequency. Therefore, the detected
counting value needs to be converted to Vt to be used for toner supply control.
Vsp ID sensor output value when ID sensor patterns are read.
Vsg ID sensor output value of the non-image part of the ITB.
Vpot Development potential (Vb-Vl)
Vb Development bias
Vd Charge potential
Vl Drum surface potential of the part illuminated by laser light during printing.
Vpl Target potential for adjusting the laser power (laser power is adjusted so that the drum
has this potential).
1748
7.Detailed Descriptions
Components
This machine uses four photoconductor development units (PCDUs) in tandem (one PCDU for each
color YMCK).
Potential Sensors
Potential sensors measure electrical potential on the surface of the drum, and are installed in the left
upper side of the drum unit (viewed from the front of the machine). Each color station has one. The
space [B] between the drum surface and the potential sensor [A] is 3 mm.
1749
7.Detailed Descriptions
ID / Music Sensor
• [A]: Front
• [B]: Center
• [C]: Rear
1750
7.Detailed Descriptions
• [A]: ITB
• , , : MUSIC Sensor = A sensor to detect MUSIC control patterns
• : ID Sensor = A sensor to measure the amount of toner that is attached to the ITB. This sensor is
used to detect the patterns for image adjustment that are made during potential control, and is also
used to detect ID patterns between sheets.
The temperature/humidity sensor located at the right rear side of the machine detects the temperature
and humidity. This sensor affects the potential control (developer agitation time, target developer
gamma determination) and charge current adjustment.
1751
7.Detailed Descriptions
Initial Settings
"Initial setting" means a process to initialize the process control parameters in order to keep the
targeted tone based on the behavior (before aging-degradation) of a new development unit, new
developer, and a new drum.
It’s essential for a machine to perform "Initial settings" correctly at the initial installation or at
replacement of a development unit, developer, or drum.
If not, the machine cannot perform the process control correctly and wrong image density (too thin or
thick) / toner scattering could occur.
When the drawer unit is closed after new developer has been installed successfully (SP3-024-001), the
TD sensor initial setting starts automatically and then the adjustments for image quality (charge current
adjustment, transfer current adjustment, potential control, MUSIC). This completes the machine set up
for operation.
The automatic initial setting result comes out on the following SP codes:
• SP3-025-001 (Dev Fill OK? - From Left: YMCK)
• SP3-031-001 (TD Sens Init OK? - From Left: YMCK)
• SP3-012-001 (ProCon OK? - History: Last)
1752
7.Detailed Descriptions
• MUSIC
Pressing [EXECUTE] starts the development auger to agitate the developer then initiates the TD
sensor.
Pressing [EXECUTE] develops the coverage pattern on the drum with the ITB retracted, so that it is
removed by the PCDU cleaning unit. The number of pages for the coverage pattern can be set with
SP3-032-021 (Force Tnr Supply: Exe). (Default: 6)
Pressing [EXECUTE] activates the toner supply clutch to move toner from the sub hopper to the
development unit. The amount of toner supplied with one execution of this SP can be set with SP3-050-
021 to 024 (Supply Quantity: KCMY). (Default: 1wt%)
Pressing [EXECUTE] moves toner from the toner bottle to the sub hopper.
Pressing [EXECUTE] for the following SP codes shown below executes process control/MUSIC.
• SP3-011-001 (Manual ProCon :Exe - Normal ProCon)
• SP3-011-002 (Manual ProCon :Exe - Density Adjustment)
• SP3-011-003 (Manual ProCon :Exe - ACC RunTime ProCon)
• SP3-011-004 (Manual ProCon :Exe - Full MUSIC)
• SP3-011-005 (Manual ProCon :Exe - Normal MUSIC)
Process Control
Potential Control
Potential control is executed at prescribed times to perform adjustments in the copy process in order to
achieve the target image density and produce the best quality images. These adjustments include
changing drum charge bias, development roller bias, and LD power.
Gradation patterns are created at prescribed intervals and read by the potential sensors ( , , ) and
the center ID/Music sensor ( ) on the ITB. The machine uses these readings to calculate development
gamma for each color.
1753
7.Detailed Descriptions
1754
7.Detailed Descriptions
1. Idle time ≥ Time threshold setting [min.] (SP3-530-001), and Page counter (SP3-530-007, 008) ≥
Interval setting [page] (SP3-530-005,006) at power ON
2. Ambient temperature changed ≥ Temperature threshold setting [°C] (SP3-530-002)
3. Relative humidity changed ≥ Relative humidity threshold setting [%RH] (SP3-530-003)
4. Absolute humidity changed ≥ Absolute humidity threshold setting [g/m3] (SP3-530-004)
• Result
The process control result is displayed in SP3-012-001 (ProCon OK?: History:Latest) with an 8-
digit code.
Two methods of toner supply are used with this machine to stabilize the amount of toner supplied to the
development unit.
• 0: Fixed supply
This mode fixes the amount of toner supplied to the development unit. Do not use this mode except
for troubleshooting.
• 4: DANC Supply (with Vtref Correction)
In this mode, the necessary amount of toner is supplied to the area where the toner is consumed in
the development unit, in order to steady the toner density in the development unit. Choose this
mode normally.
*DANC Supply: Divided image Active Noise Control (Image Divide Type Active Noise Control)
If the toner supply amount is calculated based on the amount of toner used in the covered areas only,
errors can increase, especially when changes occur in ambient temperature and drum characteristics.
This makes it difficult to control the toner supply amount only with the pixel count.
Therefore, the ID pattern is created on the ITB between sheets at a set interval (default: every 10
sheets). The machine controls the Vtref value using the readings of the ID sensor pattern on the ITB, to
stabilize the amount of toner on the ITB.
The ID pattern is created on the ITB between sheets at a set interval (default: every 10 sheets). The
machine controls the Vtref value using the readings of the ID sensor pattern on the ITB, to stabilize the
amount of toner on the ITB.
The target amount of toner on the ITB (M/A) is specified in the following SPs.
• K toner: SP3-620-001
1755
7.Detailed Descriptions
1756
7.Detailed Descriptions
Others
The proximity sensor [A] is located on the right upper corner of the main machine for MP C6503/C8003.
When the machine has been idle for a long period and the proximity sensor detects the presence of
anyone in front of the machine, it signals the machine to prepare itself for quick recovery to operation
status by shortening the time required for the machine to recover full operation (pre-recovery mode)
before the operator even touches the machine or operation panel. The proximity sensor employs
infrared and can detect the presence of the operator within an arc of 150° out to 1.8 m (6 ft.) away from
the front of the machine.
The following diagram shows the image of the area covered by the sensor on the floor.
Basically, the sensor detects the presence of an operator coming to the machine from the distance of
approximately 1.8 m. However, it may also detect the presence of someone walking across the area.
The infrared sensor’s detection performance is influenced by the ambient temperature. The sensing
distance increases in a lower ambient temperature and decreases in a higher ambient temperature.
As a guide, the sensing distance starts decreasing from 1.8 m when the ambient temperature starts
rising to 28 °C and above.
The sensor covers the area in front of the machine obliquely downward, detecting people’s legs (around
their knees). Its sensing performance is influenced by the kind of clothes such people are wearing.
1757
7.Detailed Descriptions
Sensor Operation
1758
7.Detailed Descriptions
Mode Description
Lower Finally, power is restored to the fusing lamps but maintained at low temperature.
Power
mode
Standby The machine is ready to operate.
mode
User Tools
The operation of the proximity sensor can be switched off and on with a User Tool setting.
1. Touch "User Tools" on the operation panel.
2. Select "Machine Features" > "System Settings" > "General Features" > "Human Detection Sensor".
You can switch the sensor off/on by selected "Disabled"/"Enabled". The default setting is
"Enabled".
Related SC Codes
Related SP Codes
There is one proximity sensor related SP code: SP5-102-203 Auto Detect: human detection check. This
is an on/off check.
• Enter "0" to switch the sensor off.
• Enter "1" to switch the sensor on.
This SP is used to check the operation of the sensor. It confirms that the sensor can be switched off and
on normally. (Default: On). This check can be used regardless of the User Tools setting. Even if the
1759
7.Detailed Descriptions
sensor is switched off with the User Tools setting, a check can be done with this SP code.
Energy Save
• With this timer, the user can choose when the machine will automatically enter and recover from
Energy Saver mode, as well as when it will turn on and off. The user does not need to worry about
turning the machine on or off in the morning, during lunchtime, or when leaving the office. As a
result, the machine contributes to overall energy saving in the user’s office environment, while at
the same time helping to improve work efficiency.
• The user is able to control how far the machine will power down, i.e. only to Energy Saver mode or
all the way off.
• With auto power ON and OFF, the user need not remember to turn the machine on and off every
day.
• Auto power ON:
Improves work efficiency, as machine warm-up is already completed by the time the user is
ready to begin work (the user is not made to wait).
• Auto power OFF:
Prevents unnecessary power consumption during after-work hours, saving power.
• The user can disable the "Weekly Timer", so that the machine power is not turned on automatically
during extended periods of inactivity (Ex. Summer holiday).
• A password can be set so that the machine can be used during this period if necessary, but only by
the select group who know this password.
• You can set the weekly timer setting on "Weekly Timer" in "Timer Settings" menu under
"System Settings" from "Machine Features" screen. You can access the "Machine Features"
screen with the following procedure below.
• Pro C5200S/C5210S:
1760
7.Detailed Descriptions
• When using the standard operation panel: Press the "User Tools" key.
• When using the smart operation panel: Press the "User Tools" icon, and then press
"Machine Features".
• MP C6503/C8003: Press the "User Tools" icon, and then press "Machine Features".
Overview
You can set the sleep mode timer setting on "Sleep Mode Timer" in "Timer Settings" menu under
"System Settings" from "Machine Features" screen. You can access the "Machine Features" screen
with the following procedure below.
• Pro C5200S/C5210S:
• When using the standard operation panel: Press the "User Tools" key.
• When using the smart operation panel: Press the "User Tools" icon, and then press "Machine
Features".
• MP C6503/C8003: Press the "User Tools" icon, and then press "Machine Features".
Details
After a specified period has passed, or [Energy Saver] is pressed, the machine enters Sleep mode in
order to conserve energy. Specify the time to elapse before Sleep mode.
• Pro C5200S/C5210S: 1 to 240 minutes (Default: 60 minutes)
• MP C6503/C8003: 1 to 60 minutes (Default: 60 minutes)
• Sleep Mode Timer may not work when error messages appear.
• Depending on which Embedded Software Architecture application is installed on it, the
machine might take longer than indicated to enter Sleep mode.
Overview
You can set Fusing Unit Off mode on "Fusing Unit Off Mode (Energy Saving) On/Off" in "Timer Settings"
menu under "System Settings" from "Machine Features" screen. You can access the "Machine
Features" screen with the following procedure below.
• Pro C5200S/C5210S:
• When using the standard operation panel: Press the "User Tools" key.
• When using the smart operation panel: Press the "User Tools" icon, and then press "Machine
Features".
• MP C6503/C8003: Press the "User Tools" icon, and then press "Machine Features".
Details
You can specify whether Fusing Unit Off mode is enabled or not. When Fusing Unit Off mode is
1761
7.Detailed Descriptions
enabled, the display is on but the fusing unit is off to save energy. The machine requires roughly the
same time as warm-up time to recover from Fusing Unit Off mode. The default setting is "Off".
• If "Fusing Unit Off Mode (Energy Saving) On/Off" is set to "On", you can specify when to exit
Fusing Unit Off mode and the time to elapse before entering Fusing Unit Off mode.
• If "Exit Fusing Unit Off Mode" is set to "On Printing", the machine exits Fusing Unit Off mode when
printing is performed.
• If "Exit Fusing Unit Off Mode" is set to "On Operating Control Panel", the machine exits Fusing Unit
Off mode when a key other than the copy function key is pressed on the control panel of the
machine.
If printing is performed with the copy function or a key in the copy function is pressed on the control
panel of the machine, the machine exits Fusing Unit Off mode regardless of this setting. If the timer is
set to [On], you can set the time from 10 seconds to 240 minutes, using the number keys.
Overview
You can specify the energy saving recovery setting for business application in "General Features" menu
under "System Settings" from "Machine Features" screen. You can access the "Machine Features"
screen with the following procedure below. For Pro C5200S/C5210S, you cannot use this feature when
using the standard operation panel.
• Pro C5200S/C5210S: Press the "User Tools" icon, and then press "Machine Features".
• MP C6503/C8003: Press the "User Tools" icon, and then press "Machine Features".
Details
Specify whether or not to enable low-energy recovery from Sleep mode to use applications independent
of the machine, such as Address Book Management or Browser.
If "On (Energy Saving)" is selected, it takes longer than usual to be ready to use the machine. The
default setting is "Off".
1762
7.Detailed Descriptions
State Description
1 Standby/Printing • State where normal operation is possible after warm-up
• State during printing
2 Printing State when printing with the backlight of the operation panel turned off
state/Panel OFF
3 Fusing OFF State where the Standby Fusing OFF state is entered when the time set
with the "Fusing Unit Off Mode (Energy Saving) On/Off" setting of the User
Tools has elapsed.
• State where the operation panel is flashing and the fusing heater is
OFF.
1763
7.Detailed Descriptions
State Description
• The bottom plate of the paper feed tray is raised.
4 Quiet state Quiet state is entered when the Energy Saving key is pressed or the time
set with the "Sleep Mode Timer" of the User Tools has elapsed. This is a
temporary energy saving state before entering sleep mode.
• Basically, no homing (initialization) of peripheral devices is performed.
• The bottom plate of the paper feed tray is raised.
• The fusing heater is turned OFF.
5 Engine OFF Entered from Quiet state with internal timer.
(Sleep mode) • The relevant power systems (24V, 12V, 5V) are turned OFF at the
same time as the fusing heater.
• When receiving a fax or printing is performed in engine OFF state,
warm-up is started and printing is performed while the backlight of the
operation panel is turned OFF.
6 STR state Supplying of power and clock to the CPU and peripheral chips on the
(Sleep mode) controller board is stopped.
7 Pre-recovery The Pre-recovery state is entered from STR state when the Proximity
Sensor detects presence of a person.
This is the Energy Saving state where the power of the operation panel and
HDD is ON and the power of the engine is OFF, but the backlight of the
operation panel LCD is off.
Device state for each Energy Saving state
State Energy Saving Operation Engine HDD CTL
LED panel (Printer/Scanner)
LCD
Standby/Printing ON ON ON ON ON
Printing state/Panel ON OFF ON ON ON
OFF (Only scanner is in Quiet
state)
Fusing OFF ON ON ON ON ON
(Both printer/scanner are in
Quiet state)
Quiet state ON OFF ON ON ON
ON*1 (Both printer/scanner are in
Quiet state)
Engine OFF Blinking Sleep OFF OFF ON
gradually OFF or ON*1 ON*1
ON*1
1764
7.Detailed Descriptions
Transition of operation panel to Energy Saving when [Energy Saving Recvry. for Business
Applicatn.] is [On (Energy Saving)]
Normally, the Energy Saving state of the operation panel LCD changes in step with the energy saving
state of the MFP/LP main unit, but to support the scenario where an application that does not use the
engine (printer/scanner) is executed from the operation panel, the Energy Saving state of the operation
panel is transitioned through the three states ON, OFF, and Sleep with its internal timer when "Energy
Saving Recvry. for Business Applicatn." is "On" (Energy Saving).
The up time for each power state of the machine can be checked with SP8-961 (Electricity Status). It is
also output on the SMC sheet.
SP Name Description
SP8-961- Ctrl Standby Time Cumulative time of Engine OFF mode, Quiet mode, and Standby
001 mode
SP8-961- STR Time Cumulative time of STR mode
002
SP8-961- Main Power Off Cumulative time of state in which the power plug is connected to
003 Time the outlet but the main power is off
SP8-961- Reading and Cumulative time of state in which both the plotter engine and
004 Printing Time scanner engine are running or warming up
SP8-961- Printing Time Cumulative time of the state in which the plotter engine is running
005
SP8-961- Reading Time Cumulative time of the state in which the scanner engine is running
006
SP8-961- Eng Waiting Time Cumulative time of state in which the power state of the engine is
007 Standby state
SP8-961- Low Power State Not used for this machine
008 Time
SP8-961- Quiet State Time Cumulative time of the state in which the power state of the engine
1765
7.Detailed Descriptions
SP Name Description
009 is Quiet state
SP8-961- Heater Off State Cumulative time of the state in which the power state of the engine
010 Time is Fusing OFF state
SP8-961- LCD on Time Cumulative time of the state in which the backlight of the LCD is
011 on.
SP8-941 (Machine Status) keeps a record of the amount of time that the machine spends in each
mode.
SP Name Description
SP8-941- Operation Cumulative time of the state in which the engine state notification is
001 Time enabled.
The state in which the engine is not running (such as when storing to
HD only with the controller) is excluded from the running state.
SP8-941- Standby Cumulative time of the state in which the engine state is not running.
002 Time
SP8-941- Low Power Not used for this machine
003 Time
SP8-941- Sleep mode Cumulative time in Sleep Mode state.
004 time
SP8-941- Off Mode Cumulative time in which the Energy Saving state of the device is
005 Time Engine OFF state.
SP8-941- Down time Cumulative time in which the device is disabled because itself or its
006 to 009 component is in the following state.
• SP8-941-006: SC (excluding mode SC)
• SP8-941-007: Jam (plotter)
• SP8-941-008: Jam (scanner)
• SP8-941-009: Supply/PM unit end
With this data, and the power consumption values from the specifications, we can estimate the amount
of energy that is used by the machine.
This should only be used as a reference value, because the power consumption specifications are
measured in a controlled environment with a constant power supply.
To get an exact measurement at the customer’s site, a watt meter must be used to measure the actual
energy consumed.
To use SP8-941 to calculate the energy consumed:
• At the start of the measurement period, read the values of SP8-941-001 to 005.
• At the end of the measurement period, read the values of SP8-941-001 to 005 again.
• Find the amount of time spent in each mode (subtract the earlier measurement from the later
1766
7.Detailed Descriptions
measurement).
• Multiply this by the power consumption spec for each mode.
• Convert the result to kWh (kilowatt hours)
When J058 (Bypass Paper Feed Sensor: Lag Jam) or J098 (Paper thickness error) occurred, the
machine transfers the paper, which causes the paper jam, to the purge unit [B]. The preceding paper of
the jammed paper is also transferred to the purge unit [B] or the exit tray [C]. It makes easier to remove
the remained paper by ejecting paper in the machine.
• J058 (Bypass Paper Feed Sensor: Lag Jam): When a paper in the different size from the setting in
the operation panel is transferred.
• J098 (Paper thickness error): When a paper in the different thickness from the setting in the
operation panel is transferred.
When a paper cannot be transferred to the purge unit or the exit tray according to conditions, the paper
stops inside or before the drawer unit.
The paper, which causes a jam, is controlled according to the cause of the paper jam as follows.
J058 (Bypass Paper Feed Sensor: Lag Jam)
1767
7.Detailed Descriptions
Paper Removing Control for the Paper Other Than Jammed Paper
The paper except the paper, which causes a paper jam, is controlled as follows.
• Proceeding paper:
• Not in the duplex unit: Transfer to the exit tray
• Inside the duplex unit: Transfer to the purge unit, or stop inside the drawer unit
• Succeeding paper: Stop inside or before the drawer unit. When the paper is in the standby
position, stop on the spot.
The Auto Discovery function gathers the usage information of devices which do not support @Remote
service (including competitor's machines) on the network, and sends the information to the @Remote
server.
This means the customer and CE can get visualized information about devices which do not support
@Remote service (including competitor's machines).
1768
7.Detailed Descriptions
1769
7.Detailed Descriptions
• Device IP address
• Controller version
• NIC version
• Language code
• Country/Area code
• Counter (Total, Printer, Fax, Copy)
• Device status information (Toner, Jam, Cover, SC, Staple)
7. Downloading the machine usage information from the @Remote server
The Auto Discovery function can be set up with SP mode. The user can also set up the Auto Discovery
function from the operation panel or WIM.
The settings can be performed with the following: "Machine Features" screen -> "System Settings" ->
"Administrator Tools" -> "Auto Discovery". You can access the "Machine Features" screen with the
following procedure below.
1770
7.Detailed Descriptions
• Pro C5200S/C5210S:
• When using the standard operation panel: Press the "User Tools" key.
• When using the smart operation panel: Press the "User Tools" icon, and the press "Machine
Features".
• MP C6503/C8003: Press the "User Tools" icon, and the press "Machine Features".
Each firmware module (such as System/Copy, Engine, etc.) used to be updated individually. However,
an all-inclusive firmware package (package_ALL) is now available.
There are three ways to update using the firmware package.
• Package Firmware Update via a network: SFU (Smart Firmware Update)
The CE can download the firmware package to the machine via a network, and then update the
firmware. For details, see Firmware Update (Smart Firmware Update).
• Package Firmware Update via a network: ARFU (Auto Remote Firmware Update)
The machine automatically checks the server for the latest firmware package version. If the version
of the package on the global server is later than that of the package installed on the machine, or if
the machine has not downloaded the firmware package, the machine downloads the latest
package to update the machine's firmware. For details, see Firmware Update (Auto Remote
Firmware Update).
• Package Firmware Update with an SD card
Package firmware update can be performed using the conventional SD card method by writing the
packaged firmware directly to the SD card. For details, see Firmware Update (SD Card).
1771
MP C6503/C8003, Pro
C5200S/C5210S
Machine Code:
D257/D258/D260/D261
Appendices
Ver 1.01
1
Types of SP Modes .............................................................................................................................. 49
SP Mode Button Summary ............................................................................................................... 49
Switching Between SP Mode and Copy Mode for Test Printing ...................................................... 50
Selecting the Program Number ........................................................................................................ 50
Service Mode Lock/Unlock ............................................................................................................... 51
Remarks............................................................................................................................................ 52
Service Table Key ................................................................................................................................ 54
SP Group 1000-01................................................................................................................................ 55
SP Group 1000-02.............................................................................................................................. 117
SP Group 1000-03.............................................................................................................................. 182
SP Group 1000-04.............................................................................................................................. 256
SP Group 1000-05.............................................................................................................................. 338
SP Group 1000-06.............................................................................................................................. 390
SP Group 1000-07.............................................................................................................................. 476
SP Group 2000-01.............................................................................................................................. 496
SP Group 2000-02.............................................................................................................................. 546
SP Group 2000-03.............................................................................................................................. 591
SP Group 2000-04.............................................................................................................................. 659
SP Group 3000-01.............................................................................................................................. 723
SP Group 3000-02.............................................................................................................................. 800
SP Group 4000 ................................................................................................................................... 825
SP Group 5000-01.............................................................................................................................. 845
SP Group 5000-02.............................................................................................................................. 929
SP Group 6000 ................................................................................................................................... 965
SP Group 7000-01............................................................................................................................ 1068
SP Group 7000-02............................................................................................................................ 1138
SP Group 7000-03............................................................................................................................ 1192
SP Group 8000-01............................................................................................................................ 1276
SP Group 8000-02............................................................................................................................ 1323
Input and Output Check.................................................................................................................... 1360
Input Check Table......................................................................................................................... 1360
Output Check Table ...................................................................................................................... 1399
Printer SP Mode ............................................................................................................................... 1425
SP1-XXX ....................................................................................................................................... 1425
Scanner SP Mode ............................................................................................................................ 1436
SP1-XXX (System and Others) .................................................................................................... 1436
SP2-XXX (Scanning-image quality) ............................................................................................. 1438
4. Device Software Configuration ..................................................................................................... 1440
Printing Features .............................................................................................................................. 1440
2
Behavior of USB Printer Detection ............................................................................................... 1440
Auto PDL Detection Function ....................................................................................................... 1440
Print Images Rotation ................................................................................................................... 1444
PJL USTATUS .............................................................................................................................. 1445
Scanner Features ............................................................................................................................. 1448
Display settings of recently used scan destination....................................................................... 1448
The Setting of SMTP authentication in Scan to Email ................................................................. 1448
The Qualification Switching of Scan to Folder ............................................................................. 1450
Management Features ..................................................................................................................... 1452
How to Disable the Document Server Function ........................................................................... 1452
Security Features ............................................................................................................................. 1453
How to Restrict Access to the WIM Job Menu ............................................................................. 1453
How to Restrict Web Image Monitor Access to the Document Server ........................................ 1453
User Authentication for Specific MFP Applications ...................................................................... 1454
3
1.Specifications
1. Specifications
General Specifications
Item MP C6503/C8003 Pro C5200S/5210S
Configuration: Console
CPU: 1.91GHz
RAM: 4.0
Color Support: Full Color
Photoreceptor Type: OPC Drum
Copy System: Laser Beam Electrostatic Transfer System
Develop System: Dry Two-component Triple Shaft O.D. Cycle Develop System
Fusing: Oil-less Belt-fusing Method
Original Holder type: Fixed Holder
Original Scanning Flat Scanning System
System:
First copy time: MP C6503 Pro C5200S
• Full color: 7.5 • Full color: 10.6
seconds or less seconds or less
• B&W: 5.5 seconds or • B&W: 9.2 seconds or
less less
MP C8003 Pro C5210S
• Full color: 6.4 • Full color: 9.6
seconds or less seconds or less
• B&W: 4.8 seconds or • B&W: 8.1 seconds or
less less
Copying speed: MP C6503: 65 Pages/Min. (Black & MP C6503: 65 Pages/Min. (Black &
White, Color) White, Color)
MP C8003: 80 Pages/Min.(Black & MP C8003: 80 Pages/Min.(Black &
White, Color) White, Color)
Warm-up time: MP C6503 (EU): 43.1 seconds 119 seconds
(Temperature:20C/68F, MP C6503
NRP) (NA/AP/CHN/TWN/KOR): 38.2
seconds
MP C8003: 38.2 seconds
Originals: Sheet/Book/Object
Maximum original size: 297 x 432mm/11.7" x17" (Both Book, ADF):A3/DLT Full size
(Max. placeable original size: 11" x 17")
4
1.Specifications
7
1.Specifications
ADF
Paper 35kg 40kg 45kg 55kg 70kg 90kg 110kg Tracing Remarks
Thickness paper
40.7 46.5 52.8 64 81.4 105 128
g/m2 g/m2 g/m2 g/m2 g/m2 g/m2 g/m2
11lbs 12.5lbs 14lbs 17lbs 22lbs 28lbs 34lbs TA, TE,
TC
Quantity 250 Sheets 250 Sheets 220 150 125 1 *1:
Sheets Sheets Sheets Sheet Possible
Original A3/A4 *2 *1 *1 *1 *1 *3 in simplex
Size A5 *2 *1 *1 *1 *1 - and
B4/B5 *2 *1 *1 *1 *1 *3 duplex
B6P - *2 *2 *2 *2 - *2:
DLT *2 *1 *1 *1 *1 - Simplex
LT *2 *1 *1 *1 *1 - only
F *2 *1 *1 *1 *1 - Simplex
only
9
1.Specifications
(*2) For detected originals smaller then HLT/A5 size, with SP mode either "Detect as HLT/A5" or "Detect
as Unknown" can be selected. (Default is "Detect as unknown")
(*4) Switch Book scanner original detection between ""K"" series and ""A/B"" series from SP mode.
(Cannot set both to detect, but 8K/16K detect can be set from SP mode)
• 8K SEF -> Switch between A3, B4 SEF
• 16K SEF -> Switch between A4, A5, B5 SEF
• 16K LEF -> Switch between A4, A5, B5 LEF - Cannot switch only either size.
(*5) Can be selected by switching A4/LT from SP mode:
• Standard detect (default)
• When placing A4/LT size LEF, detect as A4 LEF. When placing SEF, detect as LT SEF.
• When placing A4/LT size LEF, detect as LT LEF. When placing SEF, detect as A4 SEF.
Paper Feed
Paper Exit
12
1.Specifications
13
1.Specifications
Software Accessories
Printer Drivers
Some applications may require installation of the PCL 5c printer driver. In this case, you can install PCL
5c without having to install PCL 6.
14
1.Specifications
15
1.Specifications
Optional Equipment
Item Specification
Paper Size: Finisher / A3 SEF, A4 LEF/SEF, A5 LEF/SEF, A6 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS
Upper Tray LEF/SEF, B6 JIS SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 8.5 x 14 SEF, 8.5 x 13 SEF, 8.5 x 11
LEF/SEF, 8.25 x 14 SEF, 8.25 x 13 SEF, 8 x 13 SEF, 7.25 x 10.5
LEF/SEF, 5.5 x 8.5 LEF/SEF, 8K SEF, 16K LEF/SEF, 12 x 18 SEF, 11 x
15 SEF, 11 x 14 SEF, 10 x 15 SEF, 10 x 14 SEF, 13 x 19.2 SEF, 13 x 19
SEF, 12.6 x 19.2 SEF, 12.6 x 18.5 SEF, 13 x 18 SEF, SRA3 SEF, SRA4
LEF/SEF, 8.5 x 13.4 SEF, 8 x 10 SEF*1, 226 x 310 mm LEF/SEF*1, 310
x 432 mm SEF*1, 4.2 x 5.5SEF*1, custom size
*1 Pro C5200S/C5210S only.
Finisher / A3 SEF, A4 LEF/SEF, A5 LEF/SEF, A6 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS
Shift Tray LEF/SEF, B6 JIS SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 8.5 x 14 SEF, 8.5 x 13 SEF, 8.5 x 11
LEF/SEF, 8.25 x 14 SEF, 8.25 x 13 SEF, 8 x 13 SEF, 7.25 x 10.5
LEF/SEF, 5.5 x 8.5 LEF/SEF, 8K SEF, 16K LEF/SEF, 12 x 18 SEF, 11 x
15 SEF, 11 x 14 SEF, 10 x 15 SEF, 10 x 14 SEF, 13 x 19.2 SEF, 13 x 19
SEF, 12.6 x 19.2 SEF, 12.6 x 18.5 SEF, 13 x 18 SEF, SRA3 SEF, SRA4
LEF/SEF, 8.5 x 13.4 SEF, 8 x 10 SEF*1, 226 x 310 mm LEF/SEF*1, 310
x 432 mm SEF*1, custom size
*1 Pro C5200S/C5210S only.
Finisher / A3 SEF, A4 LEF/SEF, A5 LEF/SEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS LEF/SEF, 11 x 17
Shift Tray / SEF, 8.5 x 14 SEF, 8.5 x 13 SEF, 8.5 x 11 LEF/SEF, 8.25 x 14 SEF, 8.25
Shifting x 13 SEF, 8 x 13 SEF, 7.25 x 10.5 LEF/SEF, 5.5 x 8.5 LEF/SEF, 8K SEF,
16K LEF/SEF, 12 x 18 SEF, 11 x 15 SEF, 11 x 14 SEF, 10 x 15 SEF, 10 x
14 SEF, SRA4 SEF, 8 x 10 SEF*1, 226 x 310 mm SEF*1, 8.5 x 13.4
SEF*1, custom size
*1 Pro C5200S/C5210S only.
Staple A3 SEF, A4 LEF/SEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS LEF/SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 81/2 x
14 SEF, 81/2 x 13 SEF, 81/2 x 11 LEF/SEF, 81/4 x 14 SEF, 81/4 x 13
SEF, 8 x 13 SEF, 71/4 x 101/2 LEF/SEF, 8K SEF, 16K LEF/SEF, 11 x 15
SEF, 11 x 14 SEF, 10 x 15 SEF, 10 x 14 SEF, 81/2 x 132/5 SEF, 226 x
310 mm*1 SEF
*1 Pro C5200S/C5210S only.
Paper Finisher / 52.3 – 216.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb. Bond – 79.9 lb. Cover)
Thickness: Upper Tray
Finisher / 52.3 – 360.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb. Bond–198.0 lb. Index)
16
1.Specifications
Item Specification
Shift Tray
Staple 52.3 – 105.0 g/m2 (14.0 – 28.0 lb. Bond)
You can use two sheets of paper weighing up to 256 g/m2 (140 lb. Index)
per set as cover sheets.
Capacity: Finisher / • A4, 8.5 x 11 or smaller: 250 sheets
Upper Tray • B4, 8.5 x 14 or larger: 50 sheets
Finisher / • A4 LEF, 8 1/2 x 11 LEF: 3,000 sheets
Shift Tray • A3 SEF, B4 SEF, A4 SEF, B5, 11 x 17 SEF, 8.5 x 14 SEF,
8.5 x 11 SEF, 12 x 18 SEF, SRA3 SEF, 13 x 19.2 SEF:
1,500 sheets
• A5 LEF: 500 sheets
• A5 SEF, B6 SEF, 5.5 x 8.5 LEF: 100 sheets
• Paper that has a horizontal length of 487.8–700.0 mm
(19.21–27.56 inches) (with the output tray for banner
sheet): 50 sheets
Staple • Without Mixed Sizes:
65 sheets: A3 SEF, A4 LEF/SEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS LEF/SEF, 11 x
17 SEF, 8.5 x 14 SEF, 8.5 x 13 SEF, 8.5 x 11 LEF/SEF, 8.25 x 14
SEF, 8.25 x 13 SEF, 8 x 13 SEF, 7.25 x 10.5 LEF/SEF, 11 x 15 SEF,
11 x 14 SEF, 10 x 15 SEF, 10 x 14 SEF, 8K SEF, 16K LEF/SEF, 8.5 x
132/5 SEF, 226 x 310 mm SEF*1
*1 Pro C5200S/C5210S only.
• With Mixed Sizes: 65 sheets (A3 SEF/A4 LEF, B4 JIS
SEF/B5 JIS LEF, 11 x 17 SEF/8.5 x 11 LEF)
Staple • A4 LEF, 8.5 x 11 LEF: Binding 20 to 65 sheets...150 to 46
Output Sets, Binding 2 to 19 sheets...150 Sets
• A4 SEF, B5, 8.5 x 11 SEF: Binding 15 to 65 sheets...100 to
23 Sets, Binding 2 to 14 sheets...100 Sets
• Other Paper Size: Binding 15 to 65 sheets...100 to 23 Sets,
Binding 2 to 14 sheets...100 Sets
• Mixed Size: Binding 2 to 65 sheets...23 Sets (A3 SEF/A4
LEF, B4 SEF/B5 LEF, 11 x 17 SEF/8.5 x 11 LEF)
Power Source: Draw from main unit
Power Consumption: 67 W or less
Weight: • Without output tray for banner sheet:
Approx. 38 kg (83.8 lb.) (without punch unit)
Approx. 41 kg (90.4 lb.) (with punch unit)
• With output tray for banner sheet:
17
1.Specifications
Item Specification
Approx. 40 kg (88.2 lb.) (without punch unit)
Approx. 43 kg (94.8 lb.) (with punch unit)
Dimensions (W x D x H): • Without output tray for banner sheet:
657 x 730 x 980 mm (25.9 x 28.8 x 38.6 inches) (except protruding
parts)
• With output tray for banner sheet:
1,037 × 730 × 1,103 mm (40.9 × 28.8 × 43.5 inches)
Item Specification
Paper Size: Finisher / A3 SEF, A4 LEF/SEF, A5 LEF/SEF, A6 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS
Upper Tray LEF/SEF, B6 JIS SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 8.5 x 14 SEF, 8.5 x 13 SEF, 8.5 x 11
LEF/SEF, 8.25 x 14 SEF, 8.25 x 13 SEF, 8 x 13 SEF, 7.25 x 10.5
LEF/SEF, 5.5 x 8.5 LEF/SEF, 8K SEF, 16K LEF/SEF, 12 x 18 SEF, 11 x
15 SEF, 11 x 14 SEF, 10 x 15 SEF, 10 x 14 SEF, 13 x 19.2 SEF, 13 x 19
SEF, 12.6 x 19.2 SEF, 12.6 x 18.5 SEF, 13 x 18 SEF, SRA3 SEF, SRA4
LEF/SEF, 8.5 x 13.4 SEF, 8 x 10 SEF*1, 226 x 310 mm LEF/SEF*1, 310
x 432 mm SEF*1, 4.2 x 5.5SEF*1, custom size
*1 Pro C5200S/C5210S only.
Finisher / A3 SEF, A4 LEF/SEF, A5 LEF/SEF, A6 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS
Shift Tray LEF/SEF, B6 JIS SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 8.5 x 14 SEF, 8.5 x 13 SEF, 8.5 x 11
LEF/SEF, 8.25 x 14 SEF, 8.25 x 13 SEF, 8 x 13 SEF, 7.25 x 10.5
LEF/SEF, 5.5 x 8.5 LEF/SEF, 8K SEF, 16K LEF/SEF, 12 x 18 SEF, 11 x
15 SEF, 11 x 14 SEF, 10 x 15 SEF, 10 x 14 SEF, 13 x 19.2 SEF, 13 x 19
SEF, 12.6 x 19.2 SEF, 12.6 x 18.5 SEF, 13 x 18 SEF, SRA3 SEF, SRA4
LEF/SEF, 8.5 x 13.4 SEF, 8 x 10 SEF*1, 226 x 310 mm LEF/SEF*1, 310
x 432 mm SEF*1, custom size
*1 Pro C5200S/C5210S only.
Finisher / A3 SEF, A4 LEF/SEF, A5 LEF/SEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS LEF/SEF, 11 x 17
Shift Tray / SEF, 8.5 x 14 SEF, 8.5 x 13 SEF, 8.5 x 11 LEF/SEF, 8.25 x 14 SEF, 8.25
Shifting x 13 SEF, 8 x 13 SEF, 7.25 x 10.5 LEF/SEF, 5.5 x 8.5 LEF/SEF, 8K SEF,
16K LEF/SEF, 12 x 18 SEF, 11 x 15 SEF, 11 x 14 SEF, 10 x 15 SEF, 10 x
14 SEF, SRA4 SEF, 8 x 10 SEF*1, 226 x 310 mm SEF*1, 8.5 x 13.4
SEF*1, custom size
*1 Pro C5200S/C5210S only.
Staple A3 SEF, A4 LEF/SEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS LEF/SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 81/2 x
14 SEF, 81/2 x 13 SEF, 81/2 x 11 LEF/SEF, 81/4 x 14 SEF, 81/4 x 13
18
1.Specifications
Item Specification
SEF, 8 x 13 SEF, 71/4 x 101/2 LEF/SEF, 8K SEF, 16K LEF/SEF, 11 x 15
SEF, 11 x 14 SEF, 10 x 15 SEF, 10 x 14 SEF, 81/2 x 132/5 SEF, 226 x
310 mm*1 SEF
*1 Pro C5200S/C5210S only.
Saddle A3 SEF, A4 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 8.5 x 14 SEF,
RTB 34
New information stitch 8.5 x 11 SEF, 8.25 x 14 SEF, 8.25 x 13 SEF, 12 x 18 SEF, 11 x 15 SEF,
staple 11 x 14 SEF, 10 x 15 SEF, 10 x 14 SEF, 13 x 18 SEF, SRA4 SEF, SRA3
SEF, 8.5 x 13.4 SEF
Half fold A3 SEF, A4 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 8.5 x 14 SEF,
8.5 x 11 SEF, 8.25 x 14 SEF, 8.25 x 13 SEF, 12 x 18 SEF, 11 x 15 SEF,
11 x 14 SEF, 10 x 15 SEF, 10 x 14 SEF, 13 x 18 SEF, SRA4 SEF, SRA3
SEF, 8.5 x 13.4 SEF
Paper Finisher / 52.3 – 216.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb. Bond – 79.9 lb. Cover)
Thickness: Upper Tray
Finisher / 52.3 – 360.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb. Bond–198.0 lb. Index)
Shift Tray
Staple 52.3 – 105.0 g/m2 (14.0 – 28.0 lb. Bond)
You can use two sheets of paper weighing up to 256 g/m2 (140 lb. Index)
per set as cover sheets.
Saddle 64.0 – 105.0 g/m2 (17.1 – 28.0 lb. Bond)
stitch You can use a sheet of paper weighing up to 216 g/m2 (79.9 lb. Cover)
per set as a cover sheet.
Half fold • 1 sheet: 64.0 – 216.0 g/m2 (17.1 lb. Bond – 79.9 lb. Cover)
• 2–5 sheets: 64.0 – 105.0 g/m2 (17.1 – 28.0 lb. Bond)
Capacity: Finisher / • A4, 8.5 x 11 or smaller: 250 sheets
Upper Tray • B4, 8.5 x 14 or larger: 50 sheets
Finisher / • A4 LEF, 8 1/2 x 11 LEF: 2,000 sheets
Shift Tray • A3 SEF, B4 SEF, A4 SEF, B5, 11 x 17 SEF, 8.5 x 14 SEF,
8.5 x 11 SEF, 12 x 18 SEF, SRA3 SEF, 13 x 19.2 SEF:
1,000 sheets
• A5 LEF: 500 sheets
• A5 SEF, B6 SEF, 5.5 x 8.5 LEF: 100 sheets
• Paper that has a horizontal length of 487.8–700.0 mm
(19.21–27.56 inches) (with the output tray for banner
sheet): 50 sheets
Staple • Without Mixed Sizes:
65 sheets: A3 SEF, A4 LEF/SEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS LEF/SEF, 11 x
17 SEF, 8.5 x 14 SEF, 8.5 x 13 SEF, 8.5 x 11 LEF/SEF, 8.25 x 14
19
1.Specifications
Item Specification
SEF, 8.25 x 13 SEF, 8 x 13 SEF, 7.25 x 10.5 LEF/SEF, 11 x 15 SEF,
11 x 14 SEF, 10 x 15 SEF, 10 x 14 SEF, 8K SEF, 16K LEF/SEF, 8.5 x
132/5 SEF, 226 x 310 mm SEF*1
*1 Pro C5200S/C5210S only.
• With Mixed Sizes: 65 sheets (A3 SEF/A4 LEF, B4 JIS
SEF/B5 JIS LEF, 11 x 17 SEF/8.5 x 11 LEF)
Staple • A4 LEF, 8.5 x 11 LEF: Binding 13 to 65 sheets...150 to 30
Output Sets, Binding 2 to 12 sheets...150 Sets
• A4 SEF, B5, 8.5 x 11 SEF: Binding 10 to 65 sheets...100 to
15 Sets, Binding 2 to 9 sheets...100 Sets
• Other Paper Size: Binding 10 to 65 sheets...100 to 10 Sets,
Binding 2 to 9 sheets...100 Sets
• Mixed Size: Binding 2 to 65 sheets...23 Sets (A3 SEF/A4
LEF, B4 SEF/B5 LEF, 11 x 17 SEF/8.5 x 11 LEF)
Saddle MP C6503/C8003:
stitch • Paper between 64.0 g/m2 (17.1 lb. Bond) and 74.0 g/m2
staple (19.7 lb. Bond): 1 set (20 sheets)
• Paper between 74.1 g/m2 (19.8 lb. Bond) and 105.0 g/m2
(28.0 lb. Bond): 1 set (10 sheets)
Pro C5200S/C5210S:
• Paper between 64.0 g/m2 (17.1 lb. Bond) and 80.9 g/m2
(21.9 lb. Bond): 1 set (20 sheets)
• Paper between 81.0 g/m2 (22.0 lb. Bond) and 105.0 g/m2
(28.0 lb. Bond): 1 set (10 sheets)
Saddle • 2–5 sheets: 30 sets
stitch • 6–10 sheets: 15 sets
staple • 11–15 sheets: 10 sets
Output • 16–20 sheets: 6 sets
Power Source: Draw from main unit
Power Consumption: 67 W or less
Weight: • Without output tray for banner sheet:
Approx. 58 kg (127.9 lb.) (without punch unit)
Approx. 61 kg (134.5lb.) (with punch unit)
• With output tray for banner sheet:
Approx. 60 kg (132.3 lb.) (without punch unit)
Approx. 63 kg (138.9 lb.) (with punch unit)
Dimensions (W x D x H): • Without output tray for banner sheet:
657 x 730 x 980 mm (25.9 x 28.8 x 38.6 inches) (except protruding
20
1.Specifications
Item Specification
parts)
• With output tray for banner sheet:
1,037 × 730 × 1,103 mm (40.9 × 28.8 × 43.5 inches)
Paper size:
Paper weight:
21
1.Specifications
Item Specification
Paper Size: Finisher / • Without Z-Folding
Upper Tray A3 SEF, A4, A5, A6 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS, B6 JIS SEF, 11 x 17
SEF, 8.5 x 14 SEF, 8 x 13 SEF, 8.5 x 11, 8.25 x 14 SEF, 8.25 x 13
SEF, 8 x 13 SEF, 7.25 x 10.5, 5.5 x 8.5, 8K SEF, 16K, 12 x 18 SEF,
11 x 15 SEF, 11 x 14 SEF, 10 x 15 SEF, 10 x 14 SEF, 13 x 19.2 SEF,
13 x 19 SEF, 12.6 x 19.2 SEF, 12.6 x 18.5 SEF, 13 x 18 SEF, SRA3
SEF, SRA4, 8.5 x 13.4 SEF, Custom size
• With Z-Folding
A3 SEF, A4 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 8.5 x 14 LEF, 8.5 x 11
LEF
Finisher / • Without Z-Folding
Shift Tray A3 SEF, A4, A5, A6 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS, B6 JIS SEF, 11 x 17
SEF, 8.5 x 14 SEF, 8 x 13 SEF, 8.5 x 11, 8.25 x 14 SEF, 8.25 x 13
SEF, 8 x 13 SEF, 7.25 x 10.5, 5.5 x 8.5, 8K SEF, 16K, 12 x 18 SEF,
11 x 15 SEF, 11 x 14 SEF, 10 x 15 SEF, 10 x 14 SEF, 13 x 19.2 SEF,
13 x 19 SEF, 12.6 x 19.2 SEF, 12.6 x 18.5 SEF, 13 x 18 SEF, SRA3
SEF, SRA4, 8.5 x 13.4 SEF, Custom size
• With Z-Folding
A3 SEF, A4 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 8.5 x 14 LEF, 8.5 x 11
LEF
Paper Size: Finisher / A3 SEF, A4, A5, A6 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS, B6 JIS SEF, 11 x 17 SEF,
Shift Tray / 8.5 x 14 SEF, 8 x 13 SEF, 8.5 x 11, 8.25 x 14 SEF, 8.25 x 13 SEF, 8 x 13
Shifting SEF, 7.25 x 10.5, 5.5 x 8.5, 8K SEF, 16K, 12 x 18 SEF, 11 x 15 SEF, 11 x
14 SEF, 10 x 15 SEF, 10 x 14 SEF, 13 x 19.2 SEF, 13 x 19 SEF, 12.6 x
19.2 SEF, 12.6 x 18.5 SEF, 13 x 18 SEF, SRA3 SEF, SRA4, 8.5 x 13.4
SEF, Custom size
Staple • Without Z-Folding
A3 SEF, A4, B4 JIS SEF, B5, 11 x 17 SEF, 8.5 x 14 SEF, 8 x 13 SEF,
8.5 x 11, 8.25 x 14 SEF, 8.25 x 13 SEF, 8 x 13 SEF, 7.25 x 10.5, 8K
SEF, 16K, 11 x 15 SEF, 11 x 14 SEF, 10 x 15 SEF, 10 x 14 SEF, 8.5
x 13.4 SEF
• With Z-Folding
A3 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, 11 x 17 SEF
• With Z-Folding, Mixed Size
A3 SEF and A4 LEF
B4 JIS SEF and B5 JIS LEF
22
1.Specifications
Item Specification
11 x 17 SEF and 8.5 x 11 LEF
Paper Finisher / • Without Z-Folding
Thickness: Upper Tray 52.3 – 216.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb. Bond – 79.9 lb. Cover)
• With Z-Folding
64.0 – 80.0 g/m2 (17.1 – 21.3 lb. Bond)
Finisher / • Without Z-Folding
Shift Tray 52.3 – 300.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb. Bond – 165.0 lb. Index)
• With Z-Folding
64.0 – 80.0 g/m2 (17.1 – 21.3 lb. Bond)
Finisher / 52.3 – 300.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb. Bond – 165.0 lb. Index)
Shift Tray /
Shifting
Staple • Without Z-Folding
64.0 – 90.0 g/m2 (17.1 – 24.0 lb. Bond)
• With Z-Folding
64.0 – 80.0 g/m2 (17.1 – 21.3 lb. Bond)
Capacity: Finisher / • Without Z-Folding
Upper Tray A4, 8.5 x 11 or smaller: 500 sheets
B4, 8.5 x 14 or larger: 250 sheets
• With Z-Folding
30 sheets
Finisher / • Without Z-Folding
Shift Tray A4 LEF, B5 JIS LEF, 8.5 x 11 LEF: 3,000 sheets
A3 SEF, A4 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 8.5 x 14
SEF, 8.5 x 11 SEF: 1,500 sheets
12 x 18 SEF, 13 x 19 SEF: 1,000 sheets
A5 LEF, 5.5 x 8.5 LEF: 500 sheets
A5 SEF, 5.5 x 8.5 SEF: 100 sheets
When using paper that has a horizontal length of 487.8–1,260.0 mm
(19.21–49.60 inches), remove output sheets one by one from the tray.
• With Z-Folding
30 sheets
Staple • Without Z-Folding
A3 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 8.5 x 14 SEF, 8.5 x 13 SEF, 8.25
x 14 SEF, 8.25 x 13 SEF, 8 x 13 SEF, 8K SEF, 11 x 15 SEF, 11 x 14
SEF, 10 x 15 SEF, 10 x 14 SEF, 8.5 x 13.4 SEF: 50 sheets
A4, B5 JIS, 8.5 x 11, 7.25 x 10.5, 16K: 100 sheets
• Mixed Size
23
1.Specifications
Item Specification
50 sheets (A3 SEF /A4 LEF, B4 JIS SEF/B5 JIS LEF, 11 x 17
SEF/8.5 x 11 LEF)
• With Z-Folding
10 sheets
• Combination of With and Without Z-Folding
10 sheets of Z-Folding and 0 sheets Without Z-Folding, 9 sheets of
Z-Folding and 0 to 10 sheets Without Z-Folding, 8 sheets of Z-
Folding and 0 to 20 sheets Without Z-Folding, 7 sheets of Z-Folding
and 0 to 30 sheets Without Z-Folding, 6 sheets of Z-Folding and 0 to
40 sheets Without Z-Folding, 5 sheets of Z-Folding and 0 to 50
sheets Without Z-Folding, 4 sheets of Z-Folding and 0 to 60 sheets
Without Z-Folding, 3 sheets of Z-Folding and 0 to 70 sheets Without
Z-Folding, 2 sheets of Z-Folding and 0 to 80 sheets Without Z-
Folding, 1 sheet of Z-Folding and 1 to 90 sheets Without Z-Folding
Staple • Without Z-Folding
Output A4 LEF, B5 JIS LEF, 8.5 x 11 LEF: binding 10 to 100 sheets...200 to
30 Sets
A4 SEF, B5 JIS SEF, 8.5 x 11 SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 8.5 x 14 SEF:
binding 2 to 9 sheets...150 Sets
A3 SEF, B4 JIS SEF: binding 10 to 50 sheets...150 to 30 Sets
• With Z-Folding, Mixed Size
Z-Folded A3 and A4, Z-Folded B4 JIS and B5 JIS, Z-Folded 11 x 17
and 8.5 x 11 SEF: 1 to 10 sheets...30 to 3 Sets
• Mixed Size
2 to 50 sheets...30 Sets(A3 SEF/A4 LEF, B4 JIS SEF/B5 JIS LEF,
11 x 17 SEF/8.5 x 11 LEF)
Power Source: Draw from main unit
Power Consumption: 120 W or less
Weight: approx. 75 kg (165.4 lb.)
Dimensions (W x D x H): 806 x 730 x 980 mm (31.8 × 28.8 × 38.6 inches)
Paper size:
24
1.Specifications
Paper weight:
• 2 & 3 holes: 52.3 – 163.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb. Bond – 60.3 lb. Cover)
• 4 holes: 52.3 – 127.4 g/m2 (14.0 lb. Bond – 46.9 lb. Cover)
Item Specification
Paper Size: A3 SEF, A4 LEF/SEF, A5 LEF/SEF, A6 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS LEF/SEF, B6 JIS
SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 8.5 x 14 SEF, 8.5 x 13 SEF, 8.5 x 11 LEF/SEF, 8.25 x 14 SEF,
8.25 x 13 SEF, 8 x 13 SEF, 7.25 x 10.5 LEF/SEF, 5.5 x 8.5 LEF/SEF, 4.125 x 9.5
LEF/SEF, 3.875 x 7.5 LEF/SEF, C5 Env LEF/SEF, C6 Env SEF, DL Env LEF/SEF,
8K SEF, 16K LEF/SEF, 12 x 18 SEF, 11 x 15 SEF, 11 x 14 SEF, 10 x 15 SEF, 10 x
14 SEF, 13 x 19.2 SEF, 13 x 19 SEF, 12.6 x 19.2 SEF, 12.6 x 18.5 SEF, 13 x 18
SEF, SRA3 SEF, SRA4 LEF/SEF, 8.5 x 13.4 SEF, 8 x 10 SEF*1, 226 x 310 mm
LEF/SEF*1, 310 x 432 mm SEF*1, custom size
25
1.Specifications
Item Specification
*1 Pro C5200S/C5210S only.
Paper • MP C6503/C8003
Thickness: 52.3 – 300.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb. Bond – 165.0 lb. Index)
• Pro C5200S/C5210S
52.3 – 360.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb. Bond – 198.0 lb. Index)
Paper capacity 500 sheets
(80 g/m2, 20 lb.
Bond):
Weight: Approx. 0.9 kg (2.0 lb.)
Dimensions (W 375 × 461 × 151 mm (14.8 × 18.2 × 6.0 inches)
x D x H):
Item Specification
Paper Size: A3 SEF, A4 LEF/SEF, A5 LEF/SEF, A6 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS LEF/SEF, B6 JIS
SEF, 11 × 17 SEF, 8.5 × 14 SEF, 8.5 × 13 SEF, 8.5 × 11 LEF/SEF, 8.25 × 14 SEF,
8.25 × 13 SEF, 8 × 13 SEF, 8 × 10 SEF, 7.25 × 10.5 LEF/SEF, 5.5 × 8.5 LEF/SEF,
4.125 × 9.5 SEF, 3.875 × 7.5 SEF, C5 Env LEF/SEF, C6 Env SEF, DL Env SEF, 8K
SEF, 16K LEF/SEF, 12 × 18 SEF, 11 × 15 SEF, 11 × 14 SEF, 10 × 15 SEF, 10 × 14
SEF, 13 × 19.2 SEF, 13 × 19 SEF, 12.6 × 19.2 SEF, 12.6 × 18.5 SEF, 13 × 18 SEF,
SRA3 SEF, SRA4 LEF/SEF, 226 × 310 mm LEF/SEF, 310 × 432 mm SEF, 8.5 ×
13.4 SEF, custom size
Paper 52.3 – 300.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb. Bond – 165.0 lb. Index)
Thickness:
Power Source: Draw from main unit
Power 30W or less
Consumption:
Weight: Approx. 30 kg (66.2 lb.)
Dimensions (W 170 × 730 × 990 mm (6.7 × 28.8 × 39.0 inches)
x D x H):
Buffer Pass Unit Type S6 (D3DO -17, -27) (Pro C5210S/C5200S Only)
Item Specification
Folding Methods: Half Fold, Letter Fold-out, Letter Fold-in, Double Parallel Fold, Gate Fold,
Z-Folding
Paper Size: Fold • With Z-fold:
A3 SEF, A4 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 8.5 x 14 SEF, 8.5 x 11
SEF, 8K SEF, 12 x 18 SEF, 8.5 x 13.4 SEF
• With Half Fold:
A3 SEF, A4 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 8.5 x 14 SEF,
8.5 x 11 SEF, 8K SEF, 12 x 18 SEF, 13 x 19.5 SEF, 13 x 19 SEF, 12.6
x 19.5 SEF, 12.6 x 18.5 SEF, 13 x 18 SEF, SRA3 SEF, SRA4 SEF, 8.5
x 13.4 SEF, 226 x 310 mm SEF*1, 310 x 432 mm SEF*1
• With Letter Fold-out, Letter Fold-in, Double Parallel Fold, and
Gate Fold:
A3 SEF, A4 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 8.5 x 14 SEF,
8.5 x 11 SEF, 8K SEF, 12 x 18 SEF, 8.5 x 13.4 SEF
*1 Pro C5200S/C5210S only.
Multiple • Half Fold:
sheets A3 SEF, A4 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 8.5 x 14 SEF,
8.5 x 11 SEF, 8K SEF, 12 x 18 SEF, 13 x 19.2 SEF, 13 x 19 SEF, 12.6
x 19.2 SEF, 12.6 x 18.5 SEF, 13 x 18 SEF, SRA3 SEF, SRA4 SEF, 8.5
x 13.4 SEF, 226 x 310 mm SEF*1, 310 x 432 mm SEF*1
• Letter Fold-in:
A3 SEF, A4 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 8.5 x 14 SEF,
27
1.Specifications
Item Specification
8.5 x 11 SEF, 8K SEF, 12 x 18 SEF, 8.5 x 13.4 SEF
• Letter Fold-out:
A4 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS SEF, 8.5 x 14 SEF, 8.5 x 11 SEF, 8.5 x
13.4 SEF
*1 Pro C5200S/C5210S only.
Paper Fold 64.0 to 105.0 g/m2 (17.1–28.0 lb. Bond)
Thickness: Multiple 64.0 to 80.0 g/m2 (17.1–21.3 lb. Bond)
sheets
Power Source: • EU/AP/CHN/KOR
220–240 V, 1.2 A, 50/60 Hz
• NA/TWN
120 V, 2.0 A, 60 Hz
(A separate power source is required.)
Power Consumption: 240W or less
Weight: Approx. 92 kg (202.9 lb.)
Dimensions (W x D x 470 x 730 x 980 mm (18.6 x 28.8 x 38.6 inches)
H):
Item Specification
Bin 9 Bins
Paper Size: A3 SEF, A4, A5, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS, 11 x 17 SEF, 8.5 x 14 SEF, 8.5 x 13 SEF,
8.5 x 11, 8.25 x 14 SEF, 8.25 x 13 SEF, 8 x 13 SEF, 7.25 x 10.5, 5.5 x 8.5, 8K
SEF, 16K, 11 x 15 SEF, 11 x 14 SEF, 10 x 15 SEF, 10 x 14 SEF, 8.5 x 13.4 SEF
Paper 60.0 to 128.0 g/m2 (16.1 lb. Bond–47.3 lb. Cover)
Thickness:
Capacity: 100 Sheets each bin, total 900 Sheets
Power Source: Draw from main unit
Power 30 W or less
Consumption:
Weight: approx. 15kg (33.1 lb.)
Dimensions (W x 540 x 600 x 660 mm (21.3 × 23.7 × 26.0 inches)
D x H):
Item Specification
Paper Size: A3 SEF, A4, A5, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS, 11 x 17 SEF, 8.5 x 14 SEF, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x
28
1.Specifications
Item Specification
13 SEF, 7.25 x 10.5 SEF, 5.5 x 8.5, 10 x 14 SEF, 8K SEF, 16K, 8.5 x 13.4 SEF,
8.25 x 13 SEF, 8 x 13 SEF, 12 x 18 SEF
Paper Thickness: 64.0 to 216.0 g/m2 (17.1 lb. Bond–79.9 lb. Cover)
Capacity: 200 sheets
Power Source: Draw from main unit
Power 43 W or less
Consumption:
Weight: Approx. 12 kg (26.5 lb.)
Dimensions (W x 500 x 600 x 600 mm (19.7 x 23.7 x 23.7 inches)
D x H):
Item Specification
Paper Size: A3 SEF, A4 LEF/SEF, A5 LEF/SEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS LEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 8.5 x 11
LEF/SEF, 8 x 13 SEF, 5.5 x 8.5 LEF/SEF, SRA3 SEF, 12 x 18 SEF, B5 JIS SEF,
8.5 x 14 SEF, 8.5 x 13 SEF, 8.25 x 14 SEF, 8.25 x 13 SEF, 7.25 x 10.5 LEF/SEF,
8K SEF, 16K LEF/SEF, 11 x 15 SEF, 11 x 14 SEF, 10 x 15 SEF, 10 x 14 SEF, 13 x
19.2 SEF, 13 x 19 SEF, 12.6 x 19.2 SEF, 12.6 x 18.5 SEF, 13 x 18 SEF, 226 x 310
mm LEF/SEF*1, 310 x 432 mm SEF*1, SRA4 LEF/SEF, 8.5 x 13.4 SEF, Custom
size
*1 Pro C5200S/C5210S only.
Paper 64.0 to 216.0 g/m2 (17.1 lb. Bond–79.9 lb. Cover)
Thickness:
Capacity: 240 sheets x 2 drawers
Power Source: Draw from main unit
Power 84 W or less
Consumption:
Weight: Approx. 45 kg (99.3 lb.)
Dimensions (W 540 x 730 x 1,270 mm (21.3 x 28.8 x 50.0 inches)
x D x H):
Item Specification
Paper Size: A4 LEF, B5 JIS LEF, 8.5 x 11 SEF
Paper Thickness: 52.3 – 216.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb. Bond – 79.9 lb. Cover)
Capacity: 4,400 sheets
Power Source: Draw from main unit
29
1.Specifications
Item Specification
Power Consumption: 50W or less
Weight: Approx. 20 kg (44.1 lb.)
Dimensions (W x D x H): 352 x 540 x 625 mm (13.9 x 21.3 x 24.7 inches)
Item Specification
Paper Size: • A3 SEF, A4 LEF/SEF, A5 LEF/SEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS LEF/SEF, 11
x 17 SEF, 8.5 x 11 LEF/SEF, 8 x 13 SEF, 5.5 x 8.5 LEF/SEF, SRA3
SEF, 12 x 18 SEF, A6 SEF*1, B6 JIS SEF*1, 8.5 x 14 SEF, 8.5 x 13
SEF, 8.25 x 14 SEF, 8.25 x 13 SEF, 7.25 x 10.5 LEF/SEF, 8K SEF,
16K LEF/SEF, 11 x 15 SEF, 11 x 14 SEF, 10 x 15 SEF, 10 x 14 SEF,
13 x 19.2 SEF, 13 x 19 SEF, 12.6 x 19.2 SEF, 12.6 x 18.5 SEF, 13 x
18 SEF, SRA4 LEF/SEF, 226 x 310 mm LEF/SEF*2, 310 x 432 mm
SEF*2, 8.5 x 13.4 SEF, 4.2 x 5.5 SEF*1*2
• Custom size*1:
Vertical: 100.0–330.2 mm (3.94–13.00 inches)
Horizontal: 139.7–487.7 mm (5.50–19.20 inches)
*1 The postcard side fences are required to load paper that is between 100.0 and
139.2 mm (3.94 and 5.48 inches).
*2 Pro C5200S/C5210S only.
Paper • MP C6503/C8003
Thickness: 52.3 – 300.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb. Bond – 165.0 lb. Index)
• Pro C5200S/C5210S
52.3 – 360.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb. Bond – 198.0 lb. Index)
Capacity: 2,200 sheets
Power Source: Draw from main unit
Power 85 W or less
Consumption:
Weight: Approx. 83 kg (183.0 lb.)
Dimensions (W 869 x 730 x 658 mm (34.3 x 28.8 x 26.0 inches)
x D x H):
Item Specification
Paper Size: A3 SEF, A4 LEF/SEF, A5 LEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS LEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 8.5 x 14
SEF, 8.5 x 11 LEF/SEF, 5.5 x 8.5 LEF, 12 x 18 SEF, 13 x 19.2 SEF
Power Source: Draw from main unit
30
1.Specifications
Item Specification
Power 15 W or less
Consumption:
Weight: Approx. 2 kg (4.4 lb.)
Dimensions (W x D 169 x 539 x 203 mm (6.7 x 21.3 x 8.0 inches)
x H):
Item Specification
Paper Size: Finisher / • Without Z-fold:
Upper Tray A3 SEF, A4 LEF/SEF, A5 LEF/SEF, A6 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS
LEF/SEF, B6 JIS SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 8.5 x 14 SEF, 8.5 x 13.4 SEF,
8.5 x 13 SEF, 8.5 x 11 LEF/SEF, 8.25 x 14 SEF, 8.25 x 13 SEF, 8 x
13 SEF, 8 x 10 SEF, 7.25 x 10.5 LEF/SEF, 5.5 x 8.5 LEF/SEF, 4.125
x 9.5 SEF, C5 Env LEF/SEF, C6 Env SEF, DL Env SEF, 8K SEF,
16K LEF/SEF, 12 x 18 SEF, 11 x 15 SEF, 11 x 14 SEF, 10 x 15 SEF,
10 x 14 SEF, 13 x 19.2 SEF, 13 x 19 SEF, 12.6 x 19.2 SEF, 12.6 x
18.5 SEF, 13 x 18 SEF, SRA3 SEF, SRA4 LEF/SEF, 226 x 310 mm
LEF/SEF, 310 x 432 mm SEF, 8.5 x 13.4 SEF, custom size
• With Z-fold:
A3 SEF, A4 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 8.5 x 14 SEF, 8.5 x 13.4
SEF, 8.5 x 11 SEF, 8K SEF, 12 x 18 SEF, 8.5 x 13.4 SEF
Finisher / • Without Z-fold:
Shift Tray A3 SEF, A4 LEF/SEF, A5 LEF/SEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS LEF/SEF, 11
x 17 SEF, 8.5 x 14 SEF, 8.5 x 13.4 SEF, 8.5 x 13 SEF, 8.5 x 11
LEF/SEF, 8.25 x 14 SEF, 8.25 x 13 SEF, 8 x 13 SEF, 8 x 10 SEF,
7.25 x 10.5 LEF/SEF, 5.5 x 8.5 LEF/SEF, C5 Env LEF/SEF, 8K SEF,
16K LEF/SEF, 12 x 18 SEF, 11 x 15 SEF, 11 x 14 SEF, 10 x 15 SEF,
10 x 14 SEF, 13 x 19.2 SEF, 13 x 19 SEF, 12.6 x 19.2 SEF, 12.6 x
18.5 SEF, 13 x 18 SEF, SRA3 SEF, SRA4 LEF/SEF, 226 x 310 mm
LEF/SEF, 310 x 432 mm SEF, 8.5 x 13.4 SEF, custom size
You can output paper that has a horizontal length of up to 700.0 mm
(27.56 inches) when the output tray for banner sheet is installed.
• With Z-fold:
A3 SEF, A4 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 8.5 x 14 SEF, 8.5 x 11
SEF, 8K SEF, 12 x 18 SEF, 8.5 x 13.4 SEF
Finisher / A3 SEF, A4 LEF/SEF, A5 LEF/SEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS LEF/SEF, 11 x
Shift Tray / 17 SEF, 8.5 x 14 SEF, 8.5 x 13.4 SEF, 8.5 x 13 SEF, 8.5 x 11 LEF/SEF,
31
1.Specifications
Item Specification
Shifting 8.25 x 14 SEF, 8.25 x 13 SEF, 8 x 13 SEF, 8 x 10 SEF, 7.25 x 10.5
LEF/SEF, 5.5 x 8.5 LEF/SEF, C5 Env LEF/SEF, 8K SEF, 16K LEF/SEF,
12 x 18 SEF, 11 x 15 SEF, 11 x 14 SEF, 10 x 15 SEF, 10 x 14 SEF, 13 x
191/5 SEF, 13 x 19 SEF, 12.6 x 191/5 SEF, 12.6 x 18.5 SEF, 13 x 18
SEF, SRA3 SEF, SRA4 LEF/SEF, 226 x 310 mm LEF/SEF, 310 x 432
mm SEF, 8.5 x 13.4 SEF, custom size
Staple • Without Z-fold:
A3 SEF, A4 LEF/SEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS LEF/SEF, 11 x 17 SEF,
8.5 x 14 SEF, 8.5 x 13.4 SEF, 8.5 x 13 SEF, 8.5 x 11 LEF/SEF, 8.25
x 14 SEF, 8.25 x 13 SEF, 8 x 13 SEF, 8 x 10 SEF, 7.25 x 10.5
LEF/SEF, 8K SEF, 16K LEF/SEF, 11 x 15 SEF, 11 x 14 SEF, 10 x 15
SEF, 10 x 14 SEF, 8.5 x 13.4 SEF
• With Z-fold:
A3 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 8K SEF
• With Z-fold and Mixed Sizes:
A3 SEF/A4 LEF
B4 JIS SEF/B5 JIS LEF
11 x 17 SEF/8.5 x 11 LEF
8K SEF/16K LEF
Paper Finisher / • Without Z-fold:
Thickness: Upper Tray 52.3 – 216.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb. Bond – 79.9 lb. Cover)
• With Z-fold:
64.0 – 105.0 g/m2 (17.1 – 28.0 lb. Bond)
Finisher / • Without Z-fold:
Shift Tray 52.3 – 360.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb. Bond – 198.0 lb. Index)
• With Z-fold:
64.0 – 105.0 g/m2 (17.1 – 28.0 lb. Bond)
Staple • Without Z-fold:
64.0 – 80.0 g/m2 (17.1 lb. Bond – 20.0 lb. Cover)
You can use two sheets of paper weighing up to 200.0 g/m2 (110.7
lb. Cover) per set as cover sheets.
If you use three or more sheets of paper as cover sheets, the staple
quality might decrease.
• With Z-fold:
64.0 – 105.0 g/m2 (17.1 – 28.0 lb. Bond)
Capacity: Finisher / • A4, 8.5 x 11 or smaller: 250 sheets
Upper Tray • B4 JIS, 8.5 x 14 or larger: 50 sheets
Finisher / • Without Z-fold:
32
1.Specifications
Item Specification
Shift Tray A4 LEF, B5 JIS LEF, 8.5 x 11 LEF, 1,500 sheets: A3 SEF, A4 SEF,
B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 8.5 x 14 SEF, 8.5 x 11 SEF,
SRA4 LEF/SEF, 8.5 x 13.4 SEF, 226 x 310 mm LEF/SEF: 3,000
sheets
12 x 18 SEF, 13 x 19 SEF, SRA3 SEF, 13 x 18 SEF, 12.6 x 18.5
SEF, 12.6 x 19.2 SEF, 13 x 19.2 SEF, 310 x 432 mm SEF: 1,000
sheets
A5 LEF, 5.5 x 8.5 LEF: 500 sheets
A5 SEF, 5.5 x 8.5 SEF: 100 sheets
Paper that has a horizontal length of 487.8–700.0 mm (19.21–27.56
inches) (with the output tray for banner sheet): 200 sheets
• With Z-fold: 30 sheets
Staple • Without Z-fold and Mixed Sizes:
50 sheets: A3 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 8.5 x 14 SEF, 8.5 x
13.4 SEF, 8.5 x 13 SEF, 8.25 x 14 SEF, 8.5 x 13.4 SEF, 8.25 x 13
SEF, 8 x 13 SEF, 8K SEF, 11 x 15 SEF, 11 x 14 SEF, 10 x 15 SEF,
10 x 14 SEF, 8.5 x 132/5 SEF
100 sheets: A4 LEF/SEF, B5 JIS LEF/SEF, 8.5 x 11 LEF/SEF, 8 x 10
SEF, 7.25 x 10.5 LEF/SEF, 16K LEF/SEF
• With Mixed Sizes:
50 sheets (A3 SEF/A4 LEF, B4 JIS SEF/B5 JIS LEF, 11 x 17
SEF/8.5 x 11 LEF, 8.5 x 13.4 SEF, 8K SEF/16K LEF)
• With Z-fold: 10 sheets
• Combination of Z-folded sheets and unfolded sheets:
10 Z-folded sheets, 9 Z-folded sheets and 0 to 10 unfolded sheets, 8
Z-folded sheets and 0 to 20 unfolded sheets, 7 Z-folded sheets and
0 to 30 unfolded sheets, 6 Z-folded sheets and 0 to 40 unfolded
sheets, 5 Z-folded sheets and 0 to 50 unfolded sheets, 4 Z-folded
sheets and 0 to 60 unfolded sheets, 3 Z-folded sheets and 0 to 70
unfolded sheets, 2 Z-folded sheets and 0 to 80 unfolded sheets, 1 Z-
folded sheet and 1 to 90 unfolded sheets
Staple • Without Z-fold and Mixed Sizes:
Output 20–100 sheets: 150–30 sets (A4 LEF, B5 JIS LEF, 8.5 x 11 LEF)
10–19 sheets: 200–105 sets (A4 LEF, B5 JIS LEF, 8.5 x 11 LEF)
2–9 sheets: 150 sets (A4 LEF, B5 JIS LEF, 8.5 x 11 LEF)
10–100 sheets: 150–15 sets (A4 SEF, B5 JIS SEF, 8.5 x 11 SEF)
2–9 sheets: 150 sets (A4 SEF, B5 JIS SEF, 8.5 x 11 SEF)
10–50 sheets: 150–30 sets (A3 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 8.5 x
33
1.Specifications
Item Specification
13.4 SEF, 8.5 x 14 SEF)
2–9 sheets: 150 sets (A3 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 8.5 x 14
SEF)
• With Z-fold and Mixed Sizes:
1–10 sheets: 30–3 sets (A3 Z-folded paper with A4, B4 JIS Z-folded
paper with B5 JIS, 11 x 17 Z-folded paper with 81/2 x 11, 8K Z-
folded paper with 16K)
• With Mixed Sizes:
2–50 sheets: 30 sets (A3 SEF/A4 LEF, B4 JIS SEF/B5 JIS LEF, 11 x
17 SEF/81/2 x 11 LEF, 8K SEF/16K LEF)
Power Source: Draw from main unit
Power Consumption: 150 W or less
Weight: • Without output tray for banner sheet:
112 kg (247.0 lb.) or less
• With output tray for banner sheet:
113 kg (249.2 lb.) or less
Dimensions (W x D x H): • Without output tray for banner sheet:
1,113 x 730 x 1,192 mm (43.9 x 28.8 x 47.0 inches)
• With output tray for banner sheet:
1,334 x 730 x 1,193 mm (52.6 x 28.8 X 47.0 inches)
Item Specification
Paper Size: Finisher / • Without Z-fold:
Upper Tray A3 SEF, A4 LEF/SEF, A5 LEF/SEF, A6 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS
LEF/SEF, B6 JIS SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 8.5 x 14 SEF, 8.5 x 13.4 SEF,
8.5 x 13 SEF, 8.5 x 11 LEF/SEF, 8.25 x 14 SEF, 8.25 x 13 SEF, 8 x
13 SEF, 8 x 10 SEF, 7.25 x 10.5 LEF/SEF, 5.5 x 8.5 LEF/SEF, 4.125
x 9.5 SEF, C5 Env LEF/SEF, C6 Env SEF, DL Env SEF, 8K SEF,
16K LEF/SEF, 12 x 18 SEF, 11 x 15 SEF, 11 x 14 SEF, 10 x 15 SEF,
10 x 14 SEF, 13 x 19.2 SEF, 13 x 19 SEF, 12.6 x 19.2 SEF, 12.6 x
18.5 SEF, 13 x 18 SEF, SRA3 SEF, SRA4 LEF/SEF, 226 x 310 mm
LEF/SEF, 310 x 432 mm SEF, 8.5 x 13.4 SEF, custom size
• With Z-fold:
A3 SEF, A4 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 8.5 x 14 SEF, 8.5 x 11
SEF, 8K SEF, 12 x 18 SEF, 8.5 x 13.4 SEF
Finisher / • Without Z-fold:
34
1.Specifications
Item Specification
Shift Tray A3 SEF, A4 LEF/SEF, A5 LEF/SEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS LEF/SEF, 11
x 17 SEF, 8.5 x 14 SEF, 8.5 x 13 SEF, 8.5 x 13.4 SEF, 8.5 x 11
LEF/SEF, 8.25 x 14 SEF, 8.25 x 13 SEF, 8 x 13 SEF, 8 x 10 SEF,
7.25 x 10.5 LEF/SEF, 5.5 x 8.5 LEF/SEF, C5 Env LEF/SEF, 8K SEF,
16K LEF/SEF, 12 x 18 SEF, 11 x 15 SEF, 11 x 14 SEF, 10 x 15 SEF,
10 x 14 SEF, 13 x 19.2 SEF, 13 x 19 SEF, 12.6 x 19.2 SEF, 12.6 x
18.5 SEF, 13 x 18 SEF, SRA3 SEF, SRA4 LEF/SEF, 226 x 310 mm
LEF/SEF, 310 x 432 mm SEF, 8.5 x 13.4 SEF, custom size
You can output paper that has a horizontal length of up to 700.0 mm
(27.56 inches) when the output tray for banner sheet is installed.
• With Z-fold:
A3 SEF, A4 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 8.5 x 14 SEF, 8.5 x 11
SEF, 8K SEF, 12 x 18 SEF, 8.5 x 13.4 SEF
Finisher / A3 SEF, A4 LEF/SEF, A5 LEF/SEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS LEF/SEF, 11 x
Shift Tray / 17 SEF, 8.5 x 14 SEF, 8.5 x 13.4 SEF, 8.5 x 13 SEF, 8.5 x 11 LEF/SEF,
Shifting 8.25 x 14 SEF, 8.25 x 13 SEF, 8 x 13 SEF, 8 x 10 SEF, 7.25 x 10.5
LEF/SEF, 5.5 x 8.5 LEF/SEF, C5 Env LEF/SEF, 8K SEF, 16K LEF/SEF,
12 x 18 SEF, 11 x 15 SEF, 11 x 14 SEF, 10 x 15 SEF, 10 x 14 SEF, 13 x
191/5 SEF, 13 x 19 SEF, 12.6 x 191/5 SEF, 12.6 x 18.5 SEF, 13 x 18
SEF, SRA3 SEF, SRA4 LEF/SEF, 226 x 310 mm LEF/SEF, 310 x 432
mm SEF, 8.5 x 13.4 SEF, custom size
Staple • Without Z-fold:
A3 SEF, A4 LEF/SEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS LEF/SEF, 11 x 17 SEF,
8.5 x 14 SEF, 8.5 x 13.4 SEF, 8.5 x 13 SEF, 8.5 x 11 LEF/SEF, 8.25
x 14 SEF, 8.25 x 13 SEF, 8 x 13 SEF, 8 x 10 SEF, 7.25 x 10.5
LEF/SEF, 8K SEF, 16K LEF/SEF, 11 x 15 SEF, 11 x 14 SEF, 10 x 15
SEF, 10 x 14 SEF, 8.5 x 13.4 SEF
• With Z-fold:
A3 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 8K SEF
• With Z-fold and Mixed Sizes:
A3 SEF/A4 LEF
B4 JIS SEF/B5 JIS LEF
11 x 17 SEF/8.5 x 11 LEF
8K SEF/16K LEF
Saddle • A3 SEF, A4 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 8.5
stitch x 14 SEF, 8.5 x 13.4 SEF, 8.5 x 13 SEF, 8.5 x 11 SEF, 8.25
staple x 14 SEF, 8.25 x 13 SEF, 8 x 13 SEF, 7.25 x 10.5 SEF, 8K
SEF, 16K SEF, 12 x 18 SEF, 11 x 15 SEF, 11 x 14 SEF, 10
35
1.Specifications
Item Specification
x 15 SEF, 10 x 14 SEF, 13 x 19.2 SEF, 13 x 19 SEF, 12.6 x
19.2 SEF, 12.6 x 18.5 SEF, 13 x 18 SEF, SRA3 SEF, SRA4
SEF, 226 x 310 mm SEF, 310 x 432 mm SEF, 8.5 x 13.4
SEF
• Custom size
Vertical: 182.0 – 330.2 mm (7.17 – 13.00 inches)
Horizontal: 257.0 – 487.7 mm (10.12 – 19.20 inches)
Half fold • A3 SEF, A4 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 8.5
x 14 SEF, 8.5 x 13 SEF, 8.5 x 11 SEF, 8.25 x 14 SEF, 8.25
x 13 SEF, 8 x 13 SEF, 7.25 x 10.5 SEF, 8K SEF, 16K SEF,
12 x 18 SEF, 11 x 15 SEF, 11 x 14 SEF, 10 x 15 SEF, 10 x
14 SEF, 13 x 19.2 SEF, 13 x 19 SEF, 12.6 x 19.2 SEF, 12.6
x 18.5 SEF, 13 x 18 SEF, SRA3 SEF, SRA4 SEF, 226 x 310
mm SEF, 310 x 432 mm SEF, 8.5 x 13.4 SEF
• Custom size
Vertical: 182.0 – 330.2 mm (7.17 – 13.00 inches)
Horizontal: 257.0 – 487.7 mm (10.12 – 19.20 inches)
Paper Finisher / • Without Z-fold:
Thickness: Upper Tray 52.3 – 216.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb. Bond – 79.9 lb. Cover)
• With Z-fold:
64.0 – 105.0 g/m2 (17.1 – 28.0 lb. Bond)
Finisher / • Without Z-fold:
Shift Tray 52.3 – 360.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb. Bond – 198.0 lb. Index)
• With Z-fold:
64.0 – 105.0 g/m2 (17.1 – 28.0 lb. Bond)
Staple • Without Z-fold:
64.0 – 80.0 g/m2 (17.1 lb. Bond – 20.0 lb. Cover)
You can use two sheets of paper weighing up to 200.0 g/m2 (110.7
lb. Cover) per set as cover sheets.
If you use three or more sheets of paper as cover sheets, the staple
quality might decrease.
• With Z-fold:
64.0 – 105.0 g/m2 (17.1 – 28.0 lb. Bond)
Saddle 64.0 – 90.0 g/m2 (17.1 lb. Bond – 24.0 lb. Cover)
stitch You can use a sheet of paper weighing between 90.1 g/m2 (24.1 lb.
Bond) and 163.0 g/m2 (60.0 lb. Cover) per set as a cover sheet. If you
use two or more sheets of paper as cover sheets, the staple quality
might decrease.
36
1.Specifications
Item Specification
2
Half fold 64.0 – 90.0 g/m (17.1 – 24.0 lb. Bond)
Capacity: Finisher / • A4, 8.5 x 11 or smaller: 250 sheets
Upper Tray • B4 JIS, 8.5 x 14 or larger: 50 sheets
Finisher / • Without Z-fold:
Shift Tray A4 LEF, B5 JIS LEF, 8.5 x 11 LEF, 1,500 sheets: A3 SEF, A4 SEF,
B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 8.5 x 14 SEF, 8.5 x 13.4 SEF,
8.5 x 11 SEF, SRA4 LEF/SEF, 8.5 x 13.4 SEF, 226 x 310 mm
LEF/SEF: 3,000 sheets
12 x 18 SEF, 13 x 19 SEF, SRA3 SEF, 13 x 18 SEF, 12.6 x 18.5
SEF, 12.6 x 19.2 SEF, 13 x 19.2 SEF, 310 x 432 mm SEF: 1,000
sheets
A5 LEF, 5.5 x 8.5 LEF: 500 sheets
A5 SEF, 5.5 x 8.5 SEF: 100 sheets
Paper that has a horizontal length of 487.8–700.0 mm (19.21–27.56
inches) (with the output tray for banner sheet): 200 sheets
• With Z-fold: 30 sheets
Staple • Without Z-fold and Mixed Sizes:
50 sheets: A3 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 8.5 x 14 SEF, 8.5 x
13.4 SEF, 8.5 x 13 SEF, 8.25 x 14 SEF, 8.25 x 13 SEF, 8 x 13 SEF,
8K SEF, 11 x 15 SEF, 11 x 14 SEF, 10 x 15 SEF, 10 x 14 SEF, 8.5 x
132/5 SEF
100 sheets: A4 LEF/SEF, B5 JIS LEF/SEF, 8.5 x 11 LEF/SEF, 8 x 10
SEF, 7.25 x 10.5 LEF/SEF, 16K LEF/SEF
• With Mixed Sizes:
50 sheets (A3 SEF/A4 LEF, B4 JIS SEF/B5 JIS LEF, 11 x 17
SEF/8.5 x 11 LEF, 8.5 x 13.4 SEF, 8K SEF/16K LEF)
• With Z-fold: 10 sheets
• Combination of Z-folded sheets and unfolded sheets:
10 Z-folded sheets, 9 Z-folded sheets and 0 to 10 unfolded sheets, 8
Z-folded sheets and 0 to 20 unfolded sheets, 7 Z-folded sheets and
0 to 30 unfolded sheets, 6 Z-folded sheets and 0 to 40 unfolded
sheets, 5 Z-folded sheets and 0 to 50 unfolded sheets, 4 Z-folded
sheets and 0 to 60 unfolded sheets, 3 Z-folded sheets and 0 to 70
unfolded sheets, 2 Z-folded sheets and 0 to 80 unfolded sheets, 1 Z-
folded sheet and 1 to 90 unfolded sheets
Staple • Without Z-fold and Mixed Sizes:
Output 20–100 sheets: 150–30 sets (A4 LEF, B5 JIS LEF, 8.5 x 11 LEF)
10–19 sheets: 200–105 sets (A4 LEF, B5 JIS LEF, 8.5 x 11 LEF)
37
1.Specifications
Item Specification
2–9 sheets: 150 sets (A4 LEF, B5 JIS LEF, 8.5 x 11 LEF)
10–100 sheets: 150–15 sets (A4 SEF, B5 JIS SEF, 8.5 x 11 SEF)
2–9 sheets: 150 sets (A4 SEF, B5 JIS SEF, 8.5 x 11 SEF)
10–50 sheets: 150–30 sets (A3 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 8.5 x
13.4 SEF, 8.5 x 14 SEF)
2–9 sheets: 150 sets (A3 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 8.5 x 14
SEF)
• With Z-fold and Mixed Sizes:
1–10 sheets: 30–3 sets (A3 Z-folded paper with A4, B4 JIS Z-folded
paper with B5 JIS, 11 x 17 Z-folded paper with 81/2 x 11, 8K Z-
folded paper with 16K)
• With Mixed Sizes:
2–50 sheets: 30 sets (A3 SEF/A4 LEF, B4 JIS SEF/B5 JIS LEF, 11 x
17 SEF/81/2 x 11 LEF, 8K SEF/16K LEF)
Saddle • Paper between 64.0 g/m2 (17.1 lb. Bond) and 80.0 g/m2
stitch (20.0 lb. Bond): 1 set (20 sheets)
staple • Paper between 80.1 g/m2 (20.1 lb. Bond) and 90.0 g/m2
(24.0 lb. Bond): 1 set (15 sheets)
Saddle • 2–5 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond): 45 sets
stitch • 6–10 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond): 23 sets
staple • 11–15 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond): 15 sets
Output • 16–20 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond): 10 sets
Power Source: Draw from main unit
Power Consumption: 150 W or less
Weight: • Without output tray for banner sheet:
112 kg (247.0 lb.) or less
• With output tray for banner sheet:
113 kg (249.2 lb.) or less
Dimensions (W x D x H): • Without output tray for banner sheet:
1,113 x 730 x 1,192 mm (43.9 x 28.8 x 47.0 inches)
• With output tray for banner sheet:
1,334 x 730 x 1,193 mm (52.6 x 28.8 X 47.0 inches)
38
1.Specifications
Paper size:
Paper weight:
• 2 holes, 3 holes: 52.3 – 209.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb. Bond – 77.3 lb. Cover)
• 4 holes: 52.3 – 163.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb. Bond – 60.0 lb. Cover)
39
2.Preventive Maintenance Tables
Maintenance Tables
The yield figures in these tables are based on the following conditions.
- A4/LT LEF (Simplex)
- 5% image coverage ratio
- 5P/J (pages per job)
PM Parts
Scanner
Development
PCDU
40
2.Preventive Maintenance Tables
Toner Supply
Transfer
Fusing
Miscellaneous
44
2.Preventive Maintenance Tables
45
2.Preventive Maintenance Tables
Yield Parts
Item 500K
Pick-up Roller R
Feed Roller R
Separation Roller R
Bypass Tray
Item 160K
Bypass Pick-up Roller R
Bypass Feed Roller R
Bypass Separation Roller R
LCIT RT4020
Item 1,000K
Pick-up Roller R
Feed Roller R
Separation Roller R
LCIT RT4050
Item 300K
Pick-up Roller R
Feed Roller R
Separation Roller R
Item 60K
Feed Belt R
Separation Roller R
Pick-up Roller R
Feed Belt R
Pick-up Roller R
Separation Roller R
Item 3,000K
Stacking Sponge Roller R
46
2.Preventive Maintenance Tables
Finisher SR4110
47
3.Service Program Mode
• Make sure that the data-in LED ( ) is not on before you go into the SP mode. This
LED indicates that some data is coming to the machine. When the LED is on, wait for
the copier to process the data.
• The Service Program Mode is for use by service representatives only. If this mode is
used by anyone other than service representatives for any reason, data might be
deleted or settings might be changed. In such case, product quality cannot be
guaranteed any more.
Entering SP Mode
Exiting SP Mode
48
3.Service Program Mode
Types of SP Modes
• System SP: SP modes related to the engine functions
• Printer SP: SP modes related to the controller functions
• Scanner SP: SP modes related to the scanner functions
• Fax SP: SP modes related to the fax functions
Select one of the Service Program modes (System, Printer, Scanner, or Fax) from the touch panel as
shown in the diagram below after you access the SP mode. This section explains the functions of the
System/Printer/Scanner SP modes. Refer to the Fax service manual for the Fax SP modes.
49
3.Service Program Mode
3 Opens the copy window (copy mode) so you can make test copies. Press SP Mode (highlighted)
in the copy window to return to the SP mode screen,
4 Enter the SP code directly with the number keys if you know the SP number. Then press .
(The required SP Mode number will be highlighted when pressing . If not, just press the
required SP Mode number.)
5 Press two times to leave the SP mode and return to the copy window to resume normal
operation.
6 Press any Class 1 number to open a list of Class 2 SP modes.
7 Press to scroll the show to the previous or next group.
8 Press to scroll to the previous or next display in segments the size of the screen display (page).
9 Press to scroll the show the previous or next line (line by line).
10 Press to move the highlight on the left to the previous or next selection in the list.
1. In the SP mode, select the test print. Then press "Copy Window".
2. Use the copy window (copier mode), to select the appropriate settings (paper size, etc.) for the test
print.
3. Press Start to start the test print.
4. Press SP Mode (highlighted) to return to the SP mode screen and repeat from step 1.
50
3.Service Program Mode
current settings.
At locations where the machine contains sensitive data, the customer engineer cannot operate the
machine until the Administrator turns the service mode lock off. This function makes sure that work on
the machine is always done with the permission of the Administrator.
1. If you cannot go into the SP mode, ask the Administrator to log in with the User
Tool and then set "Service Mode Lock" to OFF after he or she logs in:
User Tools > System Settings > Administrator Tools > Service Mode Lock > OFF
• This unlocks the machine and lets you get access to all the SP codes.
• The CE can service the machine and turn the machine off and on. It is not necessary
to ask the Administrator to log in again each time the machine is turned on.
2. Go into the SP mode and set SP5-169 to "1" if you must use the printer bit
switches.
3. After machine servicing is completed:
• Change SP5169 from "1" to "0".
51
3.Service Program Mode
• Turn the machine off and on. Tell the administrator that you have completed servicing
the machine.
• The Administrator will then set the "Service Mode Lock" to ON.
Remarks
The maximum number of characters which can show on the control panel screen is limited to 30
characters. For this reason, some of the SP modes shown on the screen need to be abbreviated. The
following are abbreviations used for the SP modes for which the full description is over 20 characters.
Paper Weight (MP C6503/C8003)
52
3.Service Program Mode
[FC, K], [FC, Y], [FC, M], or [FC, C]: Black, Yellow, Magenta, or Cyan in full color mode
Process Speed (MP C6503/C8003)
L: Low speed /ML: Middle low speed /M: Middle speed /H: High speed (Standard)
MP C6503 L: 158.76 mm/s /M: 176.4 mm/s /H: 287.07 mm/s
MP C8003 L: 158.76 mm/s /ML: 176.4 mm/s /M: 287.07 mm/s /H: 352.8 mm/s
Process Speed (Pro C5200S/C5210S)
L: Low speed /ML: Middle low speed /M: Middle speed /H: High speed (Standard)
Pro C5200S L: 158.76 mm/s/ M: 246.96 mm/s/ H: 287.07 mm/s
Pro C5210S L: 158.76 mm/s/ M: 246.96 mm/s/ H: 352.8 mm/s
Print Mode
S: Simplex
D: Duplex
53
3.Service Program Mode
54
3.Service Program Mode
SP Group 1000-01
SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to
CTL Max/Init./Step]
1-001- Lead Edge Reg Tray 1 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
001
1-001- Lead Edge Reg Bypass Tray ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
002
1-001- Lead Edge Reg Duplex ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
003
1-001- Lead Edge Reg Thin ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
004
1-001- Lead Edge Reg Plain1 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
005
1-001- Lead Edge Reg Plain2 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
006
1-001- Lead Edge Reg Mid-Thick ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
007
1-001- Lead Edge Reg Thick1 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
008
1-001- Lead Edge Reg Thick2 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
009
1-001- Lead Edge Reg Thick3 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
010
1-001- Lead Edge Reg Thick4 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
011
1-001- Lead Edge Reg Tray2 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
012
1-001- Lead Edge Reg Tray3 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
013
1-001- Lead Edge Reg Tray4 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
014
1-001- Lead Edge Reg LCT ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
015
1-001- Lead Edge Reg Thick5 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
016
1-003- Side-to-Side Reg Tray1 ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 / 0.1mm]
001
1-003- Side-to-Side Reg Tray2 ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 / 0.1mm]
55
3.Service Program Mode
56
3.Service Program Mode
57
3.Service Program Mode
58
3.Service Program Mode
59
3.Service Program Mode
60
3.Service Program Mode
61
3.Service Program Mode
62
3.Service Program Mode
63
3.Service Program Mode
64
3.Service Program Mode
65
3.Service Program Mode
66
3.Service Program Mode
67
3.Service Program Mode
68
3.Service Program Mode
69
3.Service Program Mode
70
3.Service Program Mode
71
3.Service Program Mode
72
3.Service Program Mode
73
3.Service Program Mode
74
3.Service Program Mode
75
3.Service Program Mode
78
3.Service Program Mode
79
3.Service Program Mode
83
3.Service Program Mode
84
3.Service Program Mode
94
3.Service Program Mode
95
3.Service Program Mode
96
3.Service Program Mode
97
3.Service Program Mode
98
3.Service Program Mode
99
3.Service Program Mode
100
3.Service Program Mode
101
3.Service Program Mode
102
3.Service Program Mode
103
3.Service Program Mode
104
3.Service Program Mode
105
3.Service Program Mode
106
3.Service Program Mode
107
3.Service Program Mode
108
3.Service Program Mode
109
3.Service Program Mode
110
3.Service Program Mode
111
3.Service Program Mode
112
3.Service Program Mode
113
3.Service Program Mode
114
3.Service Program Mode
115
3.Service Program Mode
116
3.Service Program Mode
SP Group 1000-02
SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to Max/Init./Step]
No. or
CTL
1- Reload Permit Reload Target Temp.:Center ENG* [ 0 to * / * / 1deg]
101- Setting *MP C6503: 143
002 *MP C8003: 143
*Pro C5200S: 148
*Pro C5210S: 153
1- Reload Permit Reload Target Temp.:Press ENG* [ 0 to *1 / *2 / 1deg]
101- Setting *1 MP C6503: 140
003 *1 MP C8003: 150
*1 Pro C5200S: 110
*1 Pro C5210S: 110
*2 MP C6503: 130
*2 MP C8003: 140
*2 Pro C5200S: 100
*2 Pro C5210S: 100
1- Reload Permit Temp.:Delta:Cold:Center ENG* [ 5 to 200 / 5 / 1deg]
101- Setting
004
1- Reload Permit Temp.:Delta:Cold:End ENG* [ 0 to 200 / 100 / 1deg]
101- Setting
005
1- Reload Permit Temp.:Delta:Cold:Press ENG* [ 50 to 200 / 50 / 1deg]
101- Setting
006
1- Reload Permit Temp.:Delta:Cold:Press:End ENG* [ 0 to 200 / 100 / 1deg]
101- Setting
007
1- Reload Permit Rotation Time:Cold ENG* [ 0 to 10000 / * / 0.1sec]
101- Setting *MP C6503 (NA): 40
008 *MP C6503
(EU/AP/CHN/TWN/KOR):
35
*MP C8003: 36.5
*Pro C5200S: 106
*Pro C5210S: 106
117
3.Service Program Mode
121
3.Service Program Mode
151
3.Service Program Mode
162
3.Service Program Mode
181
3.Service Program Mode
SP Group 1000-03
SP Large Small Category ENG [Min to Max/Init./Step]
No. Category or
CTL
1- Job:Init Temp Continuous Time1:Std Spd ENG [ 0 to 50 / 0.9 / 0.1sec]
118 Calc1
-
001
1- Job:Init Temp Continuous Time1:Mid Spd ENG [ 0 to 50 / * / 0.1sec]
118 Calc1 *MP C6503: 0.9
- *MP C8003: 0.9
002 *Pro C5200S: 0.9
*Pro C5210S: 1.4
1- Job:Init Temp Continuous Time1:MidLow Spd ENG [ 0 to 50 / * / 0.1sec]
118 Calc1 *MP C6503: 0.9
- *MP C8003: 1.4
003 *Pro C5200S: 0.9
*Pro C5210S: 1.4
1- Job:Init Temp Continuous Time1:Low Spd ENG [ 0 to 50 / * / 0.1sec]
118 Calc1 *MP C6503: 1.4
- *MP C8003: 1.4
004 *Pro C5200S: 0.9
*Pro C5210S: 1.4
1- Job:Init Temp Heat Storage 1:Threshold ENG [ 0 to 200 / 80 / 1deg]
118 Calc1 *MP C6503: 80
- *MP C8003: 80
005 *Pro C5200S: 45
*Pro C5210S: 45
1- Job:Init Temp Heat Storage 2:Threshold ENG [ 0 to 200 / * / 1deg]
118 Calc1 *MP C6503: 81
- *MP C8003: 81
006 *Pro C5200S: 46
*Pro C5210S: 46
1- Job:Init Temp Heat Storage 1:Rate ENG [ 0 to 100 / 100 / 1%]
118 Calc1
-
007
1- Job:Init Temp Heat Storage 2:Rate ENG [ 0 to 100 / 100 / 1%]
182
3.Service Program Mode
255
3.Service Program Mode
SP Group 1000-04
SP Large Category Small Category EN [Min to
No. G or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
1- Depressure: Envelope Change Judging Method EN [ 0 to 1 / * / 1]
16 G *MP C6503: 0
3- *MP C8003: 0
00 *Pro C5200S: 1
1 *Pro C5210S: 1
1- Depressure: Envelope Current Nip Width EN [ 0 to 20000 / 0 /
16 G 1um]
3-
00
4
1- Depressure: Envelope Nip Width Lower Limit EN [ 0 to 20000 / 0 /
16 G 1um]
3-
00
5
1- Depressure: Envelope Sensor7 Correction Temperature EN [ -100 to 100 / 0 /
16 G 1deg]
3-
00
6
1- Depressure: Envelope Nip Width Adj. Pattern:Room EN [ 1 to 5 / 1 / 1]
16 Temp:PaperThick6 G
3-
01
0
1- Depressure: Envelope Nip Width Adj. Pattern:Room EN [ 1 to 5 / 1 / 1]
16 Temp:PaperThick7 G
3-
01
1
1- Depressure: Envelope Nip Width Adj. Pattern:Room EN [ 1 to 5 / 1 / 1]
16 Temp:PaperThick8 G
3-
01
256
3.Service Program Mode
337
3.Service Program Mode
SP Group 1000-05
SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to
CTL Max/Init./Step]
1-985- Press Roller Temp Uncoated Thick 5:L Speed:FC ENG [ 50 to 200 / * /
109 Setting 1deg]
*MP C6503: 130
*MP C8003: 130
*Pro C5200S: 90
*Pro C5210S: 90
1-985- Press Roller Temp Uncoated Thick 5:L Speed:Bk ENG [ 50 to 200 / * /
110 Setting 1deg]
*MP C6503: 130
*MP C8003: 130
*Pro C5200S: 90
*Pro C5210S: 90
1-985- Press Roller Temp Uncoated Thick 6:L Speed:FC ENG [ 50 to 200 / * /
111 Setting 1deg]
*MP C6503: 130
*MP C8003: 130
*Pro C5200S: 90
*Pro C5210S: 90
1-985- Press Roller Temp Uncoated Thick 6:L Speed:Bk ENG [ 50 to 200 / * /
112 Setting 1deg]
*MP C6503: 130
*MP C8003: 130
*Pro C5200S: 90
*Pro C5210S: 90
1-985- Press Roller Temp Matte Thick 5:L Speed:FC ENG [ 50 to 200 / * /
125 Setting 1deg]
*MP C6503: 130
*MP C8003: 130
*Pro C5200S: 90
*Pro C5210S: 90
1-985- Press Roller Temp Matte Thick 5:L Speed:Bk ENG [ 50 to 200 / * /
126 Setting 1deg]
*MP C6503: 130
*MP C8003: 130
*Pro C5200S: 90
338
3.Service Program Mode
373
3.Service Program Mode
374
3.Service Program Mode
375
3.Service Program Mode
376
3.Service Program Mode
377
3.Service Program Mode
378
3.Service Program Mode
379
3.Service Program Mode
380
3.Service Program Mode
381
3.Service Program Mode
382
3.Service Program Mode
383
3.Service Program Mode
384
3.Service Program Mode
385
3.Service Program Mode
386
3.Service Program Mode
387
3.Service Program Mode
388
3.Service Program Mode
389
3.Service Program Mode
SP Group 1000-06
SP Large Category Small Category EN [Min to
No. G or Max/Init./Step
CTL ]
1- IniCPMDwn:EnvLowTmp:UnitLowTm Plain:Uncoated:Thin/Thick1 EN [ 0 to 3 / 0 / 1]
990 p G 0: No CPM
- Down
101 1: CPM Down
1
2: CPM Down
2
3: CPM Down
3
1- IniCPMDwn:EnvLowTmp:UnitLowTm Plain:Uncoated:Plain1/Thick1 EN [ 0 to 3 / 0 / 1]
990 p G 0: No CPM
- Down
102 1: CPM Down
1
2: CPM Down
2
3: CPM Down
3
1- IniCPMDwn:EnvLowTmp:UnitLowTm Plain:Uncoated:Plain2/Thick3 EN [ 0 to 3 / 0 / 1]
990 p G 0: No CPM
- Down
103 1: CPM Down
1
2: CPM Down
2
3: CPM Down
3
1- IniCPMDwn:EnvLowTmp:UnitLowTm Plain:Uncoated:Mid- EN [ 0 to 3 / 0 / 1]
990 p Thick/Thick4 G 0: No CPM
- Down
104 1: CPM Down
1
2: CPM Down
2
390
3.Service Program Mode
475
3.Service Program Mode
SP Group 1000-07
SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to
CTL Max/Init./Step]
1-998- Cleaning Web Pressure Uncoated Thick 5:L ENG [ 0 to 1 / * / 1]
109 Setting Speed:FC *MP C6503: 0
*MP C8003: 0
*Pro C5200S: 1
*Pro C5210S: 1
0: Depress
1: Press
1-998- Cleaning Web Pressure Uncoated Thick 5:L ENG [ 0 to 1 / * / 1]
110 Setting Speed:Bk *MP C6503: 0
*MP C8003: 0
*Pro C5200S: 1
*Pro C5210S: 1
0: Depress
1: Press
1-998- Cleaning Web Pressure Uncoated Thick 6:L ENG [ 0 to 1 / * / 1]
111 Setting Speed:FC *MP C6503: 0
*MP C8003: 0
*Pro C5200S: 1
*Pro C5210S: 1
0: Depress
1: Press
1-998- Cleaning Web Pressure Uncoated Thick 6:L ENG [ 0 to 1 / * / 1]
112 Setting Speed:Bk *MP C6503: 0
*MP C8003: 0
*Pro C5200S: 1
*Pro C5210S: 1
0: Depress
1: Press
1-998- Cleaning Web Pressure Matte Thick 5:L Speed:FC ENG [ 0 to 1 / * / 1]
125 Setting *MP C6503: 0
*MP C8003: 0
*Pro C5200S: 1
*Pro C5210S: 1
0: Depress
1: Press
476
3.Service Program Mode
495
3.Service Program Mode
SP Group 2000-01
SP Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to
No. CTL Max/Init./Step]
2-101- Color Regist Adjust Main Scan Initial Value: K ENG* [ -512 to 511 / 0 /
001 1dot]
2-101- Color Regist Adjust Main Scan Initial Value: C ENG* [ -512 to 511 / 0 /
002 1dot]
2-101- Color Regist Adjust Main Scan Initial Value: M ENG* [ -512 to 511 / 0 /
003 1dot]
2-101- Color Regist Adjust Main Scan Initial Value: Y ENG* [ -512 to 511 / 0 /
004 1dot]
2-101- Color Regist Adjust Main/Sub Scan Initial Value: K ENG* [ -47 to 47 / 0 / 1sub-
006 dot]
2-101- Color Regist Adjust Main/Sub Scan Initial Value: C ENG* [ -47 to 47 / 0 / 1sub-
007 dot]
2-101- Color Regist Adjust Main/Sub Scan Initial Value: M ENG* [ -47 to 47 / 0 / 1sub-
008 dot]
2-101- Color Regist Adjust Main/Sub Scan Initial Value: Y ENG* [ -47 to 47 / 0 / 1sub-
009 dot]
2-101- Color Regist Adjust Main Phase Initial Value: K ENG* [ 0 to 1000 / 0 / 1us]
011
2-101- Color Regist Adjust Main Phase Initial Value: C ENG* [ 0 to 1000 / 0 / 1us]
012
2-101- Color Regist Adjust Main Phase Initial Value: M ENG* [ 0 to 1000 / 0 / 1us]
013
2-101- Color Regist Adjust Main Phase Initial Value: Y ENG* [ 0 to 1000 / 0 / 1us]
014
2-101- Color Regist Adjust Main Beam Pitch Adj: KC ENG* [ 1500 to 1900 / 1698
021 / 1um]
2-101- Color Regist Adjust Main Beam Pitch Adj: MY ENG* [ 1500 to 1900 / 1698
023 / 1um]
2-101- Color Regist Adjust Sub Scan Initial Value: K ENG* [ -4096 to 4095 / 0 /
036 1line]
2-101- Color Regist Adjust Sub Scan Initial Value: C ENG* [ -4096 to 4095 / 0 /
037 1line]
2-101- Color Regist Adjust Sub Scan Initial Value: M ENG* [ -4096 to 4095 / 0 /
038 1line]
2-101- Color Regist Adjust Sub Scan Initial Value: Y ENG* [ -4096 to 4095 / 0 /
496
3.Service Program Mode
497
3.Service Program Mode
498
3.Service Program Mode
499
3.Service Program Mode
500
3.Service Program Mode
501
3.Service Program Mode
504
3.Service Program Mode
520
3.Service Program Mode
522
3.Service Program Mode
526
3.Service Program Mode
527
3.Service Program Mode
528
3.Service Program Mode
529
3.Service Program Mode
530
3.Service Program Mode
531
3.Service Program Mode
532
3.Service Program Mode
533
3.Service Program Mode
534
3.Service Program Mode
535
3.Service Program Mode
536
3.Service Program Mode
537
3.Service Program Mode
538
3.Service Program Mode
539
3.Service Program Mode
540
3.Service Program Mode
541
3.Service Program Mode
542
3.Service Program Mode
543
3.Service Program Mode
544
3.Service Program Mode
545
3.Service Program Mode
SP Group 2000-02
SP Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]
No. CTL
2-202- Set AC (Fixed) Charge AC Bias :K ENG [ 0 to 3 / 2.2 / 0.01KV]
001
2-202- Set AC (Fixed) Charge AC Bias :C ENG [ 0 to 3 / 2.2 / 0.01KV]
002
2-202- Set AC (Fixed) Charge AC Bias :M ENG [ 0 to 3 / 2.2 / 0.01KV]
003
2-202- Set AC (Fixed) Charge AC Bias :Y ENG [ 0 to 3 / 2.2 / 0.01KV]
004
2-204- Set AC Environ Corr Norm:LL:Target:K ENG* [ 1.25 to 3 / * /
001 0.01mA]
*MP C6503: 1.86
*MP C8003: 2.25
*Pro C5200S: 1.86
*Pro C5210S: 2.25
2-204- Set AC Environ Corr Norm:LL:Target:C ENG* [ 1.25 to 3 / * /
002 0.01mA]
*MP C6503: 1.96
*MP C8003: 2.35
*Pro C5200S: 1.96
*Pro C5210S: 2.35
2-204- Set AC Environ Corr Norm:LL:Target:M ENG* [ 1.25 to 3 / * /
003 0.01mA]
*MP C6503: 1.96
*MP C8003: 2.35
*Pro C5200S: 1.96
*Pro C5210S: 2.35
2-204- Set AC Environ Corr Norm:LL:Target:Y ENG* [ 1.25 to 3 / * /
004 0.01mA]
*MP C6503: 1.96
*MP C8003: 2.35
*Pro C5200S: 1.96
*Pro C5210S: 2.35
2-204- Set AC Environ Corr Norm:ML:Target:K ENG* [ 1.25 to 3 / * /
006 0.01mA]
*MP C6503: 1.86
546
3.Service Program Mode
557
3.Service Program Mode
558
3.Service Program Mode
559
3.Service Program Mode
561
3.Service Program Mode
562
3.Service Program Mode
563
3.Service Program Mode
564
3.Service Program Mode
565
3.Service Program Mode
566
3.Service Program Mode
567
3.Service Program Mode
568
3.Service Program Mode
571
3.Service Program Mode
572
3.Service Program Mode
573
3.Service Program Mode
574
3.Service Program Mode
575
3.Service Program Mode
576
3.Service Program Mode
577
3.Service Program Mode
578
3.Service Program Mode
579
3.Service Program Mode
582
3.Service Program Mode
583
3.Service Program Mode
584
3.Service Program Mode
585
3.Service Program Mode
586
3.Service Program Mode
587
3.Service Program Mode
588
3.Service Program Mode
589
3.Service Program Mode
590
3.Service Program Mode
SP Group 2000-03
SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]
CTL
2-600- PTR Corr:ON/OFF All Corr ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
001 0: ON
1: OFF
2-600- PTR Corr:ON/OFF Eng Spd Corr ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
002 0: ON
1: OFF
2-600- PTR Corr:ON/OFF Env Corr ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
003 0: ON
1: OFF
2-600- PTR Corr:ON/OFF Pape Size Corr ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
004 0: ON
1: OFF
2-600- PTR Corr:ON/OFF LEdge Corr ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
005 0: ON
1: OFF
2-600- PTR Corr:ON/OFF TEdge Corr ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
006 0: ON
1: OFF
2-601- RTR:Eng Spd Coeff Standard Speed ENG [ 10 to 200 / * / 1%]
001 *MP C6503: 81
*MP C8003: 100
*Pro C5200S: 81
*Pro C5210S: 100
2-601- RTR:Eng Spd Coeff Middle Speed ENG [ 10 to 200 / * / 1%]
002 *MP C6503: 50
*MP C8003: 81
*Pro C5200S: 70
*Pro C5210S: 70
2-601- RTR:Eng Spd Coeff Middle-Low Speed ENG [ 10 to 200 / * / 1%]
003 *MP C6503: 10
*MP C8003: 50
*Pro C5200S: 10
*Pro C5210S: 10
2-601- RTR:Eng Spd Coeff Low Speed ENG [ 10 to 200 / 45 / 1%]
004
591
3.Service Program Mode
592
3.Service Program Mode
593
3.Service Program Mode
594
3.Service Program Mode
595
3.Service Program Mode
596
3.Service Program Mode
597
3.Service Program Mode
598
3.Service Program Mode
599
3.Service Program Mode
600
3.Service Program Mode
601
3.Service Program Mode
602
3.Service Program Mode
603
3.Service Program Mode
604
3.Service Program Mode
605
3.Service Program Mode
606
3.Service Program Mode
608
3.Service Program Mode
609
3.Service Program Mode
610
3.Service Program Mode
611
3.Service Program Mode
612
3.Service Program Mode
613
3.Service Program Mode
614
3.Service Program Mode
615
3.Service Program Mode
616
3.Service Program Mode
617
3.Service Program Mode
618
3.Service Program Mode
619
3.Service Program Mode
620
3.Service Program Mode
621
3.Service Program Mode
622
3.Service Program Mode
624
3.Service Program Mode
625
3.Service Program Mode
626
3.Service Program Mode
627
3.Service Program Mode
628
3.Service Program Mode
629
3.Service Program Mode
630
3.Service Program Mode
631
3.Service Program Mode
632
3.Service Program Mode
633
3.Service Program Mode
634
3.Service Program Mode
635
3.Service Program Mode
636
3.Service Program Mode
637
3.Service Program Mode
638
3.Service Program Mode
639
3.Service Program Mode
640
3.Service Program Mode
641
3.Service Program Mode
642
3.Service Program Mode
643
3.Service Program Mode
644
3.Service Program Mode
645
3.Service Program Mode
646
3.Service Program Mode
647
3.Service Program Mode
648
3.Service Program Mode
649
3.Service Program Mode
650
3.Service Program Mode
651
3.Service Program Mode
652
3.Service Program Mode
653
3.Service Program Mode
654
3.Service Program Mode
655
3.Service Program Mode
656
3.Service Program Mode
657
3.Service Program Mode
658
3.Service Program Mode
SP Group 2000-04
SP Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]
No. CTL
2- PTR AC Corr:ON/OFF All Corr ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
700- 0: ON
001 1: OFF
2- PTR AC Corr:ON/OFF Eng Spd Corr ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
700- 0: ON
002 1: OFF
2- PTR AC Corr:ON/OFF Env Corr ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
700- 0: ON
003 1: OFF
2- PTR AC Corr:ON/OFF R Corr ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
700- 0: ON
004 1: OFF
2- RTR AC:Eng Spd Coeff Standard Speed ENG [ 10 to 200 / 100 /
701- 1%]
001
2- RTR AC:Eng Spd Coeff Middle Speed ENG [ 10 to 200 / 100 /
701- 1%]
002
2- RTR AC:Eng Spd Coeff Middle-Low Speed ENG [ 10 to 200 / 100 /
701- 1%]
003
2- RTR AC:Eng Spd Coeff Low Speed ENG [ 10 to 200 / 100 /
701- 1%]
004
2- PTR AC:Env Coeff LLL:BW:Side1 ENG [ 10 to 200 / 100 /
702- 1%]
001
2- PTR AC:Env Coeff LLL:BW:Side2 ENG [ 10 to 200 / 100 /
702- 1%]
002
2- PTR AC:Env Coeff LLL:FC:Side1 ENG [ 10 to 200 / 100 /
702- 1%]
003
2- PTR AC:Env Coeff LLL:FC:Side2 ENG [ 10 to 200 / 100 /
702- 1%]
659
3.Service Program Mode
660
3.Service Program Mode
661
3.Service Program Mode
662
3.Service Program Mode
663
3.Service Program Mode
664
3.Service Program Mode
665
3.Service Program Mode
666
3.Service Program Mode
667
3.Service Program Mode
668
3.Service Program Mode
669
3.Service Program Mode
670
3.Service Program Mode
671
3.Service Program Mode
672
3.Service Program Mode
673
3.Service Program Mode
674
3.Service Program Mode
675
3.Service Program Mode
676
3.Service Program Mode
677
3.Service Program Mode
678
3.Service Program Mode
679
3.Service Program Mode
680
3.Service Program Mode
681
3.Service Program Mode
682
3.Service Program Mode
683
3.Service Program Mode
684
3.Service Program Mode
685
3.Service Program Mode
686
3.Service Program Mode
687
3.Service Program Mode
688
3.Service Program Mode
689
3.Service Program Mode
690
3.Service Program Mode
691
3.Service Program Mode
692
3.Service Program Mode
693
3.Service Program Mode
694
3.Service Program Mode
695
3.Service Program Mode
696
3.Service Program Mode
697
3.Service Program Mode
698
3.Service Program Mode
699
3.Service Program Mode
700
3.Service Program Mode
701
3.Service Program Mode
702
3.Service Program Mode
703
3.Service Program Mode
704
3.Service Program Mode
705
3.Service Program Mode
706
3.Service Program Mode
707
3.Service Program Mode
708
3.Service Program Mode
709
3.Service Program Mode
710
3.Service Program Mode
711
3.Service Program Mode
712
3.Service Program Mode
713
3.Service Program Mode
714
3.Service Program Mode
715
3.Service Program Mode
717
3.Service Program Mode
718
3.Service Program Mode
719
3.Service Program Mode
720
3.Service Program Mode
721
3.Service Program Mode
722
3.Service Program Mode
SP Group 3000-01
SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to
No. or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
3- Manual ProCon :Exe Normal ProCon ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
011-
001
3- Manual ProCon :Exe Density Adjustment ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
011-
002
3- Manual ProCon :Exe ACC RunTime ProCon ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
011-
003
3- Manual ProCon :Exe Full MUSIC ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
011-
004
3- Manual ProCon :Exe Normal MUSIC ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
011-
005
3- ProCon OK? History:Latest ENG* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 /
012- 1]
001
3- ProCon OK? History:2Times Before ENG* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 /
012- 1]
002
3- ProCon OK? History:3Times Before ENG* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 /
012- 1]
003
3- ProCon OK? History:4Times Before ENG* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 /
012- 1]
004
3- ProCon OK? History:5Times Before ENG* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 /
012- 1]
005
3- ProCon OK? History:6Times Before ENG* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 /
012- 1]
006
3- ProCon OK? History:7Times Before ENG* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 /
723
3.Service Program Mode
724
3.Service Program Mode
735
3.Service Program Mode
753
3.Service Program Mode
756
3.Service Program Mode
758
3.Service Program Mode
759
3.Service Program Mode
777
3.Service Program Mode
783
3.Service Program Mode
790
3.Service Program Mode
791
3.Service Program Mode
799
3.Service Program Mode
SP Group 3000-02
SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to
No. or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
3- Manual New Part Set #Development Unit:K ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
701-
003
3- Manual New Part Set Development Filter:K ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
701-
005
3- Manual New Part Set #Cleaning Unit: K ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
701-
008
3- Manual New Part Set Cleaning Blade: K ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
701-
009
3- Manual New Part Set Lubricant Brush: K ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
701-
010
3- Manual New Part Set Lubricant Bar: K ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
701-
011
3- Manual New Part Set Lubricant Blade: K ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
701-
012
3- Manual New Part Set Brash Drive Joint: K ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
701-
013
3- Manual New Part Set Gears: K ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
701-
014
3- Manual New Part Set #Charge Roller Unit:K ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
701-
017
3- Manual New Part Set #PCU:K ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
701-
021
3- Manual New Part Set #Development Unit:C ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
800
3.Service Program Mode
801
3.Service Program Mode
816
3.Service Program Mode
820
3.Service Program Mode
824
3.Service Program Mode
SP Group 4000
SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]
ENG
4-008- Sub Scan Magnification ENG* [ -1 to 1 / 0 / 0.1%]
001 Adj
4-010- Sub Scan Registration ENG* [ -2 to 2 / 0 / 0.1mm]
001 Adj
4-011- Main Scan Reg ENG* [ -2.5 to 2.5 / 0 /
001 0.1mm]
4-012- Set Scale Mask Book:Sub LEdge ENG [ 0 to 3 / 1 / 0.1mm]
001
4-012- Set Scale Mask Book:Sub TEdge ENG [ 0 to 3 / 0 / 0.1mm]
002
4-012- Set Scale Mask Book:Main:LEdge ENG [ 0 to 3 / 1 / 0.1mm]
003
4-012- Set Scale Mask Book:Main:TEdge ENG [ 0 to 3 / 0 / 0.1mm]
004
4-012- Set Scale Mask ADF: Leading Edge ENG* [ 0 to 3 / 0 / 0.1mm]
005
4-012- Set Scale Mask ADF: Right ENG* [ 0 to 3 / 0 / 0.1mm]
007
4-012- Set Scale Mask ADF: left ENG* [ 0 to 3 / 0 / 0.1mm]
008
4-013- Scanner Free run Lamp Off ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
001
4-013- Scanner Free run Lamp On ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
002
4-020- Dust Check Dust Detect:On/Off: Front ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
001
4-020- Dust Check Dust Detect:Lvl: Front ENG [ 0 to 8 / 4 / 1]
002
4-020- Dust Check Lvl Dust Reject:Lvl: Front ENG [ 0 to 4 / 0 / 1]
003
4-020- DF Dust Check Dust Detect Level:Rear ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
011
4-020- DF Dust Check Correction Level:Rear ENG [ 0 to 8 / 4 / 1]
012
4-201- LoCPP edge lv:K 600dpi 2bit edge1 ENG [ 0 to 15 / 11 / 1]
825
3.Service Program Mode
826
3.Service Program Mode
827
3.Service Program Mode
828
3.Service Program Mode
829
3.Service Program Mode
830
3.Service Program Mode
831
3.Service Program Mode
832
3.Service Program Mode
833
3.Service Program Mode
834
3.Service Program Mode
835
3.Service Program Mode
836
3.Service Program Mode
837
3.Service Program Mode
838
3.Service Program Mode
839
3.Service Program Mode
840
3.Service Program Mode
841
3.Service Program Mode
842
3.Service Program Mode
843
3.Service Program Mode
844
3.Service Program Mode
SP Group 5000-01
SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to Max/Init./Step]
No. or
CTL
5- Add display language 1-8 CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
009
-
201
5- Add display language 9-16 CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
009
-
202
5- Add display language 17-24 CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
009
-
203
5- Add display language 25-32 CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
009
-
204
5- Add display language 33-40 CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
009
-
205
5- Add display language 41-48 CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
009
-
206
5- Add display language 49-56 CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
009
-
207
5- mm/inch Display Selection 0:mm 1:inch CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
024 0: mm
- 1: inch
001
5- Status Lamp Mode CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
037
845
3.Service Program Mode
928
3.Service Program Mode
SP Group 5000-02
SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to Max/Init./Step]
No. or
CTL
5- HDD HDD Formatting (ALL) CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
832-
001
5- HDD HDD Formatting (IMH) CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
832-
002
5- HDD HDD Formatting CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
832- (Thumbnail/OCR)
003
5- HDD HDD Formatting (Job Log) CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
832-
004
5- HDD HDD Formatting (Printer CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
832- Fonts)
005
5- HDD HDD Formatting (User Info) CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
832-
006
5- HDD Mail RX Data CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
832-
007
5- HDD Mail TX Data CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
832-
008
5- HDD HDD Formatting (Data for a CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
832- Design)
009
5- HDD HDD Formatting (Log) CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
832-
010
5- HDD HDD Formatting (Ridoc I/F) CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
832-
011
5- HDD HDD Formatting (Thumbnail) CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
929
3.Service Program Mode
938
3.Service Program Mode
940
3.Service Program Mode
952
3.Service Program Mode
954
3.Service Program Mode
962
3.Service Program Mode
963
3.Service Program Mode
964
3.Service Program Mode
SP Group 6000
SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to
No. or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
6- ADF Adjustment Side-to-Side Regist: Front ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
006 * 0.1mm]
-
001
6- ADF Adjustment Side-to-Side Regist: Rear ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
006 * 0.1mm]
-
002
6- ADF Adjustment L-Edge Regist (1-Pass): Front ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
006 * 0.1mm]
-
010
6- ADF Adjustment L-Edge Regist (1-Pass): Rear ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
006 * 0.1mm]
-011
6- ADF Adjustment 1st Buckle (1-Pass) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
006 * 0.1mm]
-
012
6- ADF Adjustment 2nd Buckle (1-Pass) ENG [ -2 to 3 / 0 /
006 * 0.1mm]
-
013
6- ADF Adjustment T-Edge Erase (1-Pass): Front ENG [ -5 to 5 / -3 /
006 * 0.1mm]
-
014
6- ADF Adjustment T-Edge Erase (1-Pass): Rear ENG [ -5 to 5 / -2.5 /
006 * 0.1mm]
-
015
6- ADF FreeRun Free Run Simplex Motion ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
009
-
965
3.Service Program Mode
982
3.Service Program Mode
991
3.Service Program Mode
992
3.Service Program Mode
1019
3.Service Program Mode
1067
3.Service Program Mode
SP Group 7000-01
SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]
CTL
7-001- Engine Drive #PCU:K ENG* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 /
001 Distance Counter 1m]
7-401- Total SC SC Counter CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
001
7-401- Total SC Total SC Counter CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
002
7-403- SC History Latest CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
001
7-403- SC History Latest 1 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
002
7-403- SC History Latest 2 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
003
7-403- SC History Latest 3 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
004
7-403- SC History Latest 4 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
005
7-403- SC History Latest 5 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
006
7-403- SC History Latest 6 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
007
7-403- SC History Latest 7 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
008
7-403- SC History Latest 8 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
009
7-403- SC History Latest 9 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
010
7-404- Software Error Latest CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
001 History
7-404- Software Error Latest 1 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
002 History
7-404- Software Error Latest 2 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
003 History
7-404- Software Error Latest 3 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
004 History
7-404- Software Error Latest 4 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
1068
3.Service Program Mode
1069
3.Service Program Mode
1070
3.Service Program Mode
1071
3.Service Program Mode
1072
3.Service Program Mode
1073
3.Service Program Mode
1074
3.Service Program Mode
1075
3.Service Program Mode
1076
3.Service Program Mode
1077
3.Service Program Mode
1078
3.Service Program Mode
1079
3.Service Program Mode
1080
3.Service Program Mode
1081
3.Service Program Mode
1082
3.Service Program Mode
1083
3.Service Program Mode
1084
3.Service Program Mode
1085
3.Service Program Mode
1086
3.Service Program Mode
1087
3.Service Program Mode
1088
3.Service Program Mode
1089
3.Service Program Mode
1090
3.Service Program Mode
1091
3.Service Program Mode
1092
3.Service Program Mode
1093
3.Service Program Mode
1094
3.Service Program Mode
1095
3.Service Program Mode
1096
3.Service Program Mode
1097
3.Service Program Mode
1098
3.Service Program Mode
1099
3.Service Program Mode
1100
3.Service Program Mode
1101
3.Service Program Mode
1102
3.Service Program Mode
1103
3.Service Program Mode
1104
3.Service Program Mode
1105
3.Service Program Mode
1106
3.Service Program Mode
1107
3.Service Program Mode
1108
3.Service Program Mode
1109
3.Service Program Mode
1110
3.Service Program Mode
1111
3.Service Program Mode
1112
3.Service Program Mode
1113
3.Service Program Mode
1114
3.Service Program Mode
1115
3.Service Program Mode
1116
3.Service Program Mode
1117
3.Service Program Mode
1118
3.Service Program Mode
1119
3.Service Program Mode
1120
3.Service Program Mode
1121
3.Service Program Mode
1122
3.Service Program Mode
1123
3.Service Program Mode
1124
3.Service Program Mode
1132
3.Service Program Mode
1135
3.Service Program Mode
1136
3.Service Program Mode
1137
3.Service Program Mode
SP Group 7000-02
SP Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]
No. CTL
7-624- Part Replacement #Development Unit:K CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
003 Operation ON/OFF
7-624- Part Replacement Developer:K CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
004 Operation ON/OFF
7-624- Part Replacement Developer Filter:K CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
005 Operation ON/OFF
7-624- Part Replacement #Cleaning Unit:K CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
008 Operation ON/OFF
7-624- Part Replacement Cleaning Blade:K CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
009 Operation ON/OFF
7-624- Part Replacement Brush Roller:K CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
010 Operation ON/OFF
7-624- Part Replacement Coating Bar:K CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
011 Operation ON/OFF
7-624- Part Replacement Apply Blade:K CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
012 Operation ON/OFF
7-624- Part Replacement Joint:Cleaning Unit:K CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
013 Operation ON/OFF
7-624- Part Replacement Gear:Cleaning:K CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
014 Operation ON/OFF
7-624- Part Replacement #Charge Roller Unit:K CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
017 Operation ON/OFF
7-624- Part Replacement #Photo Conductor:K CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
021 Operation ON/OFF
7-624- Part Replacement #Development Unit:C CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
026 Operation ON/OFF
7-624- Part Replacement Developer:C CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
027 Operation ON/OFF
7-624- Part Replacement Developer Filter:C CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
028 Operation ON/OFF
7-624- Part Replacement #Cleaning Unit:C CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
031 Operation ON/OFF
7-624- Part Replacement Cleaning Blade:C CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
032 Operation ON/OFF
7-624- Part Replacement Brush Roller:C CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
1138
3.Service Program Mode
1139
3.Service Program Mode
1140
3.Service Program Mode
1141
3.Service Program Mode
1142
3.Service Program Mode
1143
3.Service Program Mode
1144
3.Service Program Mode
1145
3.Service Program Mode
1146
3.Service Program Mode
1147
3.Service Program Mode
1148
3.Service Program Mode
1149
3.Service Program Mode
1150
3.Service Program Mode
1151
3.Service Program Mode
1152
3.Service Program Mode
1153
3.Service Program Mode
1154
3.Service Program Mode
1155
3.Service Program Mode
1156
3.Service Program Mode
1157
3.Service Program Mode
1158
3.Service Program Mode
1159
3.Service Program Mode
1160
3.Service Program Mode
1161
3.Service Program Mode
1162
3.Service Program Mode
1163
3.Service Program Mode
1164
3.Service Program Mode
1165
3.Service Program Mode
1166
3.Service Program Mode
1167
3.Service Program Mode
1168
3.Service Program Mode
1169
3.Service Program Mode
1170
3.Service Program Mode
1171
3.Service Program Mode
1172
3.Service Program Mode
1173
3.Service Program Mode
1174
3.Service Program Mode
1175
3.Service Program Mode
1176
3.Service Program Mode
1177
3.Service Program Mode
1178
3.Service Program Mode
1179
3.Service Program Mode
1180
3.Service Program Mode
1183
3.Service Program Mode
1184
3.Service Program Mode
1185
3.Service Program Mode
1186
3.Service Program Mode
1187
3.Service Program Mode
1188
3.Service Program Mode
1189
3.Service Program Mode
1190
3.Service Program Mode
1191
3.Service Program Mode
SP Group 7000-03
SP Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to
No. CTL Max/Init./Step]
7- Replacement Date #K_Development Unit ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
950-
003
7- Replacement Date Development: Bk ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
950-
004
7- Replacement Date Development Filter:K ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
950-
005
7- Replacement Date #Cleaning Unit: K ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
950-
008
7- Replacement Date K_Cleaning Blade ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
950-
009
7- Replacement Date K_Lubricant Brush ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
950-
010
7- Replacement Date Lubricant Bar: K ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
950-
011
7- Replacement Date K_Lubricant Blade ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
950-
012
7- Replacement Date Brash Drive Joint:K ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
950-
013
7- Replacement Date Gears:K ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
950-
014
7- Replacement Date #K_Charge Roller Unit ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
950-
017
7- Replacement Date #PCU:K ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
950-
1192
3.Service Program Mode
1193
3.Service Program Mode
1194
3.Service Program Mode
1195
3.Service Program Mode
1196
3.Service Program Mode
1197
3.Service Program Mode
1198
3.Service Program Mode
1199
3.Service Program Mode
1200
3.Service Program Mode
1201
3.Service Program Mode
1202
3.Service Program Mode
1203
3.Service Program Mode
1204
3.Service Program Mode
1205
3.Service Program Mode
1206
3.Service Program Mode
1207
3.Service Program Mode
1208
3.Service Program Mode
1209
3.Service Program Mode
1210
3.Service Program Mode
1211
3.Service Program Mode
1212
3.Service Program Mode
1213
3.Service Program Mode
1214
3.Service Program Mode
1215
3.Service Program Mode
1216
3.Service Program Mode
1217
3.Service Program Mode
1218
3.Service Program Mode
1219
3.Service Program Mode
1220
3.Service Program Mode
1221
3.Service Program Mode
1222
3.Service Program Mode
1223
3.Service Program Mode
1224
3.Service Program Mode
1225
3.Service Program Mode
1226
3.Service Program Mode
1227
3.Service Program Mode
1228
3.Service Program Mode
1229
3.Service Program Mode
1230
3.Service Program Mode
1231
3.Service Program Mode
1232
3.Service Program Mode
1233
3.Service Program Mode
1234
3.Service Program Mode
1235
3.Service Program Mode
1236
3.Service Program Mode
1237
3.Service Program Mode
1238
3.Service Program Mode
1239
3.Service Program Mode
1240
3.Service Program Mode
1241
3.Service Program Mode
1242
3.Service Program Mode
1243
3.Service Program Mode
1244
3.Service Program Mode
1245
3.Service Program Mode
1246
3.Service Program Mode
1247
3.Service Program Mode
1248
3.Service Program Mode
1249
3.Service Program Mode
1250
3.Service Program Mode
1251
3.Service Program Mode
1252
3.Service Program Mode
1253
3.Service Program Mode
1254
3.Service Program Mode
1255
3.Service Program Mode
1256
3.Service Program Mode
1257
3.Service Program Mode
1258
3.Service Program Mode
1259
3.Service Program Mode
1260
3.Service Program Mode
1261
3.Service Program Mode
1262
3.Service Program Mode
1263
3.Service Program Mode
1264
3.Service Program Mode
1265
3.Service Program Mode
1266
3.Service Program Mode
1267
3.Service Program Mode
1268
3.Service Program Mode
1269
3.Service Program Mode
1270
3.Service Program Mode
1271
3.Service Program Mode
1272
3.Service Program Mode
1273
3.Service Program Mode
1274
3.Service Program Mode
1275
3.Service Program Mode
SP Group 8000-01
SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to
ENG Max/Init./Step]
8-001- T:Total Jobs CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 /
001 1]
8-002- C:Total Jobs CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 /
001 1]
8-003- F:Total Jobs CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 /
001 1]
8-004- P:Total Jobs CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 /
001 1]
8-005- S:Total Jobs CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 /
001 1]
8-006- L:Total Jobs CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 /
001 1]
8-011- T:Jobs/LS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 /
001 1]
8-012- C:Jobs/LS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 /
001 1]
8-013- F:Jobs/LS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 /
001 1]
8-014- P:Jobs/LS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 /
001 1]
8-015- S:Jobs/LS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 /
001 1]
8-016- L:Jobs/LS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 /
001 1]
8-017- O:Jobs/LS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 /
001 1]
8-021- T:Pjob/LS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 /
001 1]
8-022- C:Pjob/LS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 /
001 1]
8-023- F:Pjob/LS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 /
001 1]
8-024- P:Pjob/LS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 /
001 1]
8-025- S:Pjob/LS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1276
3.Service Program Mode
1277
3.Service Program Mode
1278
3.Service Program Mode
1279
3.Service Program Mode
1280
3.Service Program Mode
1281
3.Service Program Mode
1282
3.Service Program Mode
1283
3.Service Program Mode
1284
3.Service Program Mode
1285
3.Service Program Mode
1286
3.Service Program Mode
1287
3.Service Program Mode
1288
3.Service Program Mode
1289
3.Service Program Mode
1290
3.Service Program Mode
1291
3.Service Program Mode
1292
3.Service Program Mode
1293
3.Service Program Mode
1294
3.Service Program Mode
1295
3.Service Program Mode
1296
3.Service Program Mode
1297
3.Service Program Mode
1298
3.Service Program Mode
1299
3.Service Program Mode
1300
3.Service Program Mode
1301
3.Service Program Mode
1302
3.Service Program Mode
1303
3.Service Program Mode
1304
3.Service Program Mode
1305
3.Service Program Mode
1306
3.Service Program Mode
1307
3.Service Program Mode
1308
3.Service Program Mode
1309
3.Service Program Mode
1310
3.Service Program Mode
1311
3.Service Program Mode
1312
3.Service Program Mode
1313
3.Service Program Mode
1314
3.Service Program Mode
1315
3.Service Program Mode
1316
3.Service Program Mode
1317
3.Service Program Mode
1318
3.Service Program Mode
1319
3.Service Program Mode
1320
3.Service Program Mode
1321
3.Service Program Mode
1322
3.Service Program Mode
SP Group 8000-02
SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]
ENG
8-501- T:PrtPGS/Col Mode B/W CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-501- T:PrtPGS/Col Mode Mono Color CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-501- T:PrtPGS/Col Mode Full Color CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-501- T:PrtPGS/Col Mode Single Color CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004
8-501- T:PrtPGS/Col Mode Two Color CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
005
8-501- T:PrtPGS/Col Mode B/W(Banner) CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
051
8-501- T:PrtPGS/Col Mode Full Color(Banner) CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
052
8-501- T:PrtPGS/Col Mode Single Color(Banner) CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
053
8-501- T:PrtPGS/Col Mode Two Color(Banner) CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
054
8-504- P:PrtPGS/Col Mode B/W CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-504- P:PrtPGS/Col Mode Mono Color CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-504- P:PrtPGS/Col Mode Full Color CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-504- P:PrtPGS/Col Mode Single Color CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004
8-504- P:PrtPGS/Col Mode Two Color CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
005
8-504- P:PrtPGS/Col Mode B/W(Banner) CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
051
8-504- P:PrtPGS/Col Mode Full Color(Banner) CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
052
8-504- P:PrtPGS/Col Mode Single Color(Banner) CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
053
8-504- P:PrtPGS/Col Mode Two Color(Banner) CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
1323
3.Service Program Mode
1324
3.Service Program Mode
1325
3.Service Program Mode
1326
3.Service Program Mode
1327
3.Service Program Mode
1328
3.Service Program Mode
1329
3.Service Program Mode
1330
3.Service Program Mode
1331
3.Service Program Mode
1332
3.Service Program Mode
1333
3.Service Program Mode
1334
3.Service Program Mode
1335
3.Service Program Mode
1336
3.Service Program Mode
1337
3.Service Program Mode
1338
3.Service Program Mode
1339
3.Service Program Mode
1340
3.Service Program Mode
1341
3.Service Program Mode
1342
3.Service Program Mode
1343
3.Service Program Mode
1344
3.Service Program Mode
1345
3.Service Program Mode
1346
3.Service Program Mode
1347
3.Service Program Mode
1348
3.Service Program Mode
1349
3.Service Program Mode
1350
3.Service Program Mode
1351
3.Service Program Mode
1352
3.Service Program Mode
1353
3.Service Program Mode
1354
3.Service Program Mode
1355
3.Service Program Mode
1356
3.Service Program Mode
1357
3.Service Program Mode
1358
3.Service Program Mode
1359
3.Service Program Mode
1360
3.Service Program Mode
1362
3.Service Program Mode
1367
3.Service Program Mode
Paper End Paper Height Sensor Paper Height Sensor Remaining Panel
Sensor 1 2 Paper Display
0 0 0 100% Four bars
0 1 0 70% Three bars
0 1 1 30% Two bars
0 0 1 10% One bar
1 - - No paper None
1368
3.Service Program Mode